Digitized by tine Internet Arciiive
in 2007 witii funding from
IVIicrosoft Corporation
littp://www.arcli ive.org/details/firstspanislicourOOIiilluoft
a ••/
^^lijUi«I80^O««t«<I^50^JrMnwicj^40"
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
m t?^ILLS AND J. D. M. FORD
INDIAMA UNIVKR8ITT HASVABD UNIVKE8ITY
Authorized by the Minister of Education for Ontario
Q,3.7]
TORONTO
THE COPP CLARK COMPANY LIMITED
COPYRIGHT, 1917
BT D. C. HEATH St OO.
IDS
PREFACE
In this First Spanish Course the authors have aimed to
present to EngHsh-speaking students the essential facts of
Spanish grammar and to illustrate them by means of abun-
dant material for oral and written exercises.
The amount of formal grammar given in each Lesson is
small, and in the early Lessons there are almost no excep-
tions to the general rules.
At the end of each Lesson the rules of grammar are re-
peated in Spanish, so that the students may commit them to
memory in either Spanish or English as the teacher prefers.
The words used in the exercises are limited as far as pos-
sible to those in common use, and they are given, for the
most part, in the connected discourse of descriptive and
narrative passages. Each Lesson has a special vocabulary
of new words, and at the end of the book there is a general
vocabulary which contains all the words that are used in the
exercises.
The Spanish passages in the exercises are followed by
sets of questions based on the text. These will doubtless
be used by many teachers, although some may prefer to
formulate their own questions.
The treatment of verbs, which follows the Lessons proper,
is unusually complete, and it includes reference lists of
irregular verbs and of those that require a preposition before
an infinitive.
m
CONTENTS
PAGES
Pronxjnciation 1-10
Lessons 11-234
I. Gender of nouns. Indefinite article.
Verbs 11-12
II. Gender of nouns. Interrogative senten-
ces. Verbs 12-13
III. Plural of nouns. Definite article. Verbs 14-17
IV. Position, inflection and agreement of
adjectives 17-20
V. Agreement of adjectives. Negative
sentences 20-22
VI. Tener. Pronouns 23-26
VII. Genitive case. Ser 26-28
VIII. Present indicative 29-32
IX. Possessives. Present perfect 32-35
X. Demonstratives. Numerals 36-39
XI. Radical-changing verbs 39-43
XII. Dative and accusative cases. Apocopated
adjectives 43-^
XIII. Estar and ser. Omission of indefinite
article . .- 47-49
XrV-XVI. Personal pronovms. Verbs 50-61
XVII. Commands. Numerals 62-66
XVIII. Infinitives. Some irregular verbs . . . 66-69
XIX. Imperfect and preterite indicative . . . 70-74
XX. Radical-changing verbs. Feminine el.
Neuter lo 74-77
XXI. Inflection of adjectives. Verbs .... 77-81
XXII-XXIII. Definite article. Verbs 81-89
XXIV. Negatives. Changes in spelling .... 90-94
XXV-XXVI. Future and conditional. Months. Days 95-102
XXVII. Past participles 103-107
XXVIII. Tener and haber. Perfect tenses . . . 107-lH
V
vi CONTENTS
XXIX. EEaber, saber, and conocer 112-115
XXX. Present participles. Progressive forms 116-120
XXXI. Imperative. Subjimctive used impera-
tively 120-125
XXXII-XXXIV. Subjunctive in substantive clauses. Im-
perfect subjunctive 125-141
XXXV. Subjunctive in adjectival clauses .... 141-146
XXXVI. Subjunctive in adverbial and conditional
clauses 146-151
XXXVII. Ojal&. Softened statement. Wilt and
should. Future subjunctive. Uir verbs 152-157
XXXVIII. Nouns. Verbs 157-162
XXXIX-XL. Adjectives. Verbs 162-174
XLI-XLII. Personal pronouns. Verbs 174-184
XLIII. Definite article. Verbs 185-190
XLIV. Omission of articles. Possessives. Verbs 190-196
XLV. Demonstratives. Relatives. Verbs . . 196-202
XLVI. Interrogatives. Pronominal adjectives.
Verbs 202-208
XLVII. Numerals. Verbs 208-215
XLVIII. Adverbs. Verbs 215-221
XLIX. Prepositions and conjunctions. Verbs . 221-228
L. Augmentatives and diminutives. Verbs 228-234
The Verb 235-281
List of radical-changing, -uir, and irregular verbs .... 266-276
List of verbs requiring a preposition before a dependent
infinitive 277-281
General Vocabulary 282-327
Index 328-330
Map op Sotjth America Frontispiece
Map of Spain Facing page 1
Map of Mexico 235
FIEST SPANISH COURSE
PRONUNCIATION
1. Castilian forms the basis of both the spoken and the
written language of cultivated Spaniards and Spanish
Americans.
The Alphabet
2. The following Ust gives the signs comprised in the
Spanish or Castihan alphabet with the usual Castilian names
for them:
a(a), b(6e), c(ce), ch(c^e), 6.{de), e(e), f(e/e), g{ge), hQiache), i(t),
j{jota), k(ka), liele), ll(eHe), m(eme), n(ene), ii{ene), 0(0), pipe), q(cu),
r(ere), s(ese), t{te), u(u), v(ce, or u ve), [w{doble w)j, x{equis), j(i griega),
z{zeta or zeda).
Observe that ch, 11, and fi figure as distinct signs in the Spanish
alphabet. In the dictionary, words and syllables beginning with ch,
11, and fi are found after those beginning with c, 1, and n respectively.
3- VOWELS
a = a of father: padre.
e = (1) a of mate: mesa, table; (2) e of met, before a
consonant (except n or s) in the same syllable, before rr, and
in the diphthong ei (or ey) : papel, ■paper; set, to he; muerto,
dead; defecto, defect; perro, dog; ley, law.
i = ee of meet : libro, hook.
o = (1) 0 of note : todo, all; (2) 0 of not before a consonant
in the same syllable, before rr, and in the diphthong ei (or
ey) : sol, sun; senor, sir; con, with; gorra, cap; soy, / am.
1
2 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
u = ti of nde: pluma, pen.
The vowels are of medium length or short; they never
have the diphthongal sounds heard in the EngHsh long a
ifate), long o (no), etc. There should not be prefixed
to u the y element which it has in such English words as
tube, pure, etc. In the conjunction y, and, the sound is that
of the simple vowel i (ee); approximately the same sound
is given to final y, as in muy, very; in other positions the y
has nearly the sound of English y in yet.
In the western countries of South America, especially in
Chile, the final y of Castilian is frequently supplanted by i,
as in mui for muy, very, i for y, and, etc.
4. Vowel Combinations. — When two adjacent vowels
in a word combine into a single syllable, they form a diph-
thong; when three do so, they form a triphthong.
5. Diphthongs. — These are constituted when one of the
strong vowels, a, e, o, combines with one of the weak vowels,
i, u; thus,
ai ei oi au eu ou
ia ie io; ua ue uo;
or when two weak vowels combine; thus,
iu ui.
If the second element is i and occurs at the end of a word,
it is written y, as in muy, soy, etc.
When the syllable containing the diphthong is accented,
the stress falls on the strong element, if there be one; other-
wise it falls on the second of the two weak vowels.
The various combinations, in an accented syllable, may be
illustrated by these words:
baile, dance; hay, there is (are) principiamos, we begin
flauta, fliUe ctiatro, four
reina, qtieen; rey, king bien, weU
deuda, debt fuerte, strong
PRONUNCIATION 3
oigo; 7 hear; doy, / give naciones, naivms
bou, {Catalonian mode of fishing) cuota, quota
triunfo, triumph cuita, grief
a. No diphthong, but two distinct syllables, will be the result, (1)
when two strong vowels come together, as in Saavedra (a proper name),
faena, task, caoba, mahogany, etc.; (2) when the accent falls on a weak
vowel adjacent to a strong vowel, as in traido, brought, oido, heard, etc.;
or (3) when two adjoining weak vowels are pronounced separately, as
in Guido, fluid; hvdda, flight ; construido, constructed. In the last two
cases the accent is always written on the stressed vowel.
6. Triphthongs. — There are but four of these; they are
formed when a stressed strong vowel stands between two
weak vowels. Final i of a word is written y. The combinar
tions are
iai, as in principidis, you begin
iei, as in principieis, may you begin
uai (uay), as in averigxiAis, you ascertain; guay, woe
uei (uey), as in continueis, Tuay you continue; buey, ox
CONSONANTS
7. Of the consonants, f, m, and p may be said to have
practically the same values as in English. Ch has the soimd
of English ch in church. H is silent : hora, hour; but h from
f was pronounced as late as the sixteenth century : hacer
(from fazer). K has the English sound and occurs only in
foreign words. Q never occurs except with a following u, and
the two together mean k; moreover they can appear only
before e or i, as in aquel, that, quitar, to take away. W is
found only in foreign words and has the foreign value; the
sound of the EngUsh w, as in well, etc., is possessed by the
Spanish unaccented u in hiatus before another vowel, as in
cuestion, question, cuando, when, etc. The other consonants
need special consideration.
8. B, V. — These have one and the same value which is
usually that of a bilabial spirant. It is given to neither of
them in English, and is produced by bringing the lips quite
4 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
close to each other and allowing the air to pass out constantly
between them; there is no stoppage of the air as in the case
of the English h. The sound of the English v does not exist
in Spanish. In a measure the Spanish sound in question
may be realized by trying to utter b and y in the same breath:
cf. Cuba, vat, uva, grape. Initial b or v more nearly re-
sembles English b, as in basta, enough, brazo, arm, etc. After
m or n (within a word or at the end of a preceding word),
both b and v acquire the full value of the English b, as in
tambi^n, also, en verdad, in truth, envidia, envy. (In these
cases the n becomes m in pronunciation.)
9. C, z. — C has two values. Before a, o, or u, or before
a consonant (except in ch) it is pronounced k, as in calle,
street, codo, elbow, etc. Before e or i it has approximately
the value of th in EngHsh thin, as in cena, supper, cinco, five.
But in Spanish America and in parts of Spain (especially
southern Spain) the c before e or i is pronounced like the
English ss.
Z has in all positions the value of th; in the regions in which
c has the sibilant value, it, too, is pronounced like ss.
10. D, t, 1, n. — These differ from the English sounds in
that they are produced farther forward in the mouth: when
making them, the tongue touches the upper teeth, or at least
the roots of the upper teeth.
In most positions, d is practically a spirant, and its sound
somewhat resembles that of English th in father. It may
be compared to a prolonged English d, but pronounced
with the tongue farther forward: cf. todo, all, madre,
mother. Initial d more nearly resembles English rf, as in
dfimelo, give it to me. After 1 and n Spanish d acquires the
full value of English d: cf. espalda, back, tienda, shop. At the
end of a word d is sometimes pronounced like the th of thin,
or is omitted altogether, but neither course is sanctioned
by the best usage. There is a tendency for it to dis-
PRONUNCIATION 5
appear in pronunciation between vowels, especially in the
ending -ado.
Aside from the fact that they should be produced well to the
front in the mouth, t, 1, and n are not unlike the Enghsh sounds.
11. LI, n. — These are palataUzed modifications of 1 and n.
The sign 11 does not mean double 1 at all; it simply denotes
an 1 pronounced in that part of the mouth in which a y is
regularly produced. In the endeavor to make an 1 the
tongue is arched toward the palate (near which a y has its
place of enunciation) ; hence it is a palataHzed 1. The sound,
as in Spanish millon, is rendered in a measure by that in
EngHsh million. In Spanish America, as in certain parts of
Spain, the 11 has become simply a y in pronunciation (which
shows how strong the y element is in the 11), so that caballo,
horse, is pronounced cab ay o.
The n is, similarly, a palatalized variety of n, that is, an
n produced in the y place in the mouth: the ny in the English
canyon is an approximate rendering of the n in the Spanish
cafi6n. The mark over the n is called a tilde (a word derived
ultimately from the Latin "titulus," title, sign).
12. G, j. — Before a, o, or u and before a consonant g
has the so-called "hard" sound, as in gota, drop, grande,
big. Before e or i this sound is. rendered by gu (in which the
u has no pronounceable value of its own), as in guerra,
war, gtiisar, to cook. IntervocaUc "hard" g tends to become
an indistinct spirant, as in hago, / make, sigue, he follows.
G followed immediately by e or i, and j, wherever it occurs,
have the "velar" sound given to ch in the Scotch-Enghsh
"loch" or in the German "noch," as in gente, people,
jardin, garden. While the sound indicated is the correct
Castihan one, many Spanish speakers pronounce this g
like a strong form of the h in English hat.
a. A diaeresis is placed over u when it is pronounced in gue- or
gui- as in lingiilstico, linguistic.
6 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
13. R, rr. — Wherever it occurs, the Spanish r is carefully
pronounced with an unmistakable trill of the tongue. It
has a well defined utterance, which resembles that of a care-
fully enunciated English r, as in caro, dear, grande, large,
amar, to love. When initial in a word, when it immediately
follows 1 or n, and when written rr between vowels, it has
a re-enforced value of this sound, as in roto, broken, Enrique,
Henry, alrededor, about, perro, dog.
14. S. — In most cases of its occurrence, between vowels
and elsewhere, the Spanish s has the voiceless sound of
the EngUsh ss, but it is hissed less : cf . ser, to be, casa, house,
mds, more. It should not receive between vowels the z sound
which it often has in English. Nowadays, however, there is a
tendency to voice it, that is, pronoimce it like EngUsh z,
before a voiced consonant (b, d, g, 1, r, m, n), and many
speakers aspirate it or fail to pronounce it at all before
a consonant or at the end of a word. The better rule
for foreigners is to pronounce it like EngUsh ss wherever it
occurs.
15. X. — This is a sound of infrequent occurrence in
Spanish. Between vowels it has ordinarily the English value.
Before consonants it may be pronounced Uke the EngUsh x
(that is, as ks) or as s; both sexto and sesto are found as
spelUngs for the word meaning sixth.
16. Y. — This sound has been treated in part under the
heading Vowels. At the beginning of a word or syllable it
has a value comparable to that of the English y. However,
when it is initial in a word, it is uttered strongly, and, in
dialectal Spanish in Spain and rather generally in Spanish
America, it acquires the sound of the EngUsh j, so that yo,
/, becomes jo and ya, already, becomes ja. For CastiUan a
forcible y pronunciation suffices.
17. Double letters. — When Spanish letters, with the
exception of 11 and rr, are written double, each is pronounced
PRONUNCIATION 7
separately. Of the vowels, a, e, and o may appear as doubled;
and of these double e is the commonest, as in leer, to read,
creer, to believe. Of the consonants doubled in writing only
two are pronounced separately; these are cc and nn. Cc
can occur only before e or i, and then the first c is /b in sound
and the second is the spirant th, as in acceder, to accede,
acci6n, action. Careless speakers are prone to neglect the
first c in such cases. Double n is found only where the first
n belongs to a prefix, as in innoble, ignoble.
ACCENTUATION
18. Most Spanish words reveal the place of their accent
by their very form; for a considerable number, however, a
written accent is thought necessary. The leading rules are
these:
1. Words ending in a vowel, or in the consonants n or s,
stress regularly the next to the last syllable and require no
written accent, as in
habla, he speaks examen, examination
diilce, sweet paraguas, umbreUa
especie, species
a. S and n are often inflectional endings or a part of inflectional
endings. Usually their presence does not vary the accent which the
particular word would have without them; thus,
carta, letter; cartas, letters
ama, he loves; amas, thou lovest; aman, they love
2. Words ending in a consonant except n or s stress regu-
larly the last syllable and take no written accent, as in
libertad, liberty amar, to love
a. For accentual purposes final y is treated as a consonant.
3. A written accent is required for words not obeying the
two rules just given and for all words whose stress comes
more than two syllables from their end. (This means that
a written accent is needed by all words ending in a vowel
8 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
and stressing it, by words ending in n or s and stressing the
last syllable, by all those ending in a consonant — except
n or s — and not stressing their last syllable, and by all
words not stressed on either the last or the next to the last
syllable). Examples:
papfi, papa tkpiz, lead pencil
sof&, sofa m&rmol, marble
razdn, reason ejercito, army
interes, interest telegrafo, telegraph
a. The addition of the plural sign -es sometimes involves the use of
a written accent not needed in the singular; thus, crimen, crime, but
crimenes; on the other hand, it may mean the omission of an accent
required in the singular, as in razdn, reason, razones.
6. In general, the addition of a plural sign has no effect upon the
place of accent in the particular word; however, two words advance
one syllable toward the end the place of stress; these are car&cter,
character, caracteres (for which word no written accent is necessary),
and regimen, rule of conduct, re^menes (for which the written accent
is still necessary, as it occurs more than two syllables from the end of
the word).
19. Accents are also used merely to indicate different
parts of speech. Certain monosyllables (which, of course,
need no written accent to indicate the place of stress), and
certain demonstrative, interrogative, and exclamative words
require an accent to distinguish them from other words
spelled and pronounced like them. Compare:
mf, me, myself mi, my
si, himself, etc.; yes si, if
mAs, more mas, but
este, this one (pron.) este, this (adj.)
6se, that one (pron.) ese, that (adj.)
aquel, that one (pron.) aquel, that (adj.)
que, what, which (interrog. and que, who, whom, which
exclam.) (rel.)
qui6n, who, whom (interrog. and exclam.) quien, who, whom (rel.)
a. A recent ruling of the Spanish Academy makes it no longer
necessary to write the accent on a, to, at, e, and, u, or, and o, or (except
on o between_Arabic numerals, as in 2 6 3).
PRONUNCIATION 9
6. The written accent of a verb form must not be omitted even
though, by the addition of an object pronoim to it the olace of the
accent is clear enough, thus, hable, / spoke, hablele, / spoke to him. A
verb form which does not take an accent when it stands alone may
require one, if the addition of object pronouns to it throws the stress of
the compounded form on a syllable preceding the next to the last; thus,
diciendo, saying, diciendomelo, saying it to me; traer, to bring, traertelOf
to bring it to thee; escriba Vd., vmte, escribalo Vd., ivrite it.
SYLLABIFICATION
20. — 1. A single consonantal character and the digraphs
ch, 11, rr (these three being inseparable combinations) are,
in a syllabic division, passed over to the following vowel;
so, also, are most combinations of a consonant with an en-
suing 1 or r (except rl, si, tl, and sr, which are separable) :
la-bio, lip cu-brir, to cover no-ble, noble
ja-ca, pony su-frir, to suffer mo-fle-tu-do, chubby-cheeked
la-do, side re-pri-mir, to repress su-plir, to supply
ne-zo, knot la-cre, sealing-wax te-cla, key
mu-cho, much ma-gro, meager si-glo, century
bu-llir, to boil ma-dre, mother
pa-rra, vine cua-tro, Jour
Cf. mer-lu-za, cod es-la-b6n, link
At-lan-ti-co, Atlantic Is-ra-e-li-ta, Israelite
2. With the exception of the inseparable combinations
mentioned in the foregoing rule, two consonants between
vowels are so divided that one remains with the preceding,
the other goes to the following vowel:
ap-to, fit mds-til, mast in-no-ble, ignoble, etc,
cor-te, court ac-ci-den-te, accident
3. Where the combination of consonants between vowels
is of more than two, there is a tendency to pass over to the
second vowel only a single consonant or one of the inseparable
combinations mentioned above in 1; e.g.:
par-che, plaster cons-truc-cifin, construction
pers-pi-ca-cia, perspicacity
10 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
4. Prefixes felt as such are usually kept intact, contrary
to the rules given above in 1 ; e.g. :
des-es-pe-rar, to despair (cf. esperar, to hope)
sub-le-var-se, to rebel (cf. levar, to raise).
ab-ro-ga-ci6n, abrogation (cf. rogar, to ask).
PUNCTUATION
21. The only notable points here are : (1) the double use of
question marks and exclamation points, which not only end
their clause, but in an inverted form usually precede it (e.g.
iC6mo estd Vd.? How are youf \ Que hermosa mujer!
What a beautiful woman!); (2) the frequency of suspension
points (. . .) in narrative or dramatic style; and (3), in
dialogue, the use of a dash ( — ) to indicate a change of speaker.
CAPITALIZATION
22. Capitals are less commonly used in Spanish than in
English. Unless they begin a sentence, a line of verse, or a
quotation, proper adjectives and the pronoun yo, 7, are not
capitalized. National or other locative adjectives used as
nouns may take a capital when they denote persons (although
usage varies in this respect); when they denote languages,
they usually take no capital, even though used substantively:
los franceses (or Franceses) hablan frances, Frenchmen
speak French.
In the titles of books and in the headings of chapters,
paragraphs, etc., it is customary in Spanish either to use
capital letters (emplear letra maytiscula) exclusively, or to
capitalize only the first letter of the title or heading and use
small letters (letra minfiscula) elsewhere, as in RESUMEN
GRAMATICAL or Resumen gramatical, G^NERO DE LOS
NOMBRES or Genero de los nombres, etc.
LESSON I • 11
LESSON I
(Lecci6n Primera)
23. Gender of Nouns. — All Spanish nouns are either
masculine or feminine. There are no neuter nouns. ,
libro, m., book pltima, /., pen
24. Indefinite Article
Masculine Feminine
un, a, an una, a, an
un libro, a book una pluma, a pen
26. Un is used with masculine nouns and una with femi-
nine nouns.
26. yo tengo, I have usted tiene, you have
EXERCISES
un ISpiz, a pencil una pluma, a pen
un libro, a book y, and
papel, m., paper
A. 1. Yo tengo papel. 2. Usted tiene papel. 3. Yo
tengo un Idpiz. 4. Usted tiene un lapiz. 5. Yo tengo una
pluma, 6. Usted tiene una pluma. 7. Yo tengo un libro.
8. Usted tiene un libro. 9. Yo tengo papel y ld,piz.
10. Usted tiene papel y Idpiz. 11. Yo tengo un Idpiz y
una pluma. 12. Usted tiene un lapiz y una pluma.
B. Escrihaseenes'panol. 1. You have a book. 2, I have a book.
3. You have a pencil. 4. I have a pencil. 5. You have paper.
6. I have paper. 7. You 'have paper and a pencil. 8. I have
paper and a pencil. 9. You have a pen and a pencil. 10. I
have a pen and a pencil. 11. You have a book and a pencil.
12. I have a book and a pen.
12 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
Al Profesor: Seria conveniente que los alumnos dedujeran de lot
ejemplos precedentes las reglas que siguen, y asi sucesivamente con todas
las reglas de las lecciones siguieiites.
23. Genero de los nombres. — Todos los nombres en espafiol
son o masculinos o femeninos. No hay nombres neutros.
24-25. El articulo indeterminado (o indefinido). — Un se usa
con los nombres masculinos y una con los femeninos.
LESSON II
(Lecci6n Segunda)
27. Gender of Nouns. — 1. Nouns ending in -o are usually
masculine.
un libro, a book tin ejercicio, an exercise
2. Nouns ending in -a are usually feminine.
una pluma, a pen tinta, /., ink
3. If nouns do not end in -o or -a, it is usually best to
learn the gender of each noun separately.
28. Interrogative Sentences. — An inverted interrogation
mark is placed at the beginning of a question.
iTengo yo? have I? iTiene usted? have you?
29. yo escribo, I write. iescribo yo? do I write?
usted escribe, you write. describe usted? do you write?
Note that the English auxiUary verb do is not expressed in Spanish.
EXERCISES
con, with en, in, on
un ejercicio, an exercise tinta, /., ink
A. 1. ^Tiene usted un Idpiz? 2. Yo tengo papel y un
Idpiz. 3. iEscribe usted en papel.con Idpiz? ^ 4. Yo escribo
en papel con pluma y tinta. 5. ^Escribe usted im ejercioio
> Note the omission of un, a.
LESSON II 13
con Id,piz? 6. Yo escribo un ejercicio con pluma y tinta.
7. ^Escribe usted en un libro? 8. Yo escribo en un libro.
B. Contestese afirmativamente a las siguientes preguntas.
1. iTiene usted un Idpiz? (Respuesta: Yo tengo un Idpiz.)
2. iEscribe usted con Idpiz? 3. iTiene usted pluma y tinta?
4. ^Escribe usted con pluma y tinta? 5. iTiene usted papel?
6. iEscribe usted en papel? 7. iEscribe usted en papel con
Idpiz? 8. iEscribe usted en papel con pluma y tinta?
9. iEscribo yo un ejercicio? (Respuesta: Usted escribe un
ejercicio.) 10. ^Escribo yo en papel? 11. ^Escribo yo con
Idpiz? 12. iEscribo yo con pluma y tinta?
C. 1. I have a pencil. 2. You have a pen, 3. I write with [[a] *
pencil. 4. You write with [a] pen. 5. I write on paper. 6. I write
on paper with [a] pencil. 7. You write with pen and ink. 8, Have
you a book? 9. Do you write in a book? 10. Do you write with
|~a] pencil? 11. Do you write with pen and ink? 12. Have I a pen?
13. Do I write with pen and ink? 14. Do I write on paper?
D. Escrihase. 1. I write on paper. 2. Do you write with
fa] pencil? 3. I write with pen and ink. 4. Have you a pen?
5. I have a pen and a pencil. 6. Do you write an exercise with [a]
pencil? 7. I write an exercise with pen and ink. 8. I write with
[[a] pencil. 9. You write with pen and ink. 10. Do I write in a
book? 11. You write in a book with [a] pencil. 12. I write in a
book with pen and ink.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
27. Genero de los nombres. — 1. Los nombres que tenninan
en -o son, por regla general, masculinos. 2. Los nombres que
terminan en -a son, por regla general, femeninos. 3. En cuanto a
los nombres que no terminan ni en -o ni en -a, el genero de cada
uno debe aprenderse por separado.
28. Frases interrogativas. — En espanol las preguntas van pre-
cedidas por un signo de interrogaci6n invertido.
N6te8e que el verbo auxiliar do no se expresa en espafiol.
^ English words in brackets C 3 are to be omitted in Spanish.
14 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
LESSON III
(Lecci6n Tercera)
30. Plural of Nouns. — 1. Nouns ending in a vowel add
-s to form the plural.
libro, book pliuna, pen
libros, books pltimas, pens
2. Nouns ending in a consonant add -es to form the plural.
papal, paper lecci6n, lesson
papeles, papers lecciones, lessons
Note that lecciones does not have the accent mark. The
plural of lipiz is Upices.
31. Definite Article
Singular Plural
Masculine el los
Feminine la las '
el libro, the book los libros, the books
la pluma, the pen las plumas, the pens
(See also §§ 96, 98)
32. In Spanish the definite article is usually repeated be-
fore each noun to which it refers.
La plxuna y la tinta. The pen ajid (the) ink.
33. yo tengo, I have
usted tiene, you have
el alumno tiene, the student has
yo ensefio, I teach
usted ensefia, you teach
el profesor ensefia, the teacher teaches
yo escribo, I write
usted escribe, you write
el alumno escribe, the student writes
The same form of the verb is used when usted is the subject that is
used when the subject is a singular noun. This is true of all verbs.
LESSON III ■ 15
EXERCISES
a alumna, the student, /. iquien? who?
el alixmno, the student, m.^ sefior, sir
la lecci6n, the lesson sefiora \ , , .
1 • XV- ui 1 u J a •* r madam, ma am *
la pizarra, the blackboard sefiorita J
(of slate) 2 si, yes
el profesor, the teacher, w.' la tiza, the chalk
la profesora, the teacher, /.
yo estudio, I study; usted estudia, you study
A. 1. iTiene usted los libros? 2. Si, seiior (senora o
senorita); yo tengo los libros y estudio las lecciones. 3.
iEscribe usted los ejercicios en papel? 4. Si, senor; yo
escribo los ejercicios con pluma y tinta. 5. ^Estudia el
alumno (o la alumna) las lecciones? 6. Si, sefior; el alumno
(o la alumna) estudia las lecciones. 7. iQuien ensena las
lecciones? 8. El profesor (o la profesora) ensena las lecciones.
9. iQuien escribe los ejercicios? 10. El alumno escribe los
ejercicios en la pizarra. 11. i Escribe el alumno con tiza?
12. Si, senor; el alumno escribe con tiza en la pizarra.
B. Contestese afirmativamente a las siguientes preguntas, empe-
zando coda respuesta con las palabras si sefior (sefiora, o sefiorita).
Usense en la respuesta tantas palabras de la pregunta como sea posible.
1. ^Estudia usted las lecciones? 2. ^Escribe usted los ejerci-
cios en la pizarra? 3. i Escribe usted los ejercicios con tiza?
1 In an elementary school a pupil is discfpulo; in a university a stvdent
or under graditate is estudiante. Alumno may be used for all grades.
^ Pizarra means slate. In Spain and in some Spanish American coun-
tries a blackboard made of slate is also called pizarra, while in Mexico and
some other countries it is called pizarr6n. A blackboard made of waxed
and painted .cloth is called encerado, and one of painted boards is called
tablero.
* In a high school or academy, in which each teacher gives instruction
in only one subject, the teacher should be called profesor, — ora. In an
elementary school, teacher is maestro, -a. A university professor is called
catedritico.
* Sefiorita is used in addressing a young unmarried teacher. In address-
ing an older woman, whether she be married or single, sefiora is considered
more respectful.
16 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
4. ^Estudia el alumno (o la alumna) las lecciones? 5. ^Ea-
cribe el alumno los ejercicios? 6. ^Escribe el alumno con
Idpiz? 7. iEscribe la alumna los ejercicios? 8. ^Escribe la
alumna con pluma y tinta? 9. iEnsena el profesor (o la
profesora) las lecciones?
Contestese, empleando como sujeto del verbo el alumno o la alumna,
el profesor 0 la prof esora. 10. iQuien tiene los libros? 11. iQuidn
estudia las lecciones? 12. iQuien escribe los ejercicios en la
pizarra? 13. iQuien ensena las lecciones?
C. Traduzcase y repitase despues, poniendo todos los nombres en
plural. 1. I have the book. (Yo tengo el libro. Yo tengo los
libros.) 2. I study the lesson. 3. I have the pencil and the pen.
4. I write the exercise. 5. You teach the lesson. 6. Who has the
book? 7. Who studies the lesson? 8. Who has the pencil and
the pen? 9. Who writes the exercise? 10. Who teaches the lesson?
Traduzcase y repitase despues en forma interrogativa. 11. The
student has the book. 12. The student studies the lessons.
13. The student writes the exercises. 14. The student writes on
the blackboard. 15. The student writes with chalk. 16. The
teacher teaches the lesson.
D. Escribase. 1. I study the lessons. 2, Do you write the
exercises? 3. Yes, sir; I write the exercises on the blackboard.
4. Does the student write with pen and ink? 5. Yes, sir; the
student writes the exercises with pen and ink. 6. Does the teacher
teach the lessons? 7. Yes, sir; the teacher teaches the lessons.
8. Who studies the lessons? 9. The student studies the lessons.
10. I write the exercises on the blackboard with chalk. 11. You
write the exercises on paper with pen and ink. 12. The student
studies the lessons and writes the exercises.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
30. Plural de los nombres. — 1. Los nombres que terminan en
vocal forman su plural anadiendo una -s.
2. Los nombres que terminan en consonante forman su plural
afiadiendo -es.
LESSON IV 17
Obs^rvese que el plural de lecci6n (lecciones) no lleva el acento.
El plural de Ifipiz es Idpices.
32. Por regia general, se repite el artfculo determinado (o de-
finido) delante de cada uno de los nombres a que se refiere.
33. La misma forma de verbo se usa cuando el sujeto de la frase
(u oraci6n) es usted que cuando el sujeto es un nombre en singular.
Esta regla conviene a todos los verbos.
LESSON IV
(LecciSn CuartaO
34. Position of Adjectives. — 1. In Spanish, descriptive
adjectives usually follow their noun.
Una lecci6n ficil. An easy lesson.
Un ejercicio dificil. A difficult exercise.
2. Limiting adjectives (articles, possessives, demonstra-
tives, numerals, etc.) usually precede their noun.
Un libro, muchos libros. A book, many books.
35. Inflection of Adjectives. — 1. An adjective that ends
in -0 in the masculine singular has four forms, thus:
SXNQTJLAB
Plural
Masculine rojo ^
'T^)red
rojas J ..'
Feminine roja ^
El libro rojo.
The red book.
La casa roja.
The red house.
Los libros rojos.
The red books.
Las casas rojas.
The red houses.
2. Other adjectives have, as a rule, only two forms of
the ending, one for the singular and one for the plural.
^ In titles a numeral often follows its noun, as here, but usually one
would say la cuarta lecci6n.
18
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Masculine and feminine
El alumno inteligente.
La alumna inteligente.
Los aluninos inteligentes.
Las alumnas inteligentes.
El ejercicio f&cil.
La lecci6n Mcil.
Los ejercicios fdciles.
Las lecciones Mciles.
Singular Plural
inteligente inteligentes intelligent
f&cil f&ciles easy
The intelligent student, m.
The intelligent student, /.
The intelligent students, m.
The intelligent students, /,
The easy exercise.
The easy lesson.
The easy exercises.
The easy lessons.
36. The plural of adjectives is formed like that of
nouns.
37. Agreement of Adjectives. — An adjective, no matter
where it stands in the sentence, agrees with its noun or
pronoun in gender and number.
EXERCISES
aplicado, -a, industrious, diligent
bianco, -a, white
la casa, the house
dificil, difficult
Moil, easy
mucho, -a, much
muchos, -as, many
mucho, adv., much, a great
deal
muy, very
negro, -a, black
rojo, -a, red
tambien, also
todo, -a, all
es, is; son, are; es aplicado, (he) is a hard worker
A. 1. Yo tengo tinta negra y una pluma. 2. ^Tiene usted
papel bianco tambien? 3. Si, sefior (senora o seiiorita) ; yo
escribo los ejercicios en papel bianco. 4. ^Son diffciles los
ejercicios? ^ 5. Sf, seiior; toda la lecci6n es muy diffcil.
6. ^Escribe el alumno muchos ejercicios en la pizarra?
7. El alumno escribe todos los ejercicios en la pizarra.
^ Note that a single predicate adjective usually precedes a noun subject
in an interrogative sentence. But in D. 7, the two predicate adjectives may
well follow the noun.
LESSON IV 19
8. iEs aplicado el alumno (o aplicada la alumna)? 9. Sf,
senor; el alumno (o la alumna) estudia mucho todas las
lecciones. 10. Los alumnos son todos muy aplicados.
11. iTiene usted muchas casas? 12. Yo tengo una casa
roja y una blanca (a white one) tambi^n. .[^
B. Contestese afirmaiivamente a las siguientes pregunlas.
1. iTiene usted papel bianco? 2. ^Tiene usted tinta negra?
3. iTiene usted muchos libros rojos? 4. ^Tiene usted
lecciones muy dificiles? 5. ^Tiene usted una casa roja?
6. ^Tiene usted una blanca tambien? 7. ^Estudia mucho el
alumno? 8. ^Escribe el alumno muchos ejercicios? 9. ^Es
fdcil la lecci6n? 10. iSon fdciles los ejercicios? 11. ^Es
aplicado el alumno? 12. iSon aplicados todos los alumnos?
C. Traduzcase y repitase despnes en plural. 1. The lesson is
difficult. 2, The exercise is easy. 3. The student (m.) is [a] hard
worker. 4, The student (/.) is []a] hard worker. 5. The book is
red. 6. The house is white. 7. The pencil is black.
Traduzcase y repitase despues en forma interrogaiiva. 8. The
lessons are difficult {vease A. 4). 9. The student studies a great
deal {vease B. 7). 10. The student writes many exercises. 11. All
the students are hard workers. 12. The teacher teaches many
lessons.
D. Escribase. 1. Do you study the lessons a great deal? (vease
A. 9). 2. I study all the lessons and write all the exercises.
3. Are the lessons difficult? 4. Many exercises are very difficult.
5. Do you write the exercises with [a] pencil? 6. I write aU the
exercises with pen and ink. 7. Is the ink black or red? 8. The ink
is black and the paper is white. 9. All the students are very hard
workers. 10. The teacher teaches many lessons. 11. Have you
a white house? 12. I have a white house and a red one (vease A. 12)
too.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
34. CoIocaci6n de los adjetivos. — 1. En espanol, por regla
general, los adjetivos descriptivos (o calificativos) siguen al nombre.
20 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
2. Los adjetivos determinantes (artfculos, adjetivos posesivos,
demostrativos, nuraerales, etc.), por regla general, preceden al
nombre.
35. Infleii6n de los adjetivos. — 1. El adjetivo masculino
singular que termina en -o tiene cuatro fonnas: -o, -a, -os, -as.
2. Los demds adjetivos solamente tienen, por regla general, dos
formas, una para el singular y otra para el plural.
36. El plural de los adjetivos se forma del mismo mode que el
de los nombres.
37. Concordancia de los adjetivos. — El adjetivo, cualquiera que
sea el lugar que ocupe en la frase, concuerda en g^nero y numero
con el nombre o pronombre a que se refiere.
LESSON V
(Lecci6n Quinta)
38. Agreement of Adjectives. — 1. An adjective that
modifies tv^^o or more masculine nouns or pronouns is in
the masculine plural.
El papel y el sobre son blancos. The paper and the envelope are white.
2. An adjective that modifies two or more feminine nouns
or pronouns is in the feminine plural.
La casa y la escuela son blancas. The house and the school are white.
3. An adjective that modifies both a mascuUne and a
feminine noun or pronoun is usually in the mascuUne plural.
La tiza y el papel son blancos. The chalk and the paper are white.
39. Similarly a noun or pronoun in the masculine plural
may refer to both men and women.
Los profesores The teachers (men and women)
Los altunnos The students (boys and girls)
40. Negative Sentences. — In negative sentences, no, not,
is placed before the verb.
Usted no estudia. You do not study.
iNo estudia usted? Do you not study?
r
LESSON V 21
EXERCISES
la carta,! letter ingles, English
la clase, class no, no, not
la direcci6n, address o, or
la escuela, school ^que? what?
espafiol, Spanish el sobre, envelope
hay, there is, there are; no hay, there is not, there are not
A. 1. iQu6 estudia usted en el libro? 2. Yo estudio leccio
nes y ejercicios muy dificiles. 3. ^Es usted {vease §33) muy
aplicado?^ 4. No, senor; yo no estudio mucho las lecciones.
5. iHay muchos alumnos en la escuela? 6. SI, senor; hay
muchos alumnos y muchos profesores en la escuela. 7. iSon
muy aplicados todos los alumnos? 8. No, senor; los alumnos
no son todos muy aphcados. 9. ^Escribe el alumno (o la
alumna) muchas cartas en ingles y en espanol? 10. El
alumno (o la alumna) no escribe muchas cartas en espanol.
11. Escribe (He, o She, writes) la carta y la direcci6n con
pluma y tinta. 12. La tinta y el Idpiz son negros: el papel
y el sobre son blancos.
B. ConUstese negativamerde a las siguientes preguntas. 1. ^Es-
cribe usted cartas con lapiz? (Respuesta: No, senor; yo no
escribo cartas con Idpiz.) 2, ^Escribe usted cartas en papel
rojo? 3. ^Escribe el alumno muchas cartas en espanol?
4. iSon fdciles las lecciones y los ejercicios? 5. iSon apli-
cados todos los alumnos? 6. iHay muchos profesores en la
clase?
ConUstese segiin el sentido. 7. ^En qu6 escribe usted la
carta? 8. ^En qu6 escribe usted la direccion? 9. iCon qu6
escribe usted la carta y la direcci6n? 10. iCon q\i6 escribo
yo en la pizarra? 11. iSon blancos o negros el papel y el
sobre? 12. iSon blancas o negras la pizarra y la tinta?
I Hereafter the English definite article will be omitted from the special
vocabularies.
^ In addressing a woman, one would say: ^Es usted muy aplicada?
22 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
C. 1. The chalk is white. 2. The paper is white. 3. The chalk
and the paper are white. 4. The ink is black. 5. The pencil is
black. 6. The ink and the pencil are black.
Traduzcase y repitase despues negativamente. 7. The lesson is easy.
8. The exercise is easy. 9. The lesson and the exercise are easy.
10. The student (in.) is [a] hard worker. 11. The student (/,) is
[a] hard worker. 12. The students are hard workers.
D. Escribase. 1. Are the paper and the ink white or black?
(vease B. 11). 2. The paper is white and the ink is black. 3. Are
not the pencil and the chalk white? ^ 4. The chalk is white;
the pencil is black. 5. Does not the teacher teach many lessons?
6. Are the lessons easy or difficult? ^ 7. The exercises are not
very difficult. 8. Does the student write many letters? 9. [He]
writes many letters in EngUsh: [he] does not write letters m Span-
ish. 10. I write letters in EngUsh and in Spanish too. 11. What
does the student write on the envelope? 12. [He] writes the ad-
dress with pen and ink.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
38. Concordancia de los adjetivos. — 1. Un adjetivo que modi-
fica a dos o mds nombres o pronombres masculinos debe ponerse
en masculino plural.
2. Un adjetivo que modifica a dos o mds nombres o pronombres
femeninos debe ponerse en femenmo plural.
3. Un adjetivo que modifica a la vez a dos nombres o pronombres,
uno masculino y otro femenino, debe ponerse, por regla general,
en masculino plural.
39. Igualmente un nombre en mascuhno y niimero plural puede
referirse a hombres y mujeres.
40. Prases negativas. — En las frases (u oraciones) negativas
el adverbio de negaci6n no se coloca delante del verbo.
> See the footnote to IV, Exercises, A, 4.
I
LESSON VI 23
LESSON VI
(Leccion Sezta)
41. Present Indicative of Tener, io hate.
SiNouLAB Plural
. T u nosotros \ ^ ,
yo tengo, 1 nave nosotras I *®^®°*os» ^^ '^^.ve
^ . . . vosotros I i >. i
tfi tienes, thou hast ^ > teneis, ye have
' vosotras j
usted tiene, you have ustedes tienen, you have
eUa } *^^^^' she } ^^ eUas } *^^''^^' ^^'^ ^^"^^
42. Pronouns. — 1. Tfi, </iow, is used in familiar speech,
as between the members of a family or between intimate
friends and when speaking to small children and animals
(the dog, the horse, etc.). It is also used in poetry and in
prayers to the Deity. The plural of tti is vosotros, -as.
2. Usted, you, is required in more formal speech. In
addressing a stranger or mere acquaintance, usted must be
used. The plural of usted is ustedes.
Usted is used with the third person singular of the verb,
and ustedes with the third person plural.
Usted and ustedes are abbreviated to Vd. and Vds., and
also to Ud. and Uds. or V. and VV.
3. Nosotros, -as, we, vosotros, -as, ye, and ellos, -as,
they, have both mascuUne and feminine forms. Nosotros,
-as is the plural of yo, ellos is the plural of €1, and ellas is
the plural of ella.
"iXy he, is distinguished by the accent mark from el, the.
43. Tener que means io have to, must.
Yo tengo que estudiar. I have to, or I must, study.
^Tiene Vd. ima lecci6n que es- Have you a lesson to study?
tudiar?
24 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
44. Some Infinitives
enseiiar, to teach escriblr, to write
estudiar, to study
EXERCISES
alto, -a, high para, for, in order to (with an
ancho, -a, wide, broad infinitive)
el asiento, seat la clase, classroom '
la mesa, table, desk ^ la silla, chair
la ventana, window
A. Continuese, usando como sujetos de los verhos todos hs pronom-
bres personates, tanto masculinos como femeninos en el mlmero plural.
Si lo prefi,ere el profesor, tu y vosotros, -as, y las formas correspon-
dientes de los verhos pueden omitirse por ahora. 1 , Yo tengo mu-
chos libros (tii tienes muchos libros), usted tiene . . ., 41 tiene
. . ., etc. 2. Yo tengo que estudiar mucho. 3. Yo tengo
que escribir cartas. 4. Yo tengo ejercicios que escribir.
B. 1. La clase tiene ventanas anchas y altas. 2. Hay
muchos asientos. 3. Hay tambi^n una mesa (un escri-
torio) para el profesor (o la profesora). 4. Todos los
alumnos tienen asientos. 5. Los profesores tienen sillas y
mesas. 6. iQu6 tienen que estudiar los alumnos? 7. Los
alumnos tienen que estudiar las lecciones y escribir los
ejercicios. 8. Tienen {They have) libros para estudiar
las lecciones. 9. Tienen papel para escribir los ejercicios.
10. Los profesores tienen muchas lecciones que ensenar.
11. Yo tengo papel para escribir una carta. 12. "^Tiene Vd.
un sobre para la carta?
C. Contestese afirmativamente. 1. ^Tienen Vds. libros para
estudiar la lecci6n? 2. ^Tienen Vds. papel para escribir los
ejercicios? 3. ^Tienen Vds. pluma y tinta para escribir?
4. iTienen Vds. cartas que escribir? 5. ^Tienen Vds. sobres
' If the teacher's desk resembles a table, it is called la mesa del pro-
fesor ; if it is a writing desk, it is more properly called el escritorio.
* A lecture room in a university is called sala de conferencias or aula.
LESSON VI 25
para las cartas? 6. iTienen Vds. tiza para escribir en
la pizarra? 7. iTiene la clase ventanas altas y anchas?
8. iTienen asientos los aluiimos? 9. ^Tiene una mesa el
prof esor (o la prof esora)? 10. iTienen que estudiar mucho
los alumnos? 11. ^Tienen los alumnos muchos ejercicios
que escribir? 12. ^Tiene el prof esor muchas lecciones que
ensenar?
D. TradHzcase, y repltase despues en plural omitiendo los articitlos
indeterminados. En este ejercicio y en los siguientes traduzcase you
por usted o ustedes, a menos que se indiquen tu y vosotros, -as.
1. I have a broad desk. (Yo tengo una mesa ancha. Nosotros
tenemos mesas anchas.) 2. I must (or have to) study a lesson.
3. You have a difficult exercise. 4. You have a lesson to study.
5. You have a letter to write. 6. You must write with []a] pen.
7. He has an exercise to write. 8. He must write a letter too.
9. She hasn't a book. 10. She hasn't a chair.
E. Escribase. 1. We have to study and to write a great deal.
2. We have lessons to study and exercises to write. 3. We
must (or have to) write the exercises in Spanish. 4. Have you
also letters to write in Spanish? 5. Yes, sir (or madam) ; we have
many letters to write in Spanish and in English too. 6. The
students in the classroom have seats. 7. The teacher has a chair
and a broad desk. 8. [He] writes (Escribe) many letters on
the desk. 9. In the classroom all the windows are wide and
high. 10. What must the students write on the blackboard?
11. They have to write all the exercises in Spanish. 12. They
must study much in order to write the exercises.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
41. Presente de indicative del verb© tener (primera persona,
segunda persona, tercera persona del singular, etc.).
42. Pronombres. — 1. El pronombre tu se usa en la conversaci6n
famiUar, entre los diferentes miembros de una f amiUa, entre amigos
Intimos, y cuando se dirige uno a niflos pequenos y a los animales
(el perro, el caballo, etc.). Tambi^n se usa en la poesia y en las
oraciones a la Divinidad. El plural de tti es vosotros, -as.
26 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
2. El pronombre usted es de rigor en la conversaci6n formal.
Cuando habla uno con un extrano o simple conocido debe emplear
usted. El plural de usted es ustedes.
Usted se usa con la tercera persona del singular del verbo y
ustedes con la tercera persona del plural.
Usted y ustedes se abrevian Vd. y Vds., y tambi^n Ud. y Uds., o
V. y VV.
3. Nosotros, plural de yo, vosotros, plural de t&, y ellos, plural
de €1, tienen las formas femeninas nosotras, vosotras y ellas.
El pronombre el se distingue del artfculo el por el acento escrito.
43. Tener que significa to have to, mitst.
44. Algunos infinitivos: . . .
LESSON vn
^-f *~ (Lecci6n SIptima)
45. Genitive Case.^ — Possession is denoted by the prepo-
sition de, of.
El libro de Juan John's book.
Spanish nouns have one form for the singular and one for
the plural; they have no ending that corresponds to the
EngUsh 's.
46. De + el is contracted to del; but de la, de los, and
de las are not contracted.
Los libros del alunmo. The student's books.
Los libros de los alumnos. The students' books.
47. Present Indicative of Ser, to be.
Singular' Plural
nosotros 1
yo soy, I am ^^^^^^^^ j somos, we are
x-" XI- 1. vosotros 1 .
tu eres, thou art vosotras J ^°^^' ^® ^®
usted es, you are ustedes son, you are
II \ he \ . ellosl ,,
eUar^'Bher' ellas/ ^o^>'^^y^^
» Or Possessive Case.
LESSON VII 27
EXERCISES
I
ahora, now la ortograffa, spelling, orthography
la aritmetica, arithmetic perezoso, -a, lazy ^
la geograf la, geography pero, but
la gram^tica, grammar poco, -a, little
Juan, John pocos, -as, few
la lectura, reading poco, adv., Uttle
Maria, Mary
clase^ de espanol, Spanish class; ejercicio de espaflol, Spanish exer-
cise; leccion de gramatica, grammar lesson or lesson in grammar; libro
de lectura, reader.
A. Contin'Aese. 1. Yo soy aplicado.' 2. Yo no soy
perezoso. 3. Yo no soy el profesor. 4. Yo tengo que estudiar
ahora.
B. 1. iTiene Vd. el libro de lectura de Juan? 2. No,
senor (o senora); yo tengo el libro de Maria. 3. Juan y
Maria son alumnos de la escuela. 4. ^Son ellos aplicados
o perezosos? 5. Juan es un poco perezoso, pero Maria es
aplicada. 6. Juan tiene pocos libros, pero Maria tiene
muchos. 7. Juan, ^que estudia Vd. ahora? 8. Yo estudio
la leccion de ortografia. 9. ^Es la lecci6n fdcil o dificil?
10. Es (It is) facil, pero la lecci6n de aritmetica es muy
dificil. 11. Maria, ^es dificil la leccion de geograf ia? 12. Si,
senor; es dificil, y la lecci6n de-gramdtica es dificil tambi^n.
C. Contestese afirmativamente. 1. ^Tiene Juan el libro de
Maria? 2. ^Estudia 61 la leccion de espanol? 3. iEs fdcil
la leccion de espaiiol? 4. ^Tiene Maria el libro de Juan?
5. iEstudia ella la lecci6n de gramatica? 6. ^Es dificil
» Some teachers would call a lazy student un alumno flojo. When thus
used, flojo is a harsher term than perezoso.
^ Note that clase means both doss and classroom.
' If there are young women in the class, they should early form the habit
of using the feminine form of a predicate adjective or noun with yo soy, as
well as the feminine form of the personal pronoun, first person plural, thus:
yo soy aplicada, nosotras somos aplicadas.
28 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
la lecci6ii de gramdtica? 7. iHay muchos alumnos en la
escuela? 8. iSon aplicados todos los alumnos? 9. iSon
Vds. alumnos de la escuela? 10. iTienen Vds. muchos libros?
11. iTienen Vds. libros de lectura? 12. ^Tienen Vds.
ejercicios que escribir?
D. Traduzcase, y repitase despues en plural. 1. She is not [&]
hard worker. (Ella no es aplicada. Ellas no son aplicadas.)'
2. He is very lazy. 3. I have the student's book. 4. I have a
reader. 5. I have to study the lesson. 6. You are the teacher.
7. Is the grammar lesson easy? 8. Is the Spanish exercise difficult?
E. Escrlbase. 1. John has the teacher's book and is writing
(escribe) the exercise. 2, John, is the Spanish lesson difficult?
3. The exercise is easy, but the grammar lesson is very difficult.
4. Mary, what are you studying (ique estudia Vd.) now? 5, I am
studying (Yo estudio) the lessons in arithmetic and geography,
6. Have you (pi.) many books ui Enghsh and in Spanish?
7. We have manv books in Enghsh, but [we] have few books in
Spanish. 8. Are the students industrious (aplicados) or lazy?
9. Few are lazy; many are industrious. 10, All the students in
the Spanish class are hard workers, 11, We have difficult lessons
and exercises to study. 12. [We] must study a great deal in
order to write the Spanish exercises,
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
46. Caso genitivo. — La idea de posesi6n se expresa mediante
la preposici6n de.
Los nombres en espanol tienen una terminaci6n para el singular
y otra para el plural; carecen de una terminaci6n andloga a la
Lnglesa 's.
46. La preposici6n de y el artfculo el se contraen en la forma del,
pero de la, de los, y de las no se contraen.
LESSON vra
29
LESSON VIII
(Lecci6n Octava)
48. The Regular Conjugations. — Spanish verbs are di-
vided into three conjugations, according to the infinitive
endings -ar, -er, -ir :
I urn
Hablar, to speak Aprender, to learn Vivir, to live
Like these are inflected all regular verbs with correspond-
ing infinitive endings.
49. The inflectional endings of the Present Indicative are:
I: -o, -as, -a, -amos, -dis, -an
II: -o, -es, -e, -emos, -eis, -en
III: -o, -es, -e, -imos, -is, -en
60. Present Indicative
Hablar, to speal^
Singular
habl-o, I speak, do speak, am speaking
habl-as, thou speakest, dost speak, art speaking
, ,, [ you speak, do speak, are speaking
\ he, she or it speaks, does speak, is speaking
Plural
habl-amos, we speak, do speak, are speaking
habl-ais, ye speak, do speak, are speaking
habl-an, you or they speak, do speak, are speaking
Aprender, to learn
I learn, do learn, am learning; etc.
Singular Plural
aprend-o aprend-emos
aprend-es aprend-eis
aprend-e aprend-en
Vivir, to lite
I live, do live, am living; etc.
Singular Plural
viv-o viv-imos
viv-es viv-is
viv-e viv-en
a. Each of the verb forms given above may be translated in either
one of three ways, thus : aprendo, / learn, I do learn, or / am learning.
But no aprendo is usually to be translated in only two ways: / do not
learn or / am not learning.
h. Note the accent on the ending of the second person pliu*al in the
present indicative of all three conjugations (hablfiis, aprendeis, vivis).
30 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
51. Omission of the Subject Personal Pronoun. — In
Spanish the subject pronoun is usually omitted.
tengo, I have aprendemos, we learn
a. Sometimes the subject pronoun is needed for emphasis or to make
the meaning clear.
£l estudla, pero ella no estudia. He studies, but she does not.study.
b. It is usually more polite to express usted or ustedes, but this
pronoun need not be repeated within a sentence.
EXERCISES
el borrador,* eraser la falta, mistake
borrar, to erase pasar, to pass, go (to the
correctamente, correctly blackboard)
el cuademo, notebook, exercise seilalar, to point out, call
book attention to
la dificultad, difficulty si, if
entonces, then subrayar, to imderline
explicar, to explain
A. Continuese, usando pnmero hs pronombres sujetos de los verbos,
y repitiendo despues las mismas f rases sin los pronombres. 1. (Yo)
senalo las faltas. 2. (Yo) aprendo la lecci6n. 3. (Yo) no
escribo correctamente. 4. (Yo) hablo espanol.
B. 1. Escribimos los ejercicios de espanol en los cuadernos.
2. Si escribimos correctamente, no hay faltas. 3. Pero si
no escribimos correctamente, el profesor subraya las faltas
contintaroja. 4. En la clase de espanol pasamos a la pizarra.
5. Escribimos todo el ejercicio en la pizarra con tiza. 6. El
profesor senala todas las faltas. 7. Tambi^n expUca todas
las dificultades. 8. Entonces borramos el ejercicio con el
borrador. 9. Los alumnos tienen que estudiar mucho para
aprender las lecciones. 10. Tambi^n estudian mucho para
escribir correctamente los ejercicios. 11. ^Es (Is it) diffcil
escribir correctamente un ejercicio de espanol? 12. Sf,
sefior; es muy diflcil; pero el profesor expUca las dificultades.
i Also called cepillo.
r^ LESSON VIII 31
C. Contestese afirmativamente, omitiendo los pronombres sujetos
de los verbos. 1. ^Escribe Vd. el ejercicio en un cuaderno?
2. ^Escribe Vd. con tinta negra? 3. iSenala las faltas el
profesor? 4. ^Subraya las faltas con tinta roja? 5. iExplica
todas las dificultades? 6. iPasan Vds. a la pizarra? 7.
iEscriben Vds. el ejercicio en la pizarra? 8. ^Escriben Vds.
con tiza? 9. ^Borran Vds. el ejercicio con el borrador?
10. ^Aprenden Vds. todas las lecciones? 11. ^Escriben
Vds. todos los ejercicios? 12. ^Es diffcil escribir correcta-
mente los ejercicios?
D. Traduzcase, y repitase despuSs usando las formas plurdles de
hs sujetos y de los verbos. 1. I live in a white house. 2. [I] study
a great deal. 3. You learn the Spanish lesson. 4. You write the
exercises. 5. He points out the mistakes. 6. She explains the dif-
ficulties. 7. You go to the blackboard. 8. You erase with the
eraser. 9. The student writes the exercises. 10. The teacher calls
attention to the mistakes.
E. Escribase. 1. We do not speak Spanish, but we are learn-
ing to (a) speak. 2. If we study much, we learn much. 3. We
write all the exercises in exercise books. 4. The teacher points out
the mistakes and explains the difficulties. 5. He underUnes all
the mistakes with red ink. 6. []It] is very difficult to write cor-
rectly all the exercises. 7. Do you (pi.) go to the blackboard in
order to write the exercises? 8. .Yes, sir; we write with chalk and
erase with the eraser. 9. The industrious (aplicados) students
study much: the lazy [[ones] study Uttle. 10. All must study a
great deal in order to learn the lessons. 11. There are many
difiiculties in Spanish. 12. But there are also many difficulties in
English.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
48. Las conjugaciones regiilares. — En espanol las conjugaciones
de los verbos se dividen en tres, correspondiendo a las termina-
ciones del infinitivo, a saber: -ar, -er, -ir. Todos los verboa
regulares se conjugan como hablar, aprender, o vivir.
49. Las terminaciones del presente de indicativo son: . . .
32 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
50. a. La forma verbal del presente de indicative espafiol corres-
ponde a tres formas inglesas; por ejemplo, aprendo puede traducirse
/ learn, I do learn o / am learning; pero la forma negativa del mismo
tiempo s61o equivale a dos formas inglesas, por ejemplo, no aprendo
86I0 puede traducirse por I do not learn o I am not learning.
b. N6tese el acento escrito que lleva la terminaci^n de la segunda
persona del plural del presente de indicative en las tres conjugacio-
nes: hablfiis, aprendeis, vivis.
51. Supresion del pronombre personal que sirve de sujeto. — En
espafiol se suprime, per regla general, el pronombre que sirve de
sujeto al verbo.
a, Algunas veces se necesita el pronombre sujeto del verbo para
dar mayor 6nfasis a la expresi6n o para darle mayor claridad.
6. La expresi6n resulta mds correcta y cort& con el empleo del
pronombre usted o ustedes, pero no ea necesaria la repetici6n del
pronombre en la frase.
LESSON IX
(Lecci6n Novena)
62. Possessives
Singular
mfo, -a, -OS, -as or mi, mis my (mine)
tuyo, -a, -OS, -as or tu, tus thy (thine)
suyo, -a, -OS, -as or su, sus your (yours), his, her (hers), ita
Pl.URA.Ii
nuestro, -a, -os, -as our (ours)
vuestro, -a, -os, -as your (yours)
suyo, -a, -OS, -as - or su, sus your (yours), their (theirs)
53. The short forms, mi (mis), tu (tus), su (sus), are used
when they precede their nouns.
Mi madre. My mother. Mis libros. My books.
But, I Madre mial ^ My mother I Los libros son mios. The books
are mine.
* An inverted exclamation point (signo de admiraci6n invertido) is placed
at the beginning of an exclamatory sentence.
LESSON IX
33
54. Suyo (su) may mean your, his, her, its, or their.
iTiene Vd. sus libros?
Juan tiene sus libros.
Maria tiene sus libros.
Juan y Maria tienen sus libros.
Have you your books?
John has his books.
Mary has her books.
John and Mary have their books.
I
a. Your (yours) is often best expressed by de usted.
^Es de Vd. este libro? Is this book yoirrs?
55. Agreement of Possessives. — Possessives agree in
gender and number with the thing possessed, not with the
possessor.
a. Possessive adjectives are usually repeated before each noun to
which they refer.
Mi padre y mi madre. My father and mother.
56. Interrogative whose is de quien or de quienes.
^De quien as el libro que Vd. Whose book have you? (lit., Whose
tiene? is the book that you have?)
Note that the plural of quien is quienes.
67. Past Participles
I. Hablar : hablado, spoken III. Vivir : vivido, lived.
II. Aprender : aprendido, learned
Like these are formed the past participles of all regular
verbs.
a. Escribii has an irregular past participle: escrito, written.
68.
Present Perfect Indicative of Hablar
/ have spoken; etc.
Singular Plural
he hablado % hemos hablado ^
has hablado
ha hablado
1 hemos hablado ^
habeis hablado i
han hablado '
Like he hablado, etc., is formed the present perfect indic-
ative of all Spanish verbs.
34 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
EXERCISES
bien, well el piano, piano
hallar, to find tocar, to play (a musical
el hermano, brother; la hermana, instrument)
sister todavfa,'yet
la madre, mother tomar, to take
la mlisica, music trabajar, to work
el padre, father; los padres, parents ^
escuela municipal, municipal or city school;
trabajamos mucho, we work hard
A. CorUinuese. 1. Yo toco el piano. 2. Yo tengo mis
libros (tii tienes tus libros, etc.). 3. Yo tengo mis plumas.
4. El piano es mlo (tuyo, etc.). 5. La casa es mfa. 6. He
estudiado la lecci6n. 7. He vivido en Chile.
B. 1. Tengo un hermano y una hermana. 2. Ellos son
alumnos de una escuela municipal. 3. Estudian la gramdtica,
la ortograffa, la aritmetica y la geograffa.^ 4. Mi hermana
toca muy bien el piano. 5. Mi hermano no ha tomado
lecciones de miisica. 6. Mis hermanos ^ toman lecciones de
espafiol. 7. Trabajan mucho, pero todavfa no hablan espaflol.
8. Hallan diffciles las lecciones de gramdtica. 9. Pero son
aplicados y escriben todos los ejercicios. 10. Mi padre y mi
madre (o, Mis padres) no hablan espanol. 11. Pero estudian
todas las lecciones con mis hermanos.
C. Contestese. 1. ^Tiene Vd. su gramdtica? 2. ^Tiene
41 su aritmetica? 3. iTiene ella su geograffa? 4. iTienen
Vds. sus libros? 5. iTienen ellos sus plumas? 6. iTengo
yo mi Idpiz? 7. iToca ella el piano? 8. iHa tomado 61'
lecciones de mdsica? 9. ^H^ tomado Vd. lecciones de es-
panol? 10. iHan estudiado Vds. las lecciones? 11. ^Tra-
bajan Vds. mucho? 12. iSonj Vds. aphcados? 13. iEs
nuestra la casa? 14. iSon nueslros los hbros? 15. ^Es de
» See §39. * Note the use of the article.
* Note the positioD of the subject pronoun in ^Ha tornado 61? etc.
See §136.
LESSON IX 35
Vd. el Idpiz? 16. iEs de Vd. la pluma? 17. ^De qui^n es el
libro que Vd. tiene?
D. Traduzcase y repUase des-pues en plural. 1. The house is
mine. (La casa es mia. Las casas son mias.) 2. My house
is white. 3. The book is mine. 4. My book is red. 5. The pencil
is yours. 6. Your pencil is black. 7. The pen is his. 8. I have
his pen. 9. The letter is hers. 10. I have her letter. 11. Whose
book have you? 12. Whose pen have I?
E. Escribase. 1. Does your brother play the piano? 2, Yes,
sir; but he does not play very well. 3. I have not (Yo no he) taken
music lessons. 4. We are students in (de) a city school. 5. We
take lessons in (de) grammar, arithmetic, geography, and Spanish.*
6. My brother and I have had to (hemos tenido que) work hard.
7. But our parents also work hard. 8. We do not speak Spanish
yet. 9. Our parents have studied the lessons too. 10. But they
do not speak Spanish yet. 11. I have your book. Whose book have
you? 12. I have my sister's book, and I have written the exercise.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
62. Posesivos: . . .
53. Las formas apocopadas mi (mis), tu (tus), su (sus) se usan
cuando preceden al nombre.
54. Suyo (su) puede significar your, his, her, its, o their.
a. Con frecuencia your (yours) se traduce mds acertadamente por
de usted.
55. Concordancia de los posesivos. — Los posesivos concuerdan
en g^nero y niimero con la cosa poseida y no con el poseedor.
o. Los adjetivos posesivos, por regla general, se repiten ante cada
nombre a que se refieren.
57. Participios pasados (o pasivos). — Como hablado, apren-
dido y vivido, se forman los participios pasados (pasivos) de todos
los verbos regulares.
a. Escrito, el participio pasado de escribir, es irregular.
58. El perfecto. — Como he (has, etc.) hablado, se conjuga el
perfecto de indicative de todos los verbos espanoles.
1 Do not use the article here after de.
36 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
LESSON X
(Leccidn Decima)
59. Demonstrative Adjectives ^
este, -a, -os, -as, this, these .
',',', \ that, those
aquel, aquella, -os, -as J '
60. Ese usually denotes that which is near or which refers
to the person addressed. Aquel denotes that which is more
remote.
a. A demonstrative adjective is repeated before each noun to which
it refers.
Este hombre y esta mujer. This man and (this) woman.
61. Demonstrative Pronouns •*
6ste, -a, -6s, -as, this (one), these esto, this
6se, -a, -os, -as \ ^i, i. / \ . t, eso \ ., .
., ,.. ) that (one), those „ > that
aquel, aquella, -OS, -as J ' aquelloj
62. Esto, eso, and aquello are neuter. They are used to
denote a thing not mentioned by name or a mere idea. They
can not represent a noun, since there are no neuter nouns in
Spanish.
iQue es esto? What is this?
jEso es! That's it! That is right!
a. Note that the masculine and feminine demonstrative pronouns
are distinguished by the accent mark from the demonstrative adjectives.
The neuter demonstratives are never used as adjectives and therefore
the neuter demonstrative pronoims do not need the accent mark.
63. Cardinal Numerals
im(o), -a, one nueve, nine
dos, two diez, ten
tres, three once, eleven
cuatro, four doce, twelve
cinco, five trace, thirteea
seis, six catorce, fourteen
siete, seven quince, fifteen
ocho, eight diez y seis, sixteen
LESSON X 37
64. — 1. Uno loses the final o of the mascuKne singular
when it precedes its noun.
2. Un(o), -a has both a mascuhne and a feminine form,
but the other nmnerals given above have only one form each
for both genders.
Un ISpiz. One pencil. Una pltima. One pen.
Dos lapices. Two pencils. Dos plumas. Two pens.
a. Note that un l&piz may mean either one pencil or a pencil, and
una pliuna may mean either one pen or a pen.
EXERCISES
el abuelo, grandfather; la abue- el hombre, man
la, grandmother; los abue- leer, to read {past part.: lefdo)
los, grandparents mlsmo, -a, same
anciano, -a, aged, old la mujer, woman
fuerte, strong muy . . . para, too ... to
el hijo, son; la hija, daughter; que, rel. pron.,^ who, which, that
los hijos, children (= sons rico, -a, rich
and daughters)
ya no viven, they are not living now
A. Coniirvaese. 1. No he leldo este libro. 2. Nohevividoen
aquella casa. 3. He aprendido la primera leccion. 4. Hallo
fdcil esta lecci6n. 5. He escrito muchas cartas.
B . 1 . Este hombre y esta mu j er viven en aquella casa blanca.
2. Tienen dos hijos, Juan y Maria. 3. Estos hijos tienen dos
abuelos. 4. Los abuelos viven en la misma casa. 5. El
abuelo es anciano, pero es un hombre muy fuerte. 6. Laabuela
tambien es anciana; no es una mujer fuerte. 7. Los abuelos
no son ricos y han tenido que trabajar mucho. 8. Ahora son
muy ancianos para trabajar mucho. 9. Juan, ique lee Vd.
en ese libro? 10. En este libro yo estudio la lecci6n de es-
paiiol. 11. Hallo dificil la leccion. 12. ^Y qu6 estudia su
hermana en aquel libro rojo? 13. Ella aprende la lecci6n de
aritm^tica. 14. Tambien halla diffcil la lecci6n.
^ Note that interrogative que ia distinguished by the accent from rela-
tive que.
38 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
C. Contistese. 1. iViven este hombre y esta mujer en
aquella casa? 2. iTienen ellos dos o tres hijos? 3. iTienen
dos abuelos Juan y Maria? 4. iSon ancianos los abuelos?
5. iSon ricos? 6. iHan tenido que trabajar mucho? 7. iSon
muy ancianos para trabajar mucho? 8. ^Es el abuelo un
hombre fuerte? 9. ^Es la abuela una mujer fuerte? 10. ^Vi-
ven los abuelos en la misma casa? 11. iQu6 lee Juan en
aquelUbro? 12. ^Halla la lecci6n f dcil o diflcil? 13. iYqu6
estudia su hermana en el hbro rojo? 14. ^Halla diflcil la
lecci6n de aritm^tica?
D. Traduzcase, y repUase despitis omitiendo los nombres y
wsan<io aquel por that. 1. You have Uved in that house. 2. I have
read these letters. 3. We have written this exercise. 4. She has
studied this lesson. 5. This student is [aJ] hard worker. 6. That
student is lazy. 7. These men are rich. 8. Those women are not
rich.
E. 1. Two, four, six, eight, ten. 2. One, three, five, seven,
nine. 3. Fifteen, fourteen, thirteen, twelve, eleven. 4. Two and
two are four. 5. Three and three are six. 6. Four and five are nine.
7. Five and ten are fifteen. 8. Six and seven are thirteen.
F. Escribase. 1. Mary, what are you studying in that book?
2. I am reading the grammar lesson in this book. 3. What is John
reading in that red book? 4. He is studying the first Spanish lesson.
5. Do your grandparents five with you (Vds.)? 6. Yes, sir; they
hve in the same white house. 7. Is yoiu- grandfather very old?
8. Yes, sir; he is old and he has worked hard. 9. He is too old to
work much. 10. Om* grandmother reads and writes a great deal.
11. Our father is the son of om- grandparents. 12. The parents of
our mother are not hving now.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
69. Adjetivos demostrativos: . . .
60. El adjetivo demostrativo ese se refiere, por regla general,
a la persona o cosa que estd cerca de la persona a quien se habla.
Aquel se refiere a la persona o cosa que est& mds distante.
LESSON XI 39
a. El adjetivo demostrativo se repite, por regla general, delante
de cada nombre a que se refiere.
61. Pronombres demostrativos: ...
62. Esto, eso y aquello son neutros. Se usan para indicar una
cosa que no se menciona por su nombre o una idea. No pueden
representar nombres, puesto que no hay nombres neutros en espanol.
a. N6tese que los pronombres demostrativos masculinos y femeninos
Be distinguen de los adjetivos demostrativos por llevar el acento escrito.
Los pronombres demostrativos neutros nimca se usan como adjetivos y
en consecuencia no necesitan el acento.
63. Numerales cardinales: . . .
64. — L Uno pierde la -o final del masculine singular cuando
precede al nombre.
2. Uno admite la forma femenina una, pero los demd,s adjetivos
numerales citados s61o tienen ima forma para ambos g^neros.
a. Un lipiz puede traducirse one pencil o a pencil y una pluma puede
traducirse one pen o a pen.
LESSON XI 1
Radical-Changing Verbs
65. Many verbs of the three conjugations change the
radical vowel e to ie, or the radical vowel o to ue, when-
ever the stress falls on the root.
Present Indicative
L Cerrar, io close Contar, to count
Singular Pltjkaii SiNOtriiAR PLUBAii
cierro cerramos cuento contamos
cierras cerrfiis cuentas cont&is
derra cierran cuenta cuentan
» In referring to the lesson, exercise, page (p&gina), etc., either ordinal
numerals or cardinal numerals may be used after decimo, tenth, but the
cardinal numerals are more commonly used; thus: la und^cima Iecci6n or,
more commonly, la leccidn once. Observe that a cardinal numeral thus
used follows its noun.
n. Entender,
, to understand
Singular
Plural
entiendo
entendemos
entiendes
entendeis
entiende
entienden
m. Sentir,
to feel
SiNQULAB
Plural
siento
sentimos
sientes
sentis
siente
sienten
40 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Volver, to return
Singular Plural
vuelvq volvemos
vuelves volveis
vuelve vuelven
Dormir, to sleep
SmaUIiAB PLTTRAIt
duermo dormimos
duermes dormis
duerme duermen
66. Some verbs of the third conjugation change the radical
vowel e to i whenever the stress falls on the root.
Pedir, to as\, as\ for
Singular Plural
pido pedimos
pides pedis
pide piden
a. Note that in the present indicative of radical-changing verbs
the radical vowel does not change in the first and the second persons
plural, since in these forms the stress falls on the inflectional ending
and not on the root.
b. With the exception of the regularly recurring changes in the
radical vowels, the radical-changing verbs are inflected like regular
verbs.
c. There is no rule by which all radical-changing verbs can be
recognized (but see §254). Whenever a verb is radical-changing, this
fact wiU be indicated in the vocabularies, thus: sentir (ie), pedir (i),
dormir (ue). See also the list of verbs in § 282.
EXERCISES
Ana, Anna la biblioteca, library,
bajo, -a, low la cocina, kitchen
el bafio, bath, bathtub * el comedor, dining room
> Bathtub is also called tina del bafio (as in Mezioo) and sometimes
bafiadera (as in Argentina).
LESSON XI 41
el criado, servant, m.; la criada, la pieza, room {in general)
servant, /. el piso, story, floor
^cuSl, cixales?, which? el primo, cousin, m.; la prima,
don,^ Mr.; dona, Mrs. (used be- cousin, /.
fore given names only) qiierer (ie),' to wish, want
el dormitorio, bedroom * la sala, drawing room
el esposo, husband; la esposa, wif e el sobrino, nephew; la sobrina,
la familia, family niece
Fernando, Ferdinand el tio, uncle; la tia, aunt
cuarto de bafio, bathroom; piso alto, upper story or floor; piso bajo
groimd floor
A. Continiiese. 1. Aprendo la lecci6n. 2. No entiendo
la leccion. 3. Toco el piano. 4. Cuento las sillas. 5. Pido
una pluma. 6. He dormido poco.
B. 1. En la famiKa de mi tio Fernando hay cuatro
personas. 2. Estas son: don Fernando; doila Ana, su
esposa; un hijo, Juan; y una hija, Maria. 3. Mis tfos
(§39) tienen tambi^n una criada. 4. Viven en una casa
de ocho piezas. 5. fistas son la sala, la bibliotecaj^ el comedor
y la cocina en el pjsn baja. 6. Y el cuarto de bano. y tres
dormitorios (alcobas) en el piso alto. 7. Todos duermen en el
piso alto. 8. No quieren dormir en el piso bajo^ 9. En la
biblioteca hay muchos Ubros en ingles y en espanol.
10. Nuestro tfo Fernando es hermano de nuestra madra.
11. Juan y Marfa son nuestros primos. 12. Ellos son so-
brinos de nuestros padres.
C. Contestese segun et contexto de B. 1. ^Quienes son don
Fernando y dona Ana? (Don Fernando y dona Ana son
nuestros tios.) 2-3. iQuien es el hijo (iQuien es la hija)
de don Fernando y dona Ana? 4. ^Tienen un criado o
^ Don and dona are much used in Spanish as terms of respect when
addressing or referring to a relative or friend. It is often best not to translate
don or doSa into English.
* A bedroom is also called alcoba (as often in Spain), or rec&mara (as in
Mexico).
* Irregular in some tenses (see §271).
42 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
una criada? 5. iViven en una casa de ocho piezas?
6. iDuermen todos en el piso alto? 7. ^No quieren dormir
en el piso bajo? 8-9. iCudles son las piezas del piso bajo
(del piso alto)? 10. iHay muchos libros en la biblioteca?
11. iSon Vds. sobrinos de don Fernando y dona Ana?
12. iSon Vds. primos de Juan y Marfa?
D. Trad^zcase y repitase despues con ustedes como sujeto del
verbo. 1. We close the window. (Nosotros cerramos la ventana.
Vds. cierran la ventana.) 2. We teach the lesson. 3. We ask for
chalk, 4. We learn the lesson. 5. We understand the lesson.
6. We erase the exercise. 7. We count the books. 8. We work
hard. 9. We sleep little. 10. We do not wish to study.
E. 1. My parents, my two brothers, and I live (vivimos) in a
white house. 2. [It]] is a two-story house (casa de dos pisos).
3. [It] has four rooms on the ground floor and five on the upper
floor. 4. The rooms of the ground floor are the hbrary, the draw-
ing room, the dining room, and the kitchen. 5. On the upper floor
we have four bedrooms and a bathroom. 6. We sleep on the upper
floor. 7. We do not wish to sleep on the ground floor. 8. There
are five persons in our family. 9. We have one servant, but she
does not sleep in our house. 10. My brothers and I have (tenemos)
two cousins, John and Mary. 11. Their father Ferdinand is our
mother's brother. 12* I am [a] nephew of my uncle Ferdinand
and of my aunt Anna.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
66. Muchos verbos de las tres conjugaciones cambian la vocal
radical e en ie, o la o en ue, siempre que el acento pros6dico recaiga
sobre la rafz.
66. Algunos verbos de la tercera conjugaci6n cambian la vocal
radical e en i, siempre que el acento pros6dico recaiga sobre la
rafz.
o. Obs^rvese que en la primera y segunda persona del plural del
presente de indicative la vocal radical no cambia, debido a que el acento
proe6dico no recae sobre la ralz sino sobre la tenninaci6n.
LESSON XII 43
6. Con excepci6n de los cambios constantes en la vocal radical,
estos verbos se conjugan lo mismo que los verbos regulares.
c. No hay regla absoluta para conocer los verbos que cambian su
vocal radical. Siempre que un verbo sufra esta alteraci6n, se indicard
en los vocabularies del modo siguiente: sentir (ie), pedir (i), dormir(ue).
V6ase igualmente la lista de verbos en el§ 282.
LESSON XII
67. Dative Case. — The indirect object^ requires the prep-
osition a, to.
iA quien da ella el libro? To whom does she give the book?
She gives the book to John, or
Ella da el libro a Juan , „. t u xu u i
[ She gives John the book.
Note that the preposition to may be omitted in English if the indirect
object precedes the direct object. The Spanish preposition a cannot
be thus omitted before a noun.
68. Accusative Case. — The direct object does not, as
a rule, require a preposition, but the preposition a is required
before the direct object, ^f the object is a proper nnnrij or
any noun or pronoun^ that denotes a definite person or
personified thing.^
Busco mi libro. I am looking for my book.
But: Busco ^mi padre. - I am looking for my father.
Quiero ver a Madrid. I wish to see Madrid.
a. The preposition a is sometimes placed before the direct object
merely to distinguish the latter from the subject of the verb.
El adjetivo modifica al nombre.' The adjective modifies the noun.
A la guerra sigue la paz. Peace follows war.
> Except the relative pronoun que (dir. obj.), and a personal pronoun
that is the object (dir. or indir.) of a verb and is placed immediately be-
fore or after it.
* Including intelligent animals such as a dog or horse.
• Since in Spanish the subject often follows the verb, the omission of c
in this sentence might cause ambiguity.
44 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
b. The preposition a is usually omitted after tener; and querer a
means to be fond of, to like (a f>erson), and not to udsh or want.
Vd. tiene dos primos. You have two cousins.
iQuiere Vd. a sus primos? Do you like your cousins?
69. A + el is contracted to al.
Buscamos al profesor. We are looking for the teacher.
70. The following adjectives lose the final -o of the
masculine singular when they immediately precede their
noun.
buen(o), -a, good «ii(o), -a, one
mal(o), -a, bad algim(o), -a, some*
primer (o), -a, first ningim(o), -a, none
tercer(o), -a, third
El tercer ejercicio. The third exercise.
But: El tercero. The third (one).
EXERCISES
el amigo, friend, m.; la amiga, el mueble, piece of furniture; los
friend, /. muebles, furniture
el aparador, sideboard pensar (ie), to think, intend
buscar, to seek, look for poder (ue),^ can, to be able
el cuadro, picture recibir, to receive
electrico, -a, electric el silldn {pi., sillones), armchair
la luz ipl., luces), Ught el sofa, sofa
el mes, month visitar, to visit, call on
da, gives; dado, given
A. ContiMese. 1. Busco mi libro. 2. Busco a mi padre.
3. Quiero papel. 4. Quiero mucho a mi madre. 5. No
puedo cerrar la ventana.
B. 1. Mi tfo Fernando es anciano, pero trabaja mucho.
2. Su esposa dona Ana no puede trabajar. 3. EUos no son
rices, pero viven bien. 4. Los muebles de su sala son un
piano, una mesa, un sofd, sillas y sillones, y muchos cuadros.
^ Algfin and ningfln require the accent mark.
2 Irregular in some tenses (§270).
LESSON XII 45
5. Reciben a sus amigos en la sala. 6. En la biblioteca
hay una mesa, un escritorio, dos sillas, algunos sillones y
todos sus libros. 7. Mis tios tienen muchos libros en ingles
pero muy pocos en espanol. 8. En el comedor hay un
aparador, una mesa, sillas y tambien algunos cuadros.
9. Tienen luz electrica en toda la casa. 10. Nosotros tene-
mos luz electrica en nuestra casa tambien. 11, Pienso
visitar a mis tlos y pasar un mes con ellos (them). 12. Quiero
mucho a mis primes Juan y Maria que son muy buenos.
C. Contestese segun el contexto de B. 1. ^Es anciano don
Fernando? 2. ^Trabaja mucho don Fernando? 3. iPuede
trabajar dona Ana? 4. ^Son ricos los tlos? 5. iViven bien
los tlos? 6. iCudles son los muebles de su sala? 7. ^Reciben
a sus amigos en la sala? 8. iCudles son los muebles de la
bibhoteca? 9. ^Tienen los tlos muchos Ubros en ingles?
10. ^Tienen muchos Hbros en espanol? 11. ^Cudles son los
muebles del comedor? 12. ^Tienen los tlos luz electrica en
toda la casa? 13. ^Tienen Vds. tambien luz electrica en su
casa? 14. ^Piensan Vds. visitar a sus tios? 15. iQuieren
Vds. a sus primos?
D. Traduzcase y repitase despues con los verbos en plural.
1. I have looked for my books. (He buscado mis libros. Hemos
buscado nuestros libros.) 2. I have looked for my parents. 3. I
intend to visit Madrid. 4. I intend to visit my cousins. 5. Do you
wish the book? 6. Do you Uke your uncle Ferdinand? 7. He
wishes to speak Spanish. 8. He is writing the first exercise.
9. He is writing the first [onej 10. Does the adjective modify
the noim? 11. She receives many letters in Spanish. 12. She
receives her friends in the drawing room. 13. Have you electric
Ught in your house? 14. Have you many cousins? 15. Do you
intend to spend a month with your uncle and aunt (§39)? 16. I
have Uttle furniture (= few pieces of furniture).
E. 1. In my parents' house there is electric Ught in all the
rooms. 2. My uncle and aunt have electric light in their house
46 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
too. 3. We can read very well with the electric light in the library.
4. Our Ubrary has armchairs, a writing desk, and many good books.
5. The drawing room has many pictures and many chairs, a piano,
a sofa, and two tables. 6. My mother receives all her friends (/.)
in the drawing room. 7. My brothers and I receive (recibimos)
our friends in the Ubrary. 8. Our dining room has a table and
chairs, a sideboard, and some pictures. 9. We have Uttle fur-
niture, but it-is (son) good. 10. There is much furniture in my
uncle Ferdinand's house. 11. I intend to spend a month with
my cousins John and Mary. 12. My parents are very fond of
(qmeren mucho) their nephew and niece (§39). 13. John and
Mary like my parents too. 14. My father has given my cousins
many good books.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
67. £1 complemento indirecto (caso dativo) requiere la pre-
posici6n a (excepto delante de los pronombres me, te, etc.).
En ingl6s puede suprimirse la preposici6n to del complemento indirecto
si 68te precede al complemento directo. En espanol no puede hacerse
esta supresi6n delante del nombre.
68. El complemento directo (caso acusativo), por regla general,
no requiere preposici6n. Pero se emplea la preposici6n a con el
complemento directo si 6ste es un nombre propio, o cualquier nombre
o pronombre (excepto que y me, te, etc.) que exprese una persona
determinada o cosa personificada.
a. Algunaa veces la preposici6n a precede al complemento directo
solamente para distingxiir a ^te del sujeto del verbo.
h. La preposici6n a se suprime generalmente despu^ del verbo
tener ; y querer a significa to he fond of, to like, y no to wish o want.
69. La preposici6n a y el articulo el se contraen en la forma al.
70. Los siguientes adjetivos pierden la -o final del mascu-
lino singular cuando preceden inmediatamente al nombre que
califican: . . .
LESSON XIII 47
LESSON XIII
Present Indicative of Estar, to he
SiNGULAB Plural
estoy estamos
est&s estiis
est& est&n
72. Estar, to he, is used instead of ser, to he:
1. To express position.
2. To express an accidental or temporary condition.*
1. Mi padre estS en Chile. My father is in Chile.
Madrid estfi en Espafia. Madrid is in Spain.
2. Juan esta cansado. John is tired.
Maria esta enfenna. Mary is ill.
Las s&banas estfin limpias. The sheets are clean.
73. Some adjectives have one meaning when used with
ser, and another meaning when used with estar.
ser bueno, to be good ser male, to be bad
estar bueno, to be well estar male, to be ill
74. Omission of the Indefinite Article. — 1. The indefi-
nite article is usually omitted before an unquaUfied predicate
noun.
Mi padre es medico. My father is a physician.
Mi tio es abogado. My imcle is a lawyer.
Nuestro amigo es espafiol. Our friend is a Spaniard.
2. The indefinite article is not used with otro, other,
another.
otro libro, another book el otro libro, the other book
* This rule has many apparent exceptions, thus: #1 es joven, he is young.
Youth is, in a sense, temporary, but it is after all relatively permanent aa
compared with illness or fatigue.
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
EXERCISES
el abogado, lawyer el espejo, mirror, looking-glasa
la almohada, pillow la frazada,' blanket
la cama, bed la funda de almohada, pillowcase
cansado, -a, tired la lana^ wool; de lana, woollen
la c6moda, chest of drawers, llmpio, -a, clean
" chiffonier " el medico, physician, doctor
cuando (interrog., ctxfindo), la pared, wall
when la s&bana, sheet
el cuarto, room^ el tocador, dressing table, "dresser"
enfermo, -a, ill, sick la verdad, truth
en casa, at home; en casa de im amigo, at a friend's; ^no es verdad?
o ^verdad? is it not true? isn't it so?
A. Contin-dese. 1. No soy joven. 2. No soy medico.
3. Estoy en casa. 4. Estoy cansado, -a. 5. No soy malo, -a.
6. No tengo otra cama.
B. 1. Mi primo Juan tiene una buena (fine) cama en su
cuarto. 2. Las fundas de almohada y las sdbanas estdn
limpias y blancas. 3. Las frazadas (mantas) son de lana.
4. Juan duerme muy bien en esta cama cuando estd can-
sado. 5. Los otros muebles de su cuarto son un tocador con
un buen espejo, una c6moda, una mesa y algunas sillas.
6. Hay tambi^n algunos cuadros'en las paredes. 7. Juan
no estd ahora en casa. 8. Estd en casa de un amigo que
estd enfermo. 9. Este amigo es abogado. 10. Cuando el
abogado estd bueno, trabaja mucho. 11. Pero cuando estd
enfermo, no puede trabajar. 12. Juan quiere mucho a su
amigo el abogado.
C. Contestese seffdn el contexto de B. 1. ^Tiene Juan ima
buena cama? 2. ^Estdn limpias y blancas las sdbanas?
3. iEstd-n limpias y blancas las fundas de almohada? 4. iSon
de lana las frazadas (mantas)? 5. Juan duerme bien en
esta cama, ^no es verdad? 6. iCudles son los otros muebles
^ Note the many words for room. ' Ox manta (de cama).
I
LESSON XIII 49
del cuarto? 7. iTiene el tocador un buen espejo? 8. lEsti
Juan ahora en casa? 9. Estd en casa de un amigo, iverdad?
10. iEstd, bueno o malo el amigo de Juan? 11. ^Es este
amigo medico o abogado? 12. Juan quiere mucho a su
amigo, ino es verdad?
D. 1. Is John lazy? 2. Is John ill? 3. Mary is good.
4. Mary is well, is she not? (ino es verdad?) 5. The blankets
are red. 6. Are the blankets woolen? 7. Are the blankets clean?
8. My uncle is old. 9. My uncle is not well. 10. His father is a
physician, isn't he? 11. No, sir; he is a lawyer. 12. Haven't you
another pillow? 13. This pillowcase is not clean. 14. I have
another pillowcase.
E. 1. I have one friend who is a physician and another who is
a lawyer. 2. The physician is an EngUshman and the lawyer is a
Spaniard. 3. My brother likes the lawyer, but he does not like the
physician. 4. When my brother is ill, he does not want that (ese)
physician. 5. My brother is not now at home; he is at the lawyer's
(house). 6. Our bedroom is on the upper floor of the house.
7. We have two fine beds with clean, white sheets (= with sheets
clean and white). 8. The pillowcases are also clean and white, but
the woolen blankets are red. 9. When we are tired, we sleep well
in these beds. 10. Our dressing table has a good mirror. 11. We
have two chests of drawers (" chiffoniers ") also and some fine
pictures on the walls. 12. There are also some books and a writing
desk in our room.
KESUMEN GRAMATICAL
72. Estar y ser. — El verbo estar se usa en lugar de ser:
1. Para expresar situacion.
2. Para expresar una condici6n accidental o temporal.
73. Algunos adjetivos cambian de significado segun sean usados
con el verbo ser o con estar.
74. Supresidn del articulo indeterminado. — 1. Por regla gene-
ral se suprime el articulo indeterminado delante del nombre predi-
cado (o atributo) no caUficado.
2. El articulo indeterminado no se usa con otro.
50 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
LESSON XIV
75. Personal Pronouns. — The following personal pro-
nouns are used as objects of verbs:
Singular Plural
me, me, to me nos, us, to ua
te, thee, to thee os, you, to you
Te corresponds to tH and os to vosotros, -as.
76. The personal pronoun objects usually precede their
verb (but see §194).
Me busca. He seeks me.
„,,,., J He gives me the book, or
Me da el libro. \ ^ ■ xu u i x
[ He gives the book to me.
77. Reflexive Verbs. — 1. The pronouns given above
may also be used as reflexives. The reflexive pronoun of
the third person, singular or plural, is se.
yo me engaiio, I deceive myself
tfi te enga&as, thou deceivest thyself
usted 1 I you deceive yourself
el \ se engaila \ he deceives himself
ella J \ she deceives herself
nosotros (-as) nos engaflamos, we deceive ourselves
vosotros (-as) os engafl^s, ye deceive yourselves
ustedes 1 f you deceive yourselves
ellos \ se engaflan Wi. j • ^i. i
„ they deceive themselves
2. Many verbs are used reflexively in Spanish, but not
in English:
Me acuesto, I go to bed. Me desayimo, I (have) breakfast.
Me levanto, I get up, rise. Me equivoco, I am mistaken.
All the verbs given above are in the first conjugation.
3. If the subject is inanimate, the reflexive construction
is generally preferred in Spanish to the passive voice.
La casa se calienta per vapor. The house is warmed by steam.
Aqu! se habla espafiol. Spanish is spoken here.
I
LESSON XIV 61
78. Hours of the Day
Es la una, it is one (o'clock).
A la una, at one (o'clock).
Son las dos, it is two (o'clock).
A las tres y media, at half -past three (o'clock).
A las cuatro y cuarto, at a quarter past four (o'clock).
A las cinco menos cuarto, at a quarter to five (o'clock) .*^
A las doce y diez (minutos), at ten minutes past twelve (o'clock), at
twelve ten.
A las ocho de la mafiana, at eight (o'clock) in the morning (or, a.m.),
A las tres de la tarde, at three (o'clock) in the afternoon (or, p.m.).
A las once de la noche, at eleven (o'clock) at night {or, p.m.).
lQn% hora es? what time is it? what o'clock is it?
a. La tma agrees with hora understood, and las dos, las tres, etc.,
agree with horas. Media (half) is an adjective and agrees with hora,
while cuarto {quarter, fourth) is a noun and therefore does not agree.
EXERCISES
el aire, air el dia,* day
almorzar (ue), to lunch ^ la hora, hour
aqui, here la mafiana, morning
calentar (ie), to warm, heat la noche, night
-caliente, warm, hot producir, to produce, create
el calor, warmth, heat quemar, to burn
el calorifero central, furnace ' el s6tano, basement
el carb6n de piedra,'* coal la tarde, afternoon
cenar, to sup, have supper . el vapor, steam
comer, to eat, dine
A. Continuese. 1. Yo me levanto a las seis^ 2. Yo me
desayuno a las siete y media. 3. Yo almuerzo a la una.
— — - * •«-
> One hears also : a un cuarto para las cinco, or a las cuatro y tres cuartos.
' In Spain and Spanish America, it is customary to have a light break-
fast (desayunarse) in the morning, to dine (comer) at noon, and have
supper (cenar) in the evening. But in the large cities it is now becoming
customary to lunch (almorzar) at noon and to dine (comer) in the evening.
» Or estufa central.
« Literally stone coal. It is also called carbon mineral. Bituminous or
soft coal is huUa. Charcoal is carbon vegetal or carb&n de lefLa.
^ Dia, day, though ending in -a, is masculine.
52 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
4. Yo como a las siete. 5. Yo me acuesto a las diez. 6. Yo
me equivoco.
B. 1. Mi tfo Fernando tiene un calorffero central en el
s6tano de su casa. 2. En este calorffero se quema carb6n
de piedra. 3. Con el calor que se produce se calienta toda
la casa. 4. La casa se calienta por vapor. 5. Tambi^n se
calienta por vapor la casa de otro tfo mfo {of mine), si no
me equivoco. 6. Se equivoca Vd.; la casa se calienta por
aire caliente. 7. En nuestra casa nos levantamos todos a las
siete de la manana. 8. Nos desayimamos a las ocho. 9. A
las doce y media almorzamos, y comemos a las seis y media.
10. Pero mis tfos y mis primos comen a las doce y cenan a las
seis. 11. Nos acostamos a las once de la noche. 12. Nos
acostamos a las diez si estamos cansados.
C. Cont4stese seg^n el contexto de B. 1. ^Que tiene don Fer-
nando en el sotano de su casa? 2. iQu6 se quema en el
calorffero? 3. ^Se produce mucho calor? 4. iSe calienta
toda la casa? 5. ^Se calienta por vapor? 6. ^Se calienta
por aire caliente? 7. ^No se equivoca Vd.? 8. ^A qu6
hora se acuestan Yds.? 9. ^A qu6 hora se levantan Yds.?
10. ^A qu6 hora se desayunan Yds.? 11. i A qu6 hora
almuerzan Yds.? 12. ^A qu6 hora comen Yds.? 13. ^Al-
muerzan o comen los tfos a la una? 14. ^Comen o cenan
a las seis?
D. Trad'dzcase, y repUase despuis negativamente. 1. He teaches
me. (£l me enseila. El no me ensefla.) 2. They like me. 3. She
seeks us. 4. Spanish is spoken here.^ 5. Enghsh is spoken here.^
6. You are mistaken. 7. Coal is burned.^ 8. Heat is created.*
9. The house is warmed.* 10. I rise at five o'clock. 11. We
go to bed at eight, 12. It is twelve o'clock.
E. 1. I go to bed at nine o'clock and get up at six. 2. My
father goes to bed at ten o'clock and gets up at half-past six.
» Place the subject after the verb. Note how often the subject may
follow the verb in Spanish even in an afiBrmative sentence.
^ LESSON XIV 53
3. We breakfast at seven o'clock or at a quarter past seven, 4. We
lunch at half-past twelve and dine at half-past six. 5. When we
are at the table, we speak Spanish. 6. My cousins dine at twelve
o'clock and have supper at six. 7. There is a good furnace in the
basement of my father's house. 8. Coal is burned in the furnace.
9. The house is warmed by steam. 10. My uncle Ferdinand's
house is warmed with (por) air. 11. I cannot study when the air
is (estfi) very warm. 12. I cannot sleep well if the air of my
bedroom is warm. ^
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
75. Pronombres personales. — Los siguientes pronombres per-
sonales se usan como complementos (objetos) de verbo: me, te,
nos, OS.
76. Los pronombres personales usados como complementos, por
regla general preceden al verbo (pero v^ase el § 194).
77. Verbos reflexivos. — 1. Los pronombres citados arriba se
usan tambi^n como reflexivos. El pronombre reflexivo de tercera
persona, singular o plural, es se.
2. Muchos verbos que en espanol son reflexivos no lo son en
ingles.
3. Cuando el sujeto de la oraci6n es un ser inanimado se prefiere
en espanol la forma reflexiva a la pasiva.
78. Horas del dia : . . .
a. La una concuerda con la palabra hora sobrentendida, y las dos,
las tres, etc., concuerdan con boras. Media es adjetivo y concuerda
con hora, mientras que cuarto es substantive y por consiguiente no
concuerda.
54
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
LESSON XV
79. Personal Pronouns. — 1. The personal pronouns of
the third person used as objects of verbs are:
DIRECT OBJECT
SiNQ. le, him
la, her, it
lo, it 1
Pl.
los
las
them
INDIRECT OBJECT
{him, to him
her, to her
it, to it
les, them, to them
Busco la carta.
La busco.
Busco las cartas.
Las busco.
Busco el libro.
Lo busco.
Busco los libros.
Los busco.
Busco al profesor.
Le busco.
I seek the
I seek
I seek the
I seek
I seek the
I seek
I seek the
I seek
I seek the
I seek
letter.
it.
letters.
them.
book.
it.
books.
them.
teacher.
him.
Note that la, las, and los are used both as articles and as object
pronouns, but that the article el differs in form from the corresponding
object pronouns le and lo.
2. All the pronouns given above serve also as the object
pronouns corresponding to usted and ustedes.
Le busco.
La busco.
Los busco.
Las busco.
Le da el libro.
Les da el libro.
I seek him or you, m. sing.
I seek her or you, /. sing.
I seek them or you, to. pl.
I seek them or you, /. fl.
He gives him, her, or you the book.
He gives them or you the book.
> Lo is also used with the meaning of him or you (m.), but le is generally
considered preferable.
LESSON XV
55
I
3. English it (dir. obj.) is expressed in Spanish by la when
it refers to a feminine noun, and by lo when it refers either
to a mascuhne noun or to a mere idea or statement.
Tengo la pluma.
La tengo.
Tengo el libro.
Lo tengo.
Creo eso.
Lo creo.
I have the pen.
I have it.
I have the book.
I have it.
I believe that.
I beUeve it.
EXERCISES
asar, to roast
la baterfa de cocina/ kitchen
utensils
la came, meat
la cazuela, pan
cocer (ue), to bake, boil (food)
la cocina econ6mica,^ kitchen
stove, range
el cocinero, o la cocinera, cook
la comida, food, meal, dinner
creer, to believe
fregar (ie), to scour
guisar,' to cook
el homo, oven
la olla, pot
el pan, bread
preparar, to prepare
sabroso, -a, savory; ser (estar)
sabroso, to taste good
hay . . . que, there is (are) to; eso no me gusta, I do not Uke that
or that does not please me; nos gustan estos cuadros, we like these
pictures or these pictures please us.
A. Continuese. 1. No me (te, le, etc.) gusta esta casa.
2. No me gustan los muebles. 3. Don Juan me ensena.
4. Me da lecciones de espanol. 5. Mi (tu, su, etc.) tfo me
(te, le, etc.) busca. 6. Yo no guiso la comida.
B. 1. Nuestra cocinera guisa la comida en la cocina
econ6mica. 2. La comida que guisa es muy sabrosa.
> Or trastos de cocina.
» A modern, iron cooking stove or range is usually called a cocina econ6mica
or merely an economica. In some places it is also called estufa. Many
Spaniards and Spanish Americans still cook over openings in the top of
stone benches or shelves, in which charcoal is burned, or over open fireplaces.
Either one is usually called fogdn.
• Alao cocinar.
56 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
3. El pan que cuece en el homo es muy bueno. 4. Y me
gusta mucho la carne que asa en el horno o que cuece en una
oUa. 5. Esta mujer tiene que trabajar mucho en la cocma.
6. Tiene que preparar las comidas y fregar la baterla de
cocina. 7. Hay ollas y cazuelas que fregar. 8. Creo que le
gusta trabajar en la cocina. 9. Le gusta guisar; no le gusta
fregar las ollas y las cazuelas. 10. Pero no es perezosa y
la baterfa de cocina estd siempre muy limpia.
C. ConUstese seg^n el corUexto deB. 1. iQui^n prepara las
comidas? 2. ^En qu6 se guisa la comida? 3. ^En qu6 se
cuece el pan? 4. ^En qu6 se asa la carne? 5. ^En qu4 se
cuece la carne? 6. iQui^n friega la bateria de cocina?
7. iQue friega la mujer? 8. ^Trabaja mucho la cocinera?
9. iLe gusta guisar la comida? 10. ^Le gusta fregar las
ollas? 11. iLe gusta a Vd. (Do you like) guisar? 12. ^Le
gusta a Vd. fregar las ollas y las cazuelas?
D. Traduzcase, y repitase despues, usando el pronombre per-
sonal que corresponda en lugar del uUimo nombre de coda frase
I. We prepare the meals. (Preparamos las comidas. Las prepa-
ramos.) 2. We roast the meat. 3. We bake the bread. 4. We
scour the pans. 5. I am looking-for John. 6. I am looking-for
Mary. 7. He gives the chair to John. 8. He gives the books to
Mary. 9. He gives the letters to the men. 10. I do not Uke
Dona Ana. (No me gusta doiLa Ana. Ella no me gusta.)
II. Do you like Don Fernando? 12. We like the teachers.
E. 1. Dona Ana's cook is a Uttle lazy, and her pots and pans
are not always clean. 2. She likes to cook the food, but she does
not like to scour the kitchen utensils. 3. And in a kitchen there
are many utensils (trastos) to scour. 4. The cook has to work hard
in order to prepare three meals. 5. She bakes the bread in the oven
of the stove. 6. She roasts the meat in the oven, or she boils it
in a pot. 7. The food that she cooks always tastes good. 8. Do
you like to bake bread and roast meat? 9. No, sir; I do not like
to cook; but I am very fond of reading (me gusta mucho leer)
books. 10. I like the library of our house, but I do not like the
LESSON XVI 57
kitchen. 11. You like the dining room of your house, do you not?
(ino es verdad?) 12. Yes, I do like [lij, but I do not like to prepare
the meals.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
79. Pronombres personales. — 1. Los pronombres personales
de la tercera persona usados como complementos verbales son: le,
la, lo, los y las para el complemento directo (o caso acusativo) y
le y les para el complemento indirecto (o caso dativo).
N6tese que las fonnas la, las y los se usan como artlculos y tambi^n
como pronombres complementarios; en cuanto al artlculo el es de
forma diferente de los pronombres complementarios correspondientes
le y lo.
2. Todos los pronombres citados arriba hacen las veces de pro-
nombres complementarios correspondientes a usted y ustedes.
3. El pronombre ingles it (complemento directo) se expresa en
espanol por la cuando se refiere a un nombre del g^nero femenino,
y por lo cuando se refiere a un nombre del g^nero masculino o a
una idea o manifestaci6n.
LESSON XVI
80. Personal Pronouns. — 1. When a verb has two
personal pronoun objects, the indirect object precedes the
direct.
Me lo da. He gives it to me.
Te los da. He gives them to thee.
Nos la da. He gives it to us.
Os las da. He gives them to you.
2. If both pronouns are in the third person, se is used as
the indirect object instead of le or les. Although alike in
form, this se and the reflexive se are different words.
Se lo da. He gives it to him, her,
it, them, or you.
Note that in this sentence se has all possible meanings of both le
(ind. ohj.) and les.
58 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
81. Prepositional Forms of the Personal Pronouns.—
The personal pronouns governed by a preposition are the
same in form as the subject pronouns, except that mi and ti
are used instead of yo and tti. Si is the prepositional form
of se.
para ml, for me para nosotros, -as, for us
" ti, " thee ** vosotros, -as, " you
" usted, " you " ustedes, " you
" 61. " him, it \ „ „ ,, ^,
" eUa, " her, it / ^"°^' -*^' '^^
para si, for himself, herself, etc.
a. Mf, me, is distinguished from mi, my, and the reflexive si is
distinguished from si, if, by the accent mark.
82. When a personal pronoun is the object of a verb, the
meaning may be made clear or emphatic by adding a ml,
a ti, etc.
Me gusta a mf . I like it.
Le gusta a ella. She likes it.
Se lo da a el. He gives it to him.
Se lo da a Vd. He gives it to you.
a. One may say with still more emphasis on the pronoim: A mf me
gusta, etc.
b. With a noun the corresponding personal pronoun object is often
used thus even though it is not required to make the meaning clear or
emphatic: le gusta a Juan, John likes it; se lo da a Marfa, he gives it
to Mary.
83. The definite article with de 61, de ella, etc., may be
used instead of su, to make the meaning clear or emphatic.
Su libro, o el libro de 61. His bi
Su casa, o la casa de ella. H^^ouse.
Su cuarto, o el cuarto de Vd. Your room.
Su padre, o el padre de ellos. Their father.
a. With these expressions, compare el libro de Juan, John's book;
la casa de Marfa, Mary's house.
LESSON XVI 59
EXERCISES
el almuerzo, lunch, heavy break- el desayuno, (light) breakfast
fast despues de, prep., after
el cafe, coffee Espaila, /., Spain
el campo, country {as distin- el ganadero, cattle raiser
guished from the city)', los el habitante, inhabitant
campos, fields el hacendado, planter
la cena, supper el labrador, farm laborer *
la ciudad, city, large town la leche, milk
^cuanto? how much? ^cuan- la mantequilla, butter *
tos? how many? la 6pera, opera
cultivar, to cultivate el teatro, theater
el chocolate, chocolate
una vez, once; dos veces, twice; tres veces, three times; algunas
veces, sometimes; en vez de, instead of; al dia, daily
A. Continuese. 1. Me ensena la leccion. 2, Me la en-
sena. 3. A ml me da el libro. 4. Me lo da a ml. 5. A ml
no me gusta el campo. 6. Hay una carta para ml. 7. El
profesor tiene mi cuaderno. 8. Mi hermano tiene mi gra-
mdtica.
B. 1. En Espana los habitantes de las ciudades hacen
(have) tres comidas al dla: el desayuno, el almuerzo, y la
comida o la cena. 2. Se desayunan a las ocho de la manana,
y toman a esta hora cafe con leche,^ pan y mantequilla
(manteca). 3. Muchos toman- chocolate en vez de cafe.
4. Almuerzan a la una y comen a las siete o las siete y
media. 5. Algunas veces cenan despues del teatro o la
6pera. 6. Los hacendados y los ganaderos comen a las doce
o la una y cenan a las seis o las siete. 7. Los labradores
tienen que trabajar mucho para cultivar los campos. 8. Se
levantan a las cinco de la maiiana y se acuestan a las ocho
» A plantation is una hacienda or, in Argentina, una estancia. In Mexico
farm and farmer are rancho and ranchero and a laborer is un jomalero.
' In Spanish America butter is mantequilla and lard is manteca. In most
of Spain, however, butter is manteca (de vaca) and lard ia manteca de cerdo.
* Cafe con leche, a mixture of coSee and hot milk.
60 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
o nueve de la noche. 9. A ml me gusta mucho el campo,
pero a mi hermano no le gusta. 10. iLe gusta a Vd. el
campo? 11. — Sf, seilor; me gusta mucho.
C. ConUstese seg^n el contexto de B. 1. iCudntas comidas al
dfa hacen los habitantes de las ciudades? 2. ^Cudles son
estas comidas? 3. iA qu6 hora se desayunan? 4. iQu6
toman a esta hora? 5. iA qu6 hora almuerzan? 6. iA
qu6 hora comen? 7. iCudndo cenan? 8. iTrabajan mucho
los labradores? 9. ^A qu6 hora se levantan? 10. iA qu^
hora comen? 11. I A qu6 hora cenan? 12. ^A qu^ hora se
acuestan? 13. ^Le gusta a Vd. el campo? 14. ^Le gusta a
su hermano?
D. 1. He has her book. 2. She has his book. 3. I have your
grammar. 4. Have you my gramjnar? 5. We have limch (=. We
lunch) at half-past twelve. 6. We have dinner (= We dine) at seven
o'clock. 7. We go to bed at ten. 8. We get up at seven. 9. He
gives the paper to me: he gives it to me. 10. He does not give
the chairs to you: he does not give them to you. 11. She teaches
me arithmetic: she teaches me it. 12. She prepares for me (me
prepara) a good lunch. 13. I like the country, but you do not
like it. 14. Mary likes the country, but John does not like it.
E. 1. Ferdinand, is your father a planter? 2. No, sir; he is a
lawyer and lives in this city. 3. Does yoiur father like the coimtry?
4. Yes, sir; he likes the country, and he likes the city too. 5. Do
the cattle raisers and the planters have to work hard? 6. The farm
laborers must work hard in order to cultivate the fields. 7. When
(ik qu6 hora) do the planters have dinner? 8. They have dinner
at twelve o'clock and supper at six in the evening. 9. In the city
we have dinner at seven o'clock at night. 10. Sometimes we have
supper after the opera or theater. 11. If we take supper, we have
(hacemos) four meals. 12. For breakfast (Para el desayuno) we
take coffee and milk and bread and butter. 13. In Spain many
people (personas) take chocolate instead of coffee. 14. In our
family we all like (a todos nos gusta) to take coffee if it is not very
Btrong (cargado).
LESSON XVI 61
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
80. Pronombres personales. — 1. Cuando el verbo tiene doa
complementos pronominales, el pronombre complemento indirecto
precede al pronombre complemento directo.
2. Si ambos pronombres son de la tercera persona, se usa el
pronombre se en lugar de los complementos indirectos le o les.
Aunque este se tiene la misma forma que el pronombre reflexivo
se, son dos palabraa distintas.
81. Formas preposicionales (o terminales) de los pronombres
personales. — Cuando los pronombres personales van regidos de
una preposici6n tienen la misma forma que cuando son sujetos del
verbo, exceptuando las formas mi y ti que se usan en vez de yo y
tu. Si es la forma preposicional de se.
a. Mi, pronombre personal, se distingue de mi, adjetivo posesivo,
y la forma reflexiva si se distingue de la conjunci6n si, por el acento
escrito que llevan.
82. Cuando un pronombre personal es complemento verbal, su
significado puede aclararse o hacerse enfdtico anadiendo las ex-
presiones a mi, a ti, etc.
a. La expresi6n es aim mds enfdtica si a mi, a ti, etc., preceden al
verbo.
6. Con un nombre, el pronombre personal complementario corres-
pondiente se usa a menudo de esta manera, axmque no se requiera
para aclarar o hacer enfdtico el significado.
83. En lugar del adjetivo posesivo su, se puede emplear el artfculo
determinado y las expresiones de el, de ella, etc., lo que da mayor
claridad y 6nfasis a la frase.
62 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
LESSON XVII
84. Commands. — 1. To express a direct command with
usted or ustedes as subject, the following forms of the reg-
ular verbs are used:
Singular Plural
I. Hablar : hable Vd. hablen Vds. speak
II. Aprender : aprenda Vd. aprendan Vds. learn .
III. Vivir : viva Vd. vivan Vds. live
2. Radical-changing verbs change e to ie or i, and o to
ue, as in the third person of the present indicative.
Singular
Plural
Cerrar:
cierre Vd.
cierren Vds.
close
Pedir:
pida Vd.
pidan Vds.
ask (for)
Volver:
vuelva Vd.
vuelvan Vds.
return
Some irregular verbs:
-
Singular
Plural
Dar:
de 1 Vd.
den Vds.
give
Hacer :
haga Vd.
hagan Vds.
do
Tener:
tenga Vd.
tengan Vds.
have
Traer:
traiga Vd.
traigan Vds.
bring
a. Usted or ustedes is usually expressed once in a command as in
the examples given above, but not repeated.
Preparen Vds. la segunda leccidn Prepare the second lesson and
y repasen la primera. review the first.
85. — 1. Personal pronoun objects precede the verb in a
negative command, according to the general rule for the
position of these pronouns (§194).
No me de Vd. ese libro. Do not give me that book.
No me lo de Vd. Do not give it to me.
2. In an affirmative command the personal pronoun ob-
jects follow the verb and are attached to it so that the verb
and the pronoun or pronouns form one word.
Deme Vd. ese libro. Give me that book.
Demelo Vd. Give it to me.
» Note the accent which distinguishes this word from the preposition de.
LESSON XVII 63
a. When a pronoun is thus attached to one of these verb forma
having two or more syllables, the verb requires the accent mark.
Compare traiga, bring, with traigame, bring me.
86. — 1. Vamos (from ir, to go), used in commands, means
let us go.
Vamos a la escuela. Let us go to school.
Vamos a trabajar. Let us go to work.
2. When followed by an infinitive, vamos a often means
no more than let us.
Vamos a hablar con el. Let us speak with him.
Vamos a estudiar la leccion. Let us study the lesson.
87. Cardinal Numerals
diez y siete, seventeen veintidos, twenty-two
diez y ocho, eighteen veintitres, twenty-three
diez y nueve, nineteen veinticuatro, twenty-four
veinte, twenty veinticiiico, twenty-five
veintiim(o), -a,i twenty-one
EXERCISES
la cuchara, spoon el mozo, waiter '
el cuchillo, knife nuevo, -a, new
donde {interrog. d6nde), where el plato, plate
en seguida, then (= next) repasar, to review
entrar en,^ to enter, go in (to), repetir (i), to repeat
come in (to) el restaurant,* restaurant
escuchar, to listen (to) - sentar (ie), to seat; me siento,
hoy, to-day I seat myself, sit (down)
la lista, list, bill of fare la servilleta, napkin
el mantel, tablecloth sobre, on, upon
manana, adv., to-morrow el tenedor, fork
mientras, while el vaso, (drinking-) glass
hagame Vd. el favor de estudiar, please study; ^ prestar atenci6n,
to pay attention
1 See page 209, footnote 1. ^ Entrar a is also in common use.
» The waiter is sometimes called camarero. Mozo is also used to desig-
nate a servant boy, a street porter, etc.
* As restaurant is a French word, the final t is not pronounced.
^ Hagame Vd. el favor is more emphatic than the English please and ia
used less often.
64 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
A. 1. El profesor dice (says) a los alumnos: Escuchen Vds.
bien. 2. Esta leccion es muy diffcil. 3, Fernando, Vd. no
presta atenci6n. Cierre su libro. 4. Pasen Vds. a la pizarra
y escriban el ejercicio diez y siete. 5. Juan, lea Vd. la pri-
mera frase del ejercicio. 6. No le entiendo a Vd. : repftala.
7. jEstd bien! Borre Vd. la frase y si^ntese. 8. Borren
Vds. el ejercicio y si^ntense. 9. Preparen para manana la
lecci6n diez y ocho. 10. Y repasen tambi^n la lecci6n de hoy.
11. Hdganme Vds. el favor de aprender bien la nueva
lecci6n.
B. 1 . Mi amigo y yo entramos en el restaurant y nos sen ta-
mos a una mesa. 2. El mozo nos da la lista. 3. Mientraslee-
mos la lista, el mozo pone (puts) sobre la mesa un mantel
bianco. 4. Nos trae en seguida platos, vasos, cuchillos, tene-
dores y cucharas. 5. Mozo, le digo (sat/), trdiganos Vd. dos
servilletas tambi^n.
C. ConUstese segiin el contexto de A y'B. 1. iQu6 les dice el
profesor a los alumnos (§82, b) ? 2. iQu6 le dice a Fernando?
3. iQu6 les dice en seguida a todos los alumnos? 4. iQu6 le
dice a Juan? 5. A todos los alumnos, ^qu^ les dice? 6. iQu6
lecci6n tienen que preparar los alumnos para manana?
7. iQu6 lecci6n tienen que rcpasar? 8. iQui^nes entran en
el restaurant? 9. ^Donde se sientan Vds? 10. iQui^n les
da a Vds. la lista? 11. ^Leen Vds. la lista? 12. lQ,u6 pone
el mozo sobre la mesa? 13. iQu6 les trae a Vds. en seguida?
14. iQu6 dice Vd. al.mozo?
D. 1. Let us repeat the lesson. 2. Let us prepare the new
lesson. 3. Let us write the twentieth exercise.
Traduzcase y repitase despues negativamente. 4. Ferdinand,
go to the blackboard. 5. Write the exercise. 6. Write it with
chalk. 7. Now erase it. 8. Prepare (pi.) the twenty-first lesson
(la lecci6n veintiuna). 9. Prepare it for to-morrow. 10. Please
prepare this lesson {neg.: H&ganme Vds. el favor de no prepa-
rar, etc.).
I
LESSON xvn 65
Repltase, con el pronombre personal correspondiente en vez del
nombre. 11. He enters (into) the restaurant. 12. He says to the
waiter: Give me the bill of fare. 13. Bring me a napkin. 14. Do
not bring me the napkin to-morrow.
E. 1. Please {pi.) close your books and listen. 2. John and
Ferdinand, [please] go to the blackboard and write to-day's exer-
cise. 3. Write all the sentences and then read them to the class.
4. John, repeat your sentences; you do not read well. 5. Now
underhne {pi.) the mistakes and take your seats (= sit down).
6. Prepare for to-morrow the twenty-first lesson with the twenty-
first exercise. 7. Please prepare well all the new lesson. 8. Let
us dine in this restaurant. 9. Very well! I like this restaurant.
10. Here they cook the meals well {say: well the meals) always.
11. The tablecloths, the napkins, and the plates are always clean.
12. Waiter, give us the bill of fare. 13. Please bring us the bill of
fare. 14. While we are reading it, the waiter brings us glasses,
knives, forks, and spoons.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
84. Ezpresiones de mando. — 1. Las formas de los verboa
regulares empleadas en expresiones de mando con usted y ustedes
son: ... V
2. Los verbos que sufren cambios constantes en su rafz cam-
bian la vocal radical e en ie o i, y o en ue, como lo hacen en la
tercera persona del presente de indicativo.
c. El pronombre usted o ustedes se expresa una sola vez, per regla
general, en una expresi6n de mando, y no se repite.
85. — 1. Los pronombres personales complementarios preceden
al verbo en las frases prohibitivas, segun la regla general para la
colocaci6n de estos pronombres (§194).
2. En las expresiones de mando afirmativas los pronombres
personales complementarios siguen al verbo al cual estdn unidos,
formando asf una sola palabra.
a. Cuando al verbo de dos o mds silabas se afiade un pronombre, el
verbo requiere el acento escrito.
66 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
86. — 1. Vamos (del verbo ir) en expresiones de mando se tra-
duce al ingMs por let us go.
2. Cuando la expresi6n vamos a va seguida de iin infiniiivo,
muchas veces no significa mds que let iis.
LESSON xvin
88. Infinitives. — 1. Some verbs require a preposition
before a subordinate infinitive, but many do not.
Juan aprende a leer. John is learning to read.
Empieza a escribir. He is beginning to write.
Me ensena a hablar espafiol. He teaches me to speak Spanish.
Tratamos de estudiar. We try to study.
No pienso entrar. I do not intend to go in.
No quiero almorzar. I do not wi^h to breakfast.
iPrefiere Vd. tomar cafe? Do you prefer to take coffee?
iPuede Vd. hacerlo? Can you do it?
For a list of these verbs, see §283.
2. Personal pronoun objects follow an infinitive and are
attached to it, so that the verb and the pronoun or pronouns
form one word. If there are two pronoun objects, the final
syllable of the infinitive requires the accent mark.
Sentarse. To seat oneself, sit down.
^Quiere Vd. dirmelo? Are you wilUng to (or, Will you)
give it to me?
3. After a preposition the infinitive is regularly used in
Spanish instead of the present participle (gerund).
Antes de (Despues de) comer. Before (After) eating.
Estoy cansado de estudiar esta I am tired of studying tliis lesson.
Iecci6n.
4. Spanish al + infinitive is equivalent to English on +
present participle (gerund).
Al entrar en el restaurant. On going into the restaurant.
Al leer la carta. On reading the letter.
LESSON
XVIII
89. Present Indicative of:
It, to
/ go, do go, am
Singular
go
going ; etc.
Plural
/
Venir, to come
come, do come, am coming ; etc.
Singular Plural
voy
yas
vamos
vais 1
vengo
vienes
venimos
venis
va
van
viene
vienen
Dar,
to
gite
I give, do give
Singular
doy
das
da
, am giving; etc.
Plural
damos
dais '
dan
67
90. Forms of Ir, Venir, and Dar Used in Commands.
vaya Vd. 1 venga Vd. \ de Vd.
tT^j ) go -^ , ) come , ,.j
vayan Vds. j vengan Vds. J den Vds.
91. Idiomatic Expressions
give
Acaba de hablar.
Vuelve a hablar.
Vaya Vd. a buscarlo.
Venga Vd. a verme.
He has just spoken.
He is speaking again.
Go and get it, go after it.
Come and see me.
EXERCISES
poder (ue),* to be able, can
los postres, pi., dessert
preferir (ie), to prefer
propina, tip
queso, cheese
servir (i), to serve
sopa, soup
taza, cup
tratar, to try
vaca, cow
vino, wine
la
el
la
la
acabar, to finish
antes de, prep., before
el apetito, appetite
la botella, bottle
la carne, meat; came de vaca,'^
beef
como, as
empezar (ie), to begin
la ensalada, salad
las frutas, -pi., fruit
la papa o patata, potato '
el pescado, fish
1 Since vais and dais are monosyllables, they do not take the accent.
' In some countries called came de res.
» Called patata in most of Spain.
* Radical-changing verb in the present tenses, but irregular in some
other tenses. See §270.
la
el
68 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
A. Continikse. 1. Acabo de leer el libro. 2. Vuelvo a
leerlo. 3. Voy a buscarlo. 4. Aprendo a hablar espaiiol.
6. Trato de estudiar. 6. Pienso trabajar mucho. 7. Yo
no puedo hacerlo. 8. Yo empiezo a escribir la carta.
B. 1. Como me desayuno a las ocho, tengo buen apetito
a la una. 2. Los primeros platos que pedimos son sopa y
pescado. 3. Empezamos a comerlos con buen apetito.
4. Despu^s de comer el pescado, pedimos ensalada, came y
papas (patatas). 5. La ensalada que sirven en este restau-
rant es buena y la carne es sabrosa. 6. Como todos los
espanoles toman vino en las comidas, pedimos una botella.
7. Nuestros postres son queso y frutas. 8. Despu^s de
acabar el almuerzo, tomamos una taza de caf6. 9. En el
desayuno prefiero tomar una taza de csd6 con leche. 10. Pero
en el almuerzo y la comida no tomo leche. 11. Antes de
levantarnos de la mesa, damos una propina al mozo (al
camarero). 12. A mi amigo y a ml nos gustan mucho los
almuerzos que sirven en este restaurant.
C. Conlestese segun el contexto. 1. ^Al entrar en el restau-
rant, se sientan Yds. a una mesa? 2. iViene el mozo (el
camarero) a la mesa? 3. iVa a buscar la Usta? 4. ^Les da
a Yds. la Usta? 5. ^Leen Yds. la Hsta? 6. iCudles son los
primeros platos que piden Yds.? 7. ^Empiezan Yds. a
comerlos con buen apetito? 8. Despu^s de comer el pescado,
iqu6 piden Yds.? 9. iCudles son los postres? 10. Despu6s
de acabar el almuerzo, iqu6 toman Yds.? 11. iPrefiere Yd.
tomar caf6 con leche en el almuerzo? 12. Antes de levan-
tarse de la mesa, iqu6 dan Yds. al mozo (al camarero)?
13. iLes gusta a Yd. y a su amigo almorzar en este
restaurant?
D. 1. Waiter, come to this table. 2. I am coming (A114 voy),
sir. 3. What does the gentleman wish? (iQu6 manda el sefior?)
4. Go and get me another glass. 5. This [one] is not clean.
LESSON XVIII 69
6, Bring me also a plate of soup. 7. After the soup I wish fish.
8. Bring me a plate of the good salad that you (Vds.) serve in this
restaurant. 9. And bring me also a cup of coffee. 10. Do you
always give a tip to the waiter? 11. Yes, sir; I have just given him
a tip. 12. Do you give it to him before or after (antes o despu6s
de) rising from the table? 13. Always before rising from the table.
14. I do not give tips to the waiters.
E. 1. Do you like the meals that they serve in this restaurant?
2. I Uke the soup, the salad, and the coffee which they serve here,
but I do not Uke the meat. 3. The tablecloth, the plates, the spoons,
the knives, and (the) forks are clean, 4. Sometimes the glasses are
not clean. 5. Let us (§86, 2) sit down at this table. 6. Will you
(iQuiere Vd.) dine with us? 7. No, thank you (gracias), I have
just dined. 8. I do not wish to dine again (volver a comer).
9. But we can talk while you are eating. 10. As I have lunch
(Como almuerzo) at half-past twelve, I have [a] good appetite
for (the) dinner. 11. Will you take a cup of coffee? ^12. No,
thank you; I have just taken one cup of coffee. 13. The waiter
that is serving us is very good. 14. Before rising from the table,
let us give him a tip.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
88. Infinitives. — 1. Algunos verbos rigen a otros en el infinitive
mediante preposicion, pero muchos efectuan este regimen sin pre-
posici6n.
2. Los pronombres personales complementarios siguen al in-
finitive y se afiaden a ^1 formando una sola palabra.
3. En espanol se usa el infinitivo despu^s de una preposici6n en
lugar del participio presente (o gerundio).
4. La expresi6n castellana al con el infinitivo corresponde a la
inglesa on con el gerundio.
91. Ezpresiones idiomfiticas: . . .
70 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
LESSON XIX
92. Imperfect and Preterite Indicative. — 1. Spanish has
in the indicative mood two simple past tenses where EngUsh
has one. These Spanish tenses are the Imperfect (or Past
Descriptive) and the Preterite (or Past Absolute).
2. The inflectional endings of these tenses are:
_ / I . . . . : -aba, -abas, -aba, -fibamos, -abais, -aban
\ II and III : -la, -las, -la, -lamos, -lais, -lan
p f I . . . . : -e, -aste, -6, -amos, -asteis, -aron
' \ II and III : -i, -iste, -16, -imos, -isteis, -ieron
3.
Hablar: Imperfect Aprender: Imperfect
/ spoke, did speak, was speaking; I learned, did learn, was learning;
etc.
PLURAIi
aprendlamos
aprendiais
aprendian
Preterite Preterite
/ spoke, did speak ; etc. I learned, did learn ; etc.
Singular Plural Singular Plural
hable hablamos aprendi aprendimos
hablaste hablasteis aprendiste aprendisteis
hablo hablaron aprendio aprendieron
The imperfect (past descriptive) and the preterite (past absolute)
tenses have the same inflectional endings in the third conjugation that
they have in the second. All regular verbs are inflected in these tenses
like hablar and aprender.
Note carefully the position of the accent marks.
93. The Irregular Verb Ser
etc
Singular
Plural
Singular
hablaba
hablabamos
aprendia
hablabas
hablabais
aprendias
hablaba
hablaban
aprendia
Imperfect
Preterite
/ was ;
etc.
/
wa^;
etc.
Singular
Plural
Singular
Plural
era
6ramos
ful
ftiimos
eras
erais
fuiste
fuisteis
era
eran
fue
fueron
. LESSON XIX 71
94. Uses of the Imperfect and Preterite. — 1. When the
EngHsh simple past tense expresses an action or state as of
indefinite duration, it is equivalent to the Spanish imperfect.
When it expresses an action or state as definitely past, it
is equivalent to the Spanish preterite.
Era verdad. It was true (ii rrmy have been true long before and it
may still be true).
Fue verdad. It was true {it was true at the time to which the speaker
refers).
2. In narrations, the Spanish imperfect is used to describe
the conditions or circumstances which prevailed when some-
thing happened, while the preterite is used to tell what
happened.
Llovia cuando llegamos. It was raining when we arrived.
a. In this use the imperfect is best translated by was, etc., + the
present participle, as in the sentence above.
3. The Spanish imperfect is also used to tell what was
customary or habitual.
Cuando yo era alumno de esta vVhen I was a student in this
escuela, estudiaba mucho. school, I studied (used to study,
would study) much.
a. In this use the imperfect is often best translated by v^ed to or
would + the infinitive, as in the sentence above.
EXERCISES
America, America llegar, to arrive
el drabe, Arab llover (ue), to rain
ayer, yesterday morir (ue), to die
la compama, company el mundo, world
descubrir, to discover nunca, never
durar, to last, endure el presidente, president
encontrar (ue), to meet que, conj., that
la enfermedad, illness el siglo, century
los Estados Unidos, the United States varies, -as, several
el indio, Indian el viaje, voyage, trip
^ciiantos aflos tiene Vd.? {lit., how many years have you?), how old
are you? tango veinte afios, I am twenty years old; le falta, he lacks
(lit., there is lacking to him)
72 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
A. 1. Crist6bal Colon {Christopher Columbus) descubri6
el Nuevo Mundo el dfa 12 (doce) de octubre {October) de
1492 (mil cuatrocientos noventa y dos). 2. Hizo {pret. de
hacer) cuatro viajes al Nuevo Mundo. 3. Tenfa cincuenta
(fifly) y seis anos cuando hizo el cuarto viaje; ie faltaba el
vigor de la juventud {youth) y en el Nuevo Mundo tenia
muchos enemigos {enemies). 4. Muy enfermo volvi6 a
Espana y paso a Valladolid donde estaba la Corte {Court),
y donde muri6 {pret. de morir) poco despu6s {afterward).
" Por Castilla {Castile) y por Le6n
Nuevo Mundo hall6 Col6n."
B. 1. iQui^n descubri6 a America? 2. ^Cudndo descu-
brio a America? 3. ^Cudntos viajes hizo Col6n al Nuevo
Mundo? 4. iCudntos anos tenfa cuando hizo el cuarto
viaje? 5. ^Le faltaba el vigor de la juventud? 6. ^Tenfa
muchos enemigos en el Nuevo Mundo? 7. ^Estaba en-
fermo Colon cuando volvi6 a Espana? 8. ^A donde pas6?
9. iDonde estaba la Corte? 10. ^Donde muri6 Col6n?
C. Traduzcase, y dlgase por quS el verba estd. en el imperfecta a
en el preterita.
1. La enfermedad dur6 varios meses.
2. Ella tenia veinticinco anos cuando muri6.
3. Juan escribfa todas las cartas de la companfa.
4. Ayer escribi6 una carta a su padre.
5. Fernando no hablo a mi padre cuando le encontr6 esta
manana.
6. Nunca hablaba Fernando a mi padre cuando le encon-
traba.
7. No hall6 el libro que buscaba.
8. Yo escribfa una carta cuando mi amigo entr6.
9. Era la una de la noche cuando Uegaron.
10. Cuando mis amigos llegaron a casa eran las dos y
llovla.
I
LESSON XIX 73
11. Washington fue el primer Presidente de los Estados
Unidos.
12. Los indios vivfan en America.
13. Los drabes vivieron muchos siglos en Espafia.
D. 1. When John was (estaba) in (the) school, he did not
study much. 2. But he spoke Spanish every day (todos los dfas).
3. And he did learn to speak Spanish. 4. He used to write all
the Spanish letters (cartas en espaflol). 5. Yesterday he wrote a
Spanish letter to his aunt Mary. 6. Did you find the letter that
you were looking for? 7. No, sir; I did not find it. 8. I thought
(crei) that you found it. 9. What time was it when they arrived?
10. It was ten o'clock at night when they arrived at the house, and
it was raining. 11. Dona Marfa was ill when she arrived. 12. Did
the illness last long (mucho tiempo)? 13. No, sir; it did not last
long.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
92. Imperfecto y preterite de indicativo. — 1. El castellano
tiene en el modo indicativo dos tiempos pasados simples mien-
tras que el ingl6s s61o tiene uno. Estos tiempos castellanos
son el imperfecto (o pasado descriptivo) y el preterite (o pasado
absolute) .
3. . . . Los tiempos imperfecto y preterite tienen las mismas ter-
minaciones para los verbos de la tercera conjugaci6n que para los de la
segunda; en consecuencia todos los verbos regulares se conjugan en
estos dos tiempos como los verbos hablar y aprender.
Debe observarse cuidadosamente el lugar que le corresponde al
acento grdfico.
94. Uso de los tiempos imperfecto y pret6rito. — 1. Cuando
en ingl6s el tiempo pasado simple expresa una acci6n o estado de
duraci6n indefinida, se traduce al espaiiol por el imperfecto.
Cuando expresa una accion o estado en tiempo completamente
pasado, se traduce al espanol por el pret^rito.
2. En espanol se usa en la narraci6n el imperfecto para describir
las condiciones o circunstancias que prevaleclan cuando algiin
74 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
hecho se verificaba, pero el hecho mismo se expresa mediante el
pret^rito.
a. En este caso el imperfecto espanol se traduce al ingles mediante
IPOS, etc., mds el participio presente del verbo principal.
3. El imperfecto se usa tambi^n para expresar hechos habi-
tuales.
a. En este caso el imperfecto espanol puede traducirse al ingl6s por
used to o would mds el infinitive del verbo principal.
LESSON XX
96. Imperfect and Preterite of Radical-Changing Verbs. —
In the imperfect (past descriptive) and preterite (past abso-
lute) indicative, radical-changing verbs are inflected like
regular verbs, without change in the radical vowel, except
in the preterite of the third conjugation. Here the radical
vowels e and o are changed to i and u, respectively, in the
third person singular and plural.
Preterite
Sentir: I felt, did feel ; etc. Pedir: I asked, did ask ; etc.
Singular Plural Singular Plural
senti sentimos pedl pedimos
sentiste sentisteis pediste pedisteis
8inti6 sintieron pidid pidieron
Dormir : / slept, did sleep ; etc.
Singular Plural
dorml dormimos
dormiste dormisteis
durmid durmieron
96. The Feminine Article el (Review §31). — Before a
feminine noun with initial a- (or ha-) and with the stress
on the first syllable, el is used instead of la.
El agua. The water.
£1 hacha. The axe.
. But: las aguas, the waters; las hachas, the axes.
LESSON XX 75
97. The Neuter Gender. — There are no neuter nouns in
Spanish; but pronouns and adjectives are called neuter
when they do not refer to mascuhne or feminine objects.
Eso es bueno. That is good.
98. The Neuter Article lo. — The article lo is required
before the masculine form of an adjective when the adjective
is used substantively with the force of an abstract noun. Lo
can not be used with a noun.
Lo bueno. The good (= that which is good).
Lo infinito. The infinite.
^ EXERCISES
aceptar, to accept dormirse (ue), to go to sleep
afectuosamente, affectionately frio, -a, cold
el alma, /., soul inmortal, immortal
baflarse, to bathe, take a bath la invitacion, invitation
la calle, street invitar, to invite
el cielo, sky lleno, -a, full
Acomo? how? nublado, -a, cloudy, overcast
componerse ^ de, to be com- el niimero, number
posed of Pablo, Paul
despedirse (i) de, to take leave salir ^ a, to go out into
of vestirse (i), to dress oneself
dirigirse a, to make one's way ya, already
to, go to
ya acabe, I have finished, I'm done; se acabo, it is finished, it's done;
con mucho gusto, with great pleasure; llegue hace ocho (quince) dias,
o hace ocho (quince) dias que llegue, I arrived a week (fortnight) ago.
A. Contirvuese. 1. Me bane y me vesti. 2. Ya acab6.
3. Acepte con mucho gusto. 4, Lo sentf mucho. 5. Llegu6
hace ocho dias. 6. Hace quince dias que me despedl de
alios.
B. 1. Ayer me levante a las siete, me baiie y me vestl.
2. Despues de desayunarme, sail a la calle. 3. El cielb
* Irregular in some tenses (see poner §265, and salir §274).
76 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
estaba nublado, pero no llovfa. 4. Las calles estaban Uenas
de hombres y mujeres. 5. Me dirigf a casa de mi amigo
don Pablo. 6. Este amigo vive en la calle de Atocha,
niimero 20. 7. Me recibio afectuosamente, y me invit6 a
pasar el dfa con 6\ y su familia. 8. Acept6 la invitaci6n
con mucho gusto. 9. La familia se compone de don Pablo,
su esposa y tres hijos. 10. Despu^s de comer me despedf
de mis amigos. 11. Volvl a casa (home) y me acost^.
12. Como estaba muy cansado, me dormf en seguida.
C. 1. iA qu6 hora se levant6 Vd.? 2. Despu^s de levan-
tarse, iqu^ hizo Vd.? 3. Cuando Vd. salio a la calle, ^estaba
nublado el cielo? 4. Cuando Vd. sali6, ^llovla? 5. ^Estaban
las calles Uenas de hombres y mujeres? 6. ^A d6nde se diri-
gi6 Vd.? 7. iD6nde vive el amigo de Vd.? 8. iC6mo le
recibio a Vd.? 9. iLe invito a Vd. a pasar el dfa con 61?
10. iAcept6 Vd. la invitacion? 11. ^De qui^nes se compone
la familia de don Pablo? 12. ^Despu^s de la comida se des-
pidio Vd. de sus amigos? 13. iVolvi6 Vd. a casa? 14. ^Es-
taba Vd. cansado (cansada)? 15. iSe acost6 Vd.? 16. ^Se
durmi6 Vd. en seguida?
D. Uase B, carnbiando a la tercera persona del singular todos
los verhos y pronombres que estdn en la primera persona, y usando mi
padre como sujeto de los verhos, verbigrada: " Ayer mi padre se
levant6," etc.
E. 1. Conjiigu^nse en el imperfecto y pretM,to los siguientes
verhos: cerrar, contar, entender, volver, sentir, dormirse, y des-
pedirse.
2. i Cudntas y curies son las jormas del articulo determinado?
Traduzcase: 3. We prefer the good to the bad in this world.
4. The water is (estd) cold. 5. The waters are cold. 6. The soul
is immortal. 7. The souls of men (de los hombres) are immortal.
• F. 1. When I Uved ^ in Atocha Street, I rose at seven. 2. I
took a bath, dressed, and had breakfast at eight. 3. Then I would
1 The meaning ia / used to live, I used to rise, etc.
LESSON XXI 77
go out into the street. 4. If it was not raining the streets were full
of men and women. 5. I used to visit my friend Paul (don Pablo)
who received me affectionately. 6. He would always invite me to
spend the day with him. 7. After dinner I used to return home.
8. At ten o'clock I would go to bed. 9. — ^ Does your friend live
in Atocha Street now? 10. — No. He doesn't Uve in Madrid.
11. A week ago I went to the house in which he used to hve.
12. My friend was not there to (para) receive me, and I returned
home.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
95. En los tiempos imperfecto (pasado descriptive) y pret^rito
(pasado absoluto) de indicativo, los verbos que cambian la vocal de
la raiz se conjugan lo mismo que los verbos regulares, es decir, sin
cambiar la vocal radical, exceptudndose el pret^rito de la tercera
conjugaci6n donde las vocales radicales e y o se cambian en i y
u respectivamente, en las terceras personas del singular y plural.
96. El artlculo el se emplea con nombres femeninos que empiezan
por a o ha siempre que esta silaba lleve el acento pros6dico.
97. En castellano no hay nombres del genero neutro; pero se
consideran del genero neutro aquellos pronombres y adjetivos
que no se refieren a nombres masculinos o femeninos.
98. El artlculo lo se usa con la forma mascuUna del adjetivo
cuando ^ste hace las veces de substantivo abstract©. No puede
emplearse con el nombre.
LESSON XXI
99. Inflection of Adjectives {Review §§35, 36). — By ex-
ception, the following adjectives ending in consonants add -a
to form the feminine :
1. Adjectives ending in -in, -on, and -or (not including
comparatives in -or).
Un muchacho haragan, burl6n An idle, rogiiish, talkative boy.
y hablador.
Una muchacha haragana, bur- An idle, roguish, talkative girl.
lona y habladora.
* In written Spanish a change of speaker is indicated by a dash.
78 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
2. Adjectives of nationality.
Un muchacho espanol. A Spanish boy.
Una muchacha espafiola. A Spanish girl.
100. When an adjective of nationality denotes the lan-
guage, it is mascuUne and usually takes the definite article.
El espafiol no es fdcil. Spanish is not easy.
Estudiamos el espafiol. We are studying Spanish.
a. But the article may be omitted when the name of a language
immediately follows hablar, or is used with en.
£Habla usted espafiol (o caste- Do you speak Spanish?
Uano)?
EstS escrito en espafiol (o en It is written in Spanish.
castellano).
Note also such idiomatic expressions as ima lecci6n de francos, a
French lesson; tm ejercicio de espafiol, a Spanish exercise.
h. The term castellano (Castilian) is considered preferable to espafiol
in certain expressions, such as la gramdtica castellana, Sjxinish grammar;
and in some Spanish-American countries the Spanish language is more
commonly called el castellano.
101. Most verbs classified as irregular form the imperfect
indicative regularly. Thus, this tense is regular in the irregu-
lar verbs estar, tener, poder, and querer.
102. Preterite
Singular PlttraIi Singular Plural
Estar: / was; etc. Tener: / Jiad, or did have; etc.
estuve estuvimos tuve tuvimos
estuviste estuvisteis tuviste tuvisteis
estuvo estuvieron tuvo tuvieron
Poder : / covld, or was able; etc. Querer : / wished, or did wish; etc.
pude pudimos quise qulsimos
pudiste pudisteis quisiste quisisteis
pudo pudieron qulso quisieron
Note that these irregular preterites have a change of stem, and do
not have the accent on the endings of the first and third persons singular.
I
LESSON XXI 79
EXERCISES
Carlos, Charles mas, more, most
casi, almost el muchacho, boy; la muchacha,
cortes, polite, courteous girl; los muchachos, chil-
la duda, doubt dren.
Emilia, Emily perfectamente, perfectly
Felipe, Philip que, than
fonetico, -a, phonetic romance, Romance (derived
frances, -esa, French from Latin)
hermoso, -a, handsome traidor, -ora, treacherous
igualmente, equally triguefio, -a, dark-complex-
Isabel, Elizabeth ioned
la lengua, language
al contrario, on the contrary; me llamo (lit., 1 call myself), my name
is; ic6mo se llama Vd.? what is your name?
A. Continikse. 1. No soy espanol (espaiiola). 2. Yo no
hablaba espanol. 3. Yo queria aprender el castellano.
4. No pude hallar el libro. 5. Me llamo Felipe (Isabel).
B. 1. Don Felipe y su esposa dona Isabel eran espaiioles.
2. Tenfan dos hijos, Carlos y Emilia. 3. Carlos tenia diez
y seis aiios y Emilia doce. 4. Los dos muchachos eran
triguenos, hermosos y corteses. 5. Como eran espaiioles,
hablaban casi perfectamente el castellano. 6. Querian
aprender a hablar y escribir el ingles tambien. 7. Yo les
daba lecciones de ingles casi todos los dias. 8. Creian que
el ingles era mas dificil que el castellano. 9. Yo creia, al
contrario, que el castellano era mas dificil. 10. La verdad
es que las dos lenguas son dificiles. IL Para aprender a
hablar y escribir correctamente una lengua, tiene uno que
{one has to) estudiar mucho. 12. No hay duda de que la
ortografia inglesa es mds dificil. 13. La ortografia castellana
es mds fonetica que la inglesa. 14. Pero la gramdtica caste-
liana y la gramatica inglesa son igualmente dificiles.
C. Contestese. 1. ^C6mo se Uamaba la esposa de don
Felipe? 2. iC6mo se llamaba su hijo? 3. iComo se Uamaba
80 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
su hija? 4. iCudntos aiios tenia Carlos? 5. iCudntos afios
tenia Emilia? 6. iEran espanoles o ingleses? 7. iHablaban
espanol o ingles? 8. iQuerfan aprender el ingles tarabi^n?
9. iLes daba Vd. lecciones de ingles? 10. iCrefan ellos que el
ingles era mds diffcil que el castellano? 11. iCrefa Vd. que
el ingles era mds diffcil? 12. iSon diffciles las dos lenguas?
13. iTiene uno que estudiar mucho para aprender una
lengua? 14. ^Es mds diffcil la ortograffa inglesa? 15. ^Es
mds fon^tica la ortograffa castellana?
D. 1. iCudles son las formas masculina y femenina, singtdar y
'plural, de bianco, fuerte, cortes, ingles, traidor, inferior?
Traduzcase. 2. This woman is handsome and strong. 3. This
man i3 talkative; this woman is not talkative. 4. This girl is
French; she is poUte. 5. She does not speak Spanish. 6. She is
studying Spanish. 7. Spanish is not easy. 8. The English language
also is difficult. 9. This book is written in French. 10. French is a
Romance language.
E. 1. Spanish and French are Romance languages. 2. (The)
French grammar and (the) Spanish are equally difficult. 3. But
(the) Spanish spelling is more phonetic than (the) French. 4. When
I lived in Madrid, Don Felipe taught me Spanish. 5. I did not
speak Spanish correctly. 6. I wished to learn to speak it and write
it perfectly. 7. In order to learn Spanish I took lessons nearly every
day. 8. Dona Isabel, Don Felipe's wife, was handsome and very
courteous. 9. The two children (hijos), Emily and Charles, were
dark-complexioned. 10. They spoke Spanish and French, and
they wished to learn English. 11. When I talked English with them
they were glad (contentos). 12. I was able to give them lessons
nearly every day. 13. One day it rained, and I could not give them
an EngUsh lesson. 14. But they learned the leaaoa and wrote the
exercise.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
99. Inflezi6n de los adjetivos. — For excepci6n los siguientes
adjetivos terminados en consonante forman su femenino anadiendo
LESSON XXII 81
una a: 1. los adjetivos terminados en -fin, -fin y -or (sin incluir
los comparativos terminados en -or) ; 2. los adjetivos que denotan
nacionalidad.
100. Cuando el adjetivo de nacionalidad denota el idioma, toma
el g^nero masculino y va generalmente precedido del artfculo
determinado.
a. Se puede suprimir el artlculo cuando el nombre de la lengua sigue
inmediatamente al verbo hablar, o cuando se usa con la preposici6n en.
h. En ciertas expresiones se prefiere el t^rmino castellano al de
espaiiol, p>or ejempio, la gramdtica castellana; y en algunos pa!ses
hispanoamericanos Uaman comunmente a la lengua nacional el caste-
llano.
101. La mayor parte de los verbos irregulares forman su im-
perfecto de indicativo regularmente. Asf, pues, este tiempo es
regular en los verbos irregulares estar, tener, poder, y querer.
102. . . . Hay que notar que estos pret^ritos irregulares sufren
im cambio en su radical y no llevan el acento en las personas primera
y tercera del singular.
LESSON xxn
103. The Definite Article is Required. — 1. Before a noun
used in a general sense to denote all of the thing or kind it
names.
Las mujeres aman las flores. Women (as a rule) love flowers
(generally speaking).
But, Compramos flores. We are buying (some) flowers.
2. Before a proper noun modified by a title or a descriptive
adjective, except in direct address.
El sefior Garcfa. Mr. Garcia.
La pequefla Isabel. Little Elizabeth.
But, Buenos dlas, sefior Garcfa. Good day, Mr. Garcia.
a. Don and dofia (used before given names only) are exceptions in
that they never require the definite article: dofia Emilia no estA en
casa, Dofia Emilia is not at home.
82
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
h. Note the meanings of sefior, seilora, sefiorito, and sefiorita.
seiLor, — Mr., sir, gentleman; seflores, Messrs., sirs, gentlemen,
Mr. and Mrs.
se&ora, — Mrs., madam (ma'am), lady.
sefiorito, — Master, young gentleman.
sefiorita, — Miss, young lady.
104. Present Indicative
Decir, to say, tell Ver, to see
I eay (tell), do say (tell), am saying
{telling); etc.
SiNQUiiAR Plural
digo decimos
dices decis
dice dicen
I see, do see, am seeing; etc.
SlNOtTLAB
Plural
veo
vemos
ves
veis
ve
ven
105.
Ir, to go
I went, did go, was going ; etc.
Singular Plural
iba fbamos
ibas ibais
iba iban
Imperfect Indicative
Ver, to see
I saw, did see, was seeing; etc.
Singular Plural
veia veiamos
veias veiais
veia veian
The imperfect indicative of decir and venir is formed regularly.
106.
Preterite
Decir
/ said (told), did say (teU) ; etc.
Singular Plural
dije dijimos
dijiste dijisteis
dijo dijeron
It
/ went, did go; etc.
Singular Plural
fui fuimos
fuiste fuisteis
fa6 fueron
Ver
I saw, did see; etc.
Singular Plural
vi vimos
viste visteis
vi6 vieron
Venir
I cam^, did com^; etc.
Singular Plural
vine vinimos
viniste vinisteis
vino vinieron
LESSON XXII 83
a. Ir, to go, and set, to be, have the same preterite. Tliis is because
k has lost its own preterite and has borrowed that of ser. Compare
with the colloquial English expression: I was to town yesterday.
*
EXERCISES
amar, to love el hierro, iron
el apellido, surname, family name el marido, husband
el bautismo, baptism; nombre de mortal, mortal
bautismo, baptismal or given el oro, gold
name pequefio, -a, little, small
casado, -a, married pregimtar, to ask (a question)
comprar, to buy el significado, meaning, signifi-
conocer, to know (= be ac- cance
quainted with), meet la tarjeta, card; tarjeta de visita,
conservar, to retain visiting card
cordialmente, cordially usar, to use, wear
ense&ar, to show, teach fitil, useful
entregar, to hand, dehver la visita, visit
la flor, flower
A. Continuese. 1. Fui a verlos. 2. Los vi. 3. Vine a
ver a Vd. 4. Le dije la verdad. 5. Conoci al senor Garcfa.
B. 1. En Granada conoci a los seiiores de Garcia (al
senor Garcia y su senora esposa) . 2. La familia se componia
de don Fernando el marido, dona Emilia la esposa, y la
pequena Isabel su hija. 3. Don Fernando me invito a
hacerles una visita. 4. Fui a verlos y me recibieron cordial-
mente. 5. Un dia don Fernando vino a verme. 6. La criada
me entreg6 la tarjeta de visita del senor. 7. En la tarjeta
lei: " Fernando Garcia y Morales." 8. Cuando conoci bien
a este senor, le pregunte el significado de estos nombres.
9. Me dijo que Fernando era su nombre de bautismo (o de
pila).^ 10. Dijo tambien que Garcia era el apellido de su
padre y Morales el apellido de su madre. 11. Me explico que
muchos espanoles usan los dos apellidos. 12. Me ensen6
una tarjeta de visita de doiia Emilia. 13. En esta tarjeta
> Pila is the baptismal font.
84 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
lei: " Emilia Gonzdlez de Garcia." 14. Me explic6 que en
Espana las mujeres casadas conservan el apellido del padre.
15. Gonzdlez era el apellido del padre de dona Emilia.
16. Me dijo tambien que el nombre y los apellidos de la
pequeiia Isabel eran: Isabel Garcia y Gonzdlez.
C. Contestese. Serla conveniente que el profesor, antes de hacer
estas preguntas, escribiera en la pizarra los nombres de bautismo (o de
pila) y los apellidos de la familia Garcia. 1. Cuando Vd. estuvo
en Granada ^a qui^nes conoci6? 2. ^De cudntas personas
se componia esa familia? 3-5. iC6mo se llamaba el marido?
la esposa? la hija? 6. ^Le invit6 a Vd. don Fernando a
hacerles una visita? 7. lFu6 Vd. a verlos? 8. iC6mo le
recibieron a Vd.? 9. ^Vino don Fernando a hacerle a Vd.
una visita? 10. iQu6 le entreg6 a Vd. la criada? 11 iQu6
nombres estaban escritos en la tarjeta? 12. ^Le pregunt6
Vd. al senor el significado de esos nombres? 13-15. iCxi&l
era el nombre de bautismo del marido? de la esposa? de
la hija? 16-18. ^Cudles eran los apellidos del marido? de
la esposa? de la hija? 19. ^En Espaiia conservan las mujeres
casadas el apellido del padre? 20. Los hijos usan el apellido
de la madre tambien, ^no es verdad?
D. 1. Man is mortal. 2. Men are mortal. 3. Iron is useful.
4. Iron is more useful than gold. 5. He is buying iron with gold.
6. Do you like flowers? 7. Yes, sir; I like flowers. 8. I am buying
flowers for my mother. 9. Mr. Garcfa is a Spaniard. 10. Mrs.
Garcia (La sefiora de Garcfa) is Spanish. 11. I met Mr. and Mrs.
Garcia in Granada. 12. I met Miss Garcia also. 13. What are
your given names? 14. What is your surname?
E. 1. Mr. Garcia y Morales was the father of Uttle EUzabeth.
2. Mrs. Gonzdlez de Garcfa was her mother. 3. The surname of
EUzabeth was Garcia y Gonzdlez. 4. EUzabeth was a handsome,
dark-complexioned [girl]. 5. Like (Como) aU Spanish girls she
loved flowers. 6. She liked books and pictures, but she preferred
flowers. 7. She used to buy flowers every day. 8. Mr. Garcia
LESSON XXIII 85
did not like flowers. 9. He would say that coal and iron are
more useful than flowers. 10. One day he bought coal to warm
the house. 11. He said that he could not warm the house with
flowers (ipor que no se v^a el articulof). 12. Visiting cards are
useful. 13. When Don Fernando came to see me, the maidservant
handed me this gentleman's card. 14. I read on the card his given
name and his family names. 15. I asked (to) Don Fernando the
meaning of these names and he explained them to me.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
103. El articulo determinado se usa: 1. delante de un nombre
usado en sentido colectivo y que se refiere a toda la clase o especie;
2. delante de un nombre propio modificado por un tltulo o adjetivo
descriptive, exceptudndose el vocativo,
a. Los t^rminos don y doila (delante de nombres de bautismo) deben
considerarse como excepciones en el sentido de que no requieren el
articulo determinado.
6. No se olvide cudles son los significados de las voces sefior,
seiiora, seiLorito, y seflorita.
106. — a. Ir y ser tienen el mismo preterite. Esto se debe a que
el verbo ir ha perdido su preterite y ha tornado el del verbo ser.
LESSON xxin
107. Definite Article for Possessive. — 1. When speaking
of parts of the body or articles of clothing, the definite article
is generally used instead of the possessive adjective.
Los niilos abrieron los ojos. The children opened their eyes.
Perdi el sombrero. I lost my hat.
2. To avoid ambiguity, an indirect object pronoun may
be used also.
Me corte el dado. I cut my finger.
Me puse el sombrero. I put on my hat.
a. But the possessive is generally used before the subject of a sen*
tence: su sombrero es nuevo, his hat is new.
86
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
6. Note the following use of tener + the name of a part of the body.
Tengo Ids ojos cansados.
Tiene las manos muy frias.
My eyes are tired.
His hands are very cold.
108. Distributive Construction. — When speaking of simi-
lar objects one of which belongs to each member of a group,
the singular is generally used in Spanish.
Los niilos se lavaron la cara The children washed their faces
y las manos. and hands.
(Cara is singvlar since each child has one, while manos is plural
since each child has two.)
Se limpiaron los dientes con They cleaned their teeth with
cepillo y polvos. brushes and powder.
109.
Present Indicative
Hacer, to ma\e, do
I make {do), do make {do), am mak-
ing {doing); etc.
Poner, to put
I pvi, do pid, am putting; etc.
SiNQtJLAB
Plukal
Singular
Plural
hago
hacemos
pongo
ponemos
haces
haceis
pones
poneis
hace
hacen
pone
ponen
Dar, to gioe
I give, do give,
am giving; etc.
Singular
Plural
doy
damos
das
dais
da
dan
110.
Preterite
Hacer
Poner
I made {did), did make {did do); etc.
I put, did put; etc.
Singular
Plural
Singular
Plural
hice
hicimos
puse
pusimos
hiciste
hicisteis
pusiste
pusisteis
hizo
hicieron
puso
pusieron
LESSON XXIII 87
Dar
7 gave,
did give; etc.
Singular
Plural
di
dimos
diste
disteis
di6
dieron
a. The imperfect of hacer, poner, and dar is formed regularly.
111. Present Indicative
Conocer, to \now, be acquainted with
I know, do know, am knowing; etc.
Singular Plural
conozco conocemos
conoces conoceis
conoce conocen
a. The imperfect and the preterite of conocer are formed regularly.
112. Most verbs ending in -cer or -cir preceded by a
vowel are inflected like conocer (thus nacer, to he born; lucir,
to shine; etc.). These are usually called Inceptive Verbs.
EXERCISES
abrir, to open la mano, hand
apresurarse (a), to make haste el nino, small boy, child; la nifla,
(to) small girl, child; los niilos,
los cabelloSji hair (of the head) children
la cara, face , el ojo, eye
capillar, to brush peinar, to comb
el cepillo, brush; cepillo de dien- los polvos dentifricos,^ tooth-
tes, toothbrush powder
despertarse (ie), to wake up, porque, because, for; ipot
awaken que? why?
el diente, tooth responder, to answer
el jabon, soap saltar, to jump (out)
lavar, to wash secar, to dry
limpiar, to clean la toalla, towel
en este momento, at this moment; es hora de, it is time to or for;
hace frio, it is cold; tango frio, I am cold; tengo hambre, I am hungry.
^ Or el pelo. ^ Or polvos para los dientes.
88 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
A. Contin'dese. 1. Abrf los ojos. 2. Me lav6 la cara y
las manos. 3. Me cepill6 los cabellos (el pelo). 4. Yo
tenfa hambre. 5. No lo hice. 6. Yo conozco al senor
Morales. 7. Me puse el sombrero. 8. Le di el libro.
B. 1. Los dos niiios se despertaron y abrieron los ojos.
2. Saltaron de la cama porque ya eran las siete. 3. jLa
familia se desayunaba a las siete y media! 4. Los ninos se
lavaron la cara y las manos con agua y jab6n. 5. Y se las
secaron con una toalla. 6. En seguida se limpiaron los
dientes con cepillo y polvos. 7. Se peinaron y se cepiUaron
los cabellos (o el pelo). 8. En este momento entr6 en el
cuarto la madre de los ninos. 9. Buenos dfas, mamd, dijeron
los ninos. 10. Buenos dlas, hijos mlos, respondi6 la madre.
11. Ya es hora del desayuno. Vamos al comedor. 12. Los
ninos se apresuraron a vestirse. 13. Porque hacfa frlo en
el cuarto y tenlan hambre.
C. 1. iA qu6 hora se desayunaba la familia? 2. ^A qu^
hora se despertaron los ninos? 3. i Abrieron los ojos los
ninos? 4. ^Saltaron de la cama? 5. iCon qu6 se lavaron
la cara y las manos? 6. iCon qu6 se las secaron? 7. iCon
qu6 se limpiaron los dientes? 8. iSe peinaron y se cepillaron
los cabellos (el pelo)? 9. En este momento iqui6n entr6 en
el cuarto? 10. iQu6 le dijeron los ninos? 11. iQu6 respondi6
la madre? 12. iQu6 hicieron los ninos en seguida? 13.
iPor qu6?
D. Traduzcase, y repUase con los sujetos de los verbos en plural.
1. The child op>ened his eyes. (El niflo abri6 los ojos. Los nifios
abrieron los ojos.) 2. The child washed his face and hands. 3. I
cleaned my teeth with M toothbrush. 4. I combed my hair.*
5. I brushed my hair. 6. You made haste to dress. 7. You were
hungry. 8. I was born in the United States.
^ Omit. Me pein6 is sufficient (but in 5 the noun is required).
LESSON XXIII 89
E. 1. Good day, my children, said the mother upon entering
(§88, 4) the room. 2. Good day, mamma, said the children. 3.
The children jumped out of bed, for it was half -past seven o'clock.
4. And they had-breakfast (imperf.) at eight! 5. They made haste
to wash their faces and hands with soap and water. 6. Then they
brushed their hair and cleaned their teeth. 7. To (Para) clean their
teeth they made use of (se sirvieron de) toothbrushes and tooth
powder. 8. They made haste to dress because it was breakfast-
time, {vease B, 11). 9. They were cold and hungry. 10. When
children are cold, they wish to warm themselves. 11. When they
are hungry, they wish to eat. 12. Children always have [a] good
appetite. 13. I knew these children and their parents. 14. They
were all born (= All were born) in Spain.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
107. Empleo del articulo determinado en vez del posesivo. —
1. Para referirse a las diferentes partes del cuerpo humano o a
las diversas prendas de vestir se emplea el articulo determinado
en vez del adjetivo posesivo.
2. Para evitar ambigiiedad se puede emplear im complement©
indirecto pronominal.
a. En caxnbio se hace use del adjetivo posesivo cuando se trata del
Bujeto de la frase.
6. Hay que notar el empleo del verbo tener con el nombre de las
partes del cuerpo humano.
108. Use distributive, — Cuando se habla de objetos semej antes
de los cuales uno corresponde a cada individuo del grupo, en espanol
se emplea por regla general el singular.
110. — a. El imperfecto de indicative de los verbos hacer, poner y
dar se forma regularmente.
111. — a. El imperfecto y el pret^rito de conocer se forman regu-
larmente tambi^n.
112. La mayor parte de los verbos terminados en -cer o -cir
despu6s de vocal se conjugan como conocer (tales como nacer,
lucir, etc.). Estos verbos llevan el nombre gen^rico de Incipientes.
90
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
113.
LESSON XXIV
Negative Pronouns and Adverbs
. ni, neither
1. nadie, no one, nobody ni, nor; ni .
nada, nothing nor
ninguno (ningfin), -a, no, none tampoco, neither
nimca, never
iQuien vino? — Nadie. Who came? No one.
Nadie vino. No one came.
Nada tengo. I have nothing, or I haven't any-
thing.
2. When such negatives foHow the verb, no must precede
it. This means that then they are really affirmative in force.
No conozco a
Bxirgos.
No tengo nada.
nadie en
No tengo ni pluma ni papel.
I know no one, or I do not know
anyone, in Burgos.
I have nothing, or I haven't any-
thing.
I have neither pen nor paper, or
I haven't either pen or paper.
114. Changes in Spelling. — According to the Spanish
system of orthography, it is sometimes necessary to change
the spelhng of the stem of an inflected word, to show that the
pronunciation does not change.
1. The rules for the more common changes are:
To express the sound of:
k
hard g
gw
jota
zeta
Before -a or -o, or final, write :
Before -e or -i, write :
c
qu
- ^^
g
gu
gu
gii
J
g
z
c
t.sf
Sacar: saco, I take out; saque, I took out.
Llegar: llego, I arrive; llegue, I arrived.
Coger: cojo, I catch; coges, you catch.
Empezar: empece, I began; empezaste, you began. Luz, light;
luces, hghts.
LESSON XXIV 91
a. But verbs in -jar keep the j throughout: trabajar: trabajo, I rvork;
trabaje, / worked.
2. When the stem of a verb of the second or the third
conjugation ends in a, e, or o, its preterite is written as
follows:
Singular Plural
crei creimos
creiste creisteis
crey6 creyeron
a. Note the unusual accent-marks in the second person singular and
the first and second persons plural, and the change of -16 and -ie- to
-y6 and -ye- in the third person. This is because stressed i, standing
next to a, e, or o, requires the written accent; and y takes the place of
unstressed i between vowels.
115. To express an act or state that continues from the
past into the present, the present tense is used in Spanish,
while in English the present perfect is used.
Hace veinticuatro horas que This book has been on the desk
este libro esta sobre la mesa. for twenty-four hours.
Hace dos afios que vivimos en We have lived, or we have been
Madrid. living, in Madrid for two years
(and we are stiU there, hence the
■present tense).
Compare, Memos titido dos We have lived in Madrid for two
aflos en Madrid. years {we are not there now,
hence the ■perfect tense).
a. Similarly, if the act or state continues from one period in the past
into another less remote, the imperfect tense is used in Spanish, while
in EngUsh the pr-perfect is used.
Cuando mi padre murifi, hacia dos When my father died we had
aflos que viviamos en Madrid. been living in Madrid for two
years.
92 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
4f*
'UQAJc/d^/ EXERCISES
nm suit) ^ 0 J J /
la blusa, blouse XAi VUUjQ/
aguardar, to await, wait for llevar, to carry
la americana, coat {of a man's btisi- la media, stocking, hose
mirar, to look at
los pantalones, trousers *
el bolsillo, pocket ' la prenda de vestir, article of
el calcetin, sock, half-hose clothing
la corbata, necktie, cravat el reloj (de bolsillo), watch;
el cortaplumas, penknife / . ' reloj (de pared o de mesa),
corto, -a, short C/p^/fh t SA,Cfy clock *
el chaleco, waistcoat, vest la ropa, clothes; ropa interior,
la chaqueta, (boy's) coat, jacket underclothes
largo, -a, long y^ ^ el zapato, shoe
la levita, frock coat
WVA>t^
creo que no, I believe not; digo que sf, I say yes; yo no, not I;
acababa' de hablar, he had just spoken; acabd de hablar, he finished
speaking.
A. Continuese. 1. Dije que sf. 2. Empec^ a vestirme.
3. Acab6 de vestirme. 4. No conozco a nadie en Caracas.
5. No pido nunca nada a nadie. 6. Hace tin ano que vivo
aquf. 7. Hace un mes que estudio el espanol.
Escribase. 8. Presente de indicativo de corregir (i), to cor-
rect; veneer, to conquer; nacer, to he horn. 9. Pretirito de
leer, to read; olr, to hear; pagar, to pay; sacar, to take out;
rezar, to pray.
B. 1. Despu^s de lavarse la cara y las manos los niftoa
empezaron a vestirse. 2. Se pusieron la ropa interior y las
medias (o los calcetines). 3. En seguida se pusieron los
pantalones, la blusa y la corbata. 4. Como estos ninos tenfan
* Also called saco in some Spanish-American countries.
' Also called bolsa {as in Mexico).
* Also used in the singular: el pantaldn, trousers.
* It is usually not necessary to express de bolsillo, de pared or de mesa.
* Only the present and the imperfect of acabar are used for English hate
Jutt and had just.
LESSON XXIV 93
el lino siete anos y el otro nueve, no usaban pantalones
largos. 5. Para ponerse los zapatos se sentaron en la cama.
6. Los hombres usan levita o americana (saco) y chaleco.
7. Los niiios usan chaqueta pero no usan chaleco. 8. Estos
ninos llevaban en el bolsillo cortaplumas nuevos que su
padre acababa de darles. 9. Ni el uno ni el otro tenia reloj.
10. Mientras se vestian, miraban la hora {the time) en el
reloj de pared. 11. A las siete y media acabaron de vestirse.
12. Y se dirigieron al comedor donde los aguardaban sus
padres.
C. 1. iCudles son las prendas de vestir de un nino de
siete anos? 2. ^Usa pantalones cortos o largos? 3. iUsa
chaqueta o levita? 4. ^Usa chaleco? 5. ^En donde se
sentaron estos niiios para ponerse los zapatos? 6. Mientras
se vestian, ^en que miraban la hora? 7. ^A que hora aca-
baron de vestirse? 8. ^A d6nde se dirigieron en seguida?
9. ^Qui^nes los aguardaban en el comedor? 10. iQu6
llevaban los ninos en el bolsillo? 11. ^Qui^n acababa de
darles los cortaplumas? 12. ^Tenlan ellos reloj es?
D. (Debe tenerse presente que not any es igual a no one o none; not
anything a nothing; etc.) 1. Haven't you anything to write with
[ = with which (que) to write]]? 2. Not I. I have neither pen nor
ink. 3. Nor I either. 4. I haven't anything. 5. I never have
anything. 6. Haven't you any friends? 7. Yes, sir; I have some
friends. 8. I haven't any. 9. We have not studied the lesson.
10. We have studied the lesson [for] two hours.
E. 1. Do boys ten years old (= of ten years) wear long trousers?
2. I beUeve not. Boys ten years old wear short trousers. 3. They
never wear long trousers. 4. Men wear long trousers and coats
and waistcoats (vests). 5. The two children of whom (de quienes)
we were speaking made haste to dress. 6. It was cold in the room
and they were hungry. 7. They put on their underclothes, their
stockings and their shoes. 8. They put on their blouses and neck-
ties, and then their coats. 9. They would look often at the clock
94 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
to see the tims. 10. They did not carry watches in their pockets.
11. Before entering the dining room, they combed [their hair]
again {lisese volver). 12. At a quarter past eight o'clock they
finished dressing and entered the dining room. 13. Their parents
had just sat down at the table. 14. They had been waiting fifteen
minutes. 15. All began (the) breakfast with [a] good appetite.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
113. Pronombres y adverbios negatives : 1: . . .
2. Cuando estos vocablos negativos siguen al verbo, el adverbio
no debe precederle, lo cual quiere decir que dichos vocablos son
realmente afirmativos.
114. Cambios ortogr&ficos. — De acuerdo con el sistema pro-
s6dico castellano, con objeto de conservar el sonido del radical de
una palabra. es necesario a veces cambiar su ortografla.
1. Cambios ortogrdficos que son necesarios para conservar el
sonido de las consonantes c, g, gti, j, z: . . .
a. El verbo cuyo infinitivo termina en -jar, conserva la j.
2. Cuando el radical de un verbo de la segunda o tercera con-
jugaci6n termina en a, e, u o, su pret^rito se forma de la manera
siguiente: . . .
o. Obs6rvense Ids acentos grdficos excepcionales sobre la segunda
persona del singular y primera y segunda del plural, y el cambio de las
terminaciones -i6 y -ie- en -y6 y -ye- en la tercera persona. Esto
Be debe a que la i acentuada junto a las vocales a, e, o requiere el
acento escrito; pero la y substituye a la i no acentuada cuando va
entre vocales.
115. Para expresar una acci6n o estado que continua del pasado
al presente, en espanol se hace uso del tiempo presente gramatical
mientras que en ingl^ se requiere el presente perfecto.
a. Igualmente, si la acci6n o estado continu6 desde un perfodo de
tiempo pasado hasta otro menos remoto, en espanol se expresa la idea
mediante el tiemp>o imperfecto mientras que en ingles se usa el plus-
cuamperfecto.
LESSON XXV
95
LESSON XXV
116. Future and Conditional. — The future and the con-
ditional (or past future) indicative of all regular verbs are
formed by adding the following endings to the infinitives:
Future: -e, -ds, -§., -emos, -eis, -dn
Conditional: -ia, -las, -ia, -iamos, -iais, -ian *
117. Future
Singular Plural
I. / shaU speak, shall be speaking;
Conditional
Singular Plural
I should speak, should be speaking;
etc.
etc.
hablare
hablaremos
hablaria
hablariamos
hablaras
hablareis
hablarias
hablariais
hablard
hablardn
hablaria
hablarian
II. I shall learn, shall be learning;
etc.
aprendere aprenderemos
aprender&s aprendereis
aprenderd aprenderan
/ should learn, shoidd be learning;
etc.
aprenderia aprenderiamos
aprenderias aprenderiais
aprenderia aprenderian
III. / shaU live, shall be living; etc. I shoidd live, should be living; etc.
vivire viviremos viviria viviriamos
viviras vivireis vivirias viviriais
viviri viviran viviria vivirian
118. All radical-changing verbs and many irregular verbs
form the future and conditional indicative regularly.
Thus, the irregular verbs ser, estar, and ir form these
tenses regularly.
> The Spanish indicative future tense ia formed by postfixing to the
infinitive the indicative present tense of haber, the conditional by post-
fixing the imperfect tense.
hablar(h)e hablar(h)emos hablar(hab)fa hablar(hab)iamos
hablar(h)is hablar(hab)eis hablar(hab)ias hablar(hab)iais
hablar(h)& hablar(h)an hablar(hab)ia hablar(hab)ian
Note the disappearance of hab-.
96 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
119. Names of the Months of the Year: enero, febrero,
marzo, abril, mayo, junio, julio, agosto, septiembre, octubre,
noviembre, diciembre.
All are of the masculine gender.
120. Days of the Month. — The cardmal numbers are
used to express the days of the month, with the one exception
of primero, first.
El primero (o el tmo), el dos. The first, the second, the tlurd,
el tres, etc. de enero. etc., of January.
EXERCISES
el caballo, horse la semana, week
los demis, the rest, others el sitio, place, site
el jardin, flower garden s61o, adv., only
el lago, lake tarde, adv., late
nadar, to swim temprano, adv., early
necesario, -a, necessary treinta, thirty; treinta y uno,
partir de, to leave, depart from -a, thirty-one
pescar, to fish ^timo, -a, last
la poblaci6n,i town el verauo, summer
el rio, river
hace buen (mal) tiempo, the weather is fine (bad) ; montar a caballo,
to ride on horseback.
A. Continaese. 1. Partir^ el primero de julio. 2. Vol-
ver6 el quince de agosto. 3. Montar6 a caballo. 4. No me
gustarla montar a caballo. 5. Me equivoque. 6. Hace
echo dfas que llegu^. 7. Hace quince dias que estoy aquf.
B. 1. Este verano pasaremos algunas semanas en el
campo. 2. Partiremos de la poblaci6n el primero (el uno) o
el dos de julio. 3. Y volveremos el dltimo dfa de agosto.
4. Buscaremos una casa en un sitio hermoso. 5. No serd diff-
cil encontrar una casa con jardin. 6. En la poblaci6n me le-
vanto tarde. 7. En el campo me levantar^ temprano. 8. Me
1 Also pueblo, or, if small, pueblecito or pueblito.
LESSON XXV 97
acostar6 temprano tambi^n. 9. Llevaremos con nosotros
varies libros. 10. Si llueve, leeremos los libros. 11. Si hace
buen tiempo, mi hermana montard a caballo. 12. Yo
pescar6 o nadar6 en las aguas de algdn lago o rfo. 13. Crel
que serfa necesario pasar el verano en la poblaci6n, pero me
equivoque. 14. No me gustarla pasar los meses de julio y
agosto en esta poblaci6n.
C. 1. iD6nde pasar dn Vds. el verano? 2. iCudndo
partirdn Vds. de la poblaci6n? 3. iCudndo volverdn Vds,?
4. iQu6 buscardn Vds. en el campo? 5. ^En la poblaci6n
se levanta Vd. temprano o tarde? 6. ^En el campo se
levantard Vd. temprano? 7. ^Se acostard Vd. temprano
tambi^n? 8. Si llueve, iqu6 leerd Vd.? 9. Si hace
buen tiempo imontard a caballo su hermana de Vd.?
10-11. Si hace buen tiempo ien d6nde pescard (nadard)
Vd.? 12. iCrey6 Vd. que serfa necesario pasar el verano
en la poblaci6n? 13. iSe equivoc6 Vd.? 14. ^Le gustarfa
a Vd. pasar los meses de juho y agosto en esta poblaci6n?
C. Aprindase de memoria:
Treinta dlas trae noviembre,
Con abril, junio y septiembre;
De veintiocho s61o hay uno;
Los demds de treinta y uno.
D. Trad'dzcanse al espafiol las seis primer as frames y despuis
formMense las respuestas. 1-4. How many days has the month of
January (February, March, April)? 5. How many days are there
in a week? 6. How many weeks are there in a month? 7-9. The
first (second, third) of May, 10, Shall you spend the simmier in
(the) town? 11. Shall you go to the country? 12, Will he work
this summer? 13. Will he swim in the lake? 14. Will they fish
in the river? 15. I have just arrived (§91), 16, John arrived
two days ago,* 17. Mary has been here [for] ten days (§115).
* See vocabulary of Exercise XX.
98 FIBST SPANISH COURSE
E.V 1. The month of January has thirty-one days. 2. The
month of February has twenty-eight days. 3. January has three
days more than February. 4. February has four weeks: January
has four weeks and three days. 5. We shall not spend this summer
in (the) town. 6. We shall go to the country the twentieth of
June. 7. And we shall return to (the) town the tenth of September.
8. We shall try to find a house with [a] garden. 9. If the weather
is fine, my brothers will ride on horseback. 10. I prefer to fish in the
waters of some river or lake. 11. If Qt] rains, I shall read books
or write letters. 12. In the country we shall get up and go to bed
early. 13. Sometimes in the city [it] would be necessary for-us-
to-go-to-bed (acostarnos) late. 14. I should like to live in the
country all the year.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
116. El futuro 7 el condicional (o futuro pasado) de indicativo
se forman anadiendo al infinitivo de los verbos las siguientes de-
sinencias: . . .
118. Todos los verbos que sufren cambios constantes en su
ralz asf como muchos verbos irregulares forman su futuro y con-
dicional de una manera regular. Asi los verbos irregulares ser,
estar e ir forman estos tiempos de una manera regular.
119. Los nombres de los meses del afio son del g^nero mas-
culino.
120. Los dfas del mes. Para indicar los dfas del mes se hace
uso de los numeros cardinales, con excepci6n de primero, que ea
ordinal.
LESSON XXVI
99
LESSON XXVI
121. The following verbs are among those that form the
future and conditional indicative irregularly:
Future
Conditional
Querer :
; querr-e, -As, etc.
querr-ia, -ias, etc.
Poder :
podr-e, -fis, etc.
podr-ia, -las, etc.
Tener:
tendr-e, -Ss, etc.
tendr-ia, -fas, etc.
Poner :
pondr-e, -ds, etc.
pondr-ia, -ias, etc.
Venir:
vendr-e, -fis, etc.
vendr-ia, -las, etc.
Decir:
dir-6, -fis, etc.
dir-£a, -las, etc.
Hacer:
har-e, -ks, etc.
har-ia, -ias, etc.
122. Future and Conditional of Probability. — The future
indicative is often used to denote probability or conjecture
in present time, and the conditional to denote probabiHty or
conjecture in past time.
iQue hora as? — Seri la una.
iQue hora era? — Seria la una.
What time is it? — It is probably
about one o'clock.
What time was it? — It was
probably about one o'clock.
I Sard posiblal Is it, or can it be, possible!
123. The definite article is required before expressions of
time modified by pr6zimo, next, pasado, past, last (- past),
and the hke.^
El lunas pr6ximo. Next Monday.
La samana pasada. Last week.
El mas que viana (qua antra). Next month.
124. Names of the Days of the Week: domingo, lunes,
martes, miercoles, jueves, viernes, sfibado. All are of the
masculine gender. They usually take the definite article
> There are many expressions for next when referring to time. Tbua
next month may be translated by el mes que viene, que entra, etc. In re-
ferring to a specific date prdximo may be used, but pr6zimo really means
nearest, either in the past or in the future. Note el mes pr6ximo pasado,
the last month past.
100 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
if prdzimo or pasado be expressed or understood, or if used
in a general sense (see §103, 1). Those that end in -es have
the same form in the plural as in the singular.
Lleg6 el martes. He arrived on Tuesday.
Yo trabajo los sfibados. I work on Saturdays.
EXERCISES
acordarse (ue) de, to remember la hoja, leaf
aparecer, to appear el inviemo, winter
el firbol, tree el otoiLo, autumn, fall
cuarenta, forty la primavera, spring
el director, principal, director principiar, to begin
durante, during recitar, to recite
la estacidn, season tenninar, to end, terminate
excepto, except viejo, -a, old
la f echa, date
per, o en, la maflana,^ in the morning; per, o en, la tarde, in the
afternoon, or in the early evening; per, o en, la noche, in the evening
(after dark) or at night; el curso, school year; el dia de descanso, day
of rest; el dia de trabajo, work day; el tiempo de las vacaciones,
vacation time; a (en) la escuela, to (at or in) school; a (en) la iglesia,
to (at or in) church.
A. CordimXese. 1. No lo har^. 2. Le dirfa la verdad.
3. Vendr6 a las diez. 4. No podria venir. 5. Me pondr6
el sombrero. 6. No me acuerdo de la fecha.
B. 1. La (§ 103, 1) primavera es la primera estacidn del
afio. 2. En la primavera aparecerdn las primeras flores
en nuestros jardines. 3. Y los drboles se vestirdn de {with)
hojas. 4. El verano es la estaci6n del calor. 5. Es tambi^n
el tiempo de las vacaciones. 6. Ustedes no tendrdn lecciones
que aprender ni ejercicios que escribir. 7. El otoiio es la
estaci6n de las frutas. 8. En el otono principiard el nuevo
curso. 9. Entonces irdn Vds. a la escuela todos los dias
excepto los sdbados y los domingos. 10. Estos dfas serto
1 The time is more specific when en is used.
LESSON XXVI 101
dfas de descanso, pero los demds serdn dias de trabajo.
11. For la noche Vds. preparardn las lecciones. 12. For la
maiiana y por la tarde las recitar^n. 13. El domingo por la
manana Vds. iran a la iglesia. 14. iCudntos anos tiene el
director de la escuela? 15. — No es viejo: tendrd, treinta
y cinco o cuarenta anos. 16. iCudndo termin6 el curso
pasado? 17. — No me acuerdo de la fecha: terminarfa el
cuatro o seis de jiinio.
C. 1-4. iCudl es la primera (segunda, tercera, liltima)
estacion del ano? 5. En la primavera ique aparecerd en
nuestros jardines? 6. iDe que se vestirdn los drboles?
7-8. El verano (El otono) ^de que es la estacion? 9. iCudI
es el tiempo de las vacaciones? 10. ^Tendrd Vd. lecciones
que aprender en el verano? 11. iEn qu^ estaci6n principiard,
el nuevo curso? 12-13. Durante la semana icudles serdn los
dfas de descanso (de trabajo)? 14. ^Cudndo preparard Vd.
las lecciones? 15. iCudndo las recitard Vd.? 16. iA d6nde
ird Vd. los domingos? 17. ^Cudntos anos tiene el director
de la escuela? 18. ^Cudndo termino el curso pasado?
D. En las respuestas Usese el futuro o condicional de pro-
babilidad. 1. iQue hora es? 2. iQue hora era cuando Vd.
partio de Madrid? 3. iQu6 hora era cuando Vd. Ileg6 a
Barcelona? 4. iCudntos anos tiene Felipe? 5. iCudn-
tos anos tenia Carlos cuando muri6? 6. iD6nde estard
mi sombrero? (traduzcase : It is probably in your room.)
7. iD6nde estardn mis Ubros? {traduzcase: They are probably
on the table.)
E. 1. I studied (pret.) Spanish last year. 2. Next year I
shall study French. 3. The school year ended last month.
4. The new school year will begin next month. 5. Our vaca-
tions are not long. 6. My friends arrived last Tuesday.
7. They will leave next Friday. 8. Sunday (§ 103, 1) is [a]
rest day. 9. Monday is []a] work day. 10. Summer is the
warm season {vease B. 4). 11. Winter is the cold season.
102 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
12. Autumn is the season of fruits. 13. Spring is the season
of flowers.
F. 1. Last year I studied Spanish. 2. Next year I shall study
Spanish again (§91). 3. The second year will be more difficult
than the first year, will it not? (ino es verdad?). 4. The new school
year will begin the fifteenth of September. 5. The last school year
ended the sixteenth of June. 6. The summer vacations (= vaca-
tions of summer) will last three months. 7. These will be months
of rest. 8. I shall be able to fish or swim every day. 9. COn]
Sundays I shall go to church. 10. In the autumn I shall go to
school Mondays, Tuesdays, Wednesdays, Thursdays, and Fridays.^
11. The Saturdays and Sundays ^ wiU be rest days. 12. But [on]
the Saturdays I shall study my lessons at night, 13. The principal
of our school will be forty years old next month. 14. How old
are you? — I shan't tell you how old I am. 15. Shall you come
to see me this afternoon? 16. I shall come to see you if I can.
17. What time is [it]? — [It] is probably about eleven o'clock.
18. I haven't my watch. [It] is probably on the table in (de)
my room.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
121. Los verbos que siguen son de los que forman de una manera
irregular su futuro y condicional (o futuro pasado) : . . .
122. Futuro y condicional de probabilidad. — El futuro de
indicativo se usa a menudo para denotar probabiUdad o suposici6n
en tiempo presente, y el condicional para denotar probabilidad o
suposici6n en tiempo pasado.
123. Es indispensable el uso del artfculo determinado delante
de las expresiones de tiempo modificadas por las palabras prdximo,
pasado, etc.
124. Los nombres de los dias de la setnana son masculinos, y
generalmente van precedidos del artfculo determinado si se ex-
presan las palabras prdximo o pasado o si se sobrentienden, o si
los nombres de los dfas se usan en sentido general. Los que ter-
minan en -es tienen la misma forma para el plural que para el
singular.
* Los lunes, martes, etc. Do not repeat the article.
r
LESSON XXVII 103
LESSON XXVII
125. Past Participles. — If the infinitive of a verb ends
in -ar, the past participle ends in -ado ; if the infinitive ends
in -er or -ir, the past participle ends in -ido.
Hablar : hablado, spoken. Estar : estado, been.
Aprender : aprendido, learned. Ser : sido, been.
Vivir : vivido, lived. Ir : ido, gone.
126. The following verbs are among those that have
irregular past participles:
1. Otherwise regular verbs:
Abrir: abierto, opened, open. Cubrir: cubierto, covered.
Escribir : escrito, written.
2. Radical-changing verbs:
Morir: muerto, died, dead,^ Volver: vuelto, returned, turned,
killed.
3. Irregular verbs:
Decir: dicho, said. Poner: puesto, put, set.
Hacer : hecho, done, made. - Ver : visto, seen.
4. When the stem of a verb of the second or third conju-
gation ends in a vowel, -ido receives the accent mark.
Creer: creido, believed. Oir: o ido, heard.
127. A past participle used as an adjective is inflected like
an adjective.
Un libro bien escrito. A well written book.
Una carta bien escrita. A well written letter.
> Morir means to die; but the past participle, muerto, means either died
or killed, according to the context, when it refers to persons.
104 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
128. When used with estar, a past participle has the force
of an adjective and simply denotes a resultant state, rather
than the passive voice.
La carta esti escrita en caste- The letter is written in Spanish.
llano.
Don Pablo estaba muerto. Don Pablo was dead.
129. The past participle is used with ser to form the
tenses of the passive voice. The participle agrees in gender
and number with the subject.
La carta seri escrita por don The letter will be written by Don
Juan. Juan.
Don Pablo fue muerto por tin Don Pablo was killed by a thief.
Iadr6n.
130. With passive verbs, by is usually expressed by por;
but it may be expressed by de (instead of per) after some
verbs that denote mental action.
La puerta fue abierta por el The door was opened by the
criado. servant.
El es amado de todos. He is loved by all (beloved of all).
a. For the use of the reflexive instead of the passive, see §77, 3.
But the use of to be in English really indicates the passive voice in
Spanish when an agent is expressed, and then ser must be used.
EXERCISES
el arqmtecto, architect grande, large, big
la clase, class, kind el ladrillo, brick
colocar, to place la puerta, door
c6modo, -a, comfortable subir, to go up, ascend
construir, to build, construct el techo, roof
cubrir, to cover el tejamani,i (wooden) shingle
la escalera, stairs, stairway el telefono, telephone
el gas, gas
la sala (de recibo), reception room, drawing-room.
A. Contiwdiese. 1. Ful ensenado por mi padre. 2. Yo
estaba cansado. 3. Me equivocaba. 4. Quiero ser amado
de todos.
I A rooS of tiles (tejas) is called tejado.
LESSON XXVII 105
B. 1. Nuestra casa fu6 construida por un buen arquitecto.
2. No es grande, pero es hermosa y comoda. 3. Las paredes
estdn construidas de ladrillos. 4. El techo estd cubierto con
pizarra (con tejamanles). 5. En el piso bajo estdn la sala (de
recibo), la biblioteca, el comedor y la cocina. 6. Cuando
subimos por la escalera al piso alto, hallamos cuatro dormi-
torios (o alcobas) y el cuarto de bano. 7. Prefiero la bi-
blioteca a todas las demds piezas porque tiene libros de
todas clases. 8. Hay tambi^n un tel^fono en la biblioteca.
9. Tenemos una buena cocina economica. 10. Se quema
carbon de piedra en ella (it) cuando se preparan las comi-
das. 11. En invierno la casa se calienta por vapor. 12. El
calor se produce en un calorffero central colocado en el
s6tano. 13. En todas las piezas hay luz el^ctrica que pre-
ferimos al gas.
C. 1. iPor qui^n fu6 construida la casa de Vds.? 2. ^De
qu6 estdn construidas las paredes? 3. iCon qu6 estd cubierto
el techo? 4-5. iQue piezas estdn en el piso bajo (alto)?
6. iCudl es la pieza que Vd. prefiere a las demds? 7. iPor
qu6? 8. iD6nde estd el teWono? 9. iD6nde se preparan
las comidas? 10. ^Como se calienta la casa en invierno?
11. iEn donde se produce el calor? 12. iDonde estd colo-
cado el calorifero? 13. ^Tiene la casa luz electrica o de gas?
D. 1. The door closed (se cerr6). 2. The door was closed by
the servant. 3. The door was (estaba) closed. 4. The window
opened (se abri6). 5. The window was opened by Mary. 6. The
window was already open. 7. The book was written in Enghsh.
8. It was written by my brother. 9. This cooking-stove was made
by Pereda and Company (Compaflia). 10. It is very well made,
11. It is said that Spanish is spoken here. 12. The house was
well built. 13, It was built by a good architect, 14, The roof
is covered with shingles, 15, The house is warmed with (por)
steam, 16, Coal is burned in the furnace. 17. Don Fehpe is
loved by all.
106 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
E. 1. My uncle has just bought an eight-room house (= a house
of eight rooms). 2. It is not large, but it is very comfortable.
3. All the rooms in (de) the house are warmed with steam. 4. And
there is electric light in all the rooms. 5. There are four rooms on
the first floor: the reception room, the Ubrary, the dining room, and
the kitchen. 6. On the upper floor are four bedrooms and the
bathroom. 7. The roof of the house is covered with slate. 8. The
walls are built of brick (vease B. 3). 9. The house was built by an
architect who lives in Chicago. 10. The cooking-stove and the
furnace were made by Ayer and Company, and they are well made.
11. Yesterday I went to see my uncle's new house. 12. The door
was opened by my cousin who received me affectionately. 13. My
uncle and aunt were not at home, but my cousin showed me (me
ensefl6) all the rooms. 14. He prefers the library to the other
rooms, because he loves books (§103, 1).
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
125. Participios pasados (o pasivos). — Si el infinitivo del verbo
termina en -ar, su participio pasado termina en -ado ; si el infini-
tive termina en -er o -ir, el participio pasado termina en -ido.
126. Los verbos que siguen son de los que forman irregularmente
su participio pasado: 1. Verbos regulares en todas las demda
formas: ... 2. Verbos que sufren cambios constantes en
su ralz: ... 3. Verbos irregulares en varias formas: . . .
4. Cuando el radical del verbo de la segunda o tercera conjugaci6n
termina en a, e, u o, la terminaci6n -ido del participio pasado
recibe el acento grdfico.
127. Cuando el participio pasado se usa como adjetivo, sufre
las alteraciones gramaticales propias de estos illtimos.
128. Cuando el participio pasado acompafia al verbo estar,
adquiere el car deter de verdadero adjetivo denotando un simple
estado resultante y no la voz pasiva.
129. El participio pasado se usa con el verbo set para formar la
voz pasiva. El participio concuerda en g^nero y niimero con el
Bujeto.
LESSON XXVIII
107
130. Con los verbos en pasiva hy se traduce por la palabra por ;
pero puede expresarse por de (en lugar de por) despu^s de alguno.s
verbos que expresan acci6n mental.
a. En cuanto al use de la forma reflexiva en vez de la pasiva, v^ase
el §77, 3. Pero el empleo de to be en ingles indica la voz pasiva en
espanol cuando se expresa el agente, y entonces debe emplearse el
verbo ser.
LESSON xxvin
131. Tener and Haber. — Spanish has two verbs meaning
to have: tener and haber. To have, meaning to poseess, is
expressed by tener. As an auxihary verb to form perfect
tenses, to have is haber.
132. Perfect Tenses. — The perfect tenses are formed by
combining the auxihary verb haber, to have, with the past
participle. When used with haber, the past participle is
invariable in form.
133.
Present Perfect
I have spoken, have been
speaking; etc.
Singular Plttkal
he hablado hemes hablado
has hablado habeis hablado
ha hablado han hablado
Hablar
Pluperfect ^
I had spoken, had been speaking;
etc.
Singular Plural
habia hablado habiamos hablado
habias hablado habiais hablado
habia hablado habian hablado
Preterite Perfect ^
(when) I had spoken; etc.
Singular
(cuando) hube hablado
hubiste hablado
hubo hablado
Plural
(cuando) hubimos hablado
" hubisteis hablado
" hubieron hablado
» Or Past Perfect.
2 Or Second Past Perfect.
108 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Futtire Perfect Conditional Perfect *
I shall have spoken, shaU have I should have spoken, should have
been speaking; etc. been speaking; etc.
SiNOULAB PliUBAL SINGULAR PlURAL
habr^ hablado habremos hablado habria hablado habriamos hablado
habr&s hablado habreis hablado habrias hablado habrfais hablado
habri hablado habrfin hablado habria hablado habrfan hablado
The perfect tenses of all verbs are formed like those of
hablar.
134. — 1. / had (you had, etc.) spoken is usually expressed
in Spanish by habia (habias, etc.) hablado.
£l no habia venido. He had not come.
Yo no lo habia hecho. I had not done it.
2. Hube (hubiste, etc.) hablado is used after the temporal
conjunctions cuando, when, luego que, as soon as, and the
like. But with these conjunctions the simple preterite in-
dicative is the more common in colloquial Spanish.
Luego que hubo venido, le As soon as he had come, I told
dije la verdad. him the truth.
(Or, more commonly: luego que vino, le dije la verdad, as soon at
he came, I told him the truth.)
a. Note the following idiom: llegado que hubo, as soon as he had
arrived.
135. In Spanish it is usually best not to place the subject
or an adverb between the auxiUary and the past participle
of a perfect tense.
IHa. venido Juan? Has John come?
^Le ha hablado Vd.? Have you spoken to him?
Lo he pref erido siempre. I have always preferred it.
» Or Past Future Perfect.
LESSON XXVIII 109
EXERCISES
alumbrar, to light la lampara, lamp
la azotea, flat roof. luego que, as soon as
el brasero, brasier la lumbre, fire
cada (invariable), each el patio, (inner) courtyard
el centre, center el petroleo, coal oil, petroleum
el clima, climate la piedra, stone
el cobre, copper principal, main, principal
crecer (§112), to grow la tienda, shop, store
la chimenea, fireplace tropical, tropical
la galeria, gallery, veranda la vela, candle
el lado, side el zaguin, vestibule, passageway *
dar a, to face; no m&s que, only, no more than; habia, there was,
there were
A. Contindese. 1. He vivido en Mdlaga. 2. Hace seis
meses que vivo en Mdlaga. 3. Hace seis meses que llegu^.
4. Yo no habia vuelto. 5. Yo lo habr6 hecho.
B. 1. Hemos pasado este invierno en Mdlaga. 2. La
casa en que vivfamos estaba construida de piedra y tenia
azotea. 3. En el centro de la casa habia un patio donde
Grecian flores tropicales. 4. Entrdbamos en el patio por el
zagudn. 5. En el piso bajo habia una tienda en cada lado
del zagudn y algunos cuartos para los criados. 6. En el piso
principal ^ estaban la sala de recibo, el comedor, la cocina y
el cuarto de baiio. 7. En el segundo piso no habia mds que
alcobas que daban a la calle o a las galerlas del patio. 8. Se
alumbraba la casa con velas y Idmparas de petr61eo. 9. Y
» Leading from the street to the inner courtyard.
* In the larger houses of Spanish and Spanish-American cities, the first
floor is called the piso bajo or cuarto bajo, the second floor the piso principal
or primer piso, the third floor the segundo piso, etc. If there is an entresuelo
(a Soor between the piso bajo and the piso principal, with low ceilings, and
usually occupied by the janitors and other servants), the third floor is called
the piso principal, the fourth flaor the segundo piso, etc.
110 FIBST SPANISH COURSE
se calentaba la casa por la lumbre de las chimeneas o de
los braseros de cobre. 10. Para guisar (o cocinar) habla
en la cocina fogones^ en que se quemaba carbon de lefia.
11. El clima de Mdlaga durante el invierno ha sido casi
perfecto.
C. 1. iD6nde ban pasado Vds. este invierno? 2. ^De
qu6 estaba construida la casa en que vivfan Vds.? 3. iQu6
clase de techo tenia la casa? 4. ^Donde estaba el patio?
5. iQu4 crecia en el patio? 6. iComo entraban Vds. en
el patio? 7-9. iQu6 habfa en el piso bajo? (piso princi-
pal? segundo piso?) 10. iComo se alumbraba la casa?
11. iC6mo se calentaba? 12. iQu6 se quemaba en los
fogones? 13. ^Como ha sido el clima de Mdlaga durante
el invierno?
D. 1. Has your friend arrived? 2. Yes, sir; he has just (§91)
arrived. 3. Has Mr, Pereda come? 4. He had not come this
morning. 5. Has the letter been (sido) written by John or by
Charles? 6. It has not been written by Charles. 7. Charles has
not written it. 8. As soon as he had finished it, I read it. 9. This
house has been built by a good architect. 10. We have lived
(§115) in this house [for] three years. 11. It {= the weather) has
not been cold this winter.
E. 1. I have lived in Burgos and the other towns of the north
(del norte) where the courtyards are covered. 2. And I have spent
two winters in Granada and Mdlaga where many courtyards are
(estdn) open (descubiertos). 3. I have always preferred the houses
with the courtyards open and full of flowers. 4. I Uke to sit on the
veranda of the main floor and look at the flowers. 5. Last winter
the window of my bedroom faced the street. 6. Some rooms
(piezas) in (de) the house had no windows. 7. But each one of
these rooms had a large door that faced the courtyard. 8. I had
an oil lamp (viase B. 8) to (para) hght my bedroom. 9. In some
bedrooms there were only candles. 10. I had a fireplace in my
' See XV, Exercises, footnote 2.
LESSON XXVIII 111
room (cuarto) to warm me when it {= the weather) was cold. 11. I
have never liked the Spanish brasiers in which charcoal is burned.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
131. Tener y haber. — El verbo to have se traduce de dos
modos al espanol: por tener o por haber; el primero en el sentido
de " poseer " y el segundo para formar los tiempos perfectos.
132. Tiempos perfectos. — Para formar los tiempos perfectos
de los verbos se hace uso de los tiempos simples del verbo auxiliar
haber y se les agrega el participio pasado del verbo que se conjuga.
El participio pasado es invariable en su forma cuando se emplea
con el verbo haber.
133. En el modo indicativo los tiempos perfectos son: presente
perfecto; pluscuamperfecto; pret^rito perfecto; futuro perfecto;
condicional perfecto.
134. — 1. / had (you had, etc.) spoken, por regla general, se
traduce al espanol por habia (habias, etc.) hablado.
2. Hube (hubiste, etc.) hablado se usa despu6s de las conjuncio-
nes temporales cuando, luego que, y otras semej antes. Pero con
estas conjimciones se prefiere usar el preterite simple en el lenguaje
corriente.
135. En espanol, por regla general, no se debe colocar el sujeto
o el adverbio entre el participio pasado y el verbo auxiliar.
112 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
LESSON XXIX
136. Some Uses of Haber
1 Haber de + infinitive.
£l ha de tener hambre. He must be hungry.
Ella ha de cantar esta noche. She is to {or, she will) sing to-
night.
Compare, Tiene que hacerlo. He has (got) to do it.
2. Impersonal haber.
hay, there is (are) habrd, there will be
habia, there was (were) habria, there would be
hubo, there was (were) ha habido, there has (have) been
etc.
Note that the present indicative of impersonal haber is hay and
not ha.
o. The noun or pronoun used with impersonal haber is the object
of the verb.
I'Sa.j buenas tiendas en esta Are there (some) good shops in
poblacidn? this town?
Si, sefior; las hay muy buenas. Yes, sir; there are (some) very
good ones.
3. Hay . . . que and hay que + infinitive.
Hay mucho que estudiar. There is much to study.
Hay que estudiar mucho. One has to study much.
137. Saber, to know
Present Indicative
/ know, do know, am knowing; etc.
SiNGTTLAB PlURAL
s6 sabemos
sabes sab6is
sabe saben
I
LESSON XXIX 113
Preterite
I knew, did know; etc.
SlNQULAB PLURAIt
supe supimos
supiste supisteis
supo supieron
138. — 1. The imperfect indicative of saber is regular.
2. The future and the conditional of saber are irregular:
sabre, -fis, etc.
sabria, -ias, etc.
139. Meaning of Saber and Conocer
1. Saber means to know, know how, can (= know how).
^Sabe Vd. la lecci6n? Do you know the lesson?
^Sabe Vd. nadar? Do you know how to (Can you)
swim?
2. Conocer means to know {=he acquainted with), meet
(= become acquainted with).
iConoce Vd. al sefior Ortiz? Do you know Mr. Ortiz?
EXERCISES
el aroma,^ perfume, aroma el olfato, sense of smell
cantar, to sing el olor, odor, smell
ciego, -a, blind el 6rgano, organ
el gusto, taste la palabra, word, 8p>eech
la importancia, importance percibir, to perceive
menos, less, least sin, without
mudo, -a, dumb, mute sordo, -a, deaf
la nariz, nose la vista, sight
el oldo, (inner) ear,* hearing
esta noche, to-night
I Or el perfume, perfume. Note that aroma is masculine (see §174, 3).
* The outer, or visible, ear is called oreja.
114 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
A. Cordimlese. 1. Yo he de cantar esta noche.^ 2. No
conozco al seiior Ortiz. 3. No s6 nadar. 4. No supe la lec-
cion. 5. Tengo que estudiar mucho.
B. 1. El hombre tiene ojos para ver. 2. En este mundo
hay mucho que ver. 3. El hombre tiene ofdos para ofr. 4.
Mi hermano cree que la vista es de mas importancia que el
ofdo. 5. Pero yo preferirla el ofdo a la vista. 6. A ml me
gusta mucho la miisica. 7. La nariz sirve para percibir los
olores. 8. El olfato es de menos importancia que la vista o
el oido. 9. Pero ^qui^n no ama los aromas de las flores?
10. La lengua es el organo principal del gusto y de la palabra.
11. Sin la lengua no podrfamos hablar: seriamos mudos.
12. Sin lavista nopodrfamos ver: seriamos ciegos. 13. Sin
el oldo no podrfamos ofr: serfamos sordos. 14. Y sin la
nariz no podrfamos percibir los olores.
C. Contestese. 1-2. Para ver (Para ofr) lqu6 tiene el
hombre? 3. iQue sirve para percibir los olores? 4. ^Cudl
es el 6rgano principal del gusto? 5. iCudl prefiere Vd., la
vista o el ofdo? 6. ^Le gusta a Vd. la miisica? 7. iCudl
es de menos importancia, la vista o el oKato? 8. ^Ama Vd.
los aromas de las flores?
Completense las siguientes f rases. 9-11. Sin la vista (Sin el
ofdo, la lengua) no podrfamos . 12-14. Sin la vista (Sin
el ofdo, la lengua) serfamos .
D. 1. Do you know Miss Ortiz? 2. She is to sing to-night.
3. And I am to read. 4. Did you know the lesson? 5. I had been
studying it three hours (§115, a). 6. But I did not know it.
7. Does this boy know how to read? (iSabe leer este niflo?).
8. He can read a Uttle. 9. But he can not write. 10. Was there
much to do? 11. There were several lessons to study. 12. One
had to study hard (mucho) in order to learn them.
I In colloquial Spanish yo voy a cantar (or yo canto) esta noche, would be
commoner expressions.
LESSON XXIX 115
E. 1. We have eyes in order to see and ears in order to hear.
2. Without eyes we could (podriamos) not see and without ears we
could not hear. 3. I know a man who is blind. 4. He can not see,
but he can bear very well. 5. Without a (la) tongue man could not
speak. 6. The tongue is the principal organ of speech (vease B. 10),
7, I used to know a girl who was deaf and dumb.^ 8. That girl
could (podia) not learn to speak because she could not hear.
9. Now the deaf learn to speak. 10. Which is of more importance,
sight or hearing? 11. My sister would prefer hearing because she
likes music. 12. Without a (la) nose man could not smell (percibir
los olores). 13. Which should you prefer, taste or the sense of smell?
14. I hke perfumes, but I should prefer taste to the sense of smell.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
136. Algunos usos del verbo Aaier. — 1. Haber de mds el
infinitivo.
2. Uso impersonal del verbo haber.
Su presente de indicativo es hay y no ha.
a. El nombre o pronombre usado con el verbo impersonal haber
resulta su complemento.
3. Hay que mds el infinitivo.
138. — 1. Es regular el imperfecto de saber.
2. Son irregulares el futuro y el condicional de saber.
139. Significado de saber y conocer. — 1. Saber significa to
know, know how, can.
2. Conocer significa to be o become acquainted with.
^ Sorda y muda, or una sordo-muda (a deaf mute).
116 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
LESSON XXX
140. Present Participles
1. Regular verbs:
Hablar: hablando, speaking Vivir: viviendo, living
Aprender : aprendiendo, learning
2. Radical-changing verbs of the third conjugation:
Sentir : sintiendo, feeling Dormir : durmiendo, sleeping
Pedir : pidiendo, asking
Note that the radical vowels e and o are changed to i and u respeo*
lively.
The present participles of radical-changing verbs of the first and
second conjugations are regular.
3. Some irregular verbs:
Decir : diciendo, saying Venir : viniendo, coining
Poder : pudiendo, being able Ver : viendo, seeing
Ser: siendo, being
But many irregular verbs form their present participles regularly.
4. Change in Spelling. — If the stem of a verb of the
second or the third conjugation ends in a vowel, -iendo
becomes -yendo (but see §253).
Leer : leyendo, reading Ofr : oyendo, hearing
141. Agreement. The present participle is invariable in
form.
VI a tin muchacho (a una mu- I saw a boy (a girl) reading a
chacha) leyendo un libro. book.
Review §88, 3 and 4.
142. Progressive Forms of Verbs. — English to be ■{-
present participle often equals Spanish estar or ir + present
participle. Ir is used to denote motion or change of condition.
LESSON XXX
117
Estoy estudiando. I am studying.
Estabamos trabajando. We were working.
Va corriendo. He is running, or he goes on the run.
El nifio iba creciendo. The child was growing.
Se f ue ^ poniendo pSlida. She was turning pale.
a. The progressive forms are used to express an act or state as in
progress at the time to which the speaker refers. They are used less
often and are more emphatic in Spanish than in English.
6. Estar is not used with the present participles of ser, estar, haber,
and tener to form progressive tenses.
143. Personal pronoun objects follow a present participle
and are attached to it so that the verb and object or objects
form one word. The participle then requires the accent mark.
Esti aguardandome. He is waiting for me.
But one may also say: me est& aguardando.
la acogida, reception
adi6s, goodbye, farewell
anunciar, to announce
besar, to kiss
la bondad, goodness, kindness
el caballero,* gentleman; ]caba-
Uero! Sir!
celebrar, to rejoice at, be very
glad to have
correr, to run, hurry
dispensar, to give, grant; to ex-
cuse, pardon
gracias, thanks, thank you
EXERCISES
el giiante, glove
inclinarse, to bow
intimo, -a, intimate
llamar, to call, knock, ring (a
doorbell)
la ocasi6n, occasion, opportunity
el pie (pZ., pies), foot
presentar, to present
quitar, to take off
la reverencia, bow
segtiir (i), to continue, go on,
keep on
el sobretodo, overcoat
hasta luego, farewell for a while, goodbye till we meet again; otra
vez, again; ponerse pdlido, to turn pale, grow pale.
A. Continuese. 1. Voy corriendo. 2. Estoy escribiendo.
3. Yo iba creciendo. 4. Yo estaba estudiando. 5. Me ful
> Fu6 ia here the preterite of ir, not of ser.
' Caballero is more formal than sefior. There is no feminine form of
caballero.
118 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
poniendo pdlido, -a. 6. ^A qui^n he de anunciar? 7. E3
gusto era mlo.
B. 1. Llam6 a la puerta. 2. El criado me abri6 la puerta,
y yo entr6 en la casa. 3. Le pregunt^ al criado: ^Estd^ el
senor Gonzdlez? 4. El criado respondio: SI, el senor estd
en casa. 5. ^Tendrd Vd. la bondad de decirme su nombre?
6. iA qui^n he de anunciar? 7. Quitdndome el sombrero,
los guantes y el sobretodo, entr6 en la sala (de recibo).
8. Don Felipe me recibio cordialmente, y me dijo: iCorao
estd, Vd., caballero? 9. Le respond! : Muy bien, gracias,
lY Vd.? 10. Me presento a su esposa, dona Carolina
Herrera de Gonzdlez. 11. Yo me incline y dije: Ce-
lebro la ocasi6n de conocer a Vd., senora. 12. Despu^s
el senor Gonzdlez me presento a su hijo, don Carlos.
13. Inclindndome otra vez, yo le dije: Caballero, tengo mu-
cho gusto en conocer a Vd. 14. Don Carlos respondi6: El
gusto es mfo, caballero. 15. Al despedirme de la familia,
yo di gracias por (for) la buena acogida que me habfa dis-
pensado. 16. Haciendo una reverencia dije: A los pies de
Vd., senora. 17. Beso a Vds. la mano, caballeros. 18. Que
Vds. lo pasen bien {May you all keep well). 19. Cuando me
despido de un amigo Intimo, le digo: Adi6s, o Hasta luego.
C. Contestese. 1. iQui^n abrio la puerta cuando Vd.
llamo? 2. iQu6 le pregunt6 Vd. al criado? 3. lQa6 le
respondi6 a Vd. el criado? 4. iQu6 se quit6 Vd. antes de
entrar en la sala? 5. iC6mo le recibio a Vd. don Felipe?
6. iCudl era el apellido de don Felipe? 7. ^A qui^n le pre-
sent6 a Vd. este caballero? 8. Al inclinarse Vd., iqu6 le
dijo a dona Carolina? 9. iCudl era el apellido de la se-
fiora? 10. Despu^s ia qui^n le present6 a Vd. don Felipe?
11. iQu6 le dijo Vd. a don Carlos? 12. iQu6 le respondi6
a Vd. este senor? 13. Al despedirse de la familia, iqu6
^ Note this common omission of en casa.
LESSON XXX 119
dijo Vd.? 14. Al despedirse de un amigo Intimo, iqui le
dice Vd.?
D. Repitase B., usando don Pablo como sujeto en lugar de yo.
(Don Pablo Uamo a la puerta. £1 criado le abri6 la puerta
y don Pablo entro en la casa; etc.)
E. 1. Open (pi.) your books. 2. Ferdinand, read the first page.
3. Go on reading. 4. Close (pi.) your books. 5. Were you (pi.)
working? 6. I was writing a letter. 7. My brother was studying.
8. Your brother studies all the time. 9. He is growing pale.
10. John, run and (a) get (buscar) the doctor. 11. Hurry!
12. John is running. 13. Mary is reading a book. 14. He was
taking off his overcoat. 15. He was making a bow. 16. He was
taking leave. 17. Excuse me. 18. Have the kindness to excuse me.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
140. Participio presente (gerundio) : — 1. Verbos regulares:
hablar, hablando; aprender, aprendiendo; vivir, viviendo.
2. Verbos de la tercera conjugaci6n que sufren cambios constan-
tes de su vocal radical: sentir, sintiendo ; pedir, pidiendo ; dormir,
durmiendo.
Obs6rvese que las vocales radicaies e y o se cambian en i y u respec-
tivamente. El participio presente es regular en los verbos de la P y 2*^
conjugaci^n que cambian su vocal radical.
3. Algunos verbos irregulares: poder, pudiendo; ser, siendo^
ver, viendo; decir, diciendo; venir, viniendo.
Muchos verbos irregulares fonnan su participio presente de una
manera regular.
4. Cambios ortogr^ficos. — Si el radical de un verbo de la 2*
o 3* conjugacion termina en vocal, la terminaci6n -iendo del par-
ticipio presente se cambia en -yendo : leer, leyendo ; olr, oyendo.
141. Concordancia. — El participio presente es invariable.
142. Formas progresivas de los verbos. — La expresi6n inglesa
to be con el participio presente equivale a menudo a la espaflola
120
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
fonnada con los verbos estar o ir y el participio presente. El
verbo ir denota movimiento o cambio de condici6n.
a. Las formas progresivas se usan para expresar un acto o estado
en ejecuci6n en el momento a que se refiere el sujeto de la oraci6n.
Estas formas se usan menos y son mds enf dticas en espafiol que en inglfe.
b. El verbo estar no se construye con el participio presente de los
verbos ser, estar, haber y tener.
143. Los pronombres personales complementarios siguen al
participio presente y toman el cardcter de encliticos, es decir
que van unidos a 61 formando una sola palabra. En este caso el
participio presente lleva el acento grdfico.
LESSON XXXI
144. Imperative Mood
Singular Plural
I. Hablar: habla (tii), hablad (vosotros, -as), (you) speak
II. Aprender: aprende (td), aprended (vosotros, -as), (you) learn
III. Vivir: vive (tfi), vivid (vosotros, -as), (you) live
The imperative mood is used only affirmatively. In nega-
tive conmiands the subjmictive is used.
145. Subjunctive Mood.
I. — Hablar
Singular Plural
hable hablemos
babies
hable
Present Tense:
II. — Aprender
Singular Plural
aprenda aprendamos
hableis
aprendas
aprend&is
hablen
aprenda
aprendan
III.
— Vivir
Singular
Plural
viva
vivamos
vivas
vivfiis
viva
vivan
LESSON XXXI 121
146. The Present Subjunctive (1) may be used tc, express
a direct command or wish; or (2) it may be used in sub-
ordinate clauses.
147. Forms of Hablar Used to Express a Direct Com-
mand or Wish.
Affirmative Negative
SiNGULAB
^^^ ^^^ ] speak ^** ^"'' ^^^ ] do not speak
hable Vd. J ^^^^^ no hable Vd. J **° °°^ ^P®^
(que) hable 61/ let him speak (que) no hable el, let him not
speak
PlURAIi
hablemos, let us speak no hablemos, let us not speak
hablad (vosotros, -as), 1 , no habl6is (vosotros, -as), 1 do not
hablen Vds., J P^ jjq hablen Vds. / speak
(que) hablen ellos, let them (que) no hablen ellos, let them
speak not speak
All regular verbs of the first conjugation are thus inflected.
Regular verbs of the second and third conjugations use
similarly the forms of aprender and vivir given in §§144,
145.
a. In the third person, the que may sometimes be omitted. Without
que the command is more direct.
148. The Spanish present subjunctive used in direct
commands is generally to be expressed in EngUsh by let and
the infinitive, if the subject is not in the second person. See
above.
a. But if let means aUmo or permit, it is to be translated by dejar
or permitir: dSjeme Vd. entrar, let me go in; permita Vd. que Jtum
hable, let John speak, permit John to speak (Ut., permit that John speak).
h. In the first p>erson plural one may say either estudiemos or vamos
a estudlar, let vs study. Let its not study is no estudiemos.
1 Or que €1 hable, que ellos hablen, etc.
122 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
149. — 1. The final -d of the plural imperative is lost before
the object pronoun os, you, yourselves: sentaos (for sen-
tad-os), seat yourselves; except idos, go away, from irse, to
go away.
2. The final -s of the first person plural of the present
subjunctive is omitted before the object pronoun nos, vs,
ourselves : sentemonos (for sentemos-nos), let u^ seat ourselves.
150. For the position of the personal pronoun objects of
a verb used to express a command or wish, see §85.
a. But if the verb is introduced by que, a personal pronoun object
precedes the verb: que lo traiga ella desde luego, let her bring it at once.
b. The present subjunctive, second person, with or without que,
may also express a mere wish: que seas feliz, may you be happy;
I viva el reyl long live the king!
EXERCISES
agitar, to shake la dosis, dose
amargo, -a, bitter feliz, happy
apetecer, to have an appetite la fiebre, fever
for, wish la medicina, medicine
el autom6vil, motor car, automobile observar, to observe
beber, to drink la pildora, pill
la cucharadita, teaspoonful el pulse, pulse
deber, must, to be (expected) to el remedio, remedy
debil, weak el resfriado, cold (o disease)
la dieta, diet el rey, king
el dolor, pain, sorrow; dolor de telefonear, to telephone
cabeza, headache
A. Repltase con el- verba en plural. 1. Habla mds alto.
2. Hable Vd. mds alto. 3. Hable €i mds alto. 4. Aprende la
lecci6n. 5. Aprenda Vd. la leccion. 6. Que ella la aprenda.
Repltase negativamente. 7. Telefonea al medico. 8. Come
todo lo que apetezcas (anything you vnsh). 9. T6mela Vd.
10. Agftela Vd. 11. Sentaos. 12. Sentemonos.
B. 1. Carlos, telefonea al medico que estoy enfermo.
2. — Sf, senor; le telefonear^ desde luego. 3. Ya telef one6 al
LESSON XXXI 123
doctor Heredia. 4. Dice que vendrd, desde luego. 5. Aquf
viene el en su automovil. 6. — Buenos dias, senor doctor.
Estoy muy enfermo. 7. — Vamos a ver la lengua y a tomar
el pulso. 8. ^Se siente Vd. (Do you feel) debil? 9. — SI,
senor; me siento muy debil. 10. Tengo dolor de cabeza
y no tengo apetito. 11. Creo que tengo fiebre. 12. — Vd.
no tiene mas que un fuerte (had) resfriado. 13. Aquf tiene
Vd. algunas pfldoras. 14. Tome Vd. dos cada (every) cinco
horas. 15. Y aqui tiene Vd. una medicina muy amarga.
16. Tome Vd. una cucharadita despu^s de cada comida.
17. Agftese la botella (Let the bottle be shaken) antes
de tomar la medicina. 18. — iQue dieta debo observar?
19. — Coma Vd. todo lo que apetezca. 20. — Adi6s, senor
doctor. — Hasta luego, amigo mlo: que lo pase bien.
C. Contestese. 1. ^A qui^n telefoneo Carlos? 2. ^En qu6
vino el medico? 3. iQuiso ver la lengua del enfermo (pa-
tient)? 4. iQuiso tomar el pulso? 5. ^Tenia el enfermo
dolor de cabeza? 6. ^Tenla buen apetito? 7. ^Tenla un
fuerte resfriado? 8. lQ,n6 remedios le di6 el medico al en-
fermo? 9. ^Cudntas pildoras debia tomar el enfermo cada
cinco horas? 10. iEra amarga la medicina de la botella?
11. ^Debla agitarse la botella antes de tomar la medicina?
12. iCudl era la dosis de esta medicina?
D. 1. Did you telephone to Dr. Heredia? 2. — Yes, sir; I tele-
phoned to him. 3. He will come at once. 4. — Have you fever?
5. — No, sir; but I have a headache. 6. — You must have a
cold. 7. — Yes, sir; I have a bad cold. 8. — Here is (Aqui tiene
Vd.) a bottle of medicine. 9. — Is the medicine bitter? 10. I
do not like bitter medicine (§103, 1). 11. — Shake the bottle.
12. Let the bottle be shaken. 13. Take a teaspoonful every two
hours. 14. Here are some pills. 15. Take one pill before each meal.
16. Do not take the piU after the meal, 17. — I do not Uke pills
(§103, 1). 18. — Do not eat much. 19. — I shan't eat much.
20. I haven't [any] appetite.
124 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
E. 1. When I was ill, Charles telephoned to Dr. Heredia, 2. The
latter (£ste) came to my house in his motor car. 3. Charles
opened the door for-him (le). 4. Taking o£E his hat, his gloves, and
his overcoat, he came into (entr6 en) my room. 5. I said to him:
Good day, doctor; I am very ill. 6. He answered: Let (§148, a)
me see your (la) tongue and take your (el) piilse. 7. You have a
cold, but you are not very ill. 8. But, I answered, I have [a] head-
ache, and I haven't [any^ appetite. 9. You haven't ^smy} fever,
said the good physician. 10. I took your (el) pulse and your
temperature (la temperatura). 11. Here are twelve white pills.
12. Take one every two hours, and drink a great deal of water.
13. And here is a bottle of medicine. 14. Take a teaspoonful
fifteen minutes before each meal. 15. In the morning you
may (puede) eat anything you wish. 16. Do not eat much at
(de) night.
KESUMEN GRAMATICAL
144. Modo imperativo. — El modo imperativo 861o se usa en la
forma afirmativa. En expresiones de mando negativas se emplea
el subjuntivo.
146. Modo subjuntivo.
146. El presente de subjuntivo (1) se emplea para expresar una
orden o deseo direct© ; o (2) puede usarse en cldusulas subordinadas.
147. Fonnas del verbo hahlar en expresiones de mando o
deseo: . . .
Todos los verbos regulares de la primera conjugaci6n se con-
jugan como el verbo hablar. Los verbos regulares de las segunda y
tercera conjugaciones se conjugan igualmente como los verbos
aprender y vivir {vkmse los §§144, 145).
a. El vocable que se suprime algunas veces en la tercera persona.
Sin que, la idea de mando resulta mds directa.
148. El presente de subjuntivo, en expresiones de mando directas,
se traduce generalmente al ingles mediante el vocablo let y el infini-
tivo, con tal que el sujeto no sea de la segunda persona.
a. Pero si let significa dejar o permitir, debe traducirse por estos
verboB.
LESSON XXXII 125
6. En la primera persona plural se puede decir estudiemos o vamos
a estudiar, let us study. Let its not study equivale a no estudiemos.
149. — 1. La -d final de la segunda persona plural del imperativo
se pierde delante del pronombre complementario os.
2. La -s final de la primera persona plural del presente de sub-
juntivo se omite delante del pronombre complementario nos.
150. Para la colocaci6n del pronombre i)ersonal complemento
de im verbo en expresiones de mando o deseo, v^ase el §85.
a. Pero si el verbo va precedido de la voz que, el pronombre personal
complementario precede al verbo.
6. El presente de subjuntivo, segunda persona, con la voz que o sin
ella, puede tambi6n expresar im simple deseo.
LESSON xxxn
151. Radical-Changing Verbs. — 1. Imperative Mood:
Cerrar : cierra, cerrad, close
Contar : cuenta, contad, count
Entender : entiende, entended, imderstand
Volver : vuelve, volved, retium
Sentir : siente, sentid, feel
Dormir : duerme, dormid, sleep
Pedir : pide, pedid, ask (for)
2. Present Subjunctive
Cerrar, to close Contar, to count
SiNQtJLAR Plural Singulab Plural
cuente contemos
cuentes conteis
cuente cuenten
Volver, to return
SiNGTTLAR PlTJRAL
vuelva volvamos
vuelvas volvais
vuelva vuelvan
cierre
cerremos
cierres
cerreis
cierre
cierren
Entender,
to understand
Singular
Plural
ehtienda
entendamos
entiendas
entendais
entienda
entiendan
126 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Sentir, /o/ee/ DorvaiTt to sleep
Singular
Plural
Singular
Plural
sienta
sintamos
duerma
durmamos
sientas
sintdis
duennas
dunnfiis
sienta
sientan
duenna
duennan
Pedir, to ask
Singular
Plural
pida
pidamos
pidas
pidais
pida
pidan
Note that in the present subjunctive, as in the present indicative,
the radical vowel e changes to ie or i, and the radical vowel o changes to
ue, when the root is stressed.
In the third conjugation (but not in the first or second), the radical
vowel e changes to i, and the radical vowel o changes to u, in the first
and second persons plural.
152. Subjunctive in Substantive Clauses.^ — The present
subjunctive may be used to express a direct command or
wish (§§146, 147). It is also used to express an indirect
command or wish, after mandar, to command, order; pedir (i),
to ask; querer (ie), to wish; preferir (ie), to prefer; aconsejar,
to advise; dejar, to let, allow; prohibir, to forbid, and the like.
fil manda que yo cierre la He orders me to close (that I shall
puerta.
Quiero que tti seas feliz.
Preferimos que la escriba el.
Prohibo que td.
aquella casa.
entres en
close) the door.
I wish you to be (that you may
be) happy.
We prefer that he write (that he
should write) it.
I forbid your entering (that you
should enter) that house.
Note that in these sentences the Spanish subjunctive is expressed in
English by: (1) the simple subjunctive (as in that he vnte); (2) shall,
* A clause that is the subject or the object of a verb ia called a substantive
LESSON XXXII 127
should, or moj/ and the infinitive; (3) the infinitive alone; (4) the pres-
ent participle (or gerund).
a. Decir, escribir, and the Uke, may be used as verbs of command:
me escribe que vuelva en seguida, he writes me to return immediately.
153. If the principal and the subordinate verbs of a sen-
tence have the same subject, the infinitive is used in Spanish
instead of the subjunctive.
Quiero ser feliz. I wish to be happy.
Preferimos escribirla. We prefer to write it.
a. The infinitive is often used in EngUsh even when the principal
and the subordinate verbs have different subjects (see §152). In
Spanish the infinitive may be thus used only after a few verbs, such as
mandar, dejar, and the like, chiefly when the subject of an affirmative
subordinate verb is a personal pronoun.
Me mandd venir. He ordered me to come.
No le dejamos entrar. We did not let him come in.
EXERCISES
caro, -a, dear, expensive la literatura, Uterature
la casa editorial, publishing house el lujo, luxury; de lujo, de luxe,
clSsico, -a, classic elegant
complete, -a, complete mandar, to command, send
el dependiente, clerk mejor, better, best
desear, to desire necesitar, to need
la edicidn, edition la obra, work {of art, literaiure,
el ejemplar, copy (of a book, etc.) music)
encuademar, to bind (a hook) el peso, dollar
escoger, to choose, select la poesia, poetry, poem
ilustrar, to illustrate publicar, to pubUsh
importante, important valer,^ to be worth
la libreria, bookstore el volumen, volume
A. 1. iDonde estd, la hbrerla de Victoriano Sdnchez?
2. — Aqul estd. iQuiere Vd. que entremos en ella?
* Irregular in some tenses (§273).
128 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
3. — Sf, senor; mi padre desea que le compre las poesfas
de Espronceda. 4. — Yo tambi^n necesito comprar varies
libros. 5. En mi biblioteca ya tengo muchas obras cldsicas.
6, Tengo las Obras completas de Calderon de la Barca y las
Obras escogidas de Lope de Vega. 7. El profesor de caste-
llano me aconseja que busque (§114) una buena edici6n del
Quijote. 8. Me dice que es la obra mds importante de la
literatura castellana. 9. — AquI tiene Vd. un buen ejem-
plar, ilustrado y bien encuadernado. 10. — Voy a pedirle
al dependiente que me ensene otra edici6n mejor que 6sta.
11. — Aqul tiene Vd. ima que acaba de publicar (§91) la
mejor casa editorial de Madrid. 12. Es una edicion de lujo
encuadernada en doce voMmenes. 13. — iCudnto vale la
edici6n? — Vale veinticinco pesos. 14. — Es cara; pero la
tomo. 15. — iQuiere Vd. que la mande a su casa? 16. — Sf ;
hdgame Vd. el favor de manddrmela a casa.
B. Contestese. 1. iQuiere Vd. que entremos en la libreria?
2. iQu6 quiere su padre que le compre Vd.? 3. iYa tiene
Vd. muchas obras en su biblioteca? 4. ^Tiene Vd. las Obras
completas de Calder6n de la Barca? 5. iTiene Vd. las Obras
escogidas de Lope de Vega? 6. iCudl es la obra mds
importante de la literatura casteUana? 7. iQui^n escribi6
el Quijotef (Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra.) 8. iQui^n le
aconseja a Vd. que busque una edici6n del Quijotef 9. iCom-
pr6 Vd. una buena edici6n del Quijotef 10. ^Cudntos
voWmenes tiene? 11. iCudnto vale la edici6n? 12. iLa
mand6 el dependiente a la casa de Vd.? 13. iHa lefdo Vd.
esta obra importante? 14. iDesea Vd. leerla?
C. Repitase, usando usted como sujeto de los verbos siibordinados.
1. Deseo dormir bien. (Deseo que Vd. duerma bien.)
2. Carlos desea cerrar la puerta. 3. Ana prefiere escribirla.
4. Preferimos comprar otra edici6n. 5. Quiere mandarla
a casa. 6. Te aconsejo que no entres en esa casa. (Le
aconsejo a Vd. que no entre, etc.) 7. Prohibimos que tii
1^ <-^if*i-(^-^
•PA «PId) ^-lap 8^"^ ^sy "ST 'ps^snqnd %s\
-oiA C®*^^ ^1) ^PW 9^0 ^MX 'ill iS3[aoM s,j
oq:^ SI qoTTiAi "91 "a^nT ^<^^ op I ^'^^'^ ^^^
•BniJJOg JO sinaod 9q^ n'^ p'eai (op Busd
q-^OAS. %ovL St ^i -^f-x 'tnaq^ p'eaj o:^ pna^ui ]
-UJ02 ''Bpaouojdsa JO sraaod dx{% p'eaj %ou s
yCj8A aJB (soqanin sojjo) saaq'^o ^Cu'Eui pu'B ''B
'sa'^n'BAjaQ jo s^jjoai aq^ f jts 'saj^ -gx is-"^
g^iJOM c^u■B:^JodTIII Xu'Bui aaaq"^ aoy 'XX '(^-^^
Snq pu'B (^i (^oaps o^ raiq ^i^b n^qs i -qx i.'^
0% (jos9|Ojd tis b) jaqo^a^ JtioX 3isb (^ou no.
tn %i p'B9i o^ 9UI ^nniad (^ou qiAv aq ('^'Bq:^) s
»}oxmQ uoQ p'Bai p[noqs j '\'ev\} sjajaad aj:
JO nopipa paq.'Bi'^snqi W8 joj :5{oo| o-^ ara sasiA]
-e Xnq 0% ara saqsiM jaqo'Ba:^ Aj^ -5 '(pp
-3iooq piJp'Bj\[ 'B ui ^i puBOj I 'f 1%] iCnq noi
]pM. ifjaA XdoD araospu^q -b aA^q i fits 's
djoxin^ UOQ JO iCdoo pooS 'B Xj'Baqq moA
'PA "^ 'Bpu'Bni Q\ aip'Bd ng) -BprnSos u
9\ u'Bnf 9p ajp'Bd la XI '('^?^ '^^IP ^
ou 8nb Qoip 9:^ t:^ V "TI '^Jdraoo o\ an
la 'OT 'S9J^ua ou anb apid 9^ ajp^d
•e soni'Bfep 91 ojj^) •J'BJ^U9 souiBrap 9^ o
62T
iixxx Nossai
130 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
162. Subjuntivo en clfiusulas substantivadas. — El presente
de subjuntivo puede usarse para expresar una orden o deseo directo
(§§146, 147). Tambi^n se usa para expresar una orden o deseo
indirecto despu^s de los verbos mandar, pedir, querer, preferir,
aconsejar, dejar, probibir, y otros semej antes.
Obs6rvese que en estas f rases el subjuntivo espafiol se traduce al
ingles por (1) el simple subjuntivo, (2) shall, should o may y el infini-
tivo, (3) el infinitivo solamente, y (4) el gerundio.
a. Decir, escribir, y otros verbos semejantes, pueden usarse como
verbos de mando.
153. Si el verbo principal asf como el subordinado en una
frase tienen un mismo sujeto, en espafiol se usa el infinitivo en vez
del subjuntivo.
a. En ingles se usa a menudo el infinitivo aunque el verbo prin-
cipal y el subordinado tengan diferentes sujetos (§152). En este caso,
en espafiol s61o se usa el infinitivo despu6s de determinados verbos,
tales como mandar, dejar, y algunos otros, especialmente cuando el
Bujeto de un verbo subordinado afirmativo es un pronombre personal.
LESSON xxxm
164. Some Irregular Imperatives
Decir : di, decid, say (tell) Venir : ven, venid, come
Hacer : haz, haced, do (make) Ir : ve, id, go
Poner : pen, poned, put (place) Ser : se, sed, be
Tener: ten, tened, have
156. Stem of the Present Subjunctive. — 1. The present
subjunctive has, as a rule, the same stem as that of the first
person singular of the present indicative.
Present Subjunctive
conozc-a, -as, -a, -amos, -4is, -an
dig-a, -as, -a, -amos, -fiis, -an
hag-a, -as, -a, -amos, -6is, -an
teng-a, -as, -a, -amos, -fiis, -an
veng-a, -as, -a, -amos, -fiis, -an
Pres. Ind.
1st Pers. Sing.
Conocer;
: conozc-o ;
Decir:
dig-o;
Hacer:
hag-o ;
Tener :
teng-o ;
Venir:
veng-o;
I
I
LESSON XXXIII 131
2. The exceptions to this general rule are the six verbs
whose present indicative, first person singular, does not end
in -o.
Pres. Ind. Present Subjunctive
1st Pers. Sing.
Dar : doy ; d-e, -es, -e, -emos, -eis, -en
Estar : estoy ; est-e, -es, -e, -emos, -eis, -en
It : voy ; vay-a, -as, -a, -amos, -fiis, -an
Ser : soy ; se-a, -as, -a, -amos, -dis, -an
Haber : he ; hay-a, -as, -a, -amos, -dis, -an
Saber : se ; sep-a, -as, -a, -amos, -iis, -an
3. Poder (ue) and querer (ie) are inflected in the present
subjunctive Uke radical-changing verbs of the second conju-
gation.
156. Subjunctive in Substantive Clauses, Continued. —
1. The subjunctive is required after expressions of feeling
or emotion, such as temer, to fear; esperar,^ to hope; ale-
grarse de, to be glad of; sentir (ie), to regret, be sorry; ser
Ifistima, to be a pity, be too bad, and the Uke.
Tememos que el no llegue a We fear that he will not arrive in
tiempo. time.
Siento que Vd. este enfermo. I am sorry that you are ill.
£s l&stima que Juan no estudie It is a pity that John does not
mfis. study more.
But (§153),
Tememos no llegar a tiempo. We fear that we shall not arrive
in time.
Siento estar enfermo. I am sorry to be ill (that I am ill).
a. A preposition is usually retained before a substantive clause in
Spanish, but omitted in English : me alegro de eso, / am glad of thai;
me alegro de que Vd. no lo crea, I am glad that you do not believe it.
* The future indicative may be used after esperar and temer if certainty
is implied. See XXXVI, Exercises, E. 15.
132 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
2. The subjunctive is required after expressions of doubting
or denying, such as dudar, to doubt, and negar (ie), to deny.
Dudo que sea f eliz. I doubt that (whether) he is {or
he will be) happy.
Niega que sea verdad. He denies that it is true.
167. Expressions of beUeving or saying, such as creer, to
believe, decir, to say, estar seguro de, to be sure of, and the
like, usually take the indicative; but when they are negative
or interrogative they may express doubt or denial, in which
case they take the subjunctive.
Creo que es feliz. I believe that he ia happy.
But, No creo que sea feliz. I do not beUeve that he is happy.
iCtee Vd. que sea feliz? Do you beheve that he is happy?
{The speaker implies that he
is in doubt.)
a. Similarly, no dudo, no niego, and the like, may take the indicative
to stress a fact: no dudo que es feliz, / do not dovbt that he is happy;
no niega que es verdad, he does not deny that it is true.
b. Note that the Spanish present subjunctive may express either
present or future time, and that it is sometimes best translated into
English by the present or the future indicative.
EXERCISES
apenas, scarcely, hardly extranjero, -a, foreign
el buz6n, mail box, letter box el giro, money order, draft
el centavo, cent muchisimo, very much
cerca, near el pais, country
certificar, to register (o letter, parecer, to appear, seem
package, etc.) el porte, postage
el correo, mail, post oflBce"^ salir,^ to go out, leave
costar (ue), to cost el sello, stamp; sello de correo,
echar, to throw, put o sello postal, postage stamp •
enviar, to send
creo que si (que no), I think so (not); esperamos que si (que no),
we hope so (not).
> Post office is also casa de correos.
t Salir is irregular in some tenses (see $274).
* Also called estampilla de correo in some countries.
LESSON XXXIII 133
A. 1. Acabo de escribir algunas cartas a mis amigos en
los Estados Unidos de America. 2. Tengo sobres, pero no
tengo sellos de correo (o sellos postales). 3. Siento muchlsimo
no tener sellos. 4. — iQuiere Vd. que vaya a buscarlos?
5. — SI; tenga Vd. la bondad de ir a buscar diez sellos de
cinco centavos cada uno. 6. Este es el porte de una carta
a un pais extranjero. 7. — iQuiere Vd. que lleve las cartas
al correo? 8. — SI; el correo de la manana sale a las nueve,
9. Temo que Vd. no llegue a tiempo. 10. Dudo que pueda
llegar antes de las nueve. 11. — iQuiere Vd. que certifique
las cartas? 12. — Apenas puedo creer que haya^ tiempo
para eso. 13. Ponga Vd. los sellos y eche las cartas en el
buz6n. 14. Es Idstima que no tengamos sellos de correo
en casa. 15, Pero me alegro de que est6 cerca el correo.
16. iCree Vd. poder llegar al correo antes de las nueve?
17. — Sf, senor; creo que si. 18. — Yo espero que sf; pero
no estoy seguro de que pueda hacerlo. 19. No me parece
probable que llegue antes de las nueve. 20. Hagame Vd.
el favor de traerme diez tar j etas postales de dos centavos
cada una. 21. Manana enviar^ un giro postal de cuarenta
pesos a una casa editorial de Bogotd. 22. Dudo que tenga-
mos tiempo para hacerlo hoy.
B. Contestese. 1. ^A quienes he escrito yo? 2. ^Donde
viven mis amigos? 3. ^Tenemos en casa seUos de correo (o
sellos postales)? 4-5. ^Cual es el porte de una carta (de una
tar j eta postal) a un pals extranjero? 6. ^A qu6 hora sale
el correo de la manana? 7. iCree Vd. que yo pueda llegar
al correo antes de las nueve? {respuesta : Si, senor; creo que
puede, etc.; o, No, senor; no creo que pueda, etc.). 8. iLe
parece a Vd. probable que pueda llegar a esa hora? 9. ^Estd,
Vd. seguro de que no pueda llegar? 10. iQu^ enviar^ yo
manana a una casa editorial de Bogotd? 11. iCree Vd. que
tenga tiempo para hacerlo hoy?
^ Haya is here the present subjunctive corresponding to hay.
134 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
C. RepUase, usando usted como sujeto del verho svbordinado.
I. Temo no llegar a tiempo. (Temo que Vd. no Uegue a
tiempo.) 2. Siento muchlsimo estar enfermo hoy. 3. Espero
poder hacerlo. 4. Me alegro de poder hacerlo. 5. £l estd
seguro de poder llegar a tiempo. 6. lEsti 6\ seguro de poder
llegar a tiempo? 7. Ella niega haberlo hecho.
RepUase con yo sobrentendido, pero no expresado, como sujeto del
verho svbordinado. 8. Siento que no tengamos sellos. (Siento
no tener sellos.) 9. Quiero que Vd. vaya a buscarlos.
10. Deseo que Vd. lleve las cartas al correo. 11. Temo
que Vd. no llegue a tiempo. 12. Espero que Vd. pueda
hacerlo.
D. 1, Bring me five postal cards. 2. I desire you to bring me
also ten postage stamps. 3. The postal cards cost two cents each
(one). 4. The postage stamps cost five cents each (one). 5. Have
you sent the postal money order? 6. I am glad that you have sent
it. 7. Your father wishes you to post ^ this letter. 8. Please post
it at once. 9. We hope that you will buy some Spanish books
(libros en espaflol). 10. And we hope (that) you will read them.
II. I fear (that) you may not read them all. 12. Do you beUeve
(that) Ferdinand has read Don Quixote? 13. No, sir; I do not
believe (that) he has read it. 14. He doesn't say (that) he has
read it. 15. And I beUeve (that) he has not done so (lo).
E. 1. When does the mail for Cuba (para Cuba) leave? 2. It
leaves every third day (cada tres dias) at half-past four in the after-
noon. 3. Will you (i Qui ere Vd.) post this letter? 4. If you have
the time, please register it. 5. I prefer that you should register all
my letters. 6. Is the post office near? — Yes, sir; it is very near.
7. Good! I am glad (that) it is near. 8. But this letter hasn't
Cany] stamp! 9. That is true. Please buy me five postage stamps.
10. Put one stamp on this envelope and bring me the others (los
demfis). 11. I have many other ^ letters to write. 12. What is
the postage of a letter to a foreign country? 13. The postage of a
1 To post = echar al correo or echar en el buz6ii.
t See XXXII, Exerciaes. D. 12.
I
LESSON XXXIII 135
letter is five cents and that (el) of a postal card two cents. 14. Have
you written to your mother this week? 15. No, sir; I have not
written to her this week. 16. I am very sorry that you have not
written to her. 17. I fear that you may not be able to write to her
to-day. 18. I desire you to write if you can (puede) do so. 19. But
I doubt that you will have the time. 20. It is a pity that you do
not write to your family every Sunday (todos los domingos).
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
155. El radical del presente de subjuntivo. — 1. El presente
de subjuntivo tiene, por regla general, el mismo radical que la
primera persona singular del presente de indicativo.
2. Las excepciones de esta regla general son las de los seis verbos
cuya primera persona singular del presente de indicativo no termina
en -o.
3. Los verbos poder y querer se conjugan en el presente de
subjuntivo como los verbos de la segunda conjugaci6n que cambian
su ralz.
156. Subjuntivo en clausulas substantivadas. — 1. Se requiere
el subjuntivo despues de expresiones de sentimiento o emoci6n,
tales como temer, esperar, alegrarse de, sentir, ser lastima, etc.
a. En espanol se usa la preposici6n delante de la clausula substan-
tivada pero se suprime en ingles.
2. Se emplea el subjuntivo despues de expresiones de negaci6n
o duda, tales como dudar y negar.
157. Expresiones que implican ideas de creer o decir, tales como
creer, decir, estar seguro de, rigen, por regla general, al modo indi-
cativo; pero cuando son negativas o inter rogativas, pueden expresar
duda o negaci6n y en este caso rigen al subjuntivo.
a. Del mismo modo, las expresiones no dudo, no niego, etc., pueden
regir al modo indicativo para expresar un hecho.
b. Advidrtase que el presente de subjuntivo en espanol puede indicar
o bien tiempo presente o future, y que se traduce algunas veces al ingl69
per el presente o el futuro de indicativo.
136 FIRST SPANISH COUBSB
LESSON XXXIV
168. Subjunctive in Substantive Clauses, Continued. —
1. The subjunctive is required after such impersonal expres-
sions as es precise, it is necessary; importa, it is important;
conviene,^ it is proper; es posible, it is possible, and the Uke.
Es preciso que el diga la verdad. It is necessary for him to (that he
should) tell the truth.
Importa que lleguemos tem- It is important for us to (that we
prano. should) arrive early.
No es posible que yo lo haga. It is not possible for me to do it.
2. After most of these expressions the infinitive is used,
as in English, if it does not have a definite subject, and it
may be used if, in Spanish, its logical subject is an unstressed
personal pronoun object of the principal verb.
Importa llegar temprano. It is important to arrive early.
Nos importa llegar temprano. It is important for us to arrive
early.
No es posible hacerlo. It is not possible to do it.
No me es posible hacerlo. It is not possible for me to do it.
159. Imperfect (or Past) Subjunctive. — Spanish has two
imperfect tenses of the subjunctive mood. These tenses may
be formed for all verbs, both regular and irregular, by adding
the following endings to the stem of the preterite indicative,
third person: *
1. -ase, -ases, -ase, -asemos, -aseis, -asen
2. -ara, -aras, -ara, -firamos, -arais, -aran
TT J TTT f !• -lese, -leses, -lese, -lei
II and III. \ n ■ ' . .-
(^ 2. -lera, -leras, -lera, -le
> Convenir is inSected like venir (§264).
-lesemos, -leseis, -lesen
ieramos, -ierais, -ieran
LESSON XXXIV 137
Pret. Ind. Past Subjimctive
3d Pers. PL Hablar
, ^, f 1. habl-ase, -ases, -ase, -^semos, -aseis, -asen
habl-aroii. <^,,, -
' [ 2. habl-ara, -aras, -ara, -aramos, -arais, -aran
Aprender
f 1. aprend-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen
aprend-ieron, ) o
viv-ieron,
aprend-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran
Vivir
-iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen
ieramos, -ierais, -ieran
r 1. viv-iese, -ieses, -iese, -
\ 2. viv-iera, -ieras, -iera, -i
Pedir
.^ . f 1. pid-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen
Did-ieron. s ^ . , . . . . - . . .
*^ ' {2. pid-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran
Tener
f 1. tuv-iese, -ieses, -iese, -iesemos, -ieseis, -iesen
tuv-ieron, > o i_ • • ... ...
' { 2. tuv-iera, -ieras, -iera, -ieramos, -ierais, -ieran
a. In subordinate clauses either form may be used, but the form in
-ra is more common in Spanish America.
6. Note the absence of i in fueron, etc., and in dijeron, etc.
160. Use of the Imperfect Subjunctive. — 1. If the prin-
cipal verb of a sentence is past or conditional, the sub-
ordinate subjunctive verb is usually in the imperfect tense.
Yo queria que Vd. fuera f eliz. I wished you to be (that you might
be) happy.
Temiamos que el no llegara We feared that he would not
temprano. arrive early.
Negd que fuese verdad. He denied that it was true.
No seria posible que Pablo lo It would not be possible for Paul
hiciera. to do it.
But (§153), Yo queria ser f eliz. I wished to be happy.
Temiamos no llegar temprano. We feared that we should not
arrive early.
No serfa posible hacerlo. It would not be possible to do it.
138 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
2. The present perfect or the imperfect subjunctive is
used after the present tense if the time of the subordinate
verb is logically past.
Siento que Vd. haya estado en- I am sorry that you have been ill.
fermo.
Dudo que fuese feliz. I doubt that he was happy.
EXERCISES
acudir, to come (to), go
(to)
Uorar, to weep, cry
la aguja, needle _
la mamA, mamma, mother
aun, even; alin, yet ^
la manga, sleeve
el botdn, button
remendar (ie), to mend
la cajita,^ little box
rogar (ue), to request, ask
calzarse, to put on one's shoes
romper, to break, tear
(boots)
la ropa, clothes
castigar, to punish
roto, -a, broken, torn
cumplir, to fulfil
subir a, to go up to, climb
el dedal, thimble
las tijeras, scissors; unas tijeras,
descoser, to rip
a pair of scissors
la gorra, cap
el traje, suit {of clothes)
el hilo, thread, linen
usar, to use, wear
Juanito,* Johnny
el vestido, dress
dejd de llorar, he stopped crying; ayer cimiplid echo aflos, he was
eight years old yesterday.
A. 1. Juanito se rompe siempre la ropa. 2. Cuando se
rompi6 la chaqueta al subir a un drbol, acudi6 a su mamd y le
rog6 que le remendara en seguida la chaqueta. 3. La mamd
hallo roto un bolsillo y descosida una manga. 4. Ella busc6
una aguja e (and) hilo, el dedal, las tijeras y la cajita de
botones, y remend6 la chaqueta. 5. Para castigar a Juanito,
la madre no le permiti6 llevar mds aquel dla su traje nuevo.
6. Juanito tuvo que ponerse una chaqueta usada, pantalones
rotos y una gorra vieja. 7. Ayer cumpU6 Juanito ocho afios,
pero es todavia muy {very much of a) niiio. 8. No puede
1 Diminutive of caja, box. * Diminutive of Juan.
LESSON XXXIV 139
lavarse, vestirse ni calzarse. 9. Esta manana rog6 a su
mam^ que le pusiera la blusa y los zapatos. 10. Llora
cuando su mamd le lava la cara y las manos con agua y
jabon. 11. Llora cuando ella le peina y cepilla el pelo (los
cabellos). 12. Y llora aun mds cuando ella le cepilla los
dientes con polvos.
B. Contestese. 1. iQui^n se rompe siempre la ropa?
2. iQu6 se rompio al subir a un drbol? 3. ^A qui^n acudio?
4. iQu6 le rogo a su mamd? 5. iQue hallo roto la mamd?
6. iQu6 liall6 descosido la mamd? . 7. iQue busco ella
para remendar la chaqueta? 8. ^Como castigo a Juanito?
9. iQu6 tuvo que ponerse Juanito? 10. iCudntos aiios cum-
plio Juanito ayer? 11. ^Puede lavarse, vestirse y calzarse?
12. iQu6 le rogo a su mamd esta manana? 13. iCudndo
llora 41?
C. 1. iCvAles son las dos formas del imperfedo de svb-
juntivo de estar, haber, decir, hacer, ir, venir? 2. iCudles
son las dos formas del pluscuamperfecto de subjuntivo {usense
como verhos auxiliares hubiese, -eses, etc., y hubiera, -eras,
etc.) de los verhos hablar, aprender, vivir?
D. Repitase, con el verba principal en el imperfecta de indi-
cativo. 1. Importa que Ueguemos temprano. (Importaba
que Uegdramos temprano.) 2. Nos importa Uegar temprano.
(Nos importaba Uegar temprano.) 3. No es posible que yo
lo haga. 4. No me es posible hacerlo. 5. ^Quiere Vd. que
yo Ueve las cartas al correo? 6. Deseo que Vd. certifique las
cartas. 7. Apenas puedo creer que haya tiempo. 8. No
estoy seguro de que Vd. pueda hacerlo. 9. iCree Vd. que
sea posible?
Repitase, con el verba principal en el presente de indicativo, y
despu^s en el futuro de indicativo. 10. Prohihi que Vd. entrase
en esa casa. (Prohibo que Vd. entre, etc. Prohibir6 que Vd.
entre, etc.) 11. Era preciso que dijera la verdad. 12. Vd.
140 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
neg6 que fuese verdad. 13. No serfa posible que yo lo
hiciera. 14. Yo queria ser feliz. 15. El dud6 que tuvi^se-
mos tiempo. 16. Ellos sentlan muchisimo que estuvi^ramos
enfermos.
E. 1. It was not possible for me to go to the post office. 2. It
was necessary that you should post the letter. 3. It was important
that you should arrive early. 4. We feared that you could not do
it. 5. Do you believe that he has put stamps on the envelopes?
6. No, sir; I can scarcely believe that he has done so. 7. I doubt
that he has bought [any] stamps. 8. Did Johnnie tear h's coat?
9. Yes, sir; and he asked his mother to mend it. 10. Did she mend
it? 11. I doubt that she has mended it yet. 12. Did she permit
him to wear (Uevar) his new suit? 13. No, sir; she told him to
put-on his old suit. 14. Did Johnnie cry? 15. Yes, sir; he cried
a long time (mucho tiempo) and his mother punished him.
16. Did he stop crying when his mother punished him? 17. No,
air; he cried even more.
F. 1. Annie (Anita ^) is the daughter of Mr. and Mrs. Enrfquez.
2. She was five years old last Monday. 3. She is a handsome
dark-complexioned-httle-girl (trigueflita^). 4. But she cries when
her mother washes her face with water and soap. 5. And she cries
even more when her mother brushes her teeth. 6. Yesterday Annie
tore her new dress. 7. She went weeping to her mother and asked
her to mend it. 8. Her mother told her to go and get a needle and
thread. 9. While she was mending the dress she asked: ' How did
you (tii) tear your dress? 10. Annie answered: I tore it while
cUmbing (al subir a) a tree. 11. To (Para) punish Annie her
mother told her to wear an old dress. 12. She forbade her (le)
to cUmb (§152) the tree C^ny] more. 13. She said that it was
necessary that she should stop cUmbing trees (§103, 1). 14. And
that it was too bad that she had torn (hubiera roto) her new dress.
15. Annie was very sorry that she had done so (lo). 16. She told
her mother that she would not chmb the tree again (otra vez).
17. The mother kissed Annie and the child stopped crying.
» Diminutive of Ana, Anna. » Rogar or preguntar?
» Diminutive of trigueila.
LESSON XXXV 141
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
168. Subjuntivo en clausulas substantivadas. — 1. Se usa el
subjuntivo despu^s de expresiones impersonales tales como es
precise, importa, conviene, es posible, etc.
2. Despu^s de la mayor parte de estas expresiones, se usa el
infinitivo como en ingles si carece de sujeto determinado, y tam-
bi^n puede usarse si el sujeto 16gico es un pronombre personal
no acentuado complemento del verbo principal.
159. Imperf ecto (o pasado) de subjuntivo. — El espanol tiene
dos tiempos imperfectos en el subjuntivo. Estos tiempos pueden
formarse en todos los verbos, tanto regulares como irregulares,
anadiendo las siguientes terminaciones al radical de la tercera
persona del pret^rito (pasado absoluto) de indicativo: . . .
a. En las cldusulas subordinadas puede usarse cualquiera de las dos
formas, pero en la America espanola prefieren la forma en -ra.
6. N6tese la falta de i en fueron, etc., y en dijeron, etc.
160. Uso del imperf ecto de subjuntivo. — 1. Si el verbo princi-
pal de una frase estd en tiempo pasado o condicional, el verbo sub-
ordinado generalmente estd en el imperf ecto de subjuntivo.
2. El presente perfecto o el imperf ecto de subjuntivo se emplean
despu^s del presente si el tiempo de la acci6n indicada por el verbo
subordinado es 16gicamente pasado.
LESSON XXXV
161. Subjunctive in Adjectival Clauses. — The sub-
junctive is used in adjectival clauses ^ (introduced by a
relative pronoun):
1. After a negative.
No encontre a nadie que ha- I did not find anyone who spoke
blase espailol. Spanish,
» A clause that modifies a noun or pronoun is called an adjectival clause.
142
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
2. If the relative pronoun has an indefinite antecedent.
Yo buscaba un hombre que
hablase espailol.
But, Yo conocia a tin hombre
que hablaba espafiol.
Prometi6 dar im premlo al
alumno que escribiera el
mejor tema.
But, Di6 tin premio al que
escribid el mejor tema.
Todo viajero que tome este
tren habrS de comprar tm
billete de primera clase.
I was looking for a man (.= any
man) who spoke Spanish.
I knew a man (= some definite
man) who spoke Spanish.
He promised to give a prize to
the student (= any student)
who should write the best
theme.
He gave a prize to the one (= some
definite one) who wrote the best
theme.
Every passenger (whoever he may
be) who shall take this train will
have to buy a first-class ticket.
3. In clauses containing whoever, whatever, however.
Quienquiera que sea.
Sea lo que sea.
Por bueno que sea.
Whoever he may be.
Whatever it may be.
However good it may be.
162. The present indicative of caer, to fall, oir, to hear,
salir, to go out, and valer, to be worth, is:
Singular Plural Singular Plural
Caer: caigo caemos Salir: salgo salimos
sails
salen
Ofr:
caes
caeis
cae
caen
oigo
ofmos
eyes
ois
oye
oyen
Valer:
sales
sale
valgo
vales
vale
valemos
valeis
valen
What is the present subjunctive of these verbs? (see §155)
163. The future indicative of salir and valer is:
Salir: saldr-6, -&s, -a, -emos, -eis, -fin
Valer: valdr-e, -fis, -fi, -emos, -eis, -fin
What is the conditional tense of these verbs?
LESSON XXXV 143
164. The imperative of oir, salir, and valer is:
Oir : oye, old
Salir: sal, salid
Valer : val, valed =
All other forms of the above verbs are regular. Note, however, the
orthography of caer and oir (§ 114, 2, and § 126, 4).
EXERCISES
el algod6n, cotton
la cabritilla, kid
la camisa, shirt
la cantidad, amount, quantity
cargar, to charge
la cosa, thing
el cuello, neck, collar
la cuenta, account, bill
desatar, to untie
la docena, dozen
gastar, to spend
mostrar (ue), to show
pagar, to pay
el pafluelo, handkerchief
el paquete, package
el par, pair
la pechera, bosom {of a shirt)
la pieza, piece, article
el puflo, fist, cuff
la seda, silk
el surtido, supply, stock
vender, to sell
vistoso, -a, bright-colored,
showy
de moda, in fashion, fashionable; al contado, for cash; al fiado, on
credit; de color, colored
A. 1. Hoy gaste mds de {than) cincuenta pesos. 2. Fuf
a una tienda y compre a (o/) un dependiente un par de
guantes de cabritilla que me costaron dos pesos. 3. Tam-
bien compre una docena de paiiuelos de hilo que valfan
treinta y cinco centavos cada uno. 4. Le pregunt^ al depen-
diente: iTiene Vd. camisas del niimero quince que tengan la
pechera y los puiios de hilo? 5. El me contest©: Si, senor;
ilas quiere Vd. blancas o de color? 6. Le respondf: Las
prefiero blancas. 7. Compre media docena de camisas y
una docena de cuellos. 8. Despues me dijo el dependiente:
iNecesita Vd. corbatas? 9. Tenemos el surtido mds com-
plete que hay en la ciudad. 10. Le contests : Tenga Vd.
la bondad de mostrarme (o, ensefiarme) algunas de seda.
144 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
11. Deseo dos o tres que no scan muy vistosas. 12. fil me
contest6: No tenemos corbatas de color que no sean vistosas.
13. Este invierno las corbatas vistosas estdn de moda.
14. No encontr^ ninguna corbata que me gustase. 15. Pero
compr6 diez pares de calcetines y alguna ropa interior.
16. Cuando hube escogido estas piezas, le dije al dependiente
que me las cargara en cuenta. 17. Me contest6 que vendia
siempre al contado y no al fiado. 18. Pagu6 la cuenta y
rogue al dependiente que me lo mandase todo a casa.
19. For la tarde recibi los paquetes. 20. Los desat6 y en-
contr6 todas las cosas que habla comprado.
B. Cordestese. 1. ^Cudntos pesos gast6 Vd. hoy?
2. iCudnto costaron los guantes de cabritilla que Vd. corn-
pro? 3. ^Cudnto valian los panuelos de hilo? 4. iPrefiere
Vd. los paiiuelos de hilo a los (those) de algodon? 5. iPre-
fiere Vd. las camisas blancas a las de color? 6. iPrefiere
Vd. las camisas con pechera de hilo o con pechera de seda?
7. iCudntos cuellos compr6 Vd.? 8. iLe gustan a Vd. las
corbatas vistosas? 9. ^Estdn de moda? 10. iQu6 color
le gusta a Vd. mds? 11. ^Prefiere Vd. comprar al fiado o al
contado? 12. Cuando Vd. compra un traje (un vestido),
idesea Vd. que el dependiente se lo cargue en cuenta? 13. O
iprefiere Vd. pagar la cuenta desde luego? 14. iPag6 Vd.
la cuenta de hoy?
C. Repltase, con el verho principal, en el presente de indicaiivo.
1. Yo buscaba una corbata que no fuese vistosa. (Yo busco
una corbata que no sea vistosa.) 2. No encontrd ninguna
que me gustara. 3. No tenfan corbatas de color que no
fueran vistosas. 4. Si, senor; tenfan corbatas que no eran
vistosas. 5. Yo encontr^ una que me gustaba. 6. Bused'
bamos panuelos que no fueran de algod6n. 7. Por buenos
que fuesen, no nos gustaban los (those) de algodon. 8. ^No
tenlan camisas que costasen menos? 9. No, senor; no
I
I
LESSON XXXV 145
encontre ninguna que costara menos. 10. SI, senor; yo
encontr^ una docena que costaban menos. 11. iEncontr6
Vd. un dependiente que hablase ingles? 12. No encontr^
ninguno que hablara ingles. 13. Yo encontr^ a uno que
hablaba bien el ingles.
D. 1. We are looking for a boy who speaks Spanish. 2. Do
you know a boy who speaks Spanish? 3. I do know (Si conozco)
one who speaks Spanish very well. 4. He promised to give a dollar
to the student who should write the best exercise, whoever he
might be. 5. And he gave the dollar to the one who wrote the
best exercise. 6. However good it might be, an exercise would
not be worth a dollar. 7. We desire you to hear all that (todo lo
que) he may say. 8, It is necessary that you should hear it. 9. We
heard all that he said. 10. We are looking for silk handkerchiefs
(pafluelos de seda) that cost twenty-five cents each (one). 11. Have
you any that cost that amount? 12. No, sir; but I have some that
cost thirty cents each (one). 13. I do not see any (ninguno) that
I like. 14. I have some that you wiU like (fvi. ind.). 15. They are
of white silk.
E. 1. What did you buy to-day at Rodrfguez's shop? 2. I
bought a ready-made suit (un traje hecho) and some underclothes.
3. The suit cost me twenty dollars and the underclothes ten dollars.
4. Did you not buy shirts and collars too? 5. No, sir; I didn't
find any (ninguno) that I liked. 6. I looked for some colored
shirts without cuffs, but I could not find them. 7. Do you know
why white shirts (§103, 1) cost more than colored ones (las de
color)? 8. White shirts are of better hnen (de hilo de mejor
clase), are they not (^no es verdad?)? 9. I asked the clerk if he
had some red silk ties (= ties of red silk) that were not very
bright-colored. 10. He told me that bright-colored ties are in
fashion this year. 1 1 . I bought one dozen white handkerchiefs that
cost me ten cents each (one). 12. I do not know whether they
are (si son) of cotton or of hnen. 13. If they cost ten cents each
(one), I do not beheve that they are of hnen. 14. You will have to
pay twenty or twenty-five cents for (por) each one if they are (of)
linen. 15. Did you buy the articles (cosas) for cash or on credit?
146 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
16, I told the clerk to charge them on account. 17. He answered
that they didn't sell on credit. 18. He said (that) they always
sold for cash. 19. I paid the bill and received the things this
afternoon.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
161. Se usa el subjuntivo en clfiusulas adjetivadas (introducidas
por un pronombre relativo) :
1. Despu^s de una expresi6n negativa.
2. Siempre que el pronombre relativo tenga un antecedente
indeterminado.
3. Con las expresiones quienquiera, como quiera, etc.
LESSON XXXVI
165. Subjunctive in Adverbial Clauses. — The subjunc-
tive is used in adverbial clauses: ^
1. After the temporal conjunctions cuando, when, antes
que, before, hasta que, until, luego que, as soon as, mientras
(que), as long as, while, and the like, if future time is implied.
Cuando venga a verme, le "When he comes to see me, I shall
recibire cordialmente. receive liim cordially.
No lo venda Vd. antes que Do not sell it before I see it.
yo lo vea.
Dijo que esperaria hasta que He said that he would wait imtil
llegara el tren. the train arrived (or, should
arrive).
a. If future time is not implied, the indicative is used: cuando viene
a verme, siempre le recibo cordialmente, when he comes to see me, I
always receive him cordially; cuando vino a verme, le recibi cordial-
mente, when he came to see we, / received him cordially.
2. After para que, in order that, de modo (manera) que,
80 as, so that, con tal que or siempre que, provided that, a
menos que, unless, aunque, although, even if, dado que, granted
*■ A clause that modifies a verb is called an adverbial clause.
I
LESSON XXXVI 147
that, and the like, if the subordinate verb does not state
something as an accompUshed fact.
Le di papel, pltuna y tinta I gave him paper, pen and ink in
para que escribiese la carta. order that he should write the
letter.
Me escribi6 que compraria la He wrote me that he would buy
casa con tal que yo hiciese the house provided (that) I
las reparaciones necesarias. should make the necessary re-
pairs.
No aprendere esta leccidn I shall not learn this lesson even
aunque estudie toda la if (although) I study all night,
noche.
a. After aunque, de mode que, and the like, the indicative is used
to state something as an accomphshed fact : no aprendi la leccidn aun-
que estudie toda la noche, I did not learn the lesson although I studied
all night.
166. Conditional Clauses. — 1. The imperfect subjunc-
tive is used in a conditional clause (or if-clause) to imply
that the statement is either contrary to fact in the present
or doubtful in the future.
Si yo tuviese (o tuviera) If I had money, I should buy it
dinero, lo compraria desde immediately.
luego.
(This impUes: No tengo dinero.)
Si yo tuviese (o tuviera) If I should have money to-morrow,
dinero maflana, lo com- I should buy it.
praria.
(This impUes: Es dudoso {doubtful) que tenga dinero mafLana.)
2. In the conclusional clause of such a sentence the con-
ditional tense or, less often, the imperfect subjunctive in -ra
is used, but not the imperfect subjunctive in -se.
Si yo tuviera, o tuviese. If I had money, I should buy it.
dinero, lo compraria (o lo
comprara).
148 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
EXERCISES
la bota, high shoe, boot (= high la paja, straw
shoe) la pluinafuente,* fountain pen
el calzado, footwear el portamonedas, purse
el chanclo, rubber overshoe, go- las reparaciones, repairs
losh ^ el sastre, tailor
el dinero, money la sastreria, tailor shop
el fieltro, felt la sombrererfa, hat shop, hatter's
el frac, evening coat, "dress" el sombrerero, hatter, dealer in
coat hats
el hongo, " derby " hat, " bowler " * la suela, sole {of a shoe) *
lastimar, to hurt la zapateria, shoe store
la llave, key el zapatero, shoemaker
la medida, measure la zapatilla, slipper '
el objeto, object
la beta de montar, riding boot; el sombrero de ala ancha, broad-
brimmed hat; el traje de etiqueta, evening clothes, " dress " suit; me
mande hacer vm traje, I had, or I ordered, a suit made; me sienta (o
me cae) bien, it fits me well
A. 1. Entr^ en una sastreria. 2. Me mand6 hacer un
traje, y el sastre me tomo la medida. 3. Me pregunto el
sastre si queria levita o americana (saco). 4. Me dijo
que la levita estaba mds de moda. 5. Yo le contest! que
preferia la americana (el saco) aunque estuviera mds de
moda la levita. 6. Tambi^n me mand! hacer un traje de
etiqueta, frac y pantalon negros y chaleco bianco. 7. No
compro nunca los trajes hechos. 8. No me sientan (caen)
bien. 9. Yo necesito muchos bolsillos. 10. Llevo en ellos
muchos objetos: el reloj, el portamonedas, las Haves, un
paiiuelo, un cortaplumas y un Idpiz o una plumafuente.
^ In most Spanish-American countries called zapato (o zapat&n) de goma,
or zapato de hule (as in Mexico).
' Also called bombln (as in Mexico).
* Also pluma de fuente, or pluma estilogrifica (as in Spain).
* The sole of the foot is la planta del pie.
' Moorish alippers; without coimter, are babuchaik
I
LESSON XXXVI 149
11. Despu^s fill a una zapateria donde habfa un buen surtido
de toda clase de calzado. 12. Compr6 al dependiente un
par de botas, dos pares de zapatos y un par de zapatillas.
13. Tambi^n compre un par de chanclos (zapatos de goma)
que me pondr6 cuando llueva. 14. Mand6 poner medias
suelas a un par de zapatos viejos. 15. No me gustan las
botas de montar porque me lastiman los pies. 16. Pero
le dije al dependiente que comprarfa un par de botas de
montar con tal que no me lastimaran los pies. 17. No
las compr6 hoy, pero las comprar^ cuando vuelva otra vez,
siempre que tenga dinero. 18. Ful tambi^n a una som-
brererfa. 19. Compr6 al sombrerero un hongo y un som-
brero de fieltro. 20. Comprar^ un sombrero de paja de ala
ancha cuando llegue el verano.
B. 1. iEn d6nde entr6 Vd.? 2. Cuando Vd. mand6
hacer un traje, lqu6 le tom6 el sastre? 3. iQu6 le pre-
gunt6 a Vd. el sastre? 4. ^Cudl estaba mds de moda,
la levita o la americana (el saco)? 5. iCudl preferfa Vd.
aunque no estuviera de moda? 6. ^Cudles son las prendas
(parts) de un traje de etiqueta? 7. iPor que no le gustan
a Vd. los trajes hechos? 8. iQue lleva Vd. en los bolsUlos?
9. iEn donde venden el calzado? 10. iQui^n vende el cal-
zado? 11. iQu6 clase de calzado compro Vd.? 12-13. En
el invierno (En el verano) iprefiere Vd. las botas a los
zapatos? 14. iCudndo se pondrd, Vd. los chanclos (zapatos
de goma)? 15. iQu6 mand6 Vd. poner a un par de zapatos
viejos? 16. iPor qu6 no le gustan a Vd. las botas de montar?
17. iComprard, Vd. un par con tal que no le lastimen los
pies? 18. iEn d6nde venden los. sombreros? 19. iQui^n
vende los sombreros? 20. ^Prefiere Vd. el hongo al som-
brero de fieltro? 21. iCudndo comprard Vd. un sombrero
de paja? 22. ^Quiere Vd. que sea de ala ancha?
C. Lease A., usando la tercera persona de los verbos en lugar de
la primera.
150 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
D. 1. When (^A que hora) will the train arrive? 2. I shall
wait until the train arrives. 3. I shall leave (Partire) when the
train arrives. 4. The train arrived at three o'clock. 5. I waited
until the train should arrive. 6. I left when the train arrived,
7-8. He asks (He asked) him not to sell the piano before Mary
sees (saw) it. 9. He sold it before Mary saw (viera) it. 10. We
shall speak so as not to offend anyone. 11. We spoke so that we
did not offend anyone. 12. I shall buy the house provided you
make the repairs. 13. Will you (,;Quiere Vd.) make them?
14. They said (that) they would learn the lesson even if they
studied all night. 15. But they did not learn the lesson although
they did study all night. 16. If ready-made suits fitted him well,
he would buy one. 17. If he had the money, he would have a
good suit made. 18. If straw hats were in fashion, I should buy
one. 19. If it were (hiciera or hiciese) cold, you would prefer a
felt hat, would you not? 20. Should you wear (^Usarla Vd.)
riding boots if they did not hurt yom- feet? 21. If I rode on horse-
back, I should wear riding boots.
E. 1. Mr. (§103, 2) Martinez is a (§74) tailor and he has the
best tailor shop in (the) town. 2. When I wish a suit that will fit
(§161, 2) me well, I go to his tailor shop. 3. His suits cost more
than ready-made suits (§103, 1), but they are much better.
4. When (the) autumn comes {usese Uegar), I shall have a woolen
suit made. 5. Unless the suit fits me well, I shan't accept it. 6. And
I want a suit that has a-lot-of (muchos) pockets. 7. In one vest
(waistcoat) pocket ( = one pocket of the vest) I carry my (el) watch
and in another my (el) penknife. 8. I carry my (las) keys in a
trousers pocket. 9. There are many kinds of men's suits: those
with (los de) frock coat, with (de) evening coat, sack coat,
jacket, etc. (etcetera). 10. In the morning I use [[a] sack coat
and I use [a] frock coat in the afternoon; but at night a (el)
" dress " coat is more suitable (propio). 11. Mr. Gonzdlez bought
this morning a pair of high shoes (boots). 12. He told the shoe-
maker to put half soles on (a) the old shoes (botas). 13. In (the)
summer he prefers low shoes and in (the) winter he prefers high
shoes (boots). 14. As soon as the rainy season (la estacidn de
lIuTias) begins, he will buy a pair of rubber overshoes (goloshes).
LESSON XXXVI 151
15. I hope (that) he will buy (comprarfi) them before the rains
(las Uuvias) begin. 16. Shall you wear a straw hat when summer
comes? 17. Do you like a broad-brimmed hat? 18. In (the)
winter you prefer a felt hat, do you not? 19. Although a (el)
" derby " may be more fashionable, I shall wear a felt hat this
winter. 20. I shall buy it of (al) Mr. Herrera, because he's the
best hatter in (de la) town.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
165. Subjuntivo en cldusulas adverbiales. — Se emplea el
subjuntivo:
1. Despu^s de las conjunciones temporales cuando, antes que,
hasta que, luego que, mientras (que), etc., siempre que se impUque
tiempo futuro.
a. Pero si las expresiones anteriores no implican tiempo futuro, se
usa el indicative.
2. Despu^s de para que, de mode (manera) que, con tal que,
siempre que, a menos que, aunque, dado que, etc., siempre que el
verbo subordinado no exprese algo ya sucedido.
a. Despu^s de aimque, de mode que, y otras conjunciones semejantes,
se usa el indicative para expresar algo como un hecho ya sucedido.
166. Cldusulas condicionales. — 1. El imperfect© de subjuntivo
se usa en cldusulas condicionales para indicar que la expresi6n
es contraria a la verdad en el presente o dudosa en el futuro.
2. En las cldusulas terminales de tales frases se usan el con-
dicional o, con menos frecuencia, el imperfecto de subjuntivo en
-ra, pero nunca el imperfecto de subjuntivo en -se.
162 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
LESSON XXXVII
167. Use of Ojal4 (que) with the Subjunctive
{Ojal& (que) ^ viva nul alios! Oh, that he may {pr, I hope he
will) live a thousand years I
|Ojalfi(que)viviese(oviviera) Oh, that he might {or, I wish he
mil afios! would) Uve a thousand years I
|Ojali (que) yo pudiera I wish I could do it!
hacerlol
168. Softened Statement
1. Yo quisiera vender la casa. I should like {or, I should be glad)
to seU the house.
Yo quisiera que Vd. la comprase I wish you would buy it.
(o comprara).
Vd. debiera hacer las repara- You ought to (or, should) make
clones. the repairs.-
o. These are milder expressions, and therefore more commonly used,
than the following:
Quiero vender la casa. I want to sell the house.
Quiero que Vd. la compre. I wish you to buy it.
Vd. debe hacer las repara- You must make the repairs,
clones.
2. The conditional is also thus used.
Me gustarfa mucho hacerlo. I should be very glad to do so.
Ella preferiria pasearse en She would prefer to go driving.
coche.
169. Will and Should
Will (= am, art, is, etc., willing) is expressed by quier-o,
-cs, -e, etc.
Should (= oiight to) is expressed by debier-a, -as, etc.
iQuiere Vd. venderla? Will you sell it?
^Debiera (o deberia) yo hacerlo? Should I do it?
1 Que is often omitted after ojal&.
LESSON XXXVII 153
170. Future (or Hypothetical) Subjunctive. — This tense
may be formed for all verbs by adding the following endings
to the stem of the preterite indicative, third person:
I: -are, -ares, -are, -firemos, -areis, -aren
II and III: -iere, -ieres, -iere, -ieremos, -iereis, -ieren
S^P^r^Pl. Future Subjunctiye
Hablar : habl-aron ; habl-are, -ares, -are, -firemos, -areis, -aren
Pedir: pid-ieron; pid-iere, -ieres, -iere, -ieremos, -iereis,
-ieren
Estar: estuv-ieron; estuv-iere, -ieres, -iere, -ieremos, -iereis,
-ieren
Note that the imperfect subjimctive tenses are also formed from the
stem of the preterite, third person.
171. Use of the Future Subjunctive. — The future sub-
junctive denotes a condition or hypothesis. In the spoken
Spanish of to-day it is rarely used except in proverbs, legal
expressions, etc. Its place is regularly taken by the pres-
ent subjunctive, or by the present indicative if used with
si, if.
Donde fueres, haz como Wherever you go, do as you see.
vieres. (cf. " When in Rome, do as the
Romans do.")
Si algtin accionista pidiere (o If any shareholder asks that the
pide) que la reimi6n se meeting be postponed, the ma-
difiera, decidirt la mayor ia. jority shall decide.
172. Traer, to bring
Present Indicative Preterite Indicative
Singular Plural Singular Plural
traigo traemos traje trajimos
traes traeis trajiste trajisteis
trae traen trajo trajeron*
Other forms of the indicative, and the imperative, are regular.
What are the four subjunctive tenses of traer?
» Since i ia omitted from trajeron (the ending is -eron instead of -ieron),
it is also omitted from trajese, trajera, and trajere. See also dijeron (from
decir) : dijese, dijera, dijere (§277).
154 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
173. -uir Verbs. — These verbs add y to th . stem vowel
u except before an inflectional ending that begins with i
or y.
Huir, loflcc
Present Indicative Imperative
Singular PLUKAii Singular Plural
huyo htiimos
huyes htiis huye huid
huye huyen
a. In huy6 and huyeron the y is a part of the inflectional ending
(§114, 2).
What are the four subjunctive tenses of huir?
6. Like huir are inflected construir, to huUd, construct, instruir, to
instruct, etc.
EXERCISES
aficionado, -a (a), fond (of) manso, -a, gentle, tame
el almid6n, starch marcar, to mark
almidonar, to starch la nulla, mile
la caballeriza, stable pasearse, to walk, drive, or ride
el coche, carriage for pleasure
encoger(se), to shrink planchar, to iron
la espuela, spur ^ el precio, price
hervir (ie), to boil la raza, race, breed
el jinete, horseman la silla, chair, saddle
el kilfimetro, kilometer (= | mile) subido, -a, high
el lavandero, laundryman; la tibio, -a, lukewarm
lavandera, laundress el tiro, pull; caballo de tiro, driv-
ligero, -a, Ught, fast ing horse
hacer advertencies, to give directions; dar im paseo, to take a
walk, ride, etc.
A. 1. Cuando el lavandero (la lavandera) venga por la
ropa, yo quisiera que Vd. le hiciera las siguientes advertencias.
2. Me gustarfa que estuvieran bien almidonados los cuellos,
los pufios y las pecheras de las camisas. 3. Pero la ropa
* Sptirs with a single sharp point are called los acicates.
LESSON XXXVII 155
interior la ^ quisiera sin almidon. 4. La ropa de lana debiera
lavarse con agua tibia y no ponerse en agua hirviendo, por-
que se encoge. 5. La ropa de hilo y de algod6n puede
lavarse con agua caliente. 6. Tambi6n quisiera todas las
piezas bien planchadas. 7. Toda la ropa estd marcada.
B. 1. ^No quisiera Vd. venir a la caballeriza a ver nues-
tros caballos? 2. — Con mucho gusto. Soy aficionado a
los caballos de silla (saddle horses). 3. — Tenemos tambi^n
hermosos caballos de tiro. 4. — S6 que todos los caballos
de Vds. son de buena raza. 5. — Sf, senor; mi padre paga
precios subidos por ellos. 6. Mi hermana tiene un caballo
muy manso. 7. Ella monta a caballo casi todos los dias,
si hace {it is) buen tiempo. 8. — jOjald, que la mia hiciera lo
mismo! 9. Pero prefiere pasearse en coche o en autom6vil.
10. Yo tengo un caballo muy ligero que puede correr veinte
kilometros por hora (an hour). 11. Prefiero este caballo a
todos los demds.
C. Coniestese. 1. iQui^n vendrd por la ropa? 2. iQu6
advertencias quiere Vd. que yo le haga?
D. Coniestese. 1. ^Es Vd. aficionado (-a) a los caballos?
% iLe gusta a Vd. montar a caballo? 3. ^Son de buena
raza los caballos de Vds.? 4. iPag6 su senor padre precios
subidos por ellos? 5. iCudles -costaron mds, los caballos de
silla o los (caballos) de tiro? 6. iCudles son mds hermosos?
7. iTiene la hermana de Vd. un caballo manso? 8. ^Prefiere
montar a caballo o pasearse en autom6vil? 9. iTiene Vd.
un caballo hgero? 10. iCudntos kildmetros (iCudntas mil-
las) puede correr por hora?
E 1. We should like to sell the house. 2. We wish you (Vds.)
would buy the house. 3. We should like to sell it. 4. We should
like you to buy it (or, We wish you would buy it). 5. Will you
^ Note the personal pronoun la used here because the noun object (/.)
precedes the verb.
156 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
buy it? 6. I should study more. 7. I must study more. 8. I
have [gotj to study more. 9. I should study more if I had the
time. 10. Bring me a glass of water. 11. Please bring it at once.
12. I wish you would bring it now. 13. The house is built of
brick(s). 14. I wish my house to be built ^ of stone. 15. Should
you like your house to be built ^ of wood (madera)? 16. Please
have (= order) a new suit made. 17. The suit (that) you are
(esti) wearing does not fit you well. 18. If the price of woolen
suits (§103, 1) were not so (tan) high, I should have one made.
F, 1. Please teU the laundryman to come for the clothes [on]
(the) Mondays. 2. And teU him to bring the clean clothes on
Wednesdays or Thursdays. 3. When he comes, I wish you would
give him the following directions. 4. The woolen underclothes
should not be put ^ in boiUng water, because they shrink. 5. But
I should like ^ the hnen and cotton clothes to be washed ^ in hot
water. 6. Tell him also that I should like the cuffs and collars of
the shirts well starched. 7. But I should prefer less starch in the
shirt bosoms. 8. And I don't want any starch in the underclothes.
9. I think (Creo que) all the pieces are well marked.
G. 1. Have you a very fast saddle horse? 2. I should hke to
take a ride (pasearme a caballo) this afternoon. 3. Will you not
come with us? We are going to take a drive in a (paseamos en)
motor car. 4. No, thank you; I should prefer the exercise of
riding (§88, 3) on horseback. 5. But I should want a saddle horse:
I shouldn't want to take a ride on a driving horse. 6. I wish you
would choose a gentle horse, because I am not [a] good horseman.
7. I should like a good saddle, but I shouldn't want spurs. 8. I
never put on spurs when I ride on horseback. 9. Should you like
a fast horse? 10. Yes, sir; I should prefer a fast horse, provided
it is gentle.
* Use reflexive construction.
* Note that I should like may mean either / should vnsh (yo quisiera) of
it wouid please me (me gustaila).
LESSON XXXVIII 157
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
168. — 1. Quisiera, debiera, etc., son expresiones mds suaves y
por lo mismo mds usadas que quiero, debo, etc.
2. Tambien se usa el condicional en este sentido.
170. Futuro (o hipotetico) de subjuntivo. — Este tiempo se
forma en todos los verbos anadiendo al radical de la tercera persona
del pret^rito (pasado absoluto) de indicativo las siguientes termi-
naciones: ...
171. Uso del futuro de subjuntivo. — El futuro de subjuntivo
indica una condicion o liip6tesis. En el espanol hablado hoy en
dfa, rara vez se emplea esta forma except© en proverbios, expre-
siones legales, etc. Se substituye en el lenguaje corriente por el
presente de subjuntivo, o por el presente de indicativo si se usa
con la conjunci6n condicional si.
173. Verbos en -uir. — Los verbos en -uir anaden a la vocal
radical u una y, excepto delante de las terminaciones que empiecen
por i o por y.
a. La y de huy6 y huyeron forma parte de la terminaci6n.
b. Se conjugan como huir los verbos construir, instruir, etc.
LESSON xxxvm
In this Lesson and in those that follow there is a review of
rules of grammar given in preceding Lessons, vrith the more
important exceptions to the rules.
NOUNS
174. Gender of Nouns. — Nouns ending in -o are usually
masculine, and those ending in -a are usually feminine.
Exceptions. — 1. The name of a male being is mascu-
line, even if the noun ends in -a.
el cura, parish priest el artista, artist, m.
2. La mano, hand, is feminine, and el dia, day, is masculine.
158 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
3. El mapa, map, and some words of Greek origin ending
in -ma or -ta, like el poema, poem, and el planeta, planet,
are masculine.^
175. Number of Nouns. — A noun ending in a vowel
adds -s, and a noun ending in a consonant adds -es, to
form the plural.
Exceptions. — 1. A noun that ends in a stressed vowel
or diphthong adds -es to form the plural.
rubi, ruby; rubies, rubies rey, king; reyes, kings
a. But, mamfi, mamma, papi, papa, and all nouns ending in stressed
-e, add only -s: papS, pap&s; cafe, coffee, cafes, coffees; pie, foot,
pies, feet.
2. Nouns ending in unstressed -es or -is have the same
form in the plural as in the singular.
lunes, Monday, Mondays crisis, crisis, crises
3. Family names generally remain unchanged in the plural.
Martinez, los Martinez Garcia, los Garcia
176. Dative of Separation. — In Spanish, verbs mean-
ing to take from, a^k of, and the like, take the dative of the
person.
Pido un favor a mi padre. I ask a favor of my father.
Lo compr6 al seiior Garcia. He bought it of Mr. Garcia.
Note also: le pido un favor, I ask a favor of him; se lo compr6, he
houghl it from him.
177. An English noun used as an adjective is generally
expressed in Spanish by a noun preceded by de or para.
Un reloj de oro. A gold watch.
Una taza para te. A teacup (una taza de te is a cup
>^ of tea).
178. Study the inflection of regular verbs of the first
conj ugation. (§237) .
* Thus el clima, climate, el idioma, language, el diploma, diploma, el
programa, program, el telegrama, telegram, el tema, theme, written exercise,
el cometa, comet (but la cometa, kite), etc.
LESSON xxxvm 159
EXERCISES
agitado, -a, rough, agitated el marinero, sailor
agradable, pleasant, agreeable el muelle, wharf, dock
el billete, ticket, ^ note el oficial, oflficer
el buque, boat la ola, wave
el camarote, stateroom el pasajero, passenger
la cubierta, deck la tormenta, storm
desaparecer, to disappear tranquilo, -a, calm, tranquil
la distancia, distance la travesia, passage
la litera, berth '^ el vapor, steam; steamboat,
el mar,' sea steamship *
marearse, to get seasick
a bordo de, aboard; en ptrnto, promptly, exactly; ^que distancitt
hay de . . . ? what is the distance from . . . ? how far is it from . . . ?
A. 1. iCuando sale el vapor para Buenos Aires? 2. — To-
dos los dlas a las nueve de la maiiana. 3. — iHay camarotes
de primera clase? 4. — SI, senor; hay camarotes de primera
clase y de segunda. 5. — Deme Vd. un billete (o boleto)
de primera clase. 6. Quisiera un camarote sobre cubierta
en que no haya md,s de (than) dos literas (o camas). 7. — Si,
seiior; aqul tiene Vd. su billete. 8. — iQue distancia hay
de Montevideo a Buenos Aires? 9. — Hay cerca de doscien-
tos (200) kilometros. 10. — Vamos a bordo. Ya son las
ocho y media. 11. iCudntos pasajeros hay a bordo?
12. — Me dijo uno de los oficiales que habr^ m^ de dos-
cientas personas a bordo sin contar los marineros. 13. — Es-
pero que sea agradable la travesfa. 14. — Yo temo una
tormenta. Si el mar estd agitado, me mareo. 15. — Pero,
hombre, ^no ve Vd. que el mar estd tranquilo? Las olas ya
desaparecieron.^ 16. Vamos a decir adios a nuestros amigos
» In several Spanish-American countries ticket is boleto, and ticket agent
is boletero. * Or la cama. * Also la mar.
« One also says buque de vapor for steamboat.
' Note the preterite used with ya with the force of the EngUsh present
perfect.
160 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
del {on the) muelle antes que saiga el buque. 17. — jBueno!
Yo veo a los senores de Garcfa y a los senores de Gonzdlez
en el muelle. 18. jBuen viaje! — jFeliz viaje! — jAdios! —
iAdi6s!
B. ConUstese. 1-4. (U sense, como preguntas orales, A. 1, 3,
8 y 11.) 5, iPreferiria Vd. un camarote bajo (below) cubierta
o sobre cubierta? 6. iCudntas literas (o camas) quisiera
Vd. en el camarote? 7. ^Cudndo se marea Vd.? 8. iEst^
el mar tranquilo o agitado? 9. ^Ya desaparecieron las olas?
10. ^Cree Vd. que sea agradable la travesia? 11. iQui^nes
ban venido al muelle para despedirse de Vds.? 12. ^Le
gusta a Vd. la vida (life) a bordo de un buque? 13. ^Quisiera
Vd. ser marinero? 14. ^Preferirfa Vd. ser pasajero?
C. Usese d artlcvlo determinado correspondiente a los siguientes
nombres en ambos numeros, singular y plural: libro (por ejemplo,
el libro, los libros), pluma, mano, dia, agua, artista (m.),
artista (/.), hombre, mujer, hermano, hermana, carta, planeta,
papd, mamd, idioma, hacha, cuchara, cura, pie, ingles, martes,
canape (m.: sofa), sinopsis (/. : synopsis), rey, seiior Ortiz,
seiior Heredia, rubi, frac (§114), luz, reloj, caf6, alma, aguja,
americana, espanola.
D. 1, I asked * the man when (a que hora) the train would
arrive. 2. I asked the man for a ticket. 3. I asked him to give
me the ticket at once. 4. Did he buy the gold watch from Mr.
Olmedo? 5. Yes, sir; he bought it from him. 6. Did you buy
Charles' horse? 7. Did you buy this horse from Charles? 8. Did
you take (usese quitar) it from your sister? 9. No, ma'am; I
didn't take it from her. 10. Please bring me a coffee cup.
11. Please bring me a cup of coffee. 12. And bring me also a glass
of cold water.
E. 1. To-day we leave for Buenos Aires. 2. — How far is
Buenos Aires from Montevideo? (viase A. 8) 3. — It is (Hay) two
1 Distinguish between preguntar, and pedir or rogar.
LESSON XXXVIII 161
hundred kilometers more or less (mfis o menos). 4. — Is the
steamship that you will take (tomard) large or small? 5. — It is
not very large, but it is fast. 6. — Have you akeady bought yoiu*
tickets? 7. — Yes, sir; I have bought two tickets from the agent
(agente o boletero), one for me and the other for my brother.
8. — I am glad that yoiu* brother is going also to Buenos Aires.
9. Where is your stateroom? — We have a stateroom on deck
with two berths. 10. It is small, but it is very comfortable.
11. — Do you get seasick if the sea is rough? 12. — When the sea
is rough I always get seasick, but my brother never gets seasick.
13. — When shall you go aboard the boat? 14. — I should go
aboard now if I could. 15. I shall ask an officer if I may (puedo)
go aboard now. 16. I shall ask him to let me go aboard at once.
17. But before going (§88, 3) aboard I should like to take leave
of my friends on the wharf. 18. I see the parish priest and his old
mother. 19. Do you beheve (that) they have come to say goodbye
to us? 20. — No, sir; they have come to take leave of Mr. and
Mrs. Nunez. 21. — Do you fear a storm? — No, sir; to-day there
will not be [a] storm. 22. The waves have aheady disappeared
and the sea is calm. 23. One of the sailors told me that there will
be many passengers on the ship. 24. Yes, sir; I beUeve (that)
there will be more than two hundred persons on board, without
counting the officers and the sailors.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
174. GSnero de los nombres (o substantives). — Los nombres
que en singular terminan en -o son, por regla general, mascuhnos;
y los que terminan en -a son generalmente femeninos.
Excepciones. — 1. El nombre de hombre o animal macho es
mascuUno aunque termine en -a.
2. Mano es femenino, y dia es masculino.
3. El mapa y algunas palabras de origen griego que terminan
en -ma o -ta son mascuhnos.
175. Numero de los nombres. — Lo3 nombres que terminan en
vocal forman el plural afiadiendo una-s, y los que terminan en
consonante afiadiendo -es.
162 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Excepciones. — 1. El nombre que tennina en vocal acentuada
(o diptongo acentuado) forma el plural anadiendo -es.
a. Las palabras pap& y mam&, y todos los nombres que terminen
en -4 acentuada, forman su plural afiadiendo solamente -s.
2. Los nombres que terminan en -es o -is sin el acento tienen
en el plural la misma forma que en el singular.
3. Los nombres patronfmicos, por regla general, no varfan en el
plural.
176. Dativo de separaci6n. — En espanol los verbos quitar,
pedir, etc., rigen al dativo de la persona.
177. El nombre ingles usado en calidad de adjetivo se traduce
al espanol mediante un nombre precedido de las preposiciones de
o para.
LESSON XXXIX
ADJECTIVES
179. Apocopation of Adjectives. — 1. Bueno, good, malo,
bad, uno, one, an, or a, alguno, some, ninguno, no, none, pri-
mero, first, and tercero, third, lose the final -o of the mas-
cuUne singular when they precede their noun.
2. Grande, great, santo, Saint, and ciento, one hundredf
generally lose the final syllable before the word they modify:
Uaa gran ciudad, a great city. Cien pesos, one hundred dollars.
San Pablo, Saint Paul. But, Ciento dos pesos, one hun-
dred and two dollars.
a. Santa does not lose its final syllable: Santa Isabel, Saint Eliza-
beth.
180. Position of Adjectives. — To the rule that Spanish
descriptive adjectives usually follow their noun, there are
these exceptions:
1. A descriptive adjective usually precedes its noun if it
does not distinguish one object from another but merely
LESSON XXXIX 163
names a quality characteristic of the object It is then often
used in a figurative sense.
Compare:
La casa blanca. The white house.
La blanca nieve. The white snow.
Una voz ronca. A hoarse voice.
El ronco trueno. The hoarse thunder.
2. A few adjectives have one meaning before, and another
after their noun.
Un gran hombre. A great man.
Un hombre grande. A big man.
Una pobre mujer. A poor woman.
Una mujer pobre. A poor (poverty-stricken) woman.
Mi caro amigo. My dear friend.
Un caballo caro. A dear (expensive) horse.
Varios papeles. Several papers.
Papeles varios. Miscellaneous papers.
181. Agreement of Adjectives. — To the rule that an
adjective agrees in number with its noun, there are the
following apparent exceptions:
1. If an adjective modifies several singular nouns, the
plural form of the adjective is used (see §38).
2. Sometimes a plural noun is modified by several singular
adjectives. This occurs when each adjective modifies only
one of the individuals denoted by the noun.
Los vohimenes primero y The jQrst and second volumes,
segundo.
(For other rules for adjectives, see: Inflection, — §§35, 36,
99; Position, — §34; Agreement, — §37, 38.)
182. Comparison of Adjectives. — Most Spanish adjec-
tives form their comparative of superiority by prefixing
mds, more, to the positive, and their superlative by prefix-
ing the definite article or a possessive adjective to the
comparative.
164
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Este hombre es rico.
Este hombre es mils rico que
aquel.
Estos hombres son los m&s
ricos del mimdo.
Juan es mi amigo m&s intimo.
This man is rich.
This man is richer than that one.
These men are the richest in the
world.
John is my most intimate friend.
o. When there is no real comparison, most may be expressed by muy,
or the suffix -isimo : es muy litil, or es utilfsimo, it is most useful.
183. Study the regular verbs of the second and third
conjugations (§237).
EXERCISES
expreso, express *
el ferrocarril, railway
hasta, till, to
la lona, canvas
la maleta, vaUsc, (hand)bag
meter en, to put in or into
la pampa, prairie, plain
sacar, to take out, get (a ticket)
la sierra, mountain range, moun-
tains
el tranvfa, street car, tramway
adem&s, moreover, besides
alii, there
atravesar (ie), to cross (over)
barato, -a, cheap
el batil, trunk
el cochecama,! sleeping car
el cochecomedor, dining car
la comodidad, convenience
el conocido, acquaintance
el cuero, leather
el departamento,^ compartment
el dril, duck (cloth)
el billete sencillo, one-way ticket; el billete de Ida y vuelta,* round-
trip ticket; mafiana por la mafiana, to-morrow morning; pasado
mafiana, the day after to-morrow; por supuesto, of course; est& haciendo
(o arreglando) el batil, he is packing his trunk; hay de todo, there is
everything; hace mucho calor, it is very warm; resulta mfis barato,
it is cheaper;' tengo ganas de, I long to; iqu6 le parece a Vd.? what
is your opinion? what do you think (about it)? si le parece a Vd., if
you think best (approve).
A. 1. iA qu6 hora sale el tren para Santiago de Chile?
2. — El tren expreso (o rdpido) sale a las nueve y diez de
» Also el coche dormitorio, el " Pullman " (as in Mexico), or el " sleep-
ing."
* Or compartimiento. ' Or rSpido.
* Literally, of going and returning. * Literally, i^ resuUa cheaper.
LESSON XXXIX 165
la mafiana. 3. — iQu4 le parece a Vd.? iTomamos ese
tren maiiana por la mafiana? 4. — No, senor; mafiana no
podre partir. 5. Tengo que comprar varias cosas y hacer
(arreglar) el baiil. 6. Ademas, tengo que despedirme de
varios amigos y conocidos. 7. — jBueno! Partiremos pasado
mafiana si le parece a Vd. 8. — iQu6 traje debe llevar uno
en el tren, de lana o de dril, y que zapatos, de cuero o de
lona? 9. — Lleve Vd. traje de lana y zapatos de cuero, por
supuesto. 10. El primer dia hard mucho calor cuando
estemos atravesando las pampas. 11. Pero cuando atravese-
mos la sierra, hard mds frio que en el Labrador. 12. — ^Po-
dremos meter las maletas en los departamentos? 13. Sf;
con tal que no sean muy grandes. 14 — ^Lleva ese tren co-
checama y (coche)comedor ^ ? 15. — Si; hay de todo. El tren
expreso tiene todas las comodidades que podamos apetecer.
16. — iQue le parece a Vd.? ^Serfa mds conveniente (better)
§a£ar billete sencillo (de ida nada mds), o de ida y vuelta?
17.^— Si Vd. piensa volver_a Buenos Aires, le aconsejo que
compre billete (o boleto) de ida y vuelta. 18. Resulta mds
barato que dos billetes sencillos. 19. Yo sacar^ un billete
sencillo hasta Santiago. 20. De Santiago paso a Valparaiso
y de alii voy por (by) mar a los Estados Unidos. 21. Cuesta
menos venir por mar desde Valparaiso a los Estados Unidos
que desde Buenos Aires. 22. Ademds, hace mucho tiempo
que tengo ganas de ver a Ijma y el canal de Panamd.
23. — jBueno! Mafiana a las ocho y media tomaremos el
tranvla para ir a la estaci6n del ferrocarril.
B. Contestese. 1-6. (Repitanse, como preguntas orales, A. 1,
3, 8, 12, 14, 16.) 7. ^De qui^nes tiene Vd. que despedirse
antes de partir? 8. J,A donde va Vd. por ferrocarril?
9. Cuando Vd. parta de Santiago de Chile, i a d6nde ird
a tomar el vapor? 10. De Valparaiso ^a donde ird Vd.
por vapor? 11. iQu6 ciudad tiene Vd. ganas de ver?
^ Here comedor alone would be sufficient.
166 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
12. iHace mucho tiempo que Vd. piensa visitar a Lima?
13. iQu6 otro lugar (place) tiene Vd. ganas de ver?
14. iTomard, Vd. iin autom6vil para ir a la estaci6n del
ferrocarril? 15. iPreferiria Vd. tomar el tranvia? 16. Si Vd.
prefiere el tranvia, dlgame por qu6 lo prefiere. 17. iCudJ es
la tarifa (fare) del tranvia? (Respuesta: La tarifa del tranvia
es de cinco centavos.)
C. RepUase, omitiendo los nombres. 1. ^Tiene Vd. algiln
amigo? (iTiene Vd. alguno?) 2. Tengo un amigo. 3. No
tengo ningiin amigo. 4-6. Tenemos el primer (el tercer, el
dltimo) volumen. 7. fil tiene cien pesos. 8. Vd. tiene un
buen caballo (Vd. tiene uno bueno).
D. Pdngase en los tres grados de comparacidn: aplicado, pere-
zosa, cansados, baratas, fuerte, inteligentes.
E. Formulense f rases que contengan (1) un nombre modificado
por rojo, -a; azul (blue); mal(o), -a; gran(de); mds fdcil;
(2) dos 0 mas nombres modificados por blancos, -as; negros,
-as; pobres; caros, -as; mds pobres; m^ caros, -as; utiHsi-
mos, -as; varios, -as.
F. 1. We shall leave Buenos Aires for Santiago de Chile the day
after to-morrow. 2. The express train leaves at half -past ten in
the morning. 3. Before departing we must take leave of all our
friends and of some acquaintances. 4. My father will get our
tickets to-morrow if they will permit him Qto do] so (si se lo per-
miten). 5. We shall take a carriage or a motor car to (para) go
to the railway station. ' 6. The street (tram) car would be cheaper,
of course. 7. But we have a lot (un mont6n) of parcels and hand-
bags to carry with us. 8. I should prefer to pay more and take an
automobile (motor car). 9. We must buy many things before we
pack (§153) our trunks. 10. I wish I could wear (Qtiisiera poder
llevar) a duck suit and canvas shoes while we are crossing the
plains. 11. It will be very warm all (the) day on the train. 12. But
there will be much dust, and the suit would soon be soiled (sucio).
13. When we cross the mountains between (entre) Argentina and
LESSON XXXIX 167
Chile, it will be very cold. 14. It is cold all (the) summer in
the mountains. 15. I shall wear a woolen suit and leather shoes
on the train. 16. We shall be in the sleeping car, although it is
(es) dearer. 17. There will be fewer people (menos gente) and
more conveniences. 18. I am glad that the train carries a dining
car (lleve comedor). 19. When I am on the train, I like to take
(hacer) three meals a day. 20. I have [a] good appetite, but my
poor father can not eat much. 21. My father will not get round-
trip tickets, because we shall not return to Buenos Aires this year.
22. After spending (pasar) two or three weeks in Santiago, we shall
leave for Lima. 23. For a long time we have wished to see (el)
Cuzco in the mountains of (del) Peru. 24. And, of course, we shall
be glad to see the Panama Canal. 25. Then we shall go to New
York (Nueva York) or to San Francisco.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
179. Adjetivos apocopados. — 1. Bueno, malo, uno, alguno,
ninguno, primero y tercero pierden la -o del mascuUno singular
cuando preceden al nombre.
2. Grande, santo y ciento pierden la sflaba final cuando pre-
ceden al nombre que modifican.
a. Se exceptda santa de la regla anterior.
180. Colocacidn de los adjetivos. — En espanol los adjetivos
descriptivos (o caUficativos) siguen al nombre que modifican, con
estas excepciones:
1. El adjetivo descriptivo, por regla general, precede al nom-
bre si simplemente sefiala una cuaUdad inherente al objeto, sin
tratar de distinguirlo de otro. Dicho adjetivo tiene muchas veces
un sentido figurado.
2. Algunos adjetivos varfan de significado segdn precedan
o sigan al nombre.
181. Concordancia de los adjetivos. — A la regla que dice que
el adjetivo debe concertar en g^nero y niimero con el nombre tene-
mos estas excepciones aparentes:
1. Si el adjetivo se refiere a varios nombres en singular, se pone
en plural.
168 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
2. Algunas veces un nombre en plural va modificado por varies
adjetivos en singular. Esto acontece solamente cuando cada
adjetivo modifica a uno de los individuos expresados por el nombre.
182. Grados de comparaci6n de los adjetivos. — Casi todos
los adjetivos espanoles for man su comparative de superioridad
anteponiendo mis al positive, y su superlative antepeniende el
artfcule determinado e un adjetivo posesivo al comparative.
a. Cuando no se trata de verdadera comparaci6n, la palabra moat
86 traduce por muy o mediants la teniiinaci6n -isimo.
LESSON XL
184. Comparison of Adjectives, continued. — The follow-
ing adjectives are compared irregularly:
bueno, mejor, el mejor, good, better, the best.
malo, peer, el peor, bad, worse, the worst.
, f mis grande, el mfis grande, large, larger, the largest.
(^ mayor, el mayor, large, larger or older, the largest or oldest.
(mis pequeiLo, el mis pequeiLo, small, smaller, the smallest,
menor, el menor, small, smaller or yoimger, the smallest or
yoimgest.
mucho, mfis, much, more or most.
poco, menos, Uttle (few), less (fewer) or least (fewest).
a. Mayor means larger and menor, smaller, in quantitative expres-
sions such as en mayor (menor) cantidad, in larger (smaller) quantity.
When appUed to persons, mayor means older, and menor, younger.
b. Most, used with a noun or pronoun, is generally expressed by la
mayor parte (de) : la mayor parte de mis libros, most of my books.
185. Spanish adverbs are compared like Spanish adjectives.
aprisa, mfis aprisa, (lo) m&s aprisa, fast, faster, (the) fastest.
a. The article is used with a superlative adverb only when the ad-
verb is followed by posible or a like expression: Pablo es quien mfis
estudia. Paid is the one who studies most; llegue lo mis pronto posible,
/ came as soon as possible.
LESSON XL 169
186. The following adverbs are compared irregularly:
bien, mejor, (lo) mejor, well, better, (the) best.
mal, peor, (lo) peor, badly, worse, (the) worst.
mucho, mas, (lo) m&s, much (a great deal), more, (the) most.
poco, menos, (lo) menos, Uttle, less, (the) least.
187. Correlative the . . . the, followed by comparatives, is
usually expressed in Spanish by cuanto . . . (tanto). Tanto
is often omitted.
Cuanto mfis gana, (tanto) mas The more he earns, the more he
gasta. spends.
Cuanto menos tiene, menos The less he has, the less he wants.
quiere.
a. The . . . the may also be expressed by mientras . . . — , with
which tanto is never used: mientras mis gana, m&s gasta, the more he
earns, the more he spends.
188. Than. — 1. Than is usually expressed by que.
Juan es mis alto que Maria. John is taller than Mary.
2. Before a numeral, more than and less than are expressed
by mis de and menos de.
Hemos gastado mis de cien We have spent more than one
pesos. himdred dollars.
Ella tiene menos de diez afios. She is less than ten years old.
3. Before a clause (beginning with a verb), than is usually
de lo que; but than is del que (or, de la que, de los que, de
las que) when the noun object of the principal verb is under-
stood after del (or, de la, de los, de las).
Hace mis frio de lo que Vd. It is colder than (what) you think.
cree.
Tenemos mis libros de los We have more books than (the
que teniamos. books which) we used to have.
186. Study the inflection of the radical-changing verbs of
the first class (§§244-245), including errar and oler (§247),
and jugar (§249).
170 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
EXERCISES
anoche, last tdght equivaler, to be equivalent
asustar, to frighten la esquina, comer
bajar(se), to descend, alight, get izquierdo, -a, left
out luego, soon, then
el barrio, part (0/ a city), suburb la neblina, fog
bastante, enough; bastante nevar (ie), to snow
bueno, good enough la nieve, snow
centigrado, -a, centigrade relampaguear, to Ughten
cuarenta, forty el sol, sun
derecho, -a, adj., straight, soportar, to endure, support
right; adv., straight ahead tanto, so much, as much
desagradable, impleasant, dis- la temperatura, temperatm-e
agreeable el termfimetro, thermometer
desde, since (in time) tronar (ue), to thunder
doblar, to turn (a comer, etc.) el viento, wind
seguir derecho, to go straight ahead; la casa de huespedes, board-
ing house; hace buen (mal) tiempo, the weather is good (bad); haco
viento, it is windy; no mfis . . . que, only
A. 1. iMe hace Vd. el favor de indicarme iin buen hotel?
2. — Con mucho gusto. En mi opini6n, el mejor es el Ho-
tel A. que da a la Puerta del Sol en la esquina de la calle de
B. 3. Para ir al Hotel A., toma Vd. el tranvfa que pasa por
aquf y baja Vd. en la Puerta del Sol. 4. O si prefiere ir
a pie, Vd. sigue derecho hasta llegar a la iglesia. 5. Y luego
dobla (la esquina de) la primera calle a su derecha (a su iz-
quierda ^). 6. Si Vd. busca una casa de huespedes, haUard las
mejores en C, el barrio mds de moda de la poblaci6n. 7. Yo
vivl muchos anos en la casa niimero 18 de la calle de D., a
poca distancia de la Puerta del Sol. 8. Me gusta mucho
Madrid, pero no me gusta su clima. 9. En el verano hace mu-
cho calor y en el inviemo mucho frfo. 10. No puedo soportar
los calores * del verano ni los frfos del inviemo. 11. Mds me
> Mano is understood.
* Note the plural forms when used in this sense.
LESSON XL , 171
gusta el clima de Mdlaga, donde no hace ni frfo ni calor.
12. En mi opinion, la primavera es la mejor estaci6n del
ano en Espana. 13. Hay menos neblina que en el otono
y no llueve tanto. 14. El invierno de Nueva York es tam-
bi^n mallsimo. 15. Ayer hizo un tiempo bastante bueno.
16. Pero anoche no hizo mds que relampaguear, tronar y
Hover toda la noche. 17. Hoy hace mal tiempo. Nieva
desde la manana, y ahora hace tanto viento que no puedo
saHr a la caUe. 18. El viento y la nieve son muy desagra-
dables. 19. Manana el term6metro centfgrado marcar^
(will show) diez y ocho grados bajo cero. 20. Diez y ocho
grados centf grados bajo cero equivalen aproximadamente
(approximately) a cero Fahrenheit.
B. 1. En su opini6n ^cudl es el mejor hotel de la pobla-
ci6n? 2. lA qu6 plaza da? 3. ^Puedo tomar el tranvla
para ir a ese hotel? 4. ^En d6nde he de bajar? 5. Si
prefiero ir a pie, iqu6 direccion debo tomar? 6. ^Donde
podrla hallar una buena casa de hu^spedes? 7. iCudl es
el ntimero de la casa en que vivio Vd. tantos anos? 8. ^Estd
cerca de la Puerta del Sol? 9-10. iSabe Vd. por qu6 no
me gusta (por qu6 me gusta) el clima de Madrid (Malaga)?
11. iCudl es la mejor estacion del ano en Espana? 12. iPor
qu6? 13. iHizo buen tiempo ayer? 14. iRelampague6
anoche? 15. ^Le asustan a Vd. los reldmpagos (lightning)?
16. iTambi^n tron6? 17. ^Le asustan a Vd. los truenos
(thunder)? 18. iY llovio despues? 19. Cuanto mds relam-
pagueo y tron6, (tanto) mds. Uovi6, iverdad? 20. ^Le
gusta a Vd. la Uuvia? 21. ^Estd nevando hoy? 22. Pues
(Well then), hoy hace mds frio de lo que hacfa ayer, iver-
dad? 23. iLe gusta a Vd. la nieve? 24. iCudntos grados
bajo cero (o sobre cero) marca ahora el term6metro?
25-26. lA qu6 temperatura Fahrenheit (centfgrada) hierve
el agua? ^
» 212 " (100) ".
172 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
27. lA qu^ temperatura Fahrenheit (centfgrada) se congela
(freezes) el agua? ^ 28. Conqiie (So that) nueve grados
Fahrenheit equivalen a cinco grados centfgrados, ^no es
verdad?
C. Dense los ires grados de comparaddn de los adjetivos grande,
fuerte, malo, hermosa, buena, ricos, y pequenas; y de loa
adverbios bien, pronto, y mal.
D. 1. Most men are lazy. 2. This is the most interesting
(interesante) lesson of all. 3. And it is the most useful. 4. Charles
is taller than Anna. 5. She is older than he. 6. But he is larger
than she. 7. She is more than twenty years old. 8. It is colder
than I thought. 9. It is warmer than it was yesterday. 10. The
colder it is, the more I like it. 11. The more it thunders, the more
it rains. 12. The more I have, the more I want. 13. The less you
study, the less you will know. 14. The earlier he comes (llegue),
the better. 15. The faster she wrote, the more mistakes she made.
16. John has fewer friends than he had (tenia) last year. 17. Mary
has more friends (/.) than she used to have. 18. We receive more
letters than we received last summer. 19. We received more than
ten this morning.
E. 1. Do you prefer a boarding house to a hotel? 2. Yes,
sir; I prefer a boarding house because it is less dear. 3. And in
my opinion the cooking (la cocina) is better in a good boarding
house. 4. Do you believe that Mrs. Hernandez's boarding house
is the best in (de la) town? 5. It i^ one of the best; but I do not
say (that) it is the best of all. 6. As a rule, the more you pay, the
better the cooking is (.= is the cooking). 7. Please direct me to
Mrs. Hernandez's boarding house. 8. With great pleasure. You
go straight ahead until you come (usesc Uegar) to the church that
is on the corner of Preciados Street. 9. Then you turn the corner
and follow Preciados Street until you come to a large house that
is on the corner of M. Street. 10. The number of the house is 25.
11. You will find the boarding house (that) you are looking for
on the main floor of this house. 12. The rooms (las habitaciones)
1 32 " (cero).
LESSON XL 173
and the bed linen (la ropa de cama) are clean, and the cooking
is good. 13. Thank you very much! (| Muchisimas gracias!)
Can I take the street car to go to that (esa) house? 14. Yes, sir;
the street car passes near the house. 15. You get out at (en) the
corner of M. Street. 16. In (the) summer it is warm in Madrid,
but I believe (that) it is still (aun) warmer in New York. 17. The
heat does not trouble (usese molestar) me so much as the thunder
and lightning during the electric storms. 18. But I like the rains
in (the) summer, because after raining there is less dust (polvo).
19. Last night it lightened and thundered and rained all (the)
night. 20. I should prefer (the) snow, as (pues) it doesn't hghten
and thunder when it snows. 21. This morning the thermometer
showed a temperature of thirty degrees centigrade. 22. It is
warmer than it was last sunmier. 23. The warmer it is, the more
I Uke it.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
184. Grados de comparaci6n de los adjetivos, continuaci6n. —
Bueno, malo, grande, pequefio, mucho y poco forman su compara-
tivo de una manera irregular.
a. Mayor significa " mds grande " y menor " mds pequefio " tra-
tdndose de expresiones de cantidad. Cuando se aplican a personas, el
mayor significa el " de mayor edad " y el menor el " de menor edad."
b. Most, usado con un nombre o pronombre, se traduce al espanol
por la mayor parte (de).
185. En espanol los adverbios forman su comparative del
mismo modo que los adjetivos.
a. El artlculo se usa con el adverbio en grade superlative solamente
cuando el adverbio va seguido de la palabra posible u otra expresi6n
semejante.
186. Bien, mal, mucho y poco forman su comparative de una
manera irregular.
187. El correlative the . . . the seguido de un comparativo se
traduce por cuanto . . . (tanto). Tanto se omite generalmente.
a. The . . . the puede expresarse tambi^n por mientras ... — .
174
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
188. Than. — 1. Than se traduce generalmente por que.
2. Las expresiones more than y less than antepuestas a un ad-
jetivo numeral se traducen por mfis de y menos de.
3. Ante una clausula (conteniendo verbo), than se traduce pcfir
del que (de la que, de los que, de las que) cuando la comparaci6n
se hace con un nombre de la clausula principal; o de lo que cuando
la comparaci6n se refiere a un adjetivo o adverbio.
LESSON XLI
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
190. The Spanish personal pronouns used as the subject
or object of verbs are:
Singular
DiBECT Object
Sttbjecjt
yo, I
tfi, thou
[ m. 61, he, it
/. ella, she, it
In. ello, it
Subject
nosotros, -as, we
vosotros, -as, ye
ellos, -as, they
me, me
te, thee
(le or lo,' him, it
la, her, it
lo, it
Plural
Direct Object
nos, us
OS, you
m. los
/. las
Indirect Object
me, to me
te, to thee
le
to him, to her
to it (la, to her)
them
Indirect Object
nos, to us
OS, to you
les, to them (las, to
them, /.)
a. Ello is rarely used as the subject of a verb, except in the expres-
sion ello es que . . ., the fact is that. . . . English it, as subject, is
usually not expressed at all in Spanish. As direct object, it is lo (m.)
or la (J.) when it refers to a definite thing, and lo (n.) when it refers to
a statement or idea.
Relampaguea, llueve, nieva.
Halle el libro : lo halle.
It Ughtens, rains, snows.
I found the book: I found it.
1 See §79, footnote.
LESSON XLI
175
Vendi la casa : la vendi.
No lo creemos.
I sold the house: I sold it.
We do not believe it.
6. The feminine dative formB la, to her, and las, to them, are often
used, but their use is not sanctioned by the Spanish Academy.
See also §§42, 51, 75-77, 79, 80.
191.
SuBJEcrr
usted, you
Subject
ustedes, you
Usted, -es
Singular
Direct Object
m. le or lo
/. la
you
Indirect Object
'^ }to
le aa)
you
Plural
Direct Object
m. los
/. las
you
Indirect Object
les \,
lesaas)r°y°^
a. Usted and ustedes are of the second person in meaning, but they
require the verb in the third person.
192. Se, himself, herself, oneself, itself, yourself; them-
selves, yourselves (see §77).
1. Se, with a singular verb, sometimes has the force of
English one, people, etc., used as indefinite pronouns.
Se dice.
Se cree que es verdad.
One says.
People beUeve that it is true.
2. Some intransitive verbs may be used as reflexives,
with change of meaning.
Ir, to go
irse, to go away
dormir, to sleep
dormirse, to fall asleep
193. Study the inflection of the radical-changing verbs
of the second and third classes (§§250-251).
176 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
EXERCISES
el aceite, oil el jarro, jug, "pitcher"
el ascensor, lift, elevator ^ la lechuga, lettuce
el aziicar, sugar la nuez, (English) walnut
el bizcocho, biscuit ^ la pasta de guayaba, guava mar-
la came de carnero, mutton malade
la cucharita, teaspoon la pimienta, pepper
descansar, to rest la sal, salt
el despacho, oflSce el servicio, service
el f 6sf oro, match » el vinagre, vinegar
fresco, -a, fresh el vino tinto, red wine
el guisante, pea * ~ "
en buen orden, in good order; en primer lugar, in the first place;
tengo (mucha) hambre, I am (very) hungry; tengo (mucha) sed, I
am (very) thirsty; tengo (mucho) sueflo, I am (very) sleepy; tengo
cmdado, I am careful; itenga Vd. cuidadol be careful! look out! pierda
Vd. cuidado, do not worry
A. 1. Despues de pasearnos a pie toda la tarde tenfamos
mucha hambre. 2. Entramos en un hotel y nos dirigimos
al comedor. 3. El mozo (camarero) vino y nos di6 la hsta.
4. Mientras lefamos la lista, el mozo puso sobre la mesa un
mantel limpio, servilletas, platos, vasos, cuchillos, tene-
dores, cucharas para sopa, cucharitas, sal, pimienta, aziicar,
aceite y vinagre. 5. En primer lugar pedimos los platos
siguientes: sopa, pescado y ensalada de lechuga. 6. Des-
pues pedimos carne de carnero asada, papas (patatas) y
guisantes. 7. For regla general, prefiero la carne de vaca
(de res) a la carne de carnero. 8. Pero hoy no habfa mds
que came de carnero. 9. El mozo (camarero) nos trajo
pan y vino tinto sin pedirlo nosotros (without our ordering).
10. Para mi (For my part) lo mds diffcil es escoger los pos-
* Or el elevador (as in Mexico). ' Or galleta.
* The little wax matches, so common in Latin countries, are generally
called cerillas in Spanish (but are called cerillos in Mexico).
* Or chlcharo (as in Mexico and some other Spanish-American countries).
LESSON XLI 177
tres. 11. Hoy pedi pasta de guayaba, bizcochos, queso,
nueces y caf6. 12. Despues de la comida pagamos la cuenta
y dimos una propina al mozo. 13. Fuimos al despacho y
pedimos un cuarto. 14. Estdbamos cansados y querfamos
descansar. 15. Pedimos un cuarto grande y comodo con
ventanas que dieran a la plaza, con dos buenas camas, con
sus sdbanas blancas y limpias, almohadas de pluma y fra-
zadas (mantas) de lana. 16. Subimos al tercer piso en el as-
censor y entramos en el cuarto. 17. El criado lo habia puesto
todo en buen orden. 18. Nos trajo una vela y fosforos, un
jarro de agua fresca y vasos. 19. Se dice que la comida, las
habitaciones y el servicio de este hotel son excelentes.
B. Contestese. 1. ^Por qu6 tenfan Vds. mucha hambre?
2. iEn donde entraron Vds. y a donde se dirigieron?
3. ^D6nde se sentaron Vds.? 4. iQu6 les di6 el mozo?
5. iQu6 puso el sobre la mesa? 6. iQue pidieron Vds. en
primer lugar? 7. ^Qu^ pidieron Vds. despues? 8. ^Prefiere
Vd. la carne de carnero a la carne de vaca (de res)? 9. ^Qu6
cosas les trajo el mozo sin pedirlo Vds.? 10. ^Qu6 postres
pidieron Vds.? 11. Despues de pagar la cuenta, ^que le
dieron Vds. al mozo? 12. ^A donde fueron Vds. en seguida?
13. ^Que clase de cuarto pidieron Vds.? 14. ^En que subie-
ron Vds. al tercer piso? 15. ^Que les trajo el mozo? 16. ^Se
dice que son excelentes la comida, las habitaciones y el ser-
vicio de este hotel?
C. 1. It is true. 2. It is raining. 3. I don't believe it. 4. I
doubt it. 5. Did you buy the horse? — I bought it. 6. Did you
sell the bicycle (la bicicleta)? — I sold it. 7. It is said to be (que
es) true. 8. Spanish is spoken here. 9. The house is warmed with
steam. 10. Coal is burned in the furnace. 11. We went to bed
at ten o'clock. 12. We got up at seven o'clock.
D. Tradiizcase coda frase cuatro veces, usando (1) tix, (2) usted,
(3) vosotros, -as, y (4) ustedes, o los pronomhres complementarios
178 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
correspondientes. 1. You (m.) are tired. 2. You (/.) are ilL
3. He saw you (m.) yesterday. 4. I saw you (/.) this morning.
6. We told you the truth. 6. We gave you a present. 7. You
fell asleep. 8. Did you go away?
E. 1. I am very tired and I am very hungry. 2. We have
walked about (por la) town all (the) day. 3. It is said that they
serve excellent meals in the restaurant of this hotel. 4. Should
you like to dine here, or should you prefer to go to another
restaurant? 5. — No, sir; I am tired of walking about town,
and I should prefer to dine here. 6. Waiter! — I am coming
(vease XVIII, D. 2 y 3), sir. What do the gentlemen wish?
7. — Bring me soup and fish, and let (§148) the soup be hot.
8. — Wouldn't the gentlemen wish salad? To-day we have a good
lettuce salad. 9. — Bring us salad after the fish, and bring us
oil and vinegar. 10. I like a lot of oil on (en) the salad, but I
don't like pepper. 11. — Do the gentlemen wish beef or mut-
ton?— Bring us beef and fried (fritas) potatoes. 12. — Very
well! (lEsti bien!), sir; soup, fish, lettuce salad, roast beef, and
fried potatoes. 13. Do the gentlemen wish red wine or white
wine? 14. — I Uke (the) red wine, but my friend prefers (the) white.
15. Waiter! Please bring me another napkin: this [one] is torn.
16. — Here is (Aqui tiene Vd.) another, sir. Do the gentlemen
wish dessert? 17. — Bring us a small cup (una tacita) * of coffee,
and cheese and biscuits. 18. As [a] tip how much shall we give
the waiter? 19. — The diimer will cost two dollars. Let us give
him twenty cents. 20. Let us go to the hotel office (= the office of
the hotel) and ask for a room. 21. — On the second floor we have
a large room, with two beds, that faces the square. 22. — Is there
[an] elevator in this hotel? — No, sir; I am sorry to say (that)
there isn't any elevator. 23. I could give you a good room on the
first floor if you would prefer it. 24. — Very well! Let's go to bed;
I am very sleepy. 25. Please send (mandar) to the room a jug of
water and glasses. 26. — Very well, sir, and I shall also send
some matches and a candle. 27. Good night, sirs. May (§150, b:
Usese que) you sleep well.
1 Diminutive of taza.
LESSON XLII 179
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
190. Pronombres personales. — Los pronombres personales es-
panoles usados como sujeto o complemento son los sigiiientes: . . .
a. EUo rara vez se usa como sujeto del verbo, excepto en la expresi6n
ello es que. El it ingl6s, como sujeto, casi nunca se traduce al espafiol.
Como complemento directo, it equivale a lo (para el maaculino) y la
(para el femenino) cuando se refiere a una cosa determinada y concreta,
y lo (para el neutro) cuando se refiere a una expresi6n o idea.
b. Las formas femeninas del dativo la y las se usan a menudo; pero
Bu uso no esti sancionado por la Real Academia.
191. Usted, -es: . . .
o. Usted y ustedes son, por su significado, de la segunda persona,
pero piden el verbo en la tercera persona.
192. 1. Se, usado con un verbo en singular, equivale frecuen-
temente a one, people, etc., en ingles, usados como pronombres
indefinidos.
2. Algunos verbos intransitivos pueden usarse como reflexives,
cambiando entonces de significado.
LESSON XLII
194. Personal Pronouns, continued. — Spanish object-
pronouns usually precede their verb.
But an object-pronoun follows its verb and is attached
to it when the verb is an infinitive, a present participle, or
an affirmative imperative (or subjunctive used imperatively).
See §§88, 2; 143; 85, 1 and 2.
a. If the sentence or clause begins with the verb, the object-pro-
noun may follow, but this rarely occurs in colloquial Spanish:
pl&ceme, dice el juez, it pleases me, says the judge.
195. Reflexive se, whether direct or indirect object, al-
ways precedes another object-pronoun.
Se me figura. It seems to me.
See also § 80, 2.
180 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
196. Prepositional Forms of the Personal Pronouns. —
When personal pronouns are governed by a preposition, the
following forms are used:
1, SiNQULAB PlUBAIi
ml, me nosotros, -as, us
ti, thee vosotros, -as, you
m. el, him, it
/. ella, her, it alios, -as, them
n. ello, it
2. Usted, -es, you, and si, himself, herself, etc., are also
used with prepositions.
a. With me is conmigo ; vnth thee is contigo ; and toith himadf, her-
self, etc., is consigo.^
See also §§81-82.
197. If English myself, thyself, himself, etc., are emphatic,
they are to be expressed in Spanish by the reflexive pronoun
in the prepositional form, modified by mismo (-a, -os, -as).
Me engailo a ml mismo (-a). 1 deceive myself.
Ella se burla de si misma. She makes fun of herself.
198. In the plural a reflexive verb may become reciprocal.
Usually no distinction of form is made in Spanish between
reflexive and reciprocal verbs; thus, nos engafiamos may
mean we deceive ourselves, or we deceive each other or one
another. But a reciprocal verb may be made explicit by the
use of el uno al (del) otro, unos a (de) otros, etc.
Se engafian el uno al otro. They deceive each other.
Se burlan unas de otras. They make fun of one another.
199. The definite article is required before a noun used
in apposition with a personal pronoun.
Nosotros los alumnos de- We students desire a vacation.
seamos ima vacacidn.
Ustedes las sefioras nunca You women never gossip about one
murmuran unas de otras. another.
1 Latin mecum, tecum, and aecum became migo, tigo, and aigo in Old
Spanish, and later the preposition con was prefixed.
LESSON XLII 181
200. Study the inflection of the inceptive and the ^uir
verbs (§§255, 256).
EXERCISES
el acr6bata, acrobat la galeria/ balcony {in theater),
el actor, actor; la actriz, actress gallery-
el anuncio, advertisement la butaca (de patio), seat in " Or-
el artista, la artista, artist chestra " or " pit "
el cinematografo (el " cine "), mo- ocupado, -a, occupied
tion pictures ("movies") el palco, box
la comedia, comedy, play el peri6dico, (news) paper
desocupado, -a, unoccupied quedar, to remain
divertirse (ie), to enjoy oneself el sainete, farce
la entrada, entrance, admission el telon, curtain {of theater)
estrenar, to perform or give (a la tragedia, tragedy
play, etc.) for the first time la zarzuela, operetta, musical
la fila, row comedy
la fimci6n, performance
el teatro de variedades, vaudeville theater; jya lo creol I should
say so! no tardara en volver, it will not be long before he returns; se
hace tarde, it is getting late
A. 1. iQu6 le parece a Vd.? iVamos al teatro o a la
6pera esta noche? 2. — Si, seiior; yo quisiera ir al teatro a
divertirme. 3. — Carlos, trdigame el periodico de la ma-
iiana: quiero leer los anuncios de los teatros. 4. Si Vd.
quiere divertirse, lo mejor serd que no vaya a ver ninguna
tragedia. 5. — No, seiior; vamos a ver una comedia o un
sainete, o una zarzuela si le gusta a Vd. la musica. 6. — iQu6
le parece? Vamos a un teatro de variedades donde haya
acr6batas. 7. — No, seiior; entre nosotros prefiero el cine-
mat6grafo (el "cine") al teatro de variedades. 8. — jBueno!
Aqul tengo el anuncio de una funcion en el Teatro de Calder6n.
9. Esta noche se estrena una nueva comedia de los her-
manos Alvarez Quintero. 10. Si le parece a Vd., iremos, ^eh?
11. — ^Sabe Vd. cudnto cuesta la entrada? 12. — Butaca
con entrada cuesta dos pesos; asiento en la galeria (el
^ Or anfiteatro (as in Madrid).
182 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
anfiteatro) con entrada, un peso. 13. Un asiento de palco
costaria mds, por supuesto. 14. No somos bastante ricos
para ir a palco. 15. — iY a qu6 hora se levanta el tel6n?
— A las ocho en punto. 16. — iY hay buenos actores
(o artistas)? — jYa lo creo! los mejores del pafs. 17. — jEstd
bien! Vamos a tomar los billetes, porque ya son las siete y
cuarto. 18. Yo preferirfa una butaca de la primera fila si
no estdn todas ocupadas. 19. — Temo que no quede
desocupada ninguna butaca de la primera fila, pero vere-
mos. 20. — Y despu^s del teatro iremos al Caf6 Real a
cenar, si le parece. 21. jVamos! jApresurese Vd., que
{for) se hace tarde! No tardard en levantarse el tel6n.
B. Contestese. 1. ^Le gusta a Vd. ir al teatro? 2. iA qu6
teatro quisiera Vd. ir? 3. iEn d6nde se pueden leer los
anuncios del teatro? 4. iQu6 quiere Vd. ver, tragedia,
sainete, o zarzuela? 5. iPor qu6? 6. ^Le gusta a Vd. ir
al teatro de variedades? 7. ^Por qu6? 8. iLe gusta a Vd.
el cinematografo (el "cine")? 9. ^Por qu6? 10. ^Habrd
funci6n esta noche en el Teatro de Calder6n? 11. ^Se estrena
una nueva comedia? 12. iQui^nes son los autores {authors)
de la comedia? 13. iCudnto cuesta la entrada? 14. ^A
qu6 hora se levanta el tel6n? 15. ^Hay buenos actores (o
artistas)? 16. ^En d6nde preferirfa Vd. sentarse? 17. iCree
Vd. que queden desocupadas algunas butacas de la primera
fila? 18. Despu^s del teatro, ia d6nde iremos? 19. ^A qu6?
20. ^Se hace tarde? . 21. ^Tardard en levantarse el tel6n?
C. 1. Give it to Ferdinand. 2. Give it to him. 3. Do not
give it to Ferdinand. 4. Do not give it to him. 5. Give it to me.
6, Do not give it to me. 7. Tell the truth to we. 8. Do not tell
it to her. 9. Bring me a napkin. 10. I shall bring it to you at
once. 11. Do not bring me a torn napkin, 12. Hehkesit. 13. She
does not Uke it. 14. I wish to do so (lo). 15. You are (estfi) doing
80 now. 16. He presented himself to me. 17. Does it seem {tlsese
figurarse) to you that it is possible? 18. Come with me. 19. I
LESSON XLII 183
can't go with you (Sa pers. fam.). 20. Have you a letter for me?
21. I haven't any letter for you (3a pers. fam.). 22. John deceives
himself. 23. Charles makes fun of himself. 24. They deceive each
other. 25. They make fun of each other. 26. You students ought
to study more. 27. Men should never gossip about one another.
28. I agree to (Convengo en) it. 29. I insist upon (Insisto en) it.
D. 1. Have you read the advertisements of the theaters in the
afternoon paper? 2. — I have read all [of] them in the morning
paper. 3. At (En) the Calderon Theater a new tragedy by Jacinto
Benavente is given for the first time to-night. Should you like to
see it? 4. — No, sir; I want to enjoy myself, and I should prefer
a comedy or a farce. 5. — Well (Pues) a musical comedy is given
(se representa) to-night at the Lyric (Lfrico) Theater. We'll go
there, if you think best. 6. — / don't like the music of musical
comedies. I prefer [grand] opera. 7. — All right! Let's go and
(a) see a farce by the Alvarez Quintero brothers. I enjoy greatly
(Me divierto muchfsimo con) their comedies and farces. 8. — Will
there be [a] performance to-night? — I should say so! There is
[a] performance every night (todas las noches). 9. — Should
you like to take a box? — No, sir; we aren't rich enough to take
a box. 10. Let's take an orchestra seat or a seat in the first row of
the balcony. 11. — How much does a seat in the first row [to-
gether] with admission cost? 12. — As a rule it costs a dollar, but
it is dearer to-night. 13. According to the advertisement, it will
cost a dollar and [a] half to-night. 14. — And when (a que hora)
does the curtain rise? — Promptly at half-past eight. 15. — Then
(Pues) we must hurry. It will not be long before the performance
begins. 16. Yesterday I went to a vaudeville theater. The per-
formance was wretched (malisima). 17. There was a Spanish
actress who sang very well, and a Japanese (japones) acrobat
who did well enough. 18. But the rest (lo demfis) of the perform-
ance was not good. 19. To (Para) tell the truth, between us,
I prefer motion pictures to a vaudeville performance (= a per-
formance of vaudeville). 20. All right! Let's hurry, for it's
getting late, and I want a seat in the first row. 21. We haven't
taken tickets yet. I fear that all the best seats may already be
184 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
occupied. 22. Let's catch (-Asese tomar) the street (tram) car that
is coining up the street.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
194. Pronombres personales, continuaci6n. — En espanol los
pronombres complementarios preceden generahnente al verbo.
Pero el pronombre complementario sigue al verbo y va unido a
€1 si estd en infinitivo, participio presente, o imperativo (o sub-
juntivo usado con el car deter de imperativo) afirmativo.
a. Si la frase o clausula empieza con el verbo, el pronombre comple-
mentario puede seguirle, pero esto ocurre rara vez en el lenguaje usual.
195. El reflexivo se, ya sea como complemento directo o indi-
recto, siempre precede a los otros pronombres complementarios.
196. Formas de los pronombres personales con preposicidn. —
Cuando los pronombres personales van regidos por una prepo-
sicion se usan las siguientes formas: 1. mi, ti, el, ella, ello, no-
sotros -as, vosotros -as, ellos -as.
2. Usted y si tambi^n se usan con preposiciones.
a. Cuando con se usa con mi, ti, o si, la prep)osici6n y el pronombre
se imen formando una sola palabra, y la combinacidn termina con la
ellaba -go.
197. Si las expresiones inglesas myself, thyself, himself, etc., son
enfdticas, deben traducirse al espanol mediante el pronombre
reflexivo con preposici6n, modificado por mismo (-a, -os, -as).
198. En el plural un verbo reflexivo puede volverse reclproco.
Por regla general, en espanol no se hace distincion de forma entre los
verbos recfprocos y reflexivos; asl, por ejemplo, nos engafiamos
puede significar " nos engafiamos a nosotros mismos " o " nos en-
gafiamos el uno al otro." Pero un verbo recfproco puede hacerse
expllcito mediante las expresiones el uno al (del) otro, unos a (de)
otros, etc.
199. El artfculo determinado se requiere ante un nombre usado
en aposici6n con un pronombre personal.
LESSON
xLin
LESSON
XLIII
Definite Article
Masculinb
Femininb
el
la (el)
los
las
185
201.
Nbtjtbb
Sing. el la (el) lo
PI.
1. The feminine el is used only immediately before a
noun beginning with stressed a- or ha- (§96).
2. Neuter lo is used with neuter adjectives that have the
force of abstract nouns (§98); with neuter pronouns (lo
mismo, the same, lo cual, which, etc.); with adverbs (por lo
menos, at least, lo mds aprisa posible, as fast as possible);
and in such idiomatic expressions as sabemos lo buena que
es, we know how good she is.
202. The definite article is required: 1. With an adjec-
tive of nationaUty used to denote a language, except after
hablar or en (§100) ; with a noun used in a general sense to
denote all of the thing or kind it names (§103, 1); with a
proper noun modified by a title or a descriptive adjective,
except in direct address (§103, 2); instead of a possessive
adjective, when speaking of parts of the body or articles of
clothing, etc. (§107); with expressions of time modified by
prdximo, pasado, and the like (§123).
2. With some names of countries. These include all geo-
graphic names modified by an adjective, such as los Estados
Unidos, the United States, and also some others including the
following :
el Brasil, Brazil el Jap6n, Japan
el Canadd, Canada el Peru, Peru
el Ecuador, Ecuador
a. Names of cities, as a rule, do not take the article, but to this
rule, la Habana, Havana, and a few others are exceptions.
186
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
And the article may be used :
3. To modify an infinitive or a subject clause.
To talk too much is a vice.
It angers me that .you are not
willing to do it.
El hablar demasiado es un vicio.
Me enfada el que Vd. no qulera
hacerlo.
4. To express measure.
Diez centavos la docena.
A peso el metro.
203. Study the changes in spelling that occur in the in-
flection of verbs (§§ 239-243) .
EXERCISES
Ten cents a dozen.
(At) a dollar a meter.
amarillo, -a, yellow
la avena, oats
daro, -a, clear, bright
el corral, yard
detr&s de, behind
en frente de, before
la gallina, hen
el grano, grain
la hacienda, large farm, plantation
la huerta, garden ^
el huevo, egg
la legtimbre, vegetable
Undo, -a, pretty
el maiz, maize, Indian corn
la manzana, apple
la naranja, orange
el nido, nest
el pfijaro, bird
la pera, pear
el pez, (living) fish
el pl&tano, banana
el trigo, wheat
las verduras, fresh vegetables
vigilar, to watch over, guard
echar de menos, to miss (a person or thing) ; poco f alt6 para que se
cayera, he almost fell; poner huevos, to lay eggs; ^qu6 ha sido de ^1?
what has become of him?
A. 1. No nos gusta la vida de la ciudad durante la esta-
ci6n de los calores. 2. Nuestra familia tiene una hacienda
a quince kil6metros de la ciudad y alll pasamos el verano
todos los anos. 3. Nos divertimos mds en el campo que
en la ciudad. 4. Tenemos caballos de silla y nos pa-
seamos a caballo casi todos los dfas. 5. Mi hermana no
* In some countries, as in Mexico, a vegetable garden is called hortaliza.
Jardls usually means flower garden.
LESSON XLIII 187
tiene caballo, porque no le gusta montar. 6. La primera
vez que monto a caballo poco falt6 para que se cayera, y
no ha querido montar despues. 7. A poca distancia de la
casa hay muchos peces en un hermoso lago de agua fresca
y clara. 8. Nos divertimos mucho pescando en este lago.
9. En un jardin en f rente de la casa tenemos lindas flores
blancas, amarillas, azules y rojas. 10. Detrds de la casa
hay una huerta en la cual (in which) se cultivan muchas
clases de frutas y legumbres (verduras). 11. En mi opinion,
las manzanas y las peras son las mejores frutas. 12. Siento
mucho que en este clima no se produzcan frutas tropi-
cales como la naranja, el pMtano y la guayaba. 13. En un
corral hay galHnas blancas a las cuales echamos grano.
Ponen muchos huevos. 14. Los pajaros hacen su nido en
un drbol muy grande que estd cerca de la casa. 15. Los
labradores, que cultivan los campos, se levantan temprano y
trabajan todo el dia. 16. Cultivan varias clases de cereales,
como el trigo, el maiz y la avena. 17. El ano pasado
teniamos un hermoso perro que vigilaba la casa. 18. El
pobrecito (poor thing) murio, y ahora le echamos de menos.
19. En la hacienda hay vacas Jersey que nos dan leche.
20. En el verano la vida del campo es muy agradable.
21. Pero cuando llegue el otono, tendremos ganas de volver
a la ciudad.
B. Contestese. 1-2. iQue vida le gusta m^ a Vd. durante
la estacion de los calores (de los frios), la (that) del campo
o la de la ciudad? 3. ^A que distancia de la ciudad tiene
su famiUa la hacienda? 4. ^Se pasea Vd. a caballo? 5. iPor
que no quiere montar a caballo su hermana? 6. iDonde se
divierten Vds. pescando? 7-8. ^Donde estd, el jardin (la
huerta)? 9-10. iQue se cultiva en el jardin (en la huerta)?
11. En su opinion ^que frutas son las mejores? 12. iPor
qu6 no se pueden producir aUl las frutas tropicales?
13. iQu6 frutas tropicales? 14. ^En donde estdn las galli-
188 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
nas? 15. iQu6 ponen? 16. iD6nde hacen los pdjaros su
nido? 17. lA qu6 hora se levantan los labradores? 18. iTra-
bajan mucho? 19. iQu6 cereales cultivan? 20. iQui^n
vigilaba la casa el ano pasado? 21. iQu6 ha sido de 61?
22. iLo echan Vds. de menos? 23. iQu6 raza de vacas
tienen Vds.? 24. iDan leche? 25. iCudndo tendrdn Vds.
ganas de volver a la ciudad?
C. 1. Avoid (Evitad) the bad (n.) and seek the good. 2. Men
do not comprehend (no comprenden) the infinite. 3. We shall do
the same. 4. I prefer mine (n.) to yours. 5. Write as fast as
possible. 6. Study at least two hours. 7. I know how good she is.
8. We know how ill you are. 9. We are studying Spanish.
10. Spanish is not diflScult. 11. Do you speak Spanish? 12. This
letter is written in Spanish. 13. Women love flowers. 14. Horses
are strong. 15. Dogs are useful. 16. Gold is worth more than iron.
17. Mr. P^rez left yesterday. 18. Good day, Mr. Martinez.
19. Captain (usese capitfin) Trevino is a Mexican. 20. I took off
my gloves. 21. I washed my hands. 22. The children washed
their faces. 23. John has lost his hat. 24. We arrived last month.
25. We shall leave next Friday. 26. Is Argentina a richer country
than Mexico? 27. Mexico has more inhabitants (habitantes)
than Argentina. 28. He was born in Spain. 29. His wife was
born in Peru. 30. Havana is the largest city in (de) Cuba. 31. To
eat too much is a vice. 32. Oranges cost thirty cents a dozen.
33. This cloth (paflo) is sold at two dollars a meter.
D. 1. My father has a large-farm (at) fifty kilometers from
Boston. 2. We spend all our summer vacations (= vacations of
the summer) on (en) the farm, because it is cooler there. 3. My
brothers like to ride on horseback every day. 4. 7 do not (like
it). The first time (that) I rode on horseback I almost fell [off].
5. Since then (entonces) I have not ridden (no monto) on horse-
back. I prefer to ride on (en) [a] bicycle. 6. I used to have a dog
that I loved dearly (tiernamente), but the poor thing died a year
ago. 7. At night he used to guard the house, and during the day
(de dfa) he followed me everywhere (per todas partes). 8. There
LESSON XLIII 189
is a large lake near the farm where we go fishing (a pescar). 9. The
waters of the lake are cool and clear. 10. We have a lot of horses
and cows. 11. The Jersey cows are the best we have. 12. They
give better milk than the other cows give. 13. The farm laborers
have to work early and late in order to cultivate the fields.
14. They grow (= cultivate) many kinds of cereals, such as (tales
como) oats, wheat, and Indian corn. 15. We have a garden for
(jardin para) flowers before the house, and behind the house a gar-
den for vegetables. 16. In the flower garden beautiful (usese bello)
flowers of every color (de todos los colores) are grown. 17. There
are large flowers and little [ones]. Some are red and white, and
others are blue or yellow. 18. My mother prefers tropical fruits,
such as bananas and oranges, to northern fruits (las frutas del
norte). 19. But my father thinks that apples and pears are the
best fruits in the (del) world. 20. My little sister loves birds.
21. In a large tree before the house the birds make their nests.
22. We climb the (al) tree to look at the eggs, but we do not take
them away from (no se los quitamos a) the birds. 23. Our hens
lay many eggs and we take them from the hens and eat them up
(nos los comemos). 24. We shall be glad to return to (the) town
when September comes {usese Uegar).
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
201. El articulo determinado. — 1. La forma femenina el s61o
se usa inmediatamente delante de un nombre que empieza por a-
o ha- acentuada.
2. La forma neutra lo se usa con adjetivos neutros usados como
nombres abstractos; con pronombres neutros; con adverbios; y
en algunas expresiones idiomdticas.
202. El articulo determinado se requiere : 1. Con un adjetivo de
nacionaUdad cuando denota idioma, excepto despu^s de hablar o en ;
con un nombre usado en sentido general para denotar toda la cosa
o especie que nombra; con un nombre propio modificado por un
tltulo o un adjetivo descriptivo, si aqu61 no estd en vocativo; en
lugar del adjetivo posesivo cuando se refiere a las diferentes
partes del cuerpo humano o a las prendas de vestir, etc.; con
expresiones de tiempo modificadas por pr6zimo, pasado, etc.
190 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
2. Con los nombres de algunos paises. Entre ellos se cuentan
todos los nombres geogrdficos modificados por un adjetivo, asl
como los Estados Unidos, y tambien los siguientes: . . .
a. Los nombres de ciudades, per regla general, no Uevan el artlcnlo;
sin embargo, la Habana y algunos otros son excepciones de esta regla.
El articulo puede usarse :
3. Para modificar a un infinitivo o una clausula sujeto de verbo.
4. Para expresar medida.
LESSON XLIV
204. Omission of the Definite Article. — The definite
article is omitted in Spanish, though required in EngUsh :
1. Usually before a noun in apposition.
Santiago, capital de Chile. Santiago, the capital of Chile.
2. Before a numeral modifying a title.
Carlos Quinto. Charles the Fifth.
Alfonso Trece. Alfonso the Thirteenth.
205. Omission of the Indefinite Article. — It is regularly
omitted :
1. Before an unqualified noun in the predicate (§74).
2. Before a noun in apposition.
Lima, ciudad del Peril. Lima, a city of Perd.
3. Before cierto, a certain, otro, another, ciento, a hundred,
mil, a thousand; and after tal, such a.
4. In many idioms, such as:
Nunca lleva chaleco. He never wears a waistcoat (vest).
No dice palabra. He doesn't say a word.
I Que listima 1 What a pity !
LESSON XLIV 191
POSSESSIVES
206. Possessive Adjectives. — Study §§52-55.
207. Possessive Pronouns
Singular
el mio (la mia, lo mlo, los mios, las mias), mine
el tuyo (la tuya, lo tuyo, los tuyos, las tuyas), thine
el suyo (la suya, lo suyo, los suyos, las suyas), his, hers, its, yours
Plural
el nuestro (la nuestra, lo nuestro, los nuestros, las nuestras), ours
el vuestro (la vuestra, lo vuestro, los vuestros, las vuestras), yours
el suyo (la suya, lo suyo, los suyos, las suyas), theirs, yours
Prefiero la casa de Vd. a la mia. I prefer yoxir house to mine.
La de Vd. es mis grande que la Yours is larger than mine,
mia.
The possessive pronouns require the definite article in
Spanish though not in Enghsh.
a. But the definite article is used with a possessive in the predicate
only in a question beginning with which, or in answer to such a question.
Compare :
^De quien es este libro? — Whose book is this? — It is mine.
Es mfo.
iQue libro es el de Vd.? — Which book is yours? — This one
Este es el mio. is mine.
^Cual de las plumas es la Which pen is mine? — Tliis is
mia? — Esta es la de Vd. yours.
208. The definite article may be used with de 61, de ella,
etc., instead of suyo, etc., to make the meaning clear or
emphatic (see also §83).
Tango el libro de el : no tengo I have his book: I haven't hers.
el de ella.
Prefiere la casa de Vd. a la de He prefers your house to theirs.
ellos.
192 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
209. Study the inflection of haber (§257), ser (§259), and
ir(§261).
EXERCISES
agradecer, to be grateful for; la molestia, trouble
agradecido, -a, grateful el monumento, monument, impos-
anhelar, to long for ing public building
atento, -a, devoted, courteous la oporttmidad, opportunity
el borrdn, blot permanecer, to remain
el cariflo, affection prestar, to lend, show
el compromise, engagement pues, well, for
corriente, present (month), in- querido, -a, dear, beloved
stant el respeto, respect; respetos, re-
dentro de, within gards
Enrique, Henry saludar, to salute
estimable, esteemed el servidor, la servidora, servant
evitar, to avoid, help ( = avoid) subscribir, to subscribe, sign
historico, -a, historic (al)
Muy se£Lor mio, My dear Sir; su apreciable carta, your favor; no
hay novedad, all is well; sin novedad, without accident, as usual; me
hallo mejor, I am better; esta de vuelta, he has returned, he is back;
ique tal sigue Vd.? how are you getting on? da la una, it is striking
one; dan las dos (tres, etc.), it is striking two (three, etc.); no sirve
para nada, it is good for nothing; su atento y seguro servidor, your
devoted and faithful servant ^
A. 1. Hotel Grande, Granada
15 de Junio de 1918 ^
Querido Pablo:
Hoy Uegud a Granada sin novedad, y pienso permanecer
aqui ocho dias. La verdad es que estaba cansado cuando
llegu6, pero ya me siento mejor. He oido decir que Granada
tiene muchos monumentos historicos y deseo verlos todos.
Hdgame Vd. el favor de decir al senor Veldzquez que estar6
de vuelta dentro de quince dias. Bien s6 que le doy a Vd.
mucha molestia, pero no puedo evitarlo. iQu^ tal sigue
» This may be translated: very sincerely yours.
* Mil novecientos diez y ocho.
LESSON XLIV 193
Vd.? Espero que ya se halle mejor. Ahora no puedo es-
cribir mds, pues tengo un compromiso a las dos y media, y
ya dieron las dos. Dispense Vd. el borr6n. jEsta pluma-
fuente (pluma estilogrdfica) no sirve para nada!
Le saluda con carino su amigo
Enrique.
2. Calle de San Crist6bal, 55/ Barcelona
10 de Marzo de 1918
Sr. D.2 Tomds Hidalgo y Rivera,
Calle del Arenal, 35,
Madrid.
Muy senor mfo y amigo:
Acabo de recibir su apreciable carta del 8 del corriente y
me apresuro a contestarla. Mucho agradezco todo lo que
(that which) Vd. ha hecho por (for) mi hijo durante su
enfermedad.
Deseamos que cuente con que (he assured of the fact that)
Vd. y todos los suyos (all your family) tienen en esta ciudad
amigos muy agradecidos que anhelan la oportunidad de
corresponder a los buenos servicios que Vd. ha tenido la
bondad de prestar a nuestro querido hijo.
Con mi familia presento mis respetos a su estimable
seiiora esposa, y me subscribo de Vd. muy atento y seguro
servidor y amigo,
Carlos Pereda y Gald6s.
B. ContSstese. 1. ^A d6nde llego Enrique? 2. iC6mo
lleg6? 3. iCudnto tiempo pensaba permanecer alll?
4. ^Como estaba cuando lleg6? 5. iC6mo se sentfa cuando
escribi6 la carta? 6. iQu-5 habfa ofdo decir? 7. iQu6 le
rogo a Pablo que dijera al seiior Veldzquez? 8. iQu6 sabfa
' In letter heads the number of the houae ia usually placed after the
name of the street.
* Sr. D. » Seiior Don.
194 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Enrique que le daba a Pablo? 9. iPor qu6 no pudo Enrique
escribirmds? 10. iQu6horadi6? 11. iPor qu6 le pidio Enri-
que a Pablo que le dispensara? 12. iQue cosa no servfa
para nada? 13. iComo acabo Enrique la carta?
14. iDonde estaba Carios Pereda y Gald6s cuando es-
cribio la carta a Tomds Hidalgo y Rivera? 15. iCudl es
la fecha de esa carta? 16. iCudl es la direccion del senor
Hidalgo? 17. iQue acabo de recibir el senor Pereda?
18. iQu6 se apresuro a hacer? 19. iQu6 le agradeci6 al
senor Hidalgo? 20. iCon qu6 deseaba que contase el senor
Hidalgo? 21. iQu6 le present© al senor Hidalgo? 22. iComo
se subscribio?
C. 1-3. He lives in Lima (Bogotd, Caracas), the capital of
Peni (Colombia, Venezuela). 4. Alfonso the Thirteenth is king
of Spain. 5. My father is a physician. 6. My uncle is a lawyer.
7. Both (Los dos) are Americans. 8. Mr. Carducci is a tailor.
9. His brother is a carpenter (carpintero). 10. Both are Italians.
11. They used to live in Pisa, a city of Italy. 12. A certain friend
of mine (amigo mio) told me so (lo). 13. Another friend of mine
denied it. 14. He did not beheve such a story. 15. That man
never wears a necktie. 16. What a pity that he does not dress
('dsese vestirse) better! 17. Present my regards to your people
(a los suyos). 18. He presented his regards to my people.
Traduzcanse las siguientes f rases, y repltanse despues omitiendo los
nombres. 19. He has his books. 20. She has her books. 21. Have
you your books? 22. We have our books. 23. He read her letter.
24. She read his letter. 25. Did you read their letters? 26. I
prefer my house to yours. 27. Do you prefer your house to mine?
28. Which house * is yours? 29. Whose house is that one (aquella)?
D. 1. Hotel Grande, Granada.
AprU 25, 1918.
Dear Charles:
Granada is more interesting than Seville (Sevilla). It is not so
large, but it has the Alhambra which is the most interesting his-
* Note that which house is quS casa, while which alone ia cu&l.
LESSON XLIV 195
torical monument in Spain. It was built by the Moors (moros)
many centuries ago.
I was very tired and nearly ill when I arrived yesterday, but I
am better now. How are you getting on? I hope that you are
feeling much better. Tell Mr. P^rez that I shall be back in a week.
I can't stay longer (mas tiempo) this time (vez), but I hope to
return next year. It has struck half-past three and I have an
engagement at four o'clock.
Yours affectionately (vease A. 1),
Ferdinand.
2. 33 San Crist6bal Street, Barcelona.
May 5, 1918.
Mr, Henry Valera Ortiz,
50 Arenal Street,
Madrid.
Dear Sir:
We have just received your favors of the 2nd and 3rd instant
and we make haste to answer them. We are very grateful to you
and your wife (estimable senora) for all that (lo que) you (Vds.)
have done for our daughter during her illness, and we hope that
we shall-be-able (§153) some day to repay you [for] the many
good services that you have had the kindness to show our beloved
daughter.
We present our respects to you (Vd.) and all your family, and
we are very sincerely yours,
Paul Martinez Tamayo.
Anna Herrera de Martinez.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
204. Supresi6n del articulo determinado. — El artfculo deter-
minado, aunque necesario en ingles, se suprime en espanol:
1. Generalmente ante el nombre en aposici6n.
2. Ante el adjetivo numeral que modifica a im tltulo.
196 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
206. Supre8i6n del artfculo indetenninado. — Generalmente
sesuprime:
1. Ante el nombre no calificado que sirve de predicado (atributo).
2. Ante el nombre en aposici6n.
3. Ante las voces cierto, otro, ciento, mil ; y despu^s de tal.
4. En diversas expresiones idiomdticas, tales como: . . .
207. Pronombres posesivos. — Obs6rvese que en espanol los
pronombres posesivos requieren el artlculo determinado y no lo
requieren en ingl6s.
a. Pero el artlculo determinado se usa con el posesivo como predi-
cado (atributo) solamente en las preguntas que empiezan por cuAl o
qu6 (adj.) o en la contestaci6n a estas preguntas.
208. El artfculo determinado puede usarse con de #1, de ella,
etc., en vez de suyo, etc., para dar mayor claridad o 6nfasis a la
expresi6n.
LESSON XLV
210. Demonstratives. — Study §§59-62.
a. That of, the one of, etc., are usually expressed by el (la, lo, los,
las) de.
La pluma de acero y la de oro. The steel pen and the gold one
(lit.. The pen of steel and that
of gold).
Lo de ayer. The affair of yesterday.
211. Relative Pronouns
que, who (whom), which, that
el cual (la cual, lo cual, los cuales, las cuales) 1 , / i. \ !.• v
. n 1 1 IN f who (whom), which
el que (la que, lo que, los que, las que) j ^ "
quien (-es), who (whom)
cuanto (-a, -os, -as), all who, all that
cuyo (-a, -OS, -as), whose
212. Uses of the Relative Pronouns. — 1. Que, the most
common of the Spanish relative pronouns, is invariable. It
LESSON XLV
197
is used as subject or object of a verb, and it may refer to
persons or things. After a preposition, whom is quien (-es).
£1 alunmo que parti6 hoy.
La alumna que vi esta ma-
nana.
Los alumnos de quienes ha-
bl&bamos.
The student (m.) who (that) left
to-day.
The student (/.) whom (that) I
saw this morning.
The students of whom we were
speaking.
2. El cual (la cual, etc.), el que (la que, etc.), or quien
(-es), may be used to avoid ambiguity. El cual and el que
indicate the gender and number of the antecedent. Quien
makes clear that the antecedent is a person and indicates
the number.
He escrito al hljo de dofia
Francisca, el cual estudia
para medico.
Ayer vi al duefio de la casa,
quien estS. en la ciudad.
I have written to Dona Fran-
cisca's son who is studying to
be a physician.
Yesterday I saw the owner of the
house, who is in town.
3. He who, she who, the one who, etc., are expressed by
el que, la que, etc., or by quien (-es).
£1 que desea mucho siempre
es pobre.
£stos muchachos son los que
Vd. buscaba.
Quien calla, otorga.
No tengo a qixien dirigirme.
He who desires much is always
poor.
These boys are the ones that you
were looking for.
He who is silent gives assent.
I haven't any one to whom to
apply.
4. Neuter that which or what (= that which), referring to a
statement or idea, is lo que, and neuter which is commonly
lo cual.
^Sabe Vd. lo que quiere?
Prometi6 estudiar mas, lo cual
agradd mucho a su padre.
Do you know what he wants?
He promised to study more, which
greatly pleased his father.
198 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
5. A Spanish relative pronoun can not be omitted, nor
can it precede its preposition, as in English. Compare
the man we were talking about with el hombre de quien
habllbamos.
213. Study the inflection of tener (§258), estar (§260),
and andar (§262).
EXERCISES
afectisimo, -a {ahao, -a), most ofrecer, to offer
affectionate (ly) pedir (i) prestado, to ask the
agradar, to please loan of, borrow
apixrado, -a, without money el placer, pleasure
la culpa, fault, guilt privar, to deprive (of)
el duefio, owner procurar, to attempt, try
la falta, lack prometer, to promise
el guia, guide tomar prestado, to borrow
me hace falta, I lack, I need; no puedo menos de hacerlo, I can't
help doing it; si Vd. tiene inconveniente en hacerlo, if you have any
objection to doing it; ^que hay de nuevo? what is the news? lo
logre, I succeeded (in doing so); no es mia la culpa, it is not my fault;
Vd. tiene la culpa, it is your fault; no deje Vd. de hacerlo, do not fail
to do so; no hay nada de particular, there is nothing im usual
A. 1. Calle de Preciados, Matanzas, Cuba
8 de Enero de 1918
Querido Juan:
Me hace falta dinero. iPuede Vd. enviarme un giro postal
de cincuenta pesos oro? Si me presta esta suma, prometo
pagdrsela el primero del mes que viene. No me agrada
pedir prestado el dinero que necesito, pero esta vez no puedo
menos de hacerlo. Siento muchfsimo molestar a Vd. y si
tiene inconveniente en prestdrmelo, no lo haga. No es mla
la culpa de hallarme apurado (sin dinero) en esta poblacion.
Se lo expUcar^ a Vd. cuando le vea. He procurado tomar
prestado aqul el dinero que me falta, pero no lo logr^. La
verdad es que no tengo a quien dirigirme. iQu6 hay de
LESSON XLV 199
nuevo en la Habana? Aqul no hay nada de particular. No
deje Vd. de escribirme.
Suyo afmo,
Felipe.
2. Calle de Francos, 85
Serior Don Carlos Tamayo y Baus,
Puerta del Sol, 10.
Muy senor mio:
Tendrlamos gran placer en que nos hiciese Vd. el honor de
comer con nosotros manana por la noche. Espero que no
tenga Vd. ningun otro compromiso que nos prive de su
companla en esta ocasion.
Mi marido tendrd el gusto de hacerle una visita hoy para
saludarle y para ofrecerse a acompanarle {accompany you)
manana cuando venga a nuestra casa.
Quedo de Vd. S. S.,
Q. S. M. B.,1
Mercedes Garcia de Niinez.
A 21 de diciembre de 1918.
B. Contestese. 1. I A quien escribio Felipe? 2. ^Cudl es
la fecha de su carta? 3. iQu6 le hacia falta a Felipe?
4. ^Cud,nto dinero queria que le enviase Juan? 5. ^Cudndo
prometio pagarselo? 6. ^Le agradaba a Felipe pedir prestado
el dinero que necesitaba? 7. ^No pudo menos de hacerlo?
8. iTenia Felipe la culpa de hallarse apurado (sin dinero)?
9. ^Cuando se lo explicaria a su amigo? 10. ^Donde pro-
cure tomar prestado el dinero que le faltaba? 11. ^Lo logro?
> S. S. Q. S. M. B. here is to be read segura servidora que su mano besa.
This very formal expression is now little used except in invitations, an-
nouncements, etc. When a man thus addresses a woman, the corresponding
formal expression is S. S. Q. S. P. (pies) B. Instead of de Vd. S. S. Q. S, M.
(P.) B., one also finds S. S. S. Q. B. S. M. (P.) = su seguro servidor que
besa su mano (sus pies). In ordinary social and commercial correspond-
ence, it is now customary to omit Q. B. S. M., or to use in its place Q. E.
5. M. = que estrecha su mano, who clasps your hand.
200 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
12, iPor qu^ no? 13. iHabia algo (anything) de particular
en Matanzas? 14. iD6nde estd Matanzas?
15. iA qui6n escribio la senora dona Mercedes Garcfa de
Niiiiez? 16. ^Cual es el nombre de bautismo (de pila)
de esta senora? 17-18. iCual es el apellido de su padre
(de su marido)? 19. ^En qu^ tendrian gran placer la senora
y su marido? 20. ^Para cudndo invito ella al senor Tamayo
a comer con ellos? 21. ^Para qu6 tendria el marido el gusto
de hacer una visita al senor Tamayo? 22. ^Cudl es la fecha
de la invitacion?
C. 1. The lady who arrived yesterday. 2, The lady to whom I
was speaking. 3. The young lady whom I saw this morning.
4. The book that he borrowed from me (me pi diSprestado). 5. The
man that borrowed the book. 6. The book of which we were
speaking. 7. The house he bought. 8. The house in which he
lives. 9. I have written to Mr. Herrera's daughter who is in New
York. 10. I have written also to Mrs. Martinez's son who is in
Havana. 11. Do you know a book which is (§161, 2) more inter-
esting than this [one] ? 12. Do you know the author of this book,
who is [a] great poet in my opinion? 13-14. This boy (This
girl) is the one who told me so. 15-16. These men (These women)
are the ones who took it (se lo llevaron). 17. What do you want?
18. Tell me what you want. 19. I believe you don't know what
you want, 20. What did he buy? 21. He will (qixiere) not tell
me what he bought. 22. He is working harder (mas), which pleases
me greatly (mucho). 23, He told us the truth, which (n.) sur-
prised (sorprendi6) us.
D. 1. Calle de San Fernando, 15, Buenos Aires.
May 5, 1918,
Dear Ferdinand:
Will you send me a postal money order for (de) seventy-five
dollars? I am without money. I have spent the last dollar that
I had. I tried to borrow some money from (a) an acquaintance,
but he would (queria) not lend it to me. I haven't C^ny] friends
in this town. If you will lend me that (esa) amount, I promise
LESSON XLV 201
to pay it back (= pay it to you) the first of next month. If you
have any objection to lending me so (tan) large an amount (= an
amount so large), send me fifty dollars.
I am sorry to trouble you, but it isn't my fault that I am without
money. I haven't any one here to whom to apply. I tried to find
some friend, but I didn't succeed. What's the news in Monte-
video? I hope you and all your people are well. There is
nothing unusual here. Do not fail to write me as soon as possible,
because I need money.
Most affectionately yours,
Paul.
2. Mrs. Mary Herrera de L6pez,
Puerta del Sol, 15.
Dear Madam (Muy seflora m£a) :
We should be greatly pleased if (vease A. 2) you would do U3
the honor of dining with us Thursday night (el jueves por la noche) .
We hope that you have no engagement that will deprive us of your
company. (The) dinner will be served at seven o'clock. My hus-
band will have the pleasure of sending you (de mandar a Vd.) our
motor car, at the hour mentioned (seflalada), to bring you to our
house. I am very sincerely yours (vease A. 2),
Anna Rodriguez de Ulloa.
January 12, 1918.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
210. Demostrativos : . . .
a. Thai of, the one of, etc., se expresan generalmente per el (la, lo,
los, las) de.
212. Uso de los pronombres relatives. — 1. Que, el mds
comiin de los pronombres relatives espanoles, es invariable. Se
usa como sujebo o complemento verbal, pudiendo referirse a per-
Bonas o cosas. Despu^s de una preposici6n, whom es quien (-es).
2. Para evitar la ambigiiedad en las expresiones se hace uso de
el cual (la cual, etc.), el que (la que, etc.), o quien (-es). El cual
y el que indican el g^nero y el niimero del antecedente. Qmeo
indica que el antecedente es una persona e indica su niimero.
202 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
3. He who, she who, the one who, etc., se traducen por el que, la
que, etc., o por quien (-es).
4. Las expresiones neutras that which o what (= that which) que
hacen referenda a una manifesta,ci6n o idea, se traducen por lo que,
y el neutro which es comunmente lo cual.
5. El pronombre relativo espanol no puede omitirse, ni puede
preceder a su preposici6n, como en ingl6s.
LESSON XLVI
214. Interrogative Pronouns
quien (-es), who (whom) cufil (-es), which
de quien (-es), whose cuinto (-a, -os, -as), how much
que, what (which) (many)
All except quien (-es) may be used as pronominal adjectives.
a. In questions, which used as an attributive (or adherent) adjective
is que : ^que libro quiere Vd.? which book do you wish ?
h. In exclamations, what (a) or how is que: jque bonita niilal whai
a pretty girl! jque p&lida estdsl how pale you are!
215. Indefinite Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives
. . f some one, somebody ninguno (-a, -os, -as), none, no
\ any one, anybody ningima cosa 1
alguno (-a, -os, -as), some, any, cosa alguna [ nothing
a few nada J
alguna cosa | ^^^^^ j^ mucho (-a, ^s. -as) much many
xmo (-a, -OS, -as), one, some todo (-a, -os, -as), all, every;
cada {adj., invar.), each, every (n.) everything
cada uno (-a), each one mismo (-a, -os, -as), same, self
ambos (-as) \ i .. otro (-a, -os, -as), other, another
los (las) dos / tanto (-a, -os, -as), as (so) much
los (las) dem&s, the rest (many)
cualquiera (cualesquiera), any tal, such, such a
(one) at all, whatever quienquiera (qmenesquiera), who-
nadie, no one, nobody ever
LESSON XL VI 203
M&s vale algo que nada. Something is better than nothing.
Todo hombre debe cumplir Every man should do his duty.
con su deber.
Todos los muchachos jugaban All the boys were plajdng ball.
a la pelota.
Va al teatro todas las noches He goes to the theater every (each)
(cada noche). night.
Cada dos horas sale un tren. A train leaves every two hours.
Nos quiere a los dos. He Ukes us both.
Murio el mismo dia. He died the same day.
£l mismo me lo dijo. He told me so himself.
Quisieramos otros dos. We should like two others.
Hay tantos hombres como There are as many men as women.
mujeres.
Nunca pase tal noche. I never passed such a night.
o. An unemphatic some or any is usually not expressed in Spanish.
i Quiere Vd. uvas? Do you want some grapes?
iTiene Vd. peras? — No tengo. Have you any pears? — I haven't
any.
b. A ZMe (denoting quantity) is un poco de : ^puede Vd. prestarme
un poco de dinero? can you lend me a little money f
c. Cualquiera (cualesquiera) may lose the final -a when it precedes
the noun it modifies.
Cualquier hombre es bueno para Any man is good (enough) for
eso. that.
But, Para eso cualquiera es bueno. For that any one (at all) is good.
d. Review §113.
216. Study the inflection of poner (§265), saber (§268),
caber (§269), and poder (§270).
201 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
EXERCISES
adjunto, -a, adj., adjunto, adv., participar, to announce
enclosed, herewith reexpedir (i), to forward
asistir, to be present (at), at- religiose, -a, religious
tend remitir, to remit, send
bonito, -a, pretty resfriarse, to catch cold
casarse con, to marry, get mar- simpdtico, -a, charming, pleaa-
ried ant
la ceremonia, ceremony suplicar, to beg
el enlace, union, marriage la tardanza, delay
enojarse, to get angry; eno- el temple, temple, church
jado, -a (con), angry (with) verificarse, to be held or per-
fijamente, with certainty formed
Francisco, Francis
la noticia, news (item); las noti-
cias, news
^cuindo tuvo Vd. noticias de el? when did you hear from him last?
a los pocos alios de estar aqui, after being here a few years; ^que hay?
what's the matter? ^que tiene Vd.? what's the matter with you? no
tengo nada, there's nothing the matter with me; de vez en cuando,
from time to time; tuvo lugar, it took place; si mal no me acuerdo, if
I remember rightly; guarda cama, he stays in bed; tengo miedo, I
am frightened; se me olvid6, I forgot.
A. 1. Mexico/ 5 de Julio de 1918.
Querido Carlos:
iCudndo tuvo Vd. noticias de Pedro? A los pocos dfas de
estar en Mexico recibi una carta de 61, pero no ha vuelto a
escribirme despu^s. iQu6 tendrd que no quiere escribirme?
iCree Vd. que est6 enojado conmigo? Yo le escribo de vez
en cuando, pero no contesta a mis cartas.
^Ha of do Vd. que Francisco se cas6 con la hija de los
seiiores de Montoya? La ceremonia religiosa se verific6 en
> Within Mexico itself, the word " Mexico " usually means the city of
Mexico. The country as a whole is usually spoken of as la Repiiblica Mexi-
can*, but officially it is called los Estados Unidos Mexicanos. The official
spelling is Mexico and mexicano, but the pronunciation is always M6jico
and mejicano.
LESSON XLVI 205
el templo de Santa Teresa el 15 de abril. La ceremonia
civil ^ tuvo lugar la manana del mismo dia, si mal no me
acuerdo. Yo no pude asistir por {on account of) haberme
resfriado. Tuve que guardar cama ocho dlas. Dona Julia,
la esposa de Francisco, es bonita y simpatica; y, lo que es
de mayor importancia, su padre es rico. Adjunta * le remito
a Vd. la invitaci6n que recibf de los senores de Montoya.
Como no s6 fijamente su direcci6n, me permito remitir
esta carta a casa de su padre, quien la reexpedird si Vd. no
estd ahl (there). Le ruego perdone' la tardanza con que
correspondo a su carta.
Cr^ame siempre su buen amigo,
Juan.
2. Felipe Montoya y Carranza
y Maria Galdos de Montoya
tienen el honor de participar a Vd.
el pr6ximo enlace de su hija
Julia
con el Senor
Don Francisco
Tamayo y Baus
y le suplican se sirva (to he kind enough) asistir a
la ceremonia religiosa que se verificard en el Templo
de Santa Teresa el dfa 15 del presente a las 11 de la
maiiana.
Mexico, abril de 1918.
B. Contestese. 1. ^A quien escribi6 Juan? 2. iD6nde es-
taba cuando escribio la carta? 3. iCudl es la fecha de la
carta? 4. ^De qui^n queria noticias? 5. iCudndo recibi6
* In most countries a civil ceremony is requisite to make a marriage
legal.
' Instead of adjunta, adjunto may here be used adverbially.
« After rogar, suplicar, and the like, the conjunction que may be omitted
as here.
206 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Juan una carta de Pedro? 6. ^Ha vuelto Pedro a escribirle
despu^s? 7. iSabfa Juan lo que tenfa Pedro? 8. iTemfa
que Pedro estuviera enojado con 61? 9. iCudndo le es-
cribfa? 10, iContestaba Pedro a las cartas de Juan?
11. iCon qui^n se cas6 Francisco? 12. ^En donde se
verified la ceremonia religiosa? 13. iCudndo se verified?
14. iCudndo tuvo lugar la ceremonia civil? 15. iPudo asis-
tir Juan a las ceremonias? 16. iPor qu6 no? 17. iCudnto
tiempo tuvo que guardar cama? 18. ^Es bonita o fea
(homely) la esposa de Francisco? 19. ^Es rico o pobre el
padre de ella? 20. iQu6 cosa le remitio Juan a su amigo?
21. ^A casa de quien remitio Juan la carta? 22. ^Que le
rogo a su amigo que perdonase? 23. iComo se subscribi6
Juan?
24, ^Qui^nes son los padres de doiia Julia? 25, lQ,u6
tenian el honor de participar a Juan? 26. iQu6 le suplicaron
que se sirviera hacer?
C. 1. What a pretty girl! 2. But how pale she is! 3. What a
handsome horse you have! 4. How gentle he is! 5. Whose horse
have you? 6-7. Some one (No one) told me so. 8. Have you any
friends in Guadalajara? 9. I haven't any friends there (allfi).
10. I do not know any one there. 11. Have you anything that is
(§161, 2) better than this (n.)? 12. I haven't anything better.
13. Have you any apples to-day? 14. No, ma'am; we haven't
any to-day. 15. We have neither apples nor pears. 16. Every
man ought to get married. 17. All men ought to work. 18. They
ought to work every day except Sundays. 19. I beUeve every-
thing (§212, 5) he says (dice). 20-21. A train leaves every hour
(every two hours). 22. A Uttle (pequefio) boy asked me for a httle
money. 23. I gave him a few (unos pocos) cents. 24. He Ukes us
both. 25. He doesn't hke either one of us (No nos quiere ni a
uno ni a otro). 26-27. Did you buy another (the other) house?
28. They received many other (otras muchas) invitations. 29. She
told him so herself. 30. Mr. Hidalgo arrived the same day, 31, He
ought not to do such a thing, 32. I never passed such a day.
LESSON XLVI 207
33. Whatever amount he may offer me, I shall accept it. 34. I
should be very glad to (Tendria mucho placer en) accept any
amount (at all). 35. Are there as many women as men here?
36. There are not so many men as women.
D. 1. Guadalajara, Mexico.
June 12, 1918.
Dear Philip:
Do you know that Paul Palacio married the daughter of Mr. and
Mrs. Hidalgo last month? The reUgious ceremony was performed
in the church of Saint Anne, May 5j at 10 o'clock in (de) the morn-
ing, if I remember rightly. The civil ceremony took place the same
day. As I was ill, I couldn't go (= attend). I caught cold and had
to stay in bed several days. Paul's wife is pretty, and her friends
say that she is very charming. I hope to have the pleasure of
knowing her soon. I send you herewith the invitation that the
Hidalgos were good enough to (tuvieron la bondad de) send (enviar)
me. I forgot to tell you that the lady's father is exceedingly-rich
(riquisimo).
When did you hear from Ferdinand last? He doesn't write to
me Cany3 more. After having been here a few months I wrote to
him, but he didn't answer my letter. Do you think {usese creer)
he is angry with me? I haven't done anything that could offend
him, so far as I know (que yo sepa). Can you tell me what is the
matter with him (lo que tiene)?
I have [got] to send this letter to your father's house, as I don't
know your address. Pardon the delay with which I answer your
letter. Don't fail to write me all the news of Guanajuato. Nothing
has happened here (Aqui no hay novedad), except Paul's marriage
(la boda).
Beheve me ever your cordial friend (vease A. 1),
Charles.
2. Escribase, siguiendo el modelo de A. 2. Mr. and Mrs. Henry
Hidalgo y Bazdn ^ have the honor of announcing the approaching
marriage of their daughter Mercedes to Mr. Paul Palacio Vald^s,
1 The lady's maiden name was Maria Ortiz.
208 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
and they beg you to be kind enough to be present at the religious
ceremony which will be performed in the church of Saint Anne the
fifth day of next month at 10 o'clock in the morning.
Guadalajara, April, 1918.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
214. Pronombres interrogativos : . , . Todos except© qtii^n (-es)
pueden usarse como adjetivos pronominales.
a. En las interrogaciones, el adjetivo which, antepuesto al nombre
que modifica, se traduce per la palabra que.
b. En las exclamaciones, las palabras what o how se traducen per la
palabra que.
216. Algunos pronombres indeterminados y adjetivos prono-
minales: . . .
a. Per regla general si some o any no son enfdticos, no se expresan
en espanol.
6. A little, denotando cantidad, es im poco de.
c. Cualquiera (cualesquiera), cuando precede al nombre que modi-
fica, puede perder la -a final.
LESSON XLVn
217. Cardinal Numerals
1 im(o), -a
11 once
2 dos
12 doce
3 tres
13 trece
4 cuatro
14 catorce
5 cinco
15 quince
6 seis
16 diez y seis *
7 siete
17 diez y siete
8 echo
18 diez y ocho
9 nueve
19 diez y nueve
10 diez
20 veinte
> Or diecisfiis, diedsiete, etc.
LESSON XLVII
209
21 veintiun(o), -a *
80 ochenta
22 vemtid6s
90 noventa
23 veintitres
100 cien(to)
24 veintictxatro
200 doscientos, -as
25 veinticinco
300 trescientos, -as
26 veintiseis
400 ciiatrocientos, -as
27 veintisiete
600 qiiinientos, -as
28 veintiocho
600 seiscientos, -as
29 veintinueve
700 setecientos, -as
30 treinta
800 ochocientos, -as
31 treinta y un(o), -a
900 novecientos, -as
40 cuarenta
1000 mU
50 cincuenta
2000 dos nul
60 sesenta
1,000,000 un mill6n
70 setenta
2,000,000 dos millones
a. For the apocopation of uno and ciento, see §179. Note also the
use of un and una in such expressions as veintiiin dias, twenty-one days,
veintiuna semanas, twenty-one weeks.
b. For the omission of un before cien(to) and mil, see §205, 3.
But note veintifin mil, 21,000; etc.
c. Mill6n is a masculine noun; its plural is millones. It requires
the preposition de before the word it multiplies: un mill6n de pesos,
a million dollars.
d. In compound numbers, y, and, is placed before the last niuneral,
provided the numeral that immediately precedes is less than 100.
Thus: ciento noventa y cinco, 195; but doscientos cinco, 205.
e. Ck)unting by hundreds is not carried above nine himdred in
Spanish; beginning with ten hundred, mil is used: mil novecientos
diez y siete, 1917.
218.
Ordinal Numerals
1st primer (o), -a, -os, -as '
2nd segundo, -a, -os, -as
3rd tercer(o), -a, -os, -as
4th cuarto, -a, -os, -as
6th quinto, -a, -os, -as
6th sexto, -a, -os, -as
7th septimo, -a, -os, -as
8th octavo, -a, -os, -as
9th noveno, -a, -os, -as
10th decimo, -a, -os, -as
* Also written veinte y uno, veinte y dos, etc., but not pronounced thus.
Veintiun requires the accent mark.
* These may be abbreviated to P (l^""). 1*. i°^, l^t etc.
210 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
a. For the apocopation of primero and tercero, see §179, 1.
b. The Spanish ordinals above decimo are Uttle used. Their place
is usually taken by the cardinals.
Alfonso Trece. Alfonso the Thirteenth.
£1 capitulo cincuenta. The fiftieth chapter.
219. Fractions
, f medio, -a i / ^"* tercio
* \ la mitad 1 1^ tercera parte
I, tres cuartos; y, un quinto (or la quinta parte); iV, un decimo
(or la decima parte); etc.
From xr to ^?, fractional numerals are commonly formed by add-
ing -avo to the cardinal after dropping a final vowel, except the -e of
-siete and -nueve: tt, un onzavo; r\, dos dozavos; ^^, cinco
veintavos; etc.; but ^7, un diecisieteavo ; ^, tm veintinueveavo.
jhs is la centesima (parte) ; tsjWj la milesima (parte).i
a. Half (a half, one half, half a) as substantive, is expressed by la
mitad; as adjective, by medio (-a).
La mitad de mis bienes. One half of my goods.
Trabajd medio dia. He worked a half day.
220. Arithmetical Signs
+ , mfis o y X , (multiplicado) por
— , menos : , dlvidido por
= , es (igual a), son (iguales a).
2 + 3 = 5, dos mis (o y) tres son cinco.
5-3 = 2, cinco menos tres son (o es igual a) dos.
3x3-9, tres (multiplicado) por tres son nueve.
9 : 3 = 3, nueve dividido por tres son tres.
221. Study the inflection of venir (§264), hacer (§266),
and querer (§271).
1 One may also say una tercera parte, dos quintas partes, una milesima
(parte), etc.
LESSON XLVII 211
EXERCISES
alrededor de, around, about el mercado, market
el centimo, centime la moneda, coin
la compra, purchase multiplicar, to multiply
chico, -a, small, little el niquel, nickel (metal)
desde, since, from la onza, oimce
dividir, to divide la plata, silver
el dolar, dollar (of U. S. A.) el " real," (in Spain) " nickel ";
dure, -a, hard; el dure, dollar (in Mexico, etc.) " shilling "
(of Spain) or " bit "
estadounidense,^ of the United la tierra, earth, land
States la unidad, unity
gordo, -a, stout, fat el valor, value; courage
hispanoamericano, -a, Span- variar (§243), to vary
ish-American
da una vuelta, it makes a tiu-n, revolves; el sol sale, the sim rises;
el sol se pone, the sim sets; pot todo, altogether; la. cdmo se vende?
how is it sold? what is it sold at? hace sol (luna), the sun (moon) is
shining (also hay luna)
A. 1. El ano es el espacio de tiempo en que la tierra da
una vuelta completa alrededor del sol. 2. El ano se divide
en 4 estaciones, en 12 meses, en 52 semanas, y en 365 dias.
3. El mes tiene poco mas de 4 semanas. 4. La semana es
el espacio de 7 dIas, de los cuales el primero es el lunes y el
liltimo el domingo. 5. El dla se divide en 24 horas; la hora
se divide en 60 minutos; y el minuto se divide en 60 segun-
dos. 6. En el verano el sol sale temprano y se pone tarde.
7. En el invierno sale tarde y se pone temprano.
B. 1. La unidad monetaria de Espana es la peseta, que
vale poco menos de 20 centavos norteamericanos (estado-
unidenses). 2. La peseta se divide en 100 centimos. 3. La
moneda de plata de 5 pesetas se llama popularmente "duro";
> Estadounidense (or estadunidense) is a new word that has not met
with general acceptance. In Spain and in South America the Americans of
the United States are usually called norteamericanos or yanquis.
212 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
25 centimes son iin "real." 4. A veces la moneda de cobre
de 10 c^ntimos se llama vulgarmente "perra gorda" (o
"perro gordo"), y la de 5 centimos "perra chica" (o "perro
chico").!
5. El peso es la unidad monetaria de la Argentina, Chile,
Cuba, Mexico y algunos otros palses hispanoamericanos.
6. El peso se divide en 100 centavos. 7. El valor del peso
varfa desde 40 centavos norteamericanos (estadounidenses)
hasta 50 centavos. 8. En Mexico la moneda de 25 cen-
tavos se llama tambi^n popularmente "dos reales."
C. CovUstese. 1. iQu6 es el ano? 2. ^En cudntas esta-
ciones se divide el ano? 3. iCudles son? 4. ^En cudntos
meses se divide el ano? 5. iCudles son? 6-7. ^En
cudntas semanas (^En cu^ntos dias) se divide el ano?
8. iCud.ntas semanas tiene el mes? 9. iQu6 es la semana?
10-11. iCudl es el primer (el liltimo) dla de la semana?
12. iCudles son los dIas de la semana? 13. ^En cudntas
horas se divide el dla? 14. ^En cudntos minutos se divide
la hora? 15. iEn cudntos segundos se divide el minuto?
16-17. iSale el sol y se pone tarde o temprano en el
verano (en el invierno)? 18-19. ^Cudl es la unidad
monetaria de Espaiia (de Mexico)? 20-21. ^En qu6 se
divide la peseta (el peso)? 22-26. iC6mo se llama tam-
bi^n la moneda de plata de 5 pesetas; (la moneda de cobre
de 10 centimos; la moneda de cobre de 5 centimos; la moneda
de plata de 25 centavos)? 27-28. iCudl es el valor en
centavos norteamericanos (estadounidenses) de la peseta
espanola?
D. Contestese. 1. ^Cudl es la suma (sum) de $23.25 y
S35.50?2 2. Side $95.35 quito $33.15, icudntoqueda? 3. Si
1 Because the image of a lion on the coin is humorously assumed to
resemble a dog.
* In these problems read $ as " peso " or " pesos." In some countries
the $ is sometimes placed after the number: thus, 15$ » 15 pesos.
LESSON XLVII 213
multiplico $21.75 por 7, icual es el producto? 4. Si divido
$84.20 por 4, icual es el resultado? 5. Una persona ha he-
cho 3 compras, y ha gastado sucesivamente $14, $34 y $68.
^Cud.nto ha gastado por todo? 6. Un nino nacio el 5 de
febrero de 1910. iCuando cumplio 5 afios? 7. Si Juan
tenia $10 y gast6 $6.60, icudnto dinero le queda? 8. Si
Vd. pago $18 por 8 metres y medio de un genero de seda,
ia como se vendla el metro? 9-19. Si damos a una peseta
espanola el valor de 20 centavos norteamericanos (estado-
unidenses), ^cud,nto vale en moneda norteamericana (esta-
dounidense): Ptas.: 28.15; 15.10; 35.75; 93.35; 118.60;
175.70; 225.25; 280.20; 350.75; 500.35; 1,000? (Por
ejempio, 28 pesetas con 15 centimes valen 5 pesos y 63 cen-
tavos norteamericanos [^estadounidenses]]).^
E. Lease 0 escrlbase en espanol. 21; 32; 43; 54; 65; 76; 87
98; 123; 234; 345; 456; 567; 678; 789; 1,240; 2,357
5,962; 15,749; 100,154; 1,000,000; 2,100,150; el ano 1492
el ano 1808; el ano 1892; el ano 1917; el aiio 1919; el ano
1920 ; la pdgina 35; el capltulo 175; Carlos V.; Luis 14
el volumen 8; Alfonso 12; 1/2; 2/3; 1/4; 2/5; 5/8
9/10; 1/50; 5/75; 9/100; 25/1000; 3 + 5 = 8; 8-2 = 6
3x15 = 45; 48:16 = 3.
F. 1. A (El) year is divided into four seasons, namely (a saber) :
spring, summer, autumn (o " fall "), and winter. 2. Summer is
the warm season (vease XXVI, B. 4), and winter is the cold season.
3. It is cold in winter because the days are short (cortos) and there
is not much sunshine. 4. The days are short because the sun rises
late and sets early. 5. It is warm in summer because the days are
long and there is much sunshine. 6. A (El) year is divided into
twelve months, namely: January, February, March, April, May,
* The abbreviation of peseta is pta. Note the use of con before the
number of centimes. The easiest method of reducing pesetas to dollars
is to multiply the number of pesetas by two. and move the decimal point
one digit to the left.
214 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
June, July, August, September, October, November, December.
7. Some months are longer than the others (los demfis). 8. For
instance (Por ejemplo), January has thirty-one days while (en
tanto que) February, as a rule, has only (no tiene mfis que) twenty-
eight days. 9. February has only four weeks, while January has
nearly four weeks and a half. 10. The days of the week are Mon-
day, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday.
11, In Spain and in the Spanish- American countries Monday is
the first day of the week and Sunday is the last day. 12. Sunday
is the day of rest, and the others are work days (= days of work).
13. An (La) hour is divided into sixty minutes, and a (el) minute
is divided into sixty seconds.
G. 1. The monetary unit of Spain is different from (diferente de)
that (§210, a) of the Spanish-American countries. 2. For in-
stance, in Argentina and in Mexico, the monetary unit is the dollar,
which is divided into one hundred cents, while in Spain it is the
peseta, which is divided into one hundred centimes. 3. The Spanish
silver " duro " has approximately the same weight as (que) the
Mexican dollar. 4. A Spanish "real," as a rule, is worth less
than a Mexican " real," because the Mexican " real " is of silver.
6. In Spain there are copper coins of one centime, and of five
and ten centimes. 6. In Spanish America the smallest coin, as
a rule, is that of one cent.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
217. Numerales cardinales : . . .
a. Para el ap6cope de vmo y ciento, v^ase el §179. Obs^rvese el
USD de un y una en expresiones como veintifin dias y veintiuna
semanas.
b. Para la supresi6n de un ante las palabras cien(to) y nul, v&ise
el §205, 3. Obs^rvese sin embargo veintiiin mil.
c. Milldn es nombre masculine: su plural es millones. Requiere
la preposici6n de ante el nombre que multiplica.
d. En niimeros compuestos, y se coloca ante el liltimo numeral,
con tal que el niimero que le preceda sea menor de ciento.
e. En espanol s61o se cuenta por cientos hasta SOO; de 1,000 en
adelante se emplea mil.
LESSON XLVIII 215
218. Numerales ordinales : . . .
a. Para el ap6cope de primero y tercero, v^ase el §179, 1.
6. En espanol se hace poco uso de los ordinales despufe de decimo.
En su lugar se usan los cardinales.
219. Numeros quebrados: — Desde l/ll hasta 1/99 se forman
los numeros quebrados anadiendo -avo al ndmero cardinal despu6s
de suprimir la vocal final excepto la -e de -siete y -nueve.
a. Half (a half, one half, half a) como substantive se traduce por
la mitad ; como adjetivo, por medio (-a).
220. Signos aritmeticos : . . .
LESSON XLVIII
ADVERBS
222. — 1. Aqui, acfi, here, hither; ahi, there (near the person
addressed); alii, allfi, there, thither (more remote).
Aqui and alii denote a more specific and limited place
than do acd and alld.
Yen acH. Come here.
Yen aqui. Glome right here.
2. Mucho, mitch, a great deal; mtiy, very.
Ha estudiado mucho. He has studied much (a great
deal).
Estfi muy enferma. She is very ill.
a. Muy, not mucho, is used before a past participle not occurring
in a perfect tense: le estare muy agradecido, / shall be much obliged
to him.
b. Very, when standing alone, is mucho, as muy can never stand
alone: ^es interesante el libro? — si, mucho; i$ the book irUerestingt
— yes, very.
216 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
3. Both si, if, and si, yes, may be used as intensive
adverbs.
I Si no lo creo! Indeed I don't believe it!
J Si parti6 esta maflana! Why, he left this morning!
Ahora si lo creo. Now I do beUeve it.
Eso si que as bueno. That is indeed good.
4. Ya, already, now, in due time, indeed; ya no, no longer,
no more.
Ya acabl. I have already finished.
Ya entendemos. Now we understand.
Ya volvera. He will return in due time.
jYa lo creo! I should say so!
Ya no tengo dinero. I have no more money.
5. -mente. — In Spanish, adverbs may be formed from
many descriptive adjectives by adding -mente to the femi-
nine singular of the adjective, as correctamente (from
correcto), correctly, fdcilmente (from fScil), easily, etc.
a. When several adverbs in -mente modify the same word, -mente
is omitted from all but the last: hable Vd. clara y distintamente,
speak dearly and distinctly.
223. Agreement of Subject and Verb. — A verb agrees
with its subject in number and person.
Yd soy, I am; tfi eres, you are; Vd. y Juan son, you and John are; etc.
a. When subjects are of different persons, the verb is in the first
person plural if any of the subjects is of the first person; and it is in
the second person plural if the subjects are of the second and third
persons.
Tii y yo somos. You and I are.
£l y yo somos. He and I are.
T<i y el sois. You and he are.
224. Study the inflection of dar (§263), valer (§273),
saUr (§274), and ver (§279).
LESSON XLVIU 217
EXERCISES
la altura, height la hectfirea, hectare
la anchura, width, breadth hondo, -a, deep
el 4rea, /., are la libra, pound
firido, -a, arid, dry; los dridos, el lltro, hter
dry objects la longitud, length
ascender (ie) a, to amount to medir (i), to measure
la caja, box la pesa, weight (with which fo
el comercio, commerce, business weigh objects)
el cuadrado, square; cuadrado, pesar, to weigh
-a, square la profundidad, depth
espeso, -a, dense servirse (i) de, to use
el gramo, gramme el suelo, ground, floor
el grueso, bulk, thickness; grueso, la superficie, surface
-a, bulky, thick el tamaflo, size
^Cufil es la longitud (la anchtira, la altura, la profundidad, el grueso)?
what is the length (width, height, depth, thickness)? es de tin metro,
o tiene un metro, de largo (ancho, alto, hondo, grueso), o de longi-
tud (anchura, etc.), it is one meter long (wide, high, deep, thick); dos
veces mAs grande que, twice as large as; ^cuinto cabe en esta caja?
how much does this box hold (contain)? es decir, that is to say
A. 1. Espana y todos los pafees hispanoamericanos han
adoptado el sistema m^trico de pesas y medidas, que es
mds f dcil que el sistema ingles por (on account of) ser decimal.
2. Por ejemplo, 10 centimetros hacen un decfmetro y 10 decf-
metros hacen un metro, que es la unidad de longitud. 3. Para
medir las grandes distancias se emplea el kilometro, que es
igual a mil metros o aproximadamente 5/8 de una milla
inglesa. 4. Los terrenos se miden por dreas (el drea es un
cuadrado de 10 metros de lado) o por hectdreas ( = 100
dreas, o aproximadamente 2 1/2 ''acres" ingleses).
5. La unidad de capacidad para Hquidos es el litro, que
tiene el volumen de un decfmetro ciibico, y es igual a poco
mds de un "quart" ingles. 6. Por regla general, en los
paises espanoles los dridos se pesan y no se miden.
218 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
7. La unidad de peso del sistema m^trico decimal es el
gramo, que es igual al peso de un centimetro ciibico de agua
destilada (distilled). 8. Un gramo es equivalente aproxi-
madamente a 15 granos ingleses. 9. En el comercio la
pesa mds usual es el "kilo" o kilogramo, que tiene mil
gramos, y equivale a poco mds de dos libras inglesas.^
B. 1. iCudl es el tamano de este cuarto? 2. — El suelo
es un cuadrado de 5 metros de lado. 3. — Es decir, ^la
superficie del suelo asciende a 25 metros cuadrados? 4. — SI,
senor. — ^Y cudl es la altura de las paredes? 5. — Tienen
3 metros de altura. El techo, por supuesto, tiene la misma
superficie que el suelo.
6. iTiene Vd. una caja grande en que quepan todos mis
libros? Tengo unos 100 libros, poco mds o menos. 7. — Aqul
tengo una. El tamano de esta caja es de un metro de largo,
75 centfmetros de ancho y 50 centfmetros de hondo. ^Cree
Vd. que sea bastante grande? 8. — No, senor; necesito
una caja dos veces mds grande que ^sa. 9. — No tengo otra
mds grande. Los libros de Vd. deben de ^ ser muy grandes.
10. — Ya lo creo. La mayor parte de los volumenes son
gruesos.
C. CorUestese. 1. iQu6 sistema de pesas y medidas han adop-
tado Espana y los palses hispanoamericanos? 2-4. iCudl es
la unidad de longitud (de capacidad para llquidos, de peso)
en el sistema m^trico decimal? 5. ^Cudl es mds largo, el
metro o la vara inglesa? 6. ^Cudntas pulgadas inglesas
tiene un metro? 7. iQu6 medida se emplea para medir las
grandes distancias? 8. iCudl es mds largo, el kil6metro
o la milla inglesa? 9. iA qu6 fraccion (fraction) de milla
« Several old names of weights and measures are still occasionally heard
in Spanish-speaking countries, viz.: legua, league (about 3 miles, or 5 kil-
ometers); milla, mile; vara, yard (32 inches); pie, foot; pulgada, inch;
tonelada, ton; quintal, hundredweight; arroba, $5 pounds; libra, pound; etc.
* See deber de in General Vocabulary.
LESSON XLVIII 219
equivale el kil6metro? 10. iQu6 medida se emplea para
medir los terrenos? 11. ^A cudntos "acres" equivale la
hectarea? 12. iCudl es el voluraen de un litro? 13. ^A qu6
medida inglesa es aproximadamente igual? 14. En Espana
ise miden o se pesan los aridos? 15. El peso del gramo la.
qu6 volumen de agua destilada es igual? 16. ^A cudntos
granos ingleses equivale aproximadamente el gramo?
17. iCudl es la pesa mds usual de que se sirven en el
comercio? 18. ^A cudntas libras inglesas es aproxima-
damente igual?
D. Formense adverbios de hs siguierUes adjetivos descriptivos :
afectuoso, agradable, amargo, aproximado, atento, ciego, claro,
c6modo, completo, cordial, d^bil, fuerte, igual, real, triste.
E. 1-3. What is the length (width, depth) of this box? 4r-6. It
is one meter long (wide, deep). 7-9. What is the length (width,
height) of this room? 10-12. It is 3 meters long (wide, high).
13. What is the thickness of this woolen goods? 14. It is one
centimeter thick. 15. What is the thickness of this board (tabla)?
16. It is 3 centimeters thick. 17. What is the distance from
Havana to Santiago de Cuba? 18. It is (Hay) about 1,000 kilo-
meters. 19. How far is it from New York to Cddiz? 20. It is
about 6,000 kilometers. 21. How far is it from Boston to San
Francisco in a straight Une (en linea recta)? 22. It is about
5,000 kilometers. 23. How far is it from Philadelphia to Chicago?
24. It is about 1,500 kilometers. 25. If the floor of a room is four
meters square, how many square meters are there? 26. Contestese
a la pregunta anterior.
F. 1. He is not here. 2. Come here. 3. Come right-here (aquf).
4. She is not there. 5. There (Alii) in Havana it is warmer than
here (acfi). 6. Is she very ill? 7. Yes; very. 8. Why, I saw her
this morning! 9. Indeed I don't beheve it. 10. I also have seen
her to-day. 11. Now I do believe it. 12. I don't (Yo sf que no).
13. Have you already finished? 14. I have already finished.
15. When will he return? 16. It will not be long before he returns.
17. He will return in due time. 18. I should say so! 19. Now we
220 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
understand each other. 20. Will you lend me a dollar? 21. I can't;
I haven't any more money. 22. John and I study a great deal.
23. You and John do not study much.
G. 1. Has Mr. Morales a plantation in Cuba? 2. — I should
say so! He bought five hundred hectares of fertile land (terrenos)
for which (los cuales) he paid only fifty dollars gold a hectare.
He intends to grow tobacco (sembrar tabaco). 3. — How many
acres are five hundred hectares equal to {digase: To how many
acres, etc.)? 4. — You have only to (No tiene Vd. que hacer mis
que) multiply the number of hectares by two and a half and you
will have the number of acres. Do you understand (it)? 5. — I
didn't understand (it), but now I do (ahora si lo entiendo). 6. It
is easy, if one (uno) knows (sabe) the rule! 7. Do they use the
metric system in Cuba? 8. — Yes, sir; they use it in all the
Spanish-American countries. 9. — What is the size (tamaflo) of
Mr. Morales's house? — It is twenty-five meters long by ten meters
wide. 10. — What is the height? 11. — There are only two
stories, but the ceiUngs of the rooms are high. 12. It is-probably-
about (§122) eight meters high and it has a flat roof. 13. — How
far is it from his plantation to Havana? 14. — It is about (Es cosa
de) one hundred kilometers in a straight hne. 15. — How many
miles are one hundred kilometers equal to? 16. — About sixty.
To reduce (Para reducir) the kilometers to miles, we multiply the
nimiber of kilometers by six and strike off (quitamos) the last digit
(digito) of the product. 17. The result is not exact (exacto),
but it does pretty well (sirve bastante bien). 18. — In Cuba are
liquids bought and sold by Uters? — Yes, sir. 19. — Is wheat sold
by bushels (fanegas) or by kilograms? — By kilograms. 20. In
the western (occidentales) states of the United States that formed
part of Mexico before 1848 all grains are sold still by (the) weight,
as, for instance, in Colorado and CaUfornia.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
222. Adverbios. — 1. Aquf, ac&; ah{; allf, allfi.
AquI y alll senalan un lugar mds determinado y circunscrito que
el que senalan ac& o alU.
I
LESSON XLIX 221
2. Mucho signifioa much, a great deal; muy significa very.
a. Se usa muy, y no mucho, ante un participio pasado, si 6ate no
forma parte de un tiempo perfecto.
b. Very, cuando va solo, equivale a mucho, ya que muy no puede
Dunca ir solo.
3. Tanto si como si se usan como adverbios intensivos.
4. Ya significa now, in due time, indeed; ya no significa no
longer, no more.
5. -mente. En espanol se pueden formar adverbios de muchos
adjetivos descriptivos, anadiendo la terminaci6n -mente al femenino
singular del adjetivo.
a. Cuando varios adverbios en -mente modifican al mismo nombre,
la temiinaci6n -mente se omite en todos menos en el liltimo.
223. Concordancia de sujeto y verbo. — El verbo concierta
con el sujeto en numero y persona.
a. Cuando los sujetos son de distintas personas, el verbo se pone
en la primera persona pliu-al si alguno de los sujetos es de la primers
persona; y se pone en la segunda persona plural si los sujetos son de
la segunda y tercera persona.
LESSON XLIX
PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS
225. The Prepositions Por and Para. — For is expressed
by por or para. If for means for the sake of, on account of, or
in exchange for, it is expressed by por; if it denotes purpose
or destination, it is expressed by para.
Yo daria la vida per ella. I would give my life for her.
Le castig6 por haber dicho He punished him for having told
ima mentira. a lie.
Pagamos doscientos pesos por We paid two hundred dollars for
el caballo. the horse.
Le envie por el medico. I sent him for the physician.
Tengo im paquete para Vd. I have a package for you.
Mafiana parto para la Habana. To-morrow I leave for Havana.
222 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
a. Pot also means through, by, " per."
El ladr6n entr6 por la ven- The thief entered through the
tana. window.
Me cogi6 per la mano. He caught me by the hand.
Me pagan cinco mil pesos por They pay me five thousand dol-
aflo. lars a year (per year).
Ganamos seis por ciento por We earn six per cent per annmn.
afio.
6. Before an infinitive, to, meaning for the sake of, in exchange for,
is por, and meaning in order to is para.
Pugnando por entrar. Fighting to enter.
Lo hizo para engafiarme. He did it to deceive me.
226. Conjunctions. — 1. Y, or e before initial i- or hi-
(not before hie-), and. O, or u before initial o- or ho-, or.
Padre y madre, father and mother. Padre e hijo, father and son.
Cinco o seis, five or six. Siete u ocho, seven or eight.
But, helechos y hiedra, ferns and ivy.
2. Pero, mas, sino, bvi. Pero and mas are synonyms, but
pero is the more common. Sino is used after a negative
statement that is offset by an affirmative statement.
fil lo dice, pero (o mas) yo no He says so, but I do not believe
lo creo. it.
No voy a Caracas sino a Bo- I am not going to Caracas, but
got&. to Bogota.
3. Donde (interrogatively, d6nde), where, is often made
more explicit by prefixing a, en, or de.
La casa en donde vive. The house in which he lives.
lA d6nde va Vd.? Where are you going?
iDe d6nde viene el ? Where does he come from?
227. Word Order. — 1. When a verb precedes both its
subject and a noun object or predicate adjective, the sub-
LESSON XLIX 223
ject is placed before the object or predicate adjective if the
subject be the shorter, but if it be longer it follows.
iComprd la casa su sefior Did your father buy the house?
padre?
iComprd su padre todas estas Did your father buy all these
casas? houses?
iEs facil la lecci6n de caste- Is the Spanish lesson easy?
llano?
^Es la leccion facil o dif fell ? Is the lesson easy or difficult?
2. In a subordinate clause, the subject often follows the
verb if there be no noun object.
Esperaremos hasta que llegue We shall wait until the train
el tren. arrives.
228. Study the inflection of asir (§272), caer (§275),
and olr (§276).
EXERCISES
abonar, to credit el importe, amount
acusar, to acknowledge la libreria, bookstore
el apartado (de correos), post- manifestar (ie), to advise (of),
office box 1 inform (of)
arrojar, to throw, cast la orden, order
el cantar, song, poem particiilar, especial, private
la conformidad, approval pr6ximo pasado, last (month)
el cheque, check, draft el recibo, receipt, reception
detallar, to itemize reiterar, to repeat
la espera, expectation la remesa, remittance
el extracto, summary, statement respecto de, with regard to
la factura, bill retirar, to retire, take out
grate, -a, pleasing, kind el saldo, balance
en rdstica, in paper covers, unbound; Muy senores mios, Dear
Sirs; sirvase Vd., please; arroja un saldo a mi favor, there is (shown)
a balance in my favor
» Casilla. in Chile and some other Spanish-American countries.
224 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
A. 1. Librerfa General de Luis Contreras *
Correos: Apartado 55 Tel^fono 1695*
Madrid, 10 de Junio de 1917.
Sr. D. Felipe Heredia.
Muy sefior mlo:
Contesto a su grata (carta) de fecha 20 de mayo ppdo.
(= pr6ximo pasado) para manifestarle que el precio de la
obra de Rodriguez Marin, Quijote, publicado en la Colecci6n de
"Cldsicos casteUanos," es de 3 ptas. en nistica cada tomo,
siendo ocho la obra completa {the complete work being eight).
Respecto de la edicion critica del mismo autor, estdn ya
publicados 5 tomos ^ y el que f alta, para completar los 6 de
que se compondrd, dicha obra, se publicard dentro de este
ano.
En espera de sus gratas y nuevas 6rdenes, se reitera de
Vd. atento y seguro servidor,
Q. E. S. M.
Luis Contreras.
2. Muy seiiores mios:
Tengo el gusto de acusar a Vds. recibo de su apreciable
carta de fecha 10 del actual, a la cual me apresuro a con-
testar. Sirvanse Vds. enviarme por correo las obras que
siguen, todas encuadernadas:
Poem of The Cid, edici6n de Archer M. Huntington.
Cantar de Mio Cid, edicion de Ram6n Men^ndez Pidal.
Don Quijote, edicion critica de Rodriguez Marin.
De Vds. atento y seguro servidor,
Fehpe Heredia.
^ This may be freely translated Lewis Contreras, Publisher and Bookseller.
A pvblishing house is usually called una casa editorial (o editora). A
publisher is un editor ; an editor of a review or newspaper is un redactor.
« When telephoning, this is generally read either mil seiscientos nov<«nta
y cinco or diez y seis nueve cinco.
* For the distinction between volumen and tomo see volume in the Eng-
lish-Spanish Vocabulary.
LESSON XLIX 225
3. Muy senor mfo:
Tengo el gusto de acusar a Vd. recibo de su grata de fecha
25 de abril liltimo, de la cual retir6 cheque a m/o (= mi
orden) por ptas.: 125.50, que he abonado en su cuenta par-
ticular.
Por contra (Against you) cargo en la misma (cuenta)
ptas.: 36.25, importe de las obras detalladas en la factura
adjunta, remitidas en cinco paquetes certificados.
Se repite a las ordenes de Vd. atto s. s. (= atento seguro
servidor),
Luis Contreras.
4. Muy senor mlo:
Tengo el gusto de remitir a Vd. con la presente (carta)
el extracto de su cuenta cerrada el 30 de julio de 1916.
Como Vd. observard,, arroja en la indicada fecha un saldo
a mi favor de ptas. : 136.45, que le cargo en cuenta nueva,
rogdndole me manifieste su conformidad si lo halla exacto.
Con este motivo se reitera de Vd. atento servidor,
Luis Contreras.
B. ConUstese. 1. iCudl es el niimero del apartado de correos
(el niimero de la casilla) de Luis Contreras? 2. ^Cud,l es
el niimero de su tel^fono? 3. ^A quien escribe 61 en su carta
fechada (dated) el 10 de junio de 1917? 4. iQu6 manifiesta
al seiior Heredia? 5. Si cada tomo del Quijote cuesta 3 pese-
tas en riistica, ^costard mds encuadernado? 6. ^De cudn-
tos tomos se compondrd la edicion crftica del Quijotef
7. ^Cud,ntos tomos estdn ya publicados? 8. ^Es mds barata
la edici6n de "Cldsicos castellanos"? 9. ^Cudntos tomos
hay en esta edici6n? 10. Si el precio de cada tomo es de
3 pesetas, ^cudnto cuestan los ocho tomos? 11. iCudnto
valen en moneda norteamericana (estadounidense) 24 pesetas
espaiiolas? 12. ^C6mo se dice en castellano: I have pleas-
ure in acknowledging the receipt of your kind letter? 13. iC6mo
226 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
se dice : PUdse send me by mailf 14. 7 have credited five pesetas
to your account. 15. / charge five pesetas to your account.
16. iC6mo se dice: Dear Sir, Dear Sirs, Dear Madam, etc.
(etcetera)? 17. iC6mosedice: Yours truly. Sincerely yours,
Affectionately yours, etc.?
C. 1. He paid 100 dollaxs for that horse. 2. He bought it for
his son. 3. I have a letter for you. 4. It was written by Mr. Gon-
zalez. 5. I will give you (Le doy a Vd.) my watch for your bicycle.
6. I paid $35 for the bicycle. 7. I bought it for my brother. 8. To-
morrow I leave for Santiago de Chile. 9. I am going for (por)
six months. 10. I shall go by steamer. 11. He entered through
the door. 12. He caught me by the arm (brazo). 13. I fought
(Yo pelee) for my (la) hfe. 14. He went out through the window.
15. They earn eight per cent. 16. They pay him three dollars
a day. 17. Mother and daughter, father and son, all were ill.
18. The father and his son died. 19. There are nine or ten volumes.
20. There are ten or eleven. 21. Was it (iEra) []a] woman or [a]
man? 22. Was it Mary or Anna? 23. Was it Henry or Octavius
(Octavio)? 24. He is not a Spaniard but a Frenchman. 25. But
he has studied the Spanish and English languages. 26. He is not
going to Buenos Aires but to Montevideo. 27. He talks of nothing
but (of) Montevideo. 28. Where do they Hve? 29. The house in
which they Uve is near the post office. 30. Where do they come
from? 31. Where are they going? 32, We are waiting until the
train arrives. 33. You will wait as-long-as (mientras) life lasts.
34. Is the book interesting? 35. Is the Spanish exercise difficult?
36. Is the exercise easy or difficult? 37. Did John sell all his horses?
38. Did your brother buy a horse? 39. Did Mary write an inter-
esting letter? 40. Did Mary's sister write a letter?
D. 1. Lewis Contreras, PubUsher and Bookseller,
Post-office Box 55,
Madrid, Spain.
Dear Sir:
I have pleasure in acknowledging the receipt of your kind letter
of the 10th inst., in which you advise me that the critical edition
of the complete works of Calder6n de la Barca costs ten pesetas
LESSON XLIX 227
each volume (tomo) unbound, or twelve pesetas and sixty centimes
bound. Please send me by mail this edition, bound, and also the
following books:
Lope de Vega, Selected Works
Tirso de Molina, Complete Works
Please send me with the bill a (el) statement of my account, and
I shall send you a check to balance (saldar) it.
Very truly yours,
Phihp Heredia.
2. Dear Sir:
I have pleasure in sending you herewith a (el) statement of,
your account brought-up-to (cerrada) June 30, 1919.
1918. Debit Credit
(Debe) (Haber)
July 1st (Julio 1°) Balance in (a) my favor 139.55
Dec. (Dbre.) 5 My biU 33.30
1919.
March 24 Your (Su) remittance . 100.00
June 30 Balance in my favor . 72.85
172.85 172.85
72.85
As you will observe, there is a balance in my favor of 72.85
pesetas which I charge to you on a new account, begging you to
advise me if you do not find it correct (exacto).
Very sincerely yours,
Luis Contreras.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
226. Las preposiciones por y para. — For puede traducirse
mediante por o para. Si la voz inglesa for significa for the sake of,
on account of o in exchange for, se traduce mediante por ; si significa
prop6sito o destino, se traduce por para.
a. Por tambi^n significa through, by, " per."
b. Delante de im infinitive, la preposici6n inglesa to se expresa en
espafiol mediante por cuando significa for the sake of o in exchange
for, y mediante para cuando significa in order to.
228 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
226. Conjunciones. — 1. Y, e ante i- o hi- iniciales (y, y no
e, 8e usa ante hie-) ; o, u ante o- u ho- iniciales.
2. Pero, mas, sino, significan but. Pero y mas son sin6nimo6;
se usa pero con mds frecuencia. Sino se usa despu^s de una ex-
presi6n negativa, contradicha por una expresi6n afirmativa.
3. Donde (en forma interrogativa d6nde) se hace a menudo mds
expllcita mediante las preposiciones antepuestas a, en y de.
227. Orden de las palabras. — 1. Cuando el verbo precede al
sujeto, y tambi^n al substantivo complementario o al adjetivo pre-
dicado (atributo), el sujeto precede a cualquiera de 6stos dos con tal
que sea mds corto, pero le sigue si es mds largo.
2. En cMusulas subordinadas el sujeto sigue muchas veces al
verbo con tal que no haya ningiln substantivo complementario.
LESSON L
AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES
229. There are many augmentative and diminutive suf-
fixes in Spanish, which occur commonly in colloquial lan-
guage. The foreigner should use them with the greatest
caution. It is generally safe to use -ito (-cito, -ecito), but
it is best to avoid the other suffixes until one has become
familiar with their use. The suffixes are attached to the
stem of a word after it has dropped a final unstressed vowel.
A few of the more conunon suffixes are given below.
230. Augmentative Suffixes. 6n (-ona) and -azo (-a)
denote largeness, with or without grotesqueness. Feminine
nouns usually become masculine upon adding the suffix
-6n, unless sex is indicated.
Aquel hombrdn es montaiils. That big man is a mountaineer.
Aquella mujeraza es su her- That large woman is his sister.
mana.
Trfiigame Vd. xm cuchar6n. Bring me a large spoon.
mi
^ f#; ^'
•an .
8A'Bq 'Yexi'\ 9soq:j q;m piiB *a- in 3mpn9 spjoi
p9Sn Ql'B Q0%d *0pnZ8- *0n|38- '0jp9-) SOJ
•aoxrB:)jodraT on 'Bpu
JO Joq-^nB A%%ad v sr q-^noX ;^'Bqx ©niOJOjt
•sjreqouu'B o^'^^q 88jq^ 8JB
8J9q'j asnoq 91^'jq s^aq^op jaq uj 'B^mbsui
•J- JO u- UT Smpua a^q'Bqj
q-jXM Xpio pasn 8jb (-o^ja *0]anz- 'onr^- 'oijio
•dqs a^-j-^q 'B iCpio sbm (jj •onippo'
•spjiq
Am% [BJ8A9S ajB ajoq'^ aSco aq-^ uj -•efBd sc
•^j^Hmoo aq'^ ux a3B^:^OD b aAcq a^ •odureo «
•iCunqof
SI anTBu s^jaq'^ojq a^^jiq jCj\[ -Btif bi
^urepBui
'ja-^qSn'Bp ap'^q (JBap) jnOiC sr mojj iBJOuas
•UIOOS JO OjT
piTB 'ssauii-Bras sa'^ouap (v- 'optizs- f'
•ajnoipij 10 9!
A-Bui ipwe 'ssdu\\i3ms S8:^on8p (b- 'onps-
iCBra puB 'ssarqi^ras sa-^onap (b- *o;p8-
ssx^ng QApnunn
6ZZ
T Nossai
'^fifi
230 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
232. Study the inflection of decir (§267), traer (§277),
and conducir (§278).
EXERCISES
anticipado, -a, in advance la firma, signature
asegurar, to assure, insure firmar, to sign
el banco, bank los impresos, printed nxatter
el banquero, banker la letra de cambio, bill of ex-
el cajero, cashier change
cobrar, to collect (a bill), cash la madera, wood
(a check) otorgar, to grant
el descuento, discoimt el page, payment
efectuar, to effect, make el pedido, order (of goods)
endosar, to endorse el plazo, time limit
el envio, shipment el prospecto, announcement
ezigir, to demand, insist on reducido, low {price)
la expedicidn, sending, shipping suelto, loose, single
hacer efectivo, to cash (o check); perdone Vd., pardon me; a vuelta
de correo, by return mail; franco de porte, postage prepaid
A. 1. Voy al Primer Banco Nacional a sacar $50 (a
cobrar un cheque de $50). 2. — iConoce Vd. al banquero?
3. — No, seiior; pero conozco al cajero. 4. Strvase Vd.
hacerme efectivo este cheque. 5. — Se le olvid6 a Vd.
endosar el cheque. 6. — Perdone Vd. 7. — Escriba Vd.:
"Pdguese a la orden del Primer Banco Nacional," y ponga
su firma aquf. 8. — Estd bien. Ya lo firm^. 9. — iQuiere
Vd. billetes de banco u oro? 10. — Prefiero los billetes de
banco. 11. — Ahf los tiene Vd. — Muchas gracias.
B. 1. Muy seiioE mio:
Deseo tenga Vd. la bondad de remitirme a vuelta de
correo el Prospecto y otros impresos de esa universidad.
Soy de Vd. atento seguro servidor.
2. Muy seiior mfo:
Adjunto le remito a Vd. en giro postal $5.00 imports de
un ano de subscripci6n a La Esfera, que le ruego me envfe a
esta direcci6n.
Cr^ame de Vd. atento seguro servidor..
LESSON L 231
Precios de subscripcion, franco de porte.
Por mes, $0.50
Por ano, $5.00
Numero suelto, $0.10
3. Muy senores mios:
Sfrvanse Vds. remitirme su catdlogo y lista de precioa
Espero que me concedan los precios mds reducidos.
D indoles las gracias anticipadas, soy de Vds. S. S.
4. Muy senor mfo :
Tengo el gusto de remitir a Vd. por este mismo correo
nuestro ultimo catdlogo. Todos los articulos mencionados
en 61 est an hechos de los mejores materiales.
Le concedemos a Vd, un descuento del 5% (por ciento)
en caso de pago al contado, o un descuento del 3% si el
pago se efectua a 30 dlas desde la expedicion del envfo. Si
Vd. exige un plazo de 3 meses, no podemos otorgar ningiin
descuento de los precios corrientes.
Podemos asegurar a Vd. que haremos cuanto sea posible
para servir sus pedidos a su entera satisfaccion. El importe
de ellos puede ser enviado en letra de cambio, cheque o giro
postal.
En espera de sus gratas . 6rdenes, quedo de Vd. atto.
y s. s. q. e. s. m./
Juan Rodrfguez.
5. Muy senores mlos:
Tengo el gusto de acusar a Vds. recibo de su apreciable
carta y el catdlogo de su casa.
Sfrvanse Vds. enviarme los articulos detallados en la lista
que les remito adjunta. Al recibo de su factura les remiti-
remos el importe en cheque sobre Nueva York. Rogamos
» Some business houses prefer the small letters here to capitals.
232 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
a Vds. se sirvan hacer embalar {have packed) bien los artfcu-
los en cajas de madera.
Se reitera de Vds. atento y seguro servidor.
C. Contestese. 1. ^A donde i\i6 Vd. a sacar dinero (a cobrar
un cheque)? 2. iConocfa Vd. al banquero? 3. iQue le
dijo Vd. al cajero? 4. iQu6 se le olvido a Vd. hacer? 5. iQu6
le dijo a Vd. el cajero que escribiera? 6. ^Tuvo Vd. que firmar
el cheque? 7. iPrefiri6 Vd. los billetes de banco al oro?
Para las respuestas a las siguientes preguntas vSase B. 4, supo-
niendo que el senor Rodriguez le escribid a Vd. la carta. 8. iQu6
le remiti6 a Vd. por correo el senor Rodriguez? 9. ^De qu6
materiales dijo que estdn hechos los artfculos? 10-12. iQu6
descuento le concede a Vd. en caso de pago al contado? (si
el pago se efectiia a 30 dias desde la expedici6n del envfo? si
Vd. exige un plazo de 3 meses?) 13. iQu6 le asegur6 a Vd.?
14. iC6mo puede remitirse el importe de los pedidos?
15. iC6mo se subscribi6 el senor Rodrfguez?
D. Las palabras en letra bastardilla dehen tradudrse por diminv^
tivos 0 aumentativos. 1. Johnny was crying. 2. His mother
spoke to him. 3. Little-son, what is the matter with you? (ique
tienes?). 4. Alas! (lAy!) dear-little-mother, he answered. 5. Last
week the little-bird (-ito) died. 6. Now the kitten is dead. 7. And
the little-child kept on crying (sigui6 Uorando). 8. My little-sister' $
name is Mary (Mariquita). 9. She has a little-hou^e. 10 In the
little-house there are little-chairs and a little-table. 11. In a little'
cage there are several tiny-birds (-illos). 12. A dollie lives in the
little-house. 13. In a' little-garden there are many tiny-flowers.
14. Very-near the little-house there is a yard. 15. In the yard there
are a little-horse, a little-dog, and some tiny-hens. 16. In this yard
a teaspoon would seem a large-spoon. 17. Any (Cualquier) man
would seem a big-man. 18. Any (Cualquiera) woman would seem
a large-woman.
E. 1. I must go to the bank and (a) draw some money. 2. I
spent my last dollar this morning. 3. — Do you know the cashier?
LESSON L 233
4. — No, I do not (No le conozco), or rather (o mejor dicho) he
doesn't know me. 5. Will you come with me (acompafiarme)
to the bank to identify me (para identificarme)? 6. I shall be
greatly (sumamente) obliged to you. 7. This is the First National
Bank. 8. I should like to cash this check. 9. — Very well, sir.
10. But you forgot to endorse it. 11. Please write on the back (al
dor so) " Pay (= Let it be paid) to the order of the First National
Bank," and sign it here. 12. Thank you. Do you wish gold or
paper money (= bank notes)? 13. — Please give me paper money.
14. I am not used to (No estoy acostumbrado a) carrying gold
coins in my pocket, and I fear I may lose (§153) them.
F. 1. Sir:
Enclosed I am sending you $3.00 for a year's subscription
to . Please send it to this address. For a long time I have
been buying (§115) single copies in the street, but I prefer to
receive it at my residence (en mi domicilio).
Very truly yours.
2. Dear Sir:
I am sending you (escrihase : I have the honor of sending you)
herewith our catalogue and price Ust. I can assure you that we
shall do everjrthing in our power to fill your orders to your entire
satisfaction. We offer {usese conceder) you the lowest prices in
this market (de esta plaza). Moreover, we can offer you a dis-
count of 6 per cent, if you pay cash (= in case of cash payment),
or 3 per cent, if the payment is made in 30 days from time of ship-
ping the goods ( = from the sending of the shipment). If you insist
on more than 30 days' time (= on a time limit of more than
30 days), we can not grant any discount from current prices.
Hoping that we may have your kind orders, I am very sin-
cerely yours.
RESUMEN GRAMATICAL
229. Aumentativos y diminutivos. — Hay muchos sufijos en
espafiol para formar los aumentativos y diminutivos, sobre todo
en el lenguaje corriente. El extranjero debe emplearlos con la
mayor cautela. Lo mds seguro es usar el sufijo -ito (-cito,
-ecito), y evitar los otros hasta estar familiarizado con su use.
234 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Los sufijos se afiaden al radical de la palabra despu^s de haber
quitado a 6sta la vocal final no acentuada.
230. Stifijos aumentativos : -6n (-ona) y -azo (-a) aumentan
simplemente la idea del positivo, con o sin idea de monstruosidad.
Los nombres femeninos se vuelven masculinos al anadirles el
sufijo -611, salvo el caso de indicarse el sexo.
231. Stifijos diminutivos : -ito, -illo y -uelo expresan idea de
pequefiez, y pueden significaral mismo tiempo: -ito, sentimientos
de carino o conniiseraci6n; -illo, indiferencia o menosprecio; -uelo,
menosprecio o burla.
a. Los sufijos mds largos (-cito, -cillo, -zuelo, etc.) se usan con
voces de mds de una sllaba que terminan en -n o -r.
6. Las formas aun mds largas (-ecito, -ecillo, -ezuelo, etc.) se usan
con monosllabos, con palabras que terminan en -e, y con aquellas que
tienen el diptongo radical ie o ue.
c. Todos los diminutivos se usan principalmente con nombres; pero
tambi^n se usan con adjctivos, participios y adverbios, para expresar
pequenez de calidad o grado.
THE VERB
233. The Spanish verb system, being derived from that
of Latin, shows flexional endings characteristic of mood,
tense, person, and number:
habl-ar, to speak habl-amos, we speak
habl-ando, speaking habl-aba, I (he) was speaking,
habl-o, I speak used to speak
The perfect tenses are compounded by adding to the
auxihary verb haber, to have, the invariable past participle
of the main verb:
he hablado, I have spoken Iiabfa hablado, I (he) had spoken
234. The Spanish verb may be divided into five leading
classes: (1) the regular verb, (2) the radical-changing verb,
(3) the verb with inceptive endings, (4) the -uir verb,
(5) the irregular verb.
235. The future of the indicative and the conditional of
all verbs are based upon their infinitive form. This may
suffer some modification in the case of irregular verbs:
hablar-e, I shall speak
hablar, to speak < , , , > t u u i
' ^ ( hablar-ia, I should speak
, . ^ ( dir-fin, they will say
decir, tosay< ,. , ' , ,,
I dir-ian, they would say
a. The endings of the future of the indicative and the conditional
are derived from the present and the imperfect, respectively, of the
indicative of haber, to have (cf. §116, footnote).
236. — 1. For regular verbs the stem may be found by cut-
ting off the ending -o of the first person singular of the
present indicative, or the ending -ar, -er, -ir of the infinitive:
236
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
habl-o, I speak
aprend-o, I learn
escrib-o, I write
habl-ar, to speak
aprend-er, to learn
escrib-ir, to write
In regular verbs this stem is the basis of all forms except
those of the future of the indicative and of the conditional.
2. In the case of radical-changing and irregular verbs the
stem of the third singular (or plural) of the preterite indica-
tive is the same as that of the two imperfect (or past) sub-
jimctives and of the future (or hypothetical) subjunctive:
Pedir, to ask: pid-id (pid-ieron), he asked (they asked); imTpf. subj.,
pid-iese, etc., pid-iera, etc.; fiU. subj., pid-iere, etc.
Saber, to know: sup-o (sup-ieron), he knew (they knew); impf,
subj., sup-iese, etc., sup-iera, etc.; fut. subj., sup-iere, etc.
237. The Regular Verb. — There are three regular conju-
gations in Spanish characterized by the vowels of their
infinitive endings, namely, -at for the first conjugation, -er
for the second, and -ir for the third. But, as a matter of
fact, the endings of the second and third conjugations are
the same except in four out of their numerous forms, that is,
in the infinitive, in the first and second persons plural of the
present indicative, and in the second person plural of the
imperative.
Present
habl-ar, to speak
Present (Jerund)
habl-ando, speaking
Past
habl-ado, spoken
PARADIGMS
II
INFINITIVE MOOD
Present
aprend-er, to learn
PARTICIPLES
Present (Genmd)
aprend-iendo, learning
Past
aprend-ido, learned
III
Present
viv-ir, to live
Present (Gerund)
viv-iendo, living
Past
viv-ido, lived
THE \^RB
237
INDICATIVE MOOD
Present
Presoit
Present
/ speak, do speaJc, am
I learn, do learn, am
I live, do live, am
speaking; etc.
learning; etc.
living; etc
habl-o
aprend-o
viv-o
habl-as
aprend-es
viv-es
habl-a
aprend-e
viv-e
habl-amos
aprend-emos
viv-imos
habl-&is
aprend-eis
viv-is
habl-an
aprend-en
viv-en
Imperfect
Imperfect ^
Imperfect^
/ spoke, teas speaking,
/ learned, uxis learning.
I lived, toas living.
used to speak; etc.
used to learn; etc.
used to live; etc
habl-aba
aprend-Ia
viv-£a
habl-abas
aprend-ias
viv-Ias
habl-aba
aprend-ia
viv-Ia
habl-fibamos
aprend-famos
viv-famos
habl-abais
aprend-iais
viv-iais
habl-aban
i^rend-ian
viv-fan
Preterite
Preterite
Preterite
I spoke, did speak;
7 learned, did learn;
/ lived, did live;
etc.
etc.
etc.
habl-e
aprend-{
viv-1
habl-aste
aprend-iste
viv-iste
hahl-6
aprend-i6
viv-i6
habl-amos
aprend-imos
viv-imos
habl-asteis
aprend-isteis
viv-isteis
habl-aron
aprend-ieron
viv-ieron
^ In the imperfect indicative of the second and third conjugations and
also in the conditional of all three conjugations the accent remains on the
same vowel throughout all the forms and is always written.
238
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Future
Future
Future
/ shall speak; etc.
/ shall learn; etc.
/ shaU live; etc.
hablar-e
aprender-6
vivir-6
hablar-4s
aprender-ds
vivir-48
habIax-&
aprender-fi
vivir-4
hablar-emos
aprender-emos
vivir-emos
hablar-eis
aprender-#is
vivir-€is
hablar-fin
aprender-fin
vivir-fin
Conditional
Conditional
Conditional
/ should speak; etc.
I should learn; etc.
/ should live; etc
hablar-ia
aprender-ia
vivir-la
hablar-fas
aprender-ias
vivir-Ias
hablar-ia
aprender-ia
vivir-ia
hablar-iamos
aprender-iamos
vivir-iamos
hablar-iais
aprender-iais
vivir-iais
hablar-ian
aprender-ian
IMPERATIVE MOOD
vivir-Ian
speak
learn
live
Sing. 2 habl-a
aprend-e
viv-e
PI. 2 habl-ad
aprend-ed
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
viv-id
Present
Present
Present
(that I may) speak,
(tfiat I may) learn,
(thai I may) live,
(let me) speak; etc.
(let me) learn; etc.
(let me) live; etc.
habl-e
aprend-a
viv-a
habl-es
aprend-as
viv-as
habl-e
aprend-a
viv-a
habl-emos
aprend-amos
viv-amos
habl-€is
aprend-iis
viv-iis
habl-en
aprend-an
viv-an
'I'HK VERB
239
-se Imperfect
-se Imperfect
-se Imperfect
(that or if I might)
(that or if I might)
(that or if I might)
speak; etc.
learn; etc.
live; etc.
habl-ase
aprend-iese
viv-iese
habl-ases
aprend-ieses
viv-ieses
habl-ase
aprend-iese
viv-iese
habl-Ssemos
aprend-iesemos
viv-iesemos
habl-aseis
aprend-ieseis
viv-ieseis
habl-asen
aprend-iesen
viv-iesen
-ra Imperfect
-ra Imperfect
-ra Imperfect
/ should speak, (that or
I should learn, (that or
7 should live, (that or
if I might) speak; etc.
if I might) learn; etc.
if I might) live; etc.
habl-ara
aprend-iera
viv-iera
habl-aras
aprend-ieras
viv-ieras
habl-ara
aprend-iera
viv-iera
habl-firamos
aprend-ieramos
viv-ieramos
habl-arais
aprend-ierais
viv-ierais
habl-aran
aprend-ieran
viv-ieran
Future
Future
Future
(or Hypothetical)
(or Hypothetical)
(or Hypothetical)
/ (mny or shall)
I (may or shall) learn;
I (may or shall) live;
speak; etc.
etc.
etc.
habl-are
aprend-iere
viv-iere
habl-ares
aprend-ieres
viv-ieres
habl-are
aprend-iere
viv-iere
habl-aremos
aprend-ieremos
viv-ieremos
habl-areis
aprend-iereis
viv-iereis
habl-aren
aprend-ieren
viv-ieren
INFINITIVE
PERFECT TENSES OF HABLAR
PARTICIPLE
(GERUND)
to have spoken having spoken
haber hablado habiendo hablado
240
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Present Perfect
/ have spoken; etc.
he hablado
has hablado; etc.
Pluperfect
/ had spoken; etc.
habia hablado; etc.
INDICATIVE
Preterite Perfect
/ had spoken; etc.
hube hablado
hubiste hablado; etc.
Future Perfect
I shall have spoken; etc.
habr^ hablado; etc.
Conditional Perfect
I should have spoken; etc.
habrla hablado; etc.
SUBJUNCTIVE
Present Perfect
(That I may) have
spoken; etc.
haya hablado; etc.
-se Pluperfect
(That I might) have
spoken; etc,
hubiese hablado; etc.
-ra Pluperfect
I should have spoken;
etc.
hubiera hablado; etc.
Future (or Hypo-
thetical) Perfect
/ (may or shall) have
spoken; etc.
hubiere hablado; etc.
a. The following tables of moods and tenses give (1) the English names and
(2) the Spanish names, to which preference is given in this book, and (3) the names
given in the Oramdtica de la tengua castellana (Madrid, 1913) published by the Royal
Spanish Academy.
Infinitivb
iNFINinVO
Infinitivo
hablar:
present
presente
presente
hdber hablado:
perfect
perfecto
pret6rito
Pabticiplks
present
Participios
presente
hablando:
gerundio
hablado:
paat
pasado
participio (pasivo)
THHl VERB
241
Indicative
Indicattvo
Indicattvo
K<Mo:
present
presente
presente
hablaba:
imperfect
imperfecto
pret6rito imperfecto
hable:
preterite
preterite
pret^rito p)erfecto
hablari:
future
futuro
futuro imperfecto
hablaria:
conditional
condicional
pret^rito imperfecto
(de subjuntivo)
he hablado:
present perfect
presente perfecto
pret6rito perfecto
habia hablado:
pluperfect
pluscuamperfecto
pret^rito pluscuamperfecto
hube hablado:
preterite perfect
preterite perfecto
pret6rito perfecto
habri hablado:
future perfect
futuro perfecto
futuro perfecto
?iabria hablado:
conditional perfect condicional perfecto preterite pluscuamperfecto
(de subjuntivo)
habla:
Imperative
Impebattvo
Impbrativo
Subjunctive
SUBJUNTIVO
Subjuntivo
hable:
present
presente
presente
hablase\
hablara)
imperfect
imperfecto
pret^rito imperfecto
hablare:
future
futuro
futuro imperfecto
haya hablado:
present perfect
presente perfecto
pret^rito perfecto
... V hablado: pluperfect
hubieraj
pluscuamperfecto
pret^rito pluscuamperfecto
hubiere hablado
future perfect
futuro perfecto
futuro perfecto
In the nomenclature of the Spanish Academy the three tenses habli, he hablado,
and hube hablado have the same name: preterito perfecto de indicatlvo. Likewise
fiablase, hablara, and hablaria are called the preterito imperfecto de subjuntivo;
and hubiese hablado, hubiera hablado, and habria hablado are called the preterito
pluscuamperfecto de subjuntivo. Confusion of names may be avoided in part, aa
follows: habU, preterito perfecto simple; he hablado, preterito perfecto compuesto (con
he, has, etc.).
6. The tense names recommended in the Report of the Joint Committee on Oram-
mcUical Nomenclature (University of Chicago Press, 1913), which differ from those to
which preference is given in this book, are: hablaba, past descriptive; habU, past
absolute; hablaria, past future; habla hablado, past perfect; hube hablado, 2nd past
perfect; habria hablado, past future perfect; hablase or hablara, past subjuncttve.
238. Compound Progressive Tenses. — The present par-
ticiple of a principal verb may be combined with the auxili-
ary estar (never set) to form a progressive construction.
estamos hablando, we are speaking
Certain verbs of motion or rest such as ir, to go, quedar,
to remain, may appear instead of estar in this construction.
242 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
239. Changes in Spelling. — It is a regular tendency of
Spanish verbs to preserve throughout their conjugation the
consonantal sound at the end of the stem (found ordinarily
by cutting off the infinitive ending -at, -er, -ir). Hence,
before certain vowels of the flexional sufiix a change in spell-
ing of the end of the stem is necessitated. This is so not only
for regular verbs but for many others also.
240. Before flexional -e these changes occur:
1. Verbs in -c-ar change c to qu to keep the k sound
("hard" c sound):
Buscar, to 5eei^
Pret. Indie., \ , ,
1st Sing. r"«^"^
Pres. Svbj. busque busques busque busquemos busqu^is busquen
2. Verbs in -g-ar add to the g an unpronounced u to
keep the "hard" g sound:
Pagar, lo pay
Pret. Indie.,
1st Sing. jP^S^^
Pres. Subj. pague pagues pague paguemos pagu^is paguen
3. Verbs in -gu-ar take a diaeresis over the u to show
that this u of the stem has always a pronounced value:
Averiguar, to ascertain
Pret. Indie., 1st Sing. averigu6
Pres. Stibj. averigiie averigiies averigile
averigiiemos averigii^is averigiien
4. Verbs in -z-ar change z to c, without involving any
difference in sound:
Cazar, to hunt
Pret. Indie., \ .
Ist Sing. J
Pres. Svbj. cace caces cace cacemos cac^is cacen
N. B, It is to be noted that only seven forms of the verb inflexion
are concerned in the four cases just mentioned.
THE VERB 243
241. Before flexional o or a the following changes occur:
1. Verbs in -c-er and -c-ir preceded by a consonant
change c to z:
Veneer, to conquer
Pres. Indie., 1st Sing, venzo Pres. Stibj. venza, etc.
Zurcir, to darn
Pres. Indie, 1st Sing, zurzo Pres. Subj. zurza, etc.
N. B. Most verbs in -cer or -cir preceded by a vowel belong to the
class with inceptive endings. See §255.
2. All verbs in -g-er or -g-ir, regular or not, change
g to j:
Coger, to catch, gather
Pres. Indie., 1st Sing, cojo Pres. Svbj. coja, etc.
Elegir, to choose
Pres. Indie., 1st Sing, elijo Pres. Subj. elija, etc.
3. Verbs in -qu-ir change qu to c, as qu (denoting the
k sound) is written in Spanish only before e or i:
Delinquir, to be delinquent
Pres. Indie., 1st Sing, delinco Pres. Svbj. delinca, etc.
4. Verbs in -gu-ir omit their unpronounced u, which
is not needed to indicate a "hard" g before o or a:
Distinguir, to distinguish
Pres. Indie, 1st. Sing, distingo Pres. Svhj. distinga, etc.
N. B. It is to be noted that only seven fonns of the verb inflexion
are concerned in the four cases above.
242. Diphthongal ending -16 and -ie- :
1. Verbs of the second and third conjugations (regular
or not), whose stem ends in a vowel, change the i of the
244 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
diphthongal endings -16 and -ie- to y, as unaccented i can-
not stand between vowels in Spanish:
Cre-er, to believe; cre-yendo (/or cre-iendo); cre-y6 {for cre-i6);
cre-yeron {for cre-ieron); cre-yese {for cre-iese), etc.; cre-yera
{for cre-iera), etc.; cre-yere {for cre-iere), etc.
Conclu-ir, to conclude; conclu-yendo; conclu-y6; conclu-yeron; ete.
2. The i of the endings -i6 and -ie- disappears after
all verb stems ending in 11 or n and after certain irregular
preterite stems ending in j:
Bull-ir, to boil; bullendo; bull6; buUeron; buUese; etc.; etc.
Gnifl-ir, to grunt; grun-endo; grun-6; gnm-eron; etc.; etc.
Tra-er, to bring; traj-o; traj-eron; traj-ese; etc.; etc.
243. Verbs in -iar and -uar. A certain number of verbs
in -iar and -uar (to be learned by practice) take a written
accent on the i or u of the three persons of the singular and
the third person plural of their present tenses (indicative,
subjunctive, imperative):
Criar, to bring up: crio, erf as, crla, crfan
crie, cries, crie, crfen
cria
Continuar, to continue: continiio, continiias, continiia, contindan
contintie, continues, continlie, continiien
continria
Among the conunonest verbs with this peculiarity are aliar, to ally,
ataviar, to adorn, confiar, to confide, contrariar, to oppose, vex, desafiar,
to challenge, desconfiar, to distrust, desvariar, to rave, desviar, to divert,
enviar, to send, espiar, to- spy, ezpiar, to expiate, fiat, to trust, guiar, to
guide, inventariar, to take an inventory of, liar, to bind, porfiar, to persist,
resfriar, to chill, telegrafiar, to telegraph, vaciar, to empty, variar, to
vary; acentuar, to accentuate, atenuar, to attenuate, conceptuar, to con-
ceive, efectuar, to effectuate, exceptuar, to except, graduar, to graduate,
habituar, to habituate, insinuar, to insinuate, perpetuar, to perpetuate,
puntuar, to punctuate, situar, to situate, valuar, to appraise.
a. A considerable number of verbs do not take this accent; cf.
afiliar, to affiliate, afilio; anunciar, to announce, anuncio; apremiar, to
THE VERB
245
press, apremio; cambiar, to change, cambio; diferenciar, to differentiate,
diferencio; encomiar, to extol, encomio; estudiar, to stvdy, estudio;
inidar, to initiate, inicio; lidiar, to fight, lidio; premiar, to reward, premio;
presenciar, to vntness, presencio; principiar, to begin, principio; etc.
244. Radical-changing Verbs. — Under certain condi-
tions some verbs change their radical (root) vowels e to ie
or i and o to ue or u. The conditions are such as to make
three classes thus represented :
I. If accented
II. If accented
If unaccented
the radical vowel e becomes ie
the radical vowel o becomes ue
the radical vowel e becomes ie
the radical vowel o becomes ue
f the radical vowel e becomes i
\ the radical vowel o becomes u
before a following
-a-, -ie-, or -i6
of the flexional
ending
III. If accented the radical vowel e becomes i
If unaccented the radical vowel e becomes i before a following
-a-, -ie-, or -id of the flexional ending
245. Class I. — This comprises only first and second con-
jugation verbs. The change of accented e to ie and accented
o to ue can occur in only nine forms, viz., aU the singular
and the third plural of the present indicative and present
subjunctive and the second singular of the imperative; all
other forms show the original e or o. The endings are reg-
ular. These verbs illustrate the class:
1. Cerrar, to close
Participles cerrando cerrado
Pres. Indie, cierro cierras cierra cierran
Pres. Sut^. cierre cierres cierre cierren
Imperat. cierra
But cerramos cerrdia
But cerremos cerr6ia
BiU cerrad
Impf. Indie, cerraba, etc.
Pret. Indie. cerr6, etc.
j cerrase, ete.
\cerrara, etc.
Impf. Subj.
Fut. Indie. cerrar^, etc.
Cond. Indie. cerrarla, etc.
Fut. or Hyp. Subj. cerrare, ete.
246 FIBST SPANISH COURSE
2. Entender, to understand
Participles entendiendo entendido
Pres. Indie, entiendo entiendea entiende
entienden But entendemos entenddis
Pres. Svbj. entienda entiendas entienda
entiendan But entendamos entenddis
Imperat. entiende But entended
All other forms with the radical vowel e are perfectly
regular as of the second conjugation.
3. Contar, to count
Participles contando contado
Pres. Indie, cuento cuentas cuenta cuentan Bui contamos contdis
Pres. Subj. cuente cuentes cuente cuenten But contemos cont^ia
Imperat. cuenta Bui contad
Impf. Indie, contaba, etc. Fvi. Indie. contar6, efc.
Pret. Indie, cont^, etc. Cond. Indie. contaria, etc.
j contase, etc. Fui. or Hyp. Subj. contare, etc.
Impf. Subj. < . '.'
{ contara, etc.
4. Volver, to return
Participles volviendo vuelto
Pres. Indie, vuelvo vuelves vuelve vuelven Bui volvemos volv^is
Pres. Subj. vuelva vuelvas vuelva vuelvan But volvamos volvdis
Imperat. vuelve But volved
All other forms with the radical vowel o are perfectly
regular as of the second conjugation.
N. B. The past participle of this verb and of other verbs in -olver
is irregular. So devolver, to give back, devuelto; envolver, to wrap up,
envuelto; revolver, to stir, revuelto; solver, to loosen, suelto; absolver,
to absolve, absuelto; disolver, to dissolve, disuelto; resolver, to resolve,
resuelto; etc. Most radical-changing verbs of this class have regular
participles; thus mover, to move; muevo, / move, etc.; movido.
246. The changes in spelling of the end of the stem,
already Usted for regular verbs, occur here also; cf. §§239-
241.
THE VERB 247
1. Before e, c becomes qu:
Revolcar, to wallow: Pret. Indie., 1st Sing. revolqu6
Pres. Svbj. revuelque, etc.
2. Before e, g becomes gu:
Negar, to deny: Pret. Indie., 1st Sing. negu6
Pres. Subj. niegue, etc.
3. Before e, z becomes c:
Empezar, to begin: Pret. Indie., Ist Sing. empec6
Pres. Subj. empiece, etc.
4. Before o or a, c becomes z :
Torcer, to twist: Pres. Indie., 1st Sing, tuerzo
Pres. Subj. tuerza, etc.
5. After g, ue from o takes a diaeresis:
Degollar, to behead: Pres. Indie, degiiello degiiellas, etc.
Pres. Svbj. degtielle, etc.
Imperat. degiiella
247. When initial, the stressed e and o of radical-changing
verbs become ye and hue respectively, as Spanish does not
write ie and ue at the beginning of words:
1. Errar, to err: Pres. Indie, yerro yerras, etc.
Pres. Subj. yerre, etc.
Imperat. yerra
2. Oler, to smell: Pres. Indie, huelo hueles, etc.
Pres. Subj. huela, etc.
Imperat. huele
a. In derivatives the change of o to hue occurs also; thus desosar,
to remove the bones from, deshueso, etc.; desovar, to spawn, deshuevan,
etc. (cf. hueso, bone, and huevo, egg).
248. Being based on second conjugation (-er) verbs, some
derivatives of the third (-ir) conjugation have their stem-
stressed forms treated as of this first radical-changing class.
These are concernir, to concern,^ and discernir, to discern
^ Concernir has only third person forma in the finite tenses.
248 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
(cf. the simple verb cerner, to sift, cierno, etc.), adquirir, to
acquire, and inquirir, to inquire (cf. the simple verb querer,
to wish, quiero, etc.). Adquirir and inquirir have i in the
unstressed stem everywhere.
1. Discemir, to discern
Pres. Indie, disciemo disciernes discierne
disciernen But discemimos discemis
Pres. Subj. discierna disciemas disciema
disciernan But discemamos discemdis
Imperat. discierne But discemid
2. Adqixirir, to acquire
Pres. Indie, adquiero adquieres adquiere
adquieren But adquirimos adquirfs
Pres. Svhj. adquiera adquieras adquiera
adquieran But adquiramos adquirdis
Imperat. adquiere But adquirid
249. Jugar, to play, had originally an o stem (cf. Latin
jocari). The stem-stressed forms show ue, the others
have u:
Pres. Indie, juego juegas juega juegan But jugamos jugdis
Pres. Subj. juegue juegues juegue jueguen But juguemos jugu^is
Imperat. juega Bui jugad
250. Class II. — This includes only verbs of the third con-
jugation with the radical vowel e or o. As in Class I, the e
becomes ie and the o becomes ue when accented. Unac-
cented, the e becomes i and the o becomes u before an
immediately following -a-, -ie-, or -i6 of the flexional sufl&x;
otherwise the unaccented e and o remain.
1. Sentir, to feel
Participles sint-iendo sentido
Pres. Indie, siento sientes sicnte
sienten But sentimos eentlt
Pres. Svbj. sienta eientas sienta
sint-amos sint-dis sientan
Imperat. siente Bvi sentid
THE VERB 249
Impf, Indie, sentia, etc. (reg.)
Pret. Indie, sentf sentiste smt-i6 sentimos sentisteis sint-ieron
-se Impf, Subj. sint-iese sint-ieses sint-iese sint-i4semos eint-ieseis
sint-iesen
-ra Impf. Subj. sint-iera, etc.
Put. or , . ^ .
sint-iere, etc.
Hyp. SvJbj.
2. Donnir, to sleep
Participles durm-iendo dormido
Pres. Indie, duermo duermes duerme
duermen But dormimos dormfa
Pres. Subj. duerma duennas duenna
dunn-amos durm-dis duennan
Imperat. duerme But donnid
Impf. Indie, donnia, etc. {reg.)
Pret. Indie, donnl donniste dunn-i6
donnimos donnisteis dvmn-ieron
se Impf. Subj. dunn-iese ^ dunn-ieses dunn-iese dunn-i^semos
dunn-ieseis dunn-iesen
-ra Impf. Svbj. dunn-iera, etc.
Put. or \ J
TT a r • f dunn-iere, etc.
Hyp. Svijj. J
a. The only simple o verbs in Class II are dormir and morir, to die;
in the past participle morir has only the inegular form muerto. In
perfect tenses this, if intransitive, means died: el hombre ha muerto,
the man has died; if transitive with a personal object, it means killed :
han muerto al hombre, they have killed the man. But in the perfect
tenses of the reflexive verb matado, past participle of matar, to kill, must
be used: el hombre se ha matado, the man has killed himself. With
the verb to be, and equivalent verbs, muerto (-a, -os, -as) naturally
means dead : la mujer esta muerta, the woman is dead.
251. Class III. — As in Class II, so here only third con-
jugation verbs are concerned, and, furthermore, only those
with the radical vowel e. This changes in precisely the same
cases as in Class II, except that here the e becomes i both
under the accent and when unaccented and followed by
^ As to the stem of the imperfect and future forms of the subjunctive
of radical-changing verbs, see §236, 2.
250 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
-a-, -ie-, or -16. The original e maintains itself here in the
cases in which it persists in Class II.
Pedir, to asl^
Participles pid-iendo pedido
Pres. Indie, pido pides pide
piden But pedimos pedis
Pres. Svbj. pida pidas pida
pidamos piddis pidan
Imperat. pide But pedid
Impf. Indie, pedia, etc. (reg.)
Pret. Indie, pedl pediste pid-i6 pedimos pedisteis
pid-ieron
-se Impf. Svbj. pid-iese pid-ieses pid-iese pid-i6semos pid-ieseis
pid-iesen
-ra Impf Subj. pid-iera, etc.
Fut. or 1 -J •
Hyp.Svbj.]'^'^-'^'^^'*^'
252. Changes in spelling of the end of the stem occur
here in accordance with the rules previously stated (§241):
1. g (i, e) becomes j before o or a:
Corregir, to correct: Pres. Indie., 1st Sing, corrijo
Pres. Subj. corrija, etc.
2. gu (i, e) drops the u before o or a:
Seguir, to follow: Pres. Indie, 1st Sing, sigo
Pres. Subj. siga, etc.
3. After fi, -ie- and -16 lose their 1 :
Ceiiir, to gird: . Pres. Part, cin-endo
Pret. Indie., 3rd Sing, cifi-6, 3rd PI. cifi-eron
-se Impf. Svbj. cin-ese, etc.
-ra Impf. Subj. cifi-era, etc.
Fut. or Hyp. Subj. cin-ere, etc.
253. Verbs in -eir are of Class III. In them the 1 of the
stem ending and that of the -Ie- and -16 in the flexional
endings following coalesce:
THE VERB 251
Relr, to laugh: riendo U<^ ri-iendo); ri6 {for ri-i6); rieron {for ri-
ieron); riese {for ri-iese), etc.; riera (/or ri-iera), etc.; riere {for
ri-iere), etc.
254. The verb erguir, to erect, may be conjugated as of
either Class II or Class III with due attention to changes in
spelling of the stem ending; thus yergo (cf. §247, 1) or irgo,
yergues or irgues, etc.
N. B. Class I contains many verbs of the -ar and -er conjugations.
Class II contains all verbs in -«ntir, -erir, and -ertir, as well as hervir,
to boil, and its derivative rehervir. Class III contains all verbs in -ebir,
-edir, -egir, -eguir, -eir, -emir, -enchir, -endir, -eflir, -estir, and -etir,
as well as servir, to serve, and its derivative deservir, to do a disservice.
255. Verbs with Inceptive Endings. — Verbs in -cer and
-cir, having a vowel before these infinitive endings, insert a
z before the c in their present indicative and present sub-
junctive, wherever the verb ending begins with o or a.
All the other forms are perfectly regular, and the -zc- or
inceptive forms are only seven in number, viz., the first
person singular of the present indicative and all six forms of
the present subjunctive. There is no obvious inceptive
meaning in the verbs of this class. While certain of them
have relations to Latin inceptive verbs (cf. Spanish conocer
and Latin cognoscere), others have no such connections.
1. Conocer,. /o ^now
Participles conociendo conocido
' „. '' > conozco (All other forms reg.)
Pres. Svbj. conozca conozcas conozca conozcamos conozcdis conozcan
The rest of the verb regular as of the second conjugation
2. Lucir, io shine
Participles luciendo lucido
■ _. ■' > luzco (All other forms reg.)
Pres. Subj. luzca luzcas luzca luzcamos luzc^ luzcan
The rest of the verb regular as of the third conjugation
262 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
a. The c is simply changed to z in mecer, to rock, and its derivative
remecer, which are regular verbs, and in cocer, to boil, and its deriva-
tives recocer, to boil again, and escocer, to smart, which are radical-
changing verbs of the first class. Hence the forms mezo; meza, etc.;
cuezo; cueza, etc. The irregular verbs hacer, to do, make, and decir,
to say, with their derivatives, have no inceptive endings, but irregular
verbs in -ucir (conducir, etc.) have them (condtizco, etc.).
256. The -uir Verb. — This class comprises only verbs
with a pronounced u (huir, argiiir, etc., but not seguir and
the like). In their present forms (indicative, subjunctive,
and imperative) they add y to the u of the stem (hu-yo,
etc.), except where the flexional ending begins with i. AH
the other forms are regular. In accordance with the rule
stated previously (cf. §242) an unaccented i between vowels
will be written y in the third person of the preterite indica-
tive, in all the forms of the two imperfects and the future
of the subjunctive, and in the present participle (gerund):
Huir, /o^ee
Participles hu-yendo huido
Pres. Indie, huy-o huy-es huy-e But huimos huis
huy-en
Pres. Sitbj. huy-a huy-as huy-a
huy-amos huy-dis huy-an
Imperat. huy-e But huid
Fui. Indie. hxm6, etc. (reg.)
Cond. Indie, huiria, etc. (reg.)
Impf. Indie, hula, etc. (reg.)
-» Pret. Indie, hui huiste hu-y6 huimos huisteis hu-yeron
-se Impf. Subj. hu-yese hu-yeses, etc.
-ra Impf. Svbj. hu-yera, etc.
Put. or \ ,
Hyp. Svbj. I ^''-^^''''''-
N. B. Verbs in -gfiir retain the diaeresis only before a written i:
argiiir, to argue, argiiido, argliimos, argiifa, argtii, etc.', but arguyendo,
arguyo, arguyes, arguya, etc.
THE VERB
253
hemos hab-^is han
IRREGULAR VERBS
267 Haber, io have
Participles
hab-iendo hab-ido
Pres. Indie.
he has ha
Pres. Stibj.
hay-a hay-as hay-a hay-amos hay-dis hay-an
Imperat. (he) hab-ed
Put. Indie.
habr-^ habr-ds habr-d, habr-emos habr-^is habr-dn
Cond. Indie.
habr-ia habr-Ias habr-ia habr-iamos habr-iais habr-Ian
Impf. Indie.
hab-Ia hab-Ias hab-fa hab-Iamos, etc. (reg.)
Pret. Indie.
hub-e hub-iste hub-o hub-imos hub-isteis hub-ieron
-se Impf. Subj.
hub-iese hub-ieses hub-iese hub-i6semos, etc
-ra Impf. Svbj.
hub-iera hub-ieras, etc.
Put. or Hyp. Subj.
hub-iere hub-ieres, etc.
a. The indicative future and conditional have a contract infinitive
basis. It is not absolutely certain that he is a part of haber; it occurs
most often with the adverb aquf, here; he aqui, behold. Haber is also
the impersonal verb (there) to be, and as such it employs only the third
singular of its finite forms. In the impersonal use the third singular
present indicative (and only this one form) appends the otherwise
obsolete adverb y, here, there: hay, there is (are).
Note that haber has in the first and third singular of the preterite
indicative so-called "strong" forms, i.e., forms stressing the stem and
not the flexional ending. This is a marked characteristic also of the
irregular verbs tener, estar, andar, querer, poder, caber, saber, hacer,
venir, poner, traer, decir, and the derivatives in -ducir (aducir, con-
ducir, deducir, etc.).
254
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
258.
Tener, to hate, hold
Participles
ten-iendo ten-ido
Pres. Indie.
teng-o
tien-es tien-e
ten-emos
ten-^is
tien-en
Pres. Svbj.
teng-a
teng-as teng-a
teng-amos
teng-dis
teng-an
Imperat.
ten
ten-ed
Fut. Indie.
tendr-6
tendr-ds tendr-d
tendr-emos
tendr-^is
tendr-dn
Cond. Indie.
tendr-ia
tendr-Ias tendr-Ia
tendr-I>unos
tendr-fais
tendr-lan
Impf. Indie.
ten-la
ten-las 0"eg.)
Pret. Indie.
tuv-e
tuv-iste tuv-o
tuv-imos
tuv-isteis
tuv-ieron
-se Impf. Subj.
tuv-iese
tuv-ieses tuv-iese
tuv-i6semos,
etc.
•^a Impf. Subj.
tuv-iera
tuv-ieras,
etc.
Ftit. or Hyp. Subj.
tuv-iere
tuv-ieres, etc.
a. The indicative future and conditional have
a contract infinitive
basis with a phonetically developed d: tendr-; for the same phenome-
non, cf . also venir, poner, salir, and valer. Certain present forms show
radical-changing pecuUarities. Like venir, poner, valer, salir, hacer,
and decir, tener has no flexional ending in the imperative singular.
259.
Ser, to be
Participles
s-iendo
s-ido
Pres. Indie.
soy
eres
es
somos
sois
BOH
Pres. Subj.
se-a
se-as
se-a
se-amos
se-dis
se-an
Imperat.
s6
sed
Fvi. Indie.
ser-6
ser-ds
ser-d
ser-emos
ser-^is
ser-dn
Cond. Indie,
ser-Ia
ser-ias
ser-Ia
ser-iamos
ser-Iais
ser-Ian
Impf. Indie,
, era
eras
era
^ramos
erais
eran
Pret. Indie.
fu-i
fu-iste
fu-6
fu-imos
fu-isteis
fu-eron
••se Impf. Svbj.
fu-ese
fu-eses
fu-ese
fu-68emos,
etc.
-ra Impf. Subj.
fu-era
fu-eras,
etc.
Fut. or ]
> fu-ere
fu-eres,
etc.
Hyp. Subj. J
THE VERB
255
260.
Participles
Pres. Indie.
Pres. Svbj.
Imperat.
Put. Indie.
Cond. Indie.
Impf. Indie.
Pret. Indie.
~se Impf. Subj.
~ra Impf. Svhj.
Put. or
Hyp. Subj.
Estar, to he
est-ando
est-oy
est-6
estar-4
estar-Ia
est-aba
estuv-e
estuv-iese
estuv-iera
est-ado
est-ds
est-4s
est-d
estar-ds
est-d est-amo8 est-dis est-dn
est-6 est-emos est-^is est-^n
est-ad
estar-d estar-emos, etc. (reg.)
estar-Ias, ete. (reg.)
est-abas est-aba est-dbamos, etc. (reg.)
estuv-iste estuv-o estuv-imos estuv-isteis
estuv-ieron
estuv-ieses estuv-iese estuv-i^semos, etc.
estuv-ieras, etc.
estuv-iere estuv-ieres, etc.
a. This is the Latin stare, whose sense has weakened from stand to
be. It is regular, as of the first conjugation, in its present tenses and in
the future, conditional, and imperfect of the indicative except for the
y added in estoy. This y is found also in soy from ser, voy from ir,
and doy from dar. Note the frequency of the written accent in the
present tenses.
261.
yendo
voy
vay-a
Participles
Pres. Indie.
Pres. Svlij.
Imperat.
Put. Indie.
Cond. Indie, ir-la
Impf. Indie, iba
Pret. Indie. fu-I
-se Impf. Subj.
-ra Impf. Subj.
Put. or
Hyp. Svbj.
ir-4
fu-ese
fu-era
Ir, to go
ido
vas va
vay-as vay-a
ve
ir-ds, etc. (reg.)
ir-Ias, etc. (reg.)
ibas iba
fu-iste, ete. (as for ser)
fu-eses, etc. (as for ser)
f u-eras, etc. (as for ser)
vamos
vay-amos
(vamos)
fbamos
vaia
vay-dis
id
ibais
van
vay-an
iban
fu-ere fu-eres, etc. (as for ser)
a. This verb is very irregular; its forms are related to those of three
different Latin verbs, ire, vadere, and esse. It is obvious that it borrows
from ser the forms of its preterite indicative and its two imperfects and
future of the subjunctive. The grammars usually register for it a
256
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
first plural of the imperative, vamos, let us go (also used as an inter-
jection, come now, etc.), which is strictly speaking an older form of the
first plural of the present subjimctive. Vayamos is restricted to the
purely subjunctive use in clauses that are clearly subordinate; vamos
occurs only in clauses that are independent or apparently so.
262.
Participles
Pres. Indie.
Pres. Subj.
Imperat.
Put. Indie.
Andar, to go, walk
and-ando
and-o
and-e
and-ado
and-as, etc. (reg.)
and-es, etc. (reg.)
anda, etc. (reg.)
andar-ds, etc. (reg.)
andar-6
Cond. Indie. andar-Ia, etc. (reg.)
Impf. Indie, and-aba, etc. (reg.)
Pret. Indie, anduv-e anduv-iste anduv-o anduv-imos anduv-isteis
anduv-ieron
-se Impf. Svbj. anduv-iese anduv-ieses, etc.
-ra Impf. Siibj. anduv-iera anduv-ieras, etc.
FlU.OT \ , .
-.- ct , . r anduv-iere
Hyp. Subj. J
anduv-ieres, etc.
a. This verb is perfectly regular as of the first conjugation in its
infinitive, participles, present tenses, and future, conditional, and im-
perfect of the indicative. With the stem anduv- it is of the second
or third regular conjugation in the preterite indicative and the three
subjunctive tenses that follow it.
263.
Dar, to give, strike
Participles
d-ando
d-ado
Pres. Indie
d-oy
d-as
d-a d-amos, etc.
Pres. Svbj.
d-6
d-es
d-4 d-emos, etc.
Imperat.
d-a
d-ad (reg.)
Put. Indie.
dar-6
dar-ds.
etc. (reg.)
Cond. Indie.
dar-Ia
dar-ias,
etc. (reg.)
Impf. Indie.
, d-aba
d-abas,
etc. (reg).
Pret. Indie.
d-i
d-iste
d-i6 d-imos d-isteis d
-se Impf. Svbj.
d-iese
d-ieses
d-iese d-i&emos, etc.
■ra Impf. Subj.
d-iera
d-ieras.
etc.
Put. or 1
Hyp. Subj. J
d-iero
d-ieres,
etc.
d-ieron
THE VERB
257
a. With the stem d-, this verb is regular as of the first conjugation
(save for the y of doy) in its infinitive, participles, present tenses, and
future, conditional, and imperfect of the indicative; and it is regular
as of the second or third conjugation in the preterite indicative and
the three subjunctive tenses that follow it.
264.
Venir, io
come
Participles
vin-iendo
ven-ido
Pres. Indie.
veng-o
vien-es vien-e
ven-imos
ven-Is
vien-en
Pres. Subj.
veng-a
veng-as veng-a
veng-amos
veng-dis
veng-an
Imperat.
ven
ven-id
Put. Indie.
vendr-4
vendr-ds vendr-d
vendr-emos
vendr-^is
vendr-dn
Cond. Indie.
vendr-Ia
vendr-Ias vendr-Ia
, etc.
Impf. Indie.
ven-Ia
ven-Ias, ete. (reg.)
Pret. Indie.
vin-e
vin-iste vin-o
vin-imos
vin-isteis
vin-ieron
-se Impf. Subj.
vin-iese
vin-ieses, ete.
-ra Impf. Subj.
vin-iera
vin-ieras, etc.
Put. or Hyp. Subj.
vin-iere vin-ieres, etc.
a. This is one of several irregular verbs which add g or ig to the
verb stem in the first singular of the present indicative and in all six
forms of the present subjunctive; the others are tener, poner, asir,
salir, and valer, which add g, and caer, oir, and traer, which add -ig.
In part venir is, like tener, of the radical-changing class.
265. Poner, to put
Participles
pon-iendo puesto
Pres. Indie.
pon-es pon-e pon-emos
f)ong-o
Pres. Subj.
pong-a
pong-as pong-a pong-amos
pon-^is
pong-dis
pon-en
pong-an
258
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
pon pon-ed
Imperat.
Fvi. Indie.
pondr-^ pondr-ds ix>ndT-£ pondr-emos pondr-^is pondr-^
Cond. Indie.
pondr-ia pondr-Ias, etc.
Impf. Indie.
pon-ia pon-Ias, ete. {reg.)
Pret. Indie.
pus-e pus-iste pus-o pus-imos pus-isteis pus-ieron
-se Impf. Svbj.
pus-iese pus-ieses, etc.
-ra Impf. Subj.
pus-iera pus-ieras, etc.
Fut. or Hyp. Subj.
pus-iere pus-ieres, etc.
a. The past participle, the preterite indicative, and the imperfects
and future of the subjvmctive have irregular formations.
266.
Hacer, to do, make
Participles
•
hac-iendo
hecho
Pres. Indie.
hag-o
hac-es hac-e
hac-emos
hac-€is
hac-en
Pres. Svbj.
hag-a
hag-as hag-a
hag-amos
hag-dis
hag-an
Imperat.
haz
hac-ed
Fut. Indie.
har-4
har-^ har-d
har-emos
har-^is
har-6n
Cond. Indie.
har-Ia
har-Ias, etc.
Impf. Indie.
hac-ia
hac-Ias, ete. (reg.)
Pret. Indie.
hic-e
hic-iste hiz-o
hio-imo8
hio-isteis
hic-iero
-«e Impf. Suij.
hic-iese
hic-ieses, etc.
•
-ra Impf. Subj.
hio-iera
hic-ieras, etc.
Fut. or Hyp. Svbj.
hic-iere
hic-ieres, etc.
tt
THE VERB 259
a. This verb, like decir, has many irregularities; notable are the
formation of the past participle, the -g- in certain of the present forms,
the contract infinitive basis, har-, of the future and conditional of the
indicative, and the preterite stem hie-, hiz-.
267. Decir, to say
Participles dic-iendo dicho
Pres. Indie, dig-o dic-es dic-e dec-imos dec-fs dic-en
Pres. Svbj. dig-a dig-as dig-a dig-amos dig-dis dig-an
Imperat. di dec-id
Fut. Indie, dir-6 dir-ds dir-d dir-emos dir-6is dir-dn
Cond. Indie. dir-Ia dir-Ias, ele.
Imp/. Indie, dec-la dec-las, ete. (reg.)
Pret. Indie, dij-e dij-iste dij-o dij-imos dij-isteis dij-eron
-se Impf. Svbj. dij-ese dij-eses, ete.
-ra Impf. Subj. dij-era dij-eras, etc.
Fut. or \ ... ... ,
-, c ,. } dii-ere dii-eres, etc.
Hyp. Subj. J '
a. Leading peculiarities are the irregular past participle, a -g-
stem and radical-changing forms in the present tenses, the contract
infinitive basis of the indicative future and conditional, and the pret-
erite stem dij- with the loss of i in the diphthongal endings after it
(dijeron, dijese, etc.).
268. Saber, to know
Participles sab-iendo^ sab-ido
Pres. Indie. 86 sab-es sab-e sab-emos sab-4is sab-en
Pres. Subj. sep-a sep-as sep-a s^amos sep-dis sep-an
Imperat. sab-e sab-ed
Fut. Indie, sabr-6 sabr-ds sabr-d sabr-emos sabr-dis sabr-dn
Cond. Indie. sabr-Ia sabr-ias, etc.
Impf. Indie. sab-Ia sab-las, ete. (reg.)
Pret. Indie, sup-e sup-iste sup>-o sup-imos sup-isteis sup-ieron
-se Impf. Subj. sup>-iese sup-ieses, etc.
-ra Impf. Subj. sup-iera sup-ieras, ete. •
Fut. or \ . . ,
Hyp.SvId.]'^^'^'^ sup-ieres, efc.
260
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
269. Caber, to be contained, fit
Participles
cab-iendo cab-ido
Pres. Indie.
quep-o cab-ea cab-e cab-emos cab-^is cab-en
Pres. Subj.
quep-a quep-as quep-a quep-amos quep-dis quep-an
Imperai cab-e cab-ed
FiU. Indie.
cabr-6 cabr-ds cabr-d cabr-emos cabr-^is cabr-^
Cond. Indie.
cabr-ia cabr-Ias, ete.
Impf. Indie.
cab-ia cab-ias, etc. (reg.)
Pret. Indie.
cup-e cup-iste cup-o cup-imos cup-isteis cup-ieron
-se Impf. Siibj.
cup-iese cup-ieses, etc.
-ra Impf. Subj.
cup-iera cup-ieras, etc.
Fut. or Hyp. Subj.
cup-iere cup-ieres, etc.
a. Saber and caber are exactly alike in their peculiarities, except
that saber has a reduced form se (instead of sepo) in the present indic-
ative, first singular, where caber has quepo. The interchange of -p-
and -b- in the present stem, the contract infinitive basis for the indic-
ative future and conditional, and the irregular preterite stem, sup-,
cup-, are to be noted.
270.
Poder, to be able
Participles
pud-iendo pod-ido
Pres. Indie.
pued-o pued-es pued-e pod-emos pod-^is pued-en
Pres. Subj.
pued-a pued-as pued-a pod-amos pod-^ pued-an
Imperat. (None)
Fut. Indie.
podr-6 podr-ds podr-d podr-emos podr-^is podr-dn
THE VERB
261
pud-imos pud-isteis pud-ieron
Cond. Indie.
podr-Ia podr-Ias, etc.
Impf. Indie.
pod-la pod-las, etc. {reg.)
Pret. Indie.
pud-e pud-iste pud-o
~se Impf. Subj.
pud-iese pud-ieses, etc.
-ra Impf. Subj.
pud-iera pud-ieras, etc.
Fvi. or Hyp. Sitbj.
pud-iere pud-ieres, etc.
a. Poder has certain features of the radical-changing verb and a
contract stem in the future and conditional of the indicative. Its
preterite stem is pud-. Its sense precludes its having a real imperative.
271. Querer, to wish, be fond of
Participles
quer-iendo quer-ido
Pres. Indie.
quier-es quier-e quer-emos quer-^is
quier-en
qmer-as
quier-e
quier-a quer-amos
quer-dis
quer-ed
qmer-an
querr-ds querr-£ querr-emos querr-6is querr-iln
qmer-o
Pres. Subj.
quier-a
Imperat,
Fvi. Indie.
querr-e
Cond. Indie.
querr-ia querr-Ias, etc.
Impf. Indie.
quer-Ia quer-ias, etc. (reg.)
Pret. Indie.
quis-e quis-iste quis-o
-se Impf. Subj.
quis-iese quis-ieses, etc.
-ra Impf. Subj.
quis-iera quis-ieras, etc.
Fui. or Hyp. Svbj.
quis-iere quis-ieres, etc.
a. Querer has features of the radical-changing verb, a contract
infinitive in the future and conditional of the indicative, and a pret-
erite stem quis-.
quis-imos quis-isteis quis-ieron
262 FIRST SPANISH COURSE
272. Asir, io grasp
Participles as-iendo as-ido
Pres. Indie, asg-o as-es as-e as-imos as-Is as-en
Pres. Siibj. asg-a asg-as asg-a asg-amos asg-dis asg-an
All the other fonns are perfectly regular as of the third conjugation.
273. Valer, to be worth
Participles val-iendo val-ido
Pres. Indie valg-o val-es val-e val-emos val-4i8 val-en
Pres. Subj. valg-a valg-as valg-a valg-amos valg-dis valg-an
Imperat. val or vale val-ed
Fvi. Indie, valdr-4 valdr-ds valdr-d valdr-emos valdr-4is valdr-dn
Cond. Indie, valdr-ia valdr-Ias, etc.
Impf. Indie, val-la val-Ias, etc. (reg.)
Pret. Indie, (reg.)
-se Impf. Svbj. (reg.)
-ra Impf. Svl^. (reg.)
Fut. or
Hyp. Svbj.
(.reg.)
274. Salir, to go out, come otd
Participles sal-iendo eal-ido
Pres. Indie. ealg-o sal-es sal-e sal-imos sal-Is sal-en
Pres. Svbj. salg-a salg-as salg-a salg-amos salg-dis salg-an
Imperat. sal sal-id
The other forms follow the model of valer.
275. C&eTytofall
Participles ca-yendo oa-Ido
Pres. Indie, caig-o ca-es ca-e ca-emos ca-^s ca-en
Pres. Svbj. caig-a caig-as caig-a caig-amos caig-dis caig-an
Imperat. ca-e ca-ed
The other forms are regular; they show the change of unaccented i
between vowels to y, as in cay6, cayeron, cayese, etc.
a. The noticeable pecuUarity here, as in the case of the two verba
following, is the addition of -ig- to the present stem for the 1st singular
of the present indicative and for all of the present subjimctive.
Tim VERB
263
276.
Oir, to hear
Participles
Pres. Indie.
Pres. Svbj.
Imperat.
o-yendo
oig-o
oig-a
o-Ido
oy-es oy-e o-fmos
oig-as oig-a oig-amos
oy-e
o-is
oig-dis
o-id
oy-en
oig-an
The other forms are r^ular; they show the change of unaccented i
between vowels to y, as in oy6, oyeron, oyese, etc.
a. Note the three present stems: oig- before -o and -a; oy- before
-e: and o- before -i.
Traer, to bring
tra-es
tra-e
tra-emos
traig-amos
tra-4is tra-en
traig-dis traig-an
tra-ed
277.
Participles
tra-yendo tra-ido
Pres. Indie.
traig-o
Pres. Sidy.
traig-a
Imperat.
Put. Indie.
Cond. Indie.
Impf. Indie.
Pret. Indie.
traj-e
—86 Impf. Svbj.
traj-ese
-ra Impf. Svbj.
traj-era traj-eras traj-era traj-^ramos traj-erais traj-eran
Put. or Hyp. Svbj.
traj-ere traj-eres traj-ere traj-^remos traj-ereis traj-eren
a. Traer and verbs in -ducir have a preterite stem in -j- after which
the -i- of a diphthongal ending is lost.
traig-as traig-a
tra-e
(reg.)
ireg.)
(reg.)
traj-iste traj-o traj-imos traj-isteis traj-eron
traj-eses traj-ese traj-^emos traj-eseis traj-esen
278.
Conducir, to conduct
Participles conduc-iendo conduc-ido
Pres. Indie, conduzc-o conduc-es
conduc-imos conduc-is
Pres. Svbj. conduzc-a conduzc-as
conduzc-amos conduzc-dis
conduc-e
conduc-en
conduzc-a
conduzc-aa
264
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Imperat.
conduc-e
conduc-id
Fut. Indie.
{reg.)
Cond. Indie.
(reg.)
Impf. Indie.
• (reg.)
Pret. Indie.
conduj-e
conduj-iste
conduj-o
conduj-imos
conduj-isteis
conduj-eron
-se Impf. Svbj.
conduj-ese
conduj-eses
conduj-ese
conduj-^semos
conduj-eseis
conduj-eser
-ra Impf. Svbj.
conduj-era
conduj-eras
conduj-era
conduj-^ramos
conduj-erais
conduj-eran
Fvi. or
1 conduj-ere
conduj-eres
conduj-ere
Hyp. Svbj. J
f conduj-^remos
conduj-ereis
conduj-eren
a. Like conducir are conjugated the other derivatives in -ducir;
aducir, deducir, inducir, producir, reducir, seducir; in the present
tenses they show inceptive endings.
279.
Ver, to see
Participles
v-iendo
visto
Pres. Indie.
ve-o
v-es v-e
v-emos
v-eis
v-en
Pres. Svbj.
ve-a
ve-as ve-a
ve-amo8
ve-dis
ve-an
Imperat.
v-e
v-ed
Fvi. Indie.
ver-^
ver-ds, ete.
Cond. Indie.
ver-ia
ver-ias, ete.
Pret. Indie.
v-i
v-iste v-i6
v-imos
v-isteis
v-ieron
-se Impf. Svbj.
v-iese
v-ieses, ete.
-^a Impf. Svbj.
v-iera
v-ieras, etc.
Fvi. or 1
1 .
Hyp. Svbj. ^
> v-iere
v-ieres, etc.
a. The full stem ve- of the present is reduced to v- before -e, as in
v-er, v-es, etc.; the preterite stem is v-.
The derivatives in -ver, e.g., antever, prever, are conjugated as above.
Proveer, to provide, has the full stem prove- throughout and is reg-
ular in its conjugation. It has, however, both proveido and provisto as
the past participle.
280. Irregiilar Past Participles. — Four verbs of the third
conjugation, — abrir, to open, cubrir, to cover, escribir, to
write, and imprimir, to 'print, impress, — have only irregular
THE VERB 265
past participles; these are abierto, cubierto, escrito, and
impreso. Otherwise these verbs are entirely regular. Two
second conjugation verbs, prender, to catch, arrest, and
romper, to break, tear, are perfectly regular throughout, but
they have irregular past participles beside the regular ones;
the irregular forms, preso and roto, are preferred for the per-
fect tenses and in the literal sense.
281. Defective Verbs. — The verbs placer, to please, and
yacer, to lie, are now used chiefly in the third person forms,
place, yace, etc. Perhaps the commonest form of placer
is the imperfect subjunctive pluguiera, employed especially
in i pluguiera a Dios I would to God; yacer figures in tombstone
inscriptions, aqui yace (yacen), here lies (lie), and occasion-
ally in other uses in higher style. The radical-changing
verb concernir, to concern, occurs only in the forms of the
third singular and plural of the various tenses. The radical-
changing verb soler, to be accustomed, is used frequently
only in the forms of the indicative present and imperfect,
as follows:
Buelo
sueles
suele
solemos
sol^is
Buelen
Bolla
solias
soUa
soliamos
solfaia
soliau
282.
LIST OF VERBS
The following list embraces radical-changing, -uir, and irregular
verbs. The verbs with inceptive endings (-cer or -cir preceded by a
vowel) are not included: they simply follow the models given in §255.
In the case of derivatives, reference is made to the conjugation of the
simple verbs, which they follow. Radical-changing verbs are indicated
by (ie), (ue), or (i) placed after the verb. The numbers refer to para-
graphs.
abnegar (ie), to renounce: 240, 2;
246,2
abrir, to open: p.p. irr., 280
absolver (ue), to absolve: p.p.
irr., 245, 4
abstenerse, to abstain: irr., 258
abstraer, to abstract: irr., 277
abuilolar (ue), to make fritter-
shaped: cf. abufluelar, reg.
acertar (ie), to hit the mark
aclocarse (ue), to stretch out,
brood: 240, 1; 246, 1
acordar (ue), to resolve, remind,
tune; — se (ue), to remember
acostar (ue), to lay down; — se
(ue), to lie down
acrecentar (ie), to increase
adestrar (ie), to guide: oZsoadies-
trar, reg.
adherir (ie), to adhere
adormir (ue), to make drowsy
adquirir (ie), to acquire: 248, 2
adudr, to adduce: irr., 278;
255, o; 242, 2
advertir (ie), to observe, advise
afollar (ue), to blow with bellows
aforar (ue), to give a charter:
aforar, to gauge, reg.
agorar (ue), to divine, prognos-
ticate: 246, 5
alebrarse (ie), to squat, cower
alentar (ie), to breathe, encourage
aliquebrar (ie), to break the wings
almorzar (ue), to breakfast: 240,
4; 246, 3
alongar (ue), to lengthen: 240, 2;
246,2
amoblar (ue), to furnish: also
amueblar, reg.
amolar (ue), to whet
amover (ue), to remove, dismiss
andar, to go, walk: irr., 262
antedecir, to foretell: irr., 267
anteponer, to put before, prefer:
irr., 265
antever, to foresee: irr., 279
apacentar (ie), to graze
apercollar (ue), to collar, snatch
apemar (ie), to seize by the l^a
aplacer, to please: irr., 281
LIST OF VERBS
267
apostar (ue), to bet, post: apostar,
to post troops, reg.
apretar (ie), to squeeze, press
aprobar (ue), to approve
argiiir, to argue: 256
arrendar (ie), to rent, hire
arrepentirse (ie), to repent
ascender (ie), to ascend
asentar (ie), to seat, set down
asentir (ie), to assent, acquiesce
aserrar (ie), to saw
asir, to seize, grasp: irr., 272
asolar (ue), to level to ground,
raze
asoldar (ue), to hire
asonar (ue),' to assonate, be in.
assonance
asosegar: see sosegar
atender (ie), to attend, mind
atenerse, to abide, hold: irr, 258
atentar (ie), to try: atentar, to
attempt a crime, reg.
aterrar (ie), to fell: aterrar, to
terrify, reg.
atestar (ie), to cram, stu£f: ates-
tar, to attest, reg.
atraer, to attract: irr., 277; 242, 2
atravesar (ie), to cross
atribuir, to attribute: 256
atronar (ue), to make a thunder-
ing din, stun
avenir, to reconcile: irr., 264
aventar (ie), to fan, winnow
avergonzar (ue), to shame: 240,
4; 246, 3; 246, 5
azolar (ue), to shape with the
adze
bendedr, to bless: irr., 267; 242, 2
bruilir, to burnish: 242, 2
bullir, toboil: 242,2
caber, to be contained, find room:
irr., 269
caer, to fall: irr., 275
calentar (ie), to warm
cegar (ie), to blind: 240, 2; 246, 2
ceflir (i), to gird: 242, 2; 252, 3
cemer (ie), to sift; bud
cerrar (ie), to close
cimentar (ie), to found, establish
circuir, to encircle: 256
clocar (ue), to cluck: 240, 1;
246, 1
cocer (ue), to boil, bake: 255, a.
coextenderse (ie), to be coexten-
sive
colar (ue), to strain, filter
colegir (i), to collect: 241, 2;
252, 1
colgar (ue), to hang up: 240, 2;
246, 2
comedirse (i), to behave
comenzar (ie), to commence: 240,
4; 246, 3
competir (i), to compete
complacer, to please, content:
irr., 281
componer, to compose: irr., 266
comprobar (ue), to verify, con-
firm
concebir (i), to conceive
concemir (ie), to concern: 248, 1,
footnote 1; 281
concertar (ie), to concert, regu-
late
concluir, to conclude: 256; 242, I
concordar (ue), to accord, agree
condescender (ie), to condescend
condolerse (ue), to condole
conducir, to conduct: irr., 278;
255, a; 242,2
conferir (ie), to confer
268
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
confesar (ie), to confess
confluir, to join: 256
conmover (ue), to move, affect
conseguir (i), to obtain, attain:
241, 4; 252, 2
consentir (ie), to consent
consolar (ue), to console
consonar (ue), to be in consonance,
rhyme
constituir, to constitute: 256
constrefLir (i), to compel, con-
strain: 242, 2; 252, 3
construir, to construct : 256
contar (ue), to count, tell
contender (ie), to contend
contener, to contain: irr., 258
contorcerse (ue), to be distorted,
writhe: 241, 1
contradecir, to contradict: irr.,
267; 242, 2; 255, a.
contraer, to contract: irr., 277;
242, 2
contrahacer, to counterfeit: irr.,
266; 255, a.
contraponer, to oppose, compare:
irr., 265
contravenir, to contravene: irr.,
264
contribuir, to contribute: 256
controvertir (ie), to controvert
convenir, to agree, fit: irr., 264
convertir (ie), to convert
corregir (i), to correct: 241, 2;
262, 1
costar (ue), to cost
creer, to believe: 242, 1
cubrir, to cover: -p.-p. irr., 280
dar, to give: irr., 263
decaer, to decay: irr., 276
decentar (ie), to begin to use
decir, to say: irr., 267; 255, a;
242, 2
deducir, to deduce: irr., 278;
255, a; 242, 2
defender (ie), to defend
deferir (ie), to defer
degollar (ue), to behead, cut the
throat: 246, 5
demoler (ue), to demolish
demostrar (ue), to demonstrate
denegar (ie), to deny: 240, 2;
246,2
denostar (ue), to insult
dentar (ie), to tooth, indent; to
teethe
deponer, to depose, depone: irr.,
265
derrengar (ie), to sprain the hip,
cripple: 240, 2; 246, 2
derretir (i), to melt
derrocar (ue), to pull down, de-
molish: 240, 1; 246, 1
demur, to cast down, destroy:
256
desacertar (ie), to blunder, err
desacordar (ue), to make dis-
cordant; — se (ue), to forget
desaferrar (ie), to loosen, unfurl
desalentar (ie), to put out of
breath, discourage
desamoblar (ue), to unfurnish, re-
move furniture: also desamue-
War, reg.
desandar, to retrace steps, imdo:
irr., 262
desapretar (ie), to slacken, loosen
desaprobar (ue), to disapprove
desarrendarse (ie), to shake off
the bridle
desasentar (ie), to disagree, dis-
please; — se (ie), to get up
LIST OF VERBS
269
desasir, to let go, release hold:
irr., 272
desasosegar (ie), to disturb, dis-
quiet: 240, 2; 246, 2
desatender (ie), to disregard, neg-
lect
desatentar (ie), to perturb, per-
plex
desavenir, to discompose, discon-
cert: irr., 264
descender (ie), to descend
descefiir (i), to ungird: 242, 2;
252, 3
descolgar (ue), to unhang, take
down: 240, 2; 246, 2
descollar (ue), to stand forth, excel
descomedirse (i), to be disre-
spectful, behave ill
descomponer, to disconcert, de-
compose: irr., 265
desconcertar (ie), to disconcert,
confound
desconsentir (ie), to dissent
desconsolar (ue), to make discon-
solate
descontar (ue), to discoimt
desconvenir, to disagree, be un-
like: irr., 264
descordar (ue), to remove cords
descomar (ue), to remove horns
descubrir, to uncover, discover:
p.p. irr., 280
desdar, to untwist: irr., 263
desdecir, to gainsay: irr., 267;
242, 2
desdentar (ie), to remove teeth
desempedrar (ie), to xmpave
desencerrar (ie), to release from
confinement
desencordar (ue), to remove
strings, loosen
desengrosar (ue), to make lean
desentenderse (ie), to disregard,
feign not to notice
desenterrar (ie), to disinter
desenvolver (ue), to unfold, im-
ravel: p.p. irr., 245, 4
deservir (i), to neglect duty, do
a disservice
desflocar (ue), to remove flocks
(of wool): 240, 1; 246, 1
desgobemar (ie), to derange the
government, misgovern
deshacer, to imdo, destroy: irr.,
266; 255, a
deshelar (ie), to thaw
desherbar (ie), to pluck out
herbs
desherrar, to uniron, remove
horseshoes
desleir (i), to dilute: 253
deslendrar (ie), to remove nits
(Jrom hair)
desmajolar (ue), to uproot vines
desmedirse (i), to go beyond
boimds, be unreasonable
desmembrar (ie), to dismember
desmentir (ie), to belie
desnegar (ie), to retract denial:
240, 2; 246, 2
desnevar (ie), to melt away (o/
snow)
desobstruir, to remove obstruc-
tion: 256
desoir, not to heed, feign not to
hear: irr., 276
desolar (ue), to make desolate
desoldar (ue), to imsolder
desollar (ue), to flay
desosar (ue), to remove bones:
247, a
desovar (ue), to spawn: 247, o
270
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
despedir (i), to dismiss; — se (i),
to take leave
despemar (ie), to remove legs,
cripple
despertar (ie), to awaken
despezar (ie), to arrange (stones)
at intervals, taper at the end:
240, 4; 246, 3
desplacer, to displease: 281
desplegar (ie), to unfold, imfurl:
240, 2; 246, 2
despoblar (ue), to depopulate
desproveer, to leave unprovided,
deprive of supplies: 279, a;
242, 1
desteflir (i), to discolor, fade: 242,
2; 252, 3
desterrar (ie), to exile
destituir, to deprive, remove from
office: 256
destorcer (ue), to untwist: 241, 1;
246,4
destrocar (ue), to retiu-n a bar-
tered object: 240, 1; 246, 1
destruir, to destroy: 256
desventar (ie), to vent, let out air
desvergonzarse (ue), to be shame-
less or impudent: 240, 4; 246,
3; 246, 5
detener, to detain: irr., 258
detraer, to detract: irr., 277; 242, 2
devolver (ue), to give back: p.p.
irr., 245, 4
diferir (ie), to defer, delay, differ
digerir (ie), to digest
diluir, to dilute: 256
discemir (ie), to discern: 248, 1
disconvenir: see desconvenir
discordar (ue), to disagree, be dis-
cordant
disentir (ie), to dissent
disminuir, to diminish: 256
disolver (ue), to dissolve: p.p. irr.,
245,4
disonar (ue), to be in dissonance
dispertar: see despertar
displacer, to displease: irr., 281
disponer, to dispose: trr., 265
distender (ie), to distend
distraer, to distract: irr., 277;
242,2
distribuir, to distribute: 256
divertir (ie), to divert
dolar (ue), to plane, smooth {wood,
etc.)
doler (ue), to pain, grieve
dormir (ue), to sleep
educir, to educe, bring out: irr.,
278; 255, a; 242, 2
elegit (i), to elect: 241, 2; 252, 1
embestir (i), to invest, attack
emparentar (ie), to be related by
marriage
empedrar (ie), to pave
empeller, to urge, push: 242, 2
empezar (ie), to begin: 240, 4;
246, 3
emporcar (ue), to sully, befoul:
240, 1; 246, 1
encender (ie), to light, kindle
encentar (ie), to begin to use for
first time
encerrar (ie), to shut up, confine
enclocar (ue), to cluck: 240, 1;
246, 1
encomendar (ie), to commend
encontrar (ue), to meet, find
encorar (ue), to cover with leather,
renew the skin
encordar (ue), to string {musical
instruments), lash
LIST OF VERBS
271
encovar (ue), to put into a cave
or cellar, lock up
encubertar (ie), to cover over
endentar (ie), to mortise in
engorar (ue), to lay addled eggs:
246, 5
engreir (i), to elate, puff up: 253
engrosar (ue), to fatten, strengthen
enhestar (ie), to erect, set upright
enmelar (ie), to honey, sweeten
enmendar (ie), to amend, correct
enrodar (ue), to break on the
wheel
ensangrentar (ie), to cover with
blood
entender (ie), to hear, imderstand
enterrar (ie), to inter
entortar (ue), to make crooked;
to deprive of one eye
entredecir, to interdict: irr., 267;
242, 2; 255, a
entremorir (ue), to pine away:
p.p. irr., 250, a
entreoir, to hear indistinctly: irr.,
276
entrepemar (ie), to put the legs in
between {something else)
entreponer, to interpose: irr., 265
entretener, to delay, entertain:
irr., 258
entrever, to see imperfectly, catch
a glimi>se of: irr., 279
envolver (ue), to involve, wrap
up, complicate: p.p. irr., 2A5, 4
eqtiivaler, to equal, be equivalent:
irr., 273
erguir (ie or i), to erect: 254;
241,4
errar (ye-), to err, wander: 247, 1
escarmentar (ie), to give warning
example, learn by experience
escocer (ue), to smart: 255, a;
241, 1; 246, 4
escribir, to write: p.p. irr., 280
esforzar (ue), to strengthen; — se
(ue), to attempt: 240,4; 246,3
estar, to be: irr., 260
estatuir, to establish: 256
estregar (ie), to rub, scoiu", grind:
240, 2; 246, 2
estrefiir (i), to bind, restrain:
242,2
ezcluir, to exclude: 256
expedir (i), to expedite, despatch
exponer, to expose: irr., 265
extender (ie), to extend
extraer, to extract: irr., 277;
242, 2
ferrai (ie), to put on iron points,
etc.
fluir, to flow: 256
foliar (ue), to blow with bellows
forzar (ue), to force: 240, 4;
246,3
fregar (ie), to rub, scour: 240,
2; 246, 2
freir (i), to fry: 253
gemir (i), to groan, moan
gobernar (ie), to govern
gruir, to cry like cranes: 256
gruflir, to grunt: 242, 2; 252, 3
haber, to have: irr., 257
hacendar (ie), to transfer prop-
erty
hacer, to do, make: irr., 266;
255, a {thus derivatives in
— facer)
heder (ie), to have a stench,
stink
272
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
helar (ie), to freeze
henchir (i), to stuff, cram
hender (ie), to cleave, split
herbar (ie), to dress skins
herir (ie), to wound
hervir (ie), to boil, bubble
herrar (ie), to shoe {horses), brand
(caMe)
holgar (ue), to rest, cease work-
ing: 240, 2; 246, 2
hollar (ue), to trample on, tread
on
huir, to flee: 256
imbuir, to imbue: 256
impedir (i), to impede
imponer, to impose: irr., 265
imprimir, to print: p.p. irr., 280
improbar (ue), to disapprove, cen-
sure
incensar (ie), to perfume, in-
cense
incluir, to include: 256
indisponer, to indispose, disin-
cline: irr., 265
inducir, to induce: irr., 278; 255,
a; 242, 2
inferir (ie), to infer
infemar (ie), to damn, vex
influir, to influence: 256
ingerir (ie), to graft, insert
inquirir (ie), to inquire: 248, 2
instituir, to institute: 256
instniir, to instruct: 256
iaterdecir, to indict: irr., 267;
242, 2
interponer, to interpose: irr., 265
intervenir, to intervene: irr., 264
introducir, to introduce: irr., 278;
255, a; 242, 2
inyemar (ie), to winter
invertir (ie), to invert, spend, in-
vest
investir (i), to invest, gird
ir, to go: irr., 261
jugar (ue), to play: 249
leer, to read: 242, 1
llover (ue), to rain
maldecir, to curse; irr., 267;
242,2
malherir (ie), to wound seriously
malsonar (ue), to make cacophony
maltraer, to maltreat: irr., 277;
242, 2
manifestar (ie), to manifest
mantener, to maintain: irr., 258
mecer, to rock, lull, mix: 255, a
medir (i), to measure
melar (ie), to boil to honey, de-
posit honey (of bees)
mentar (ie), to mention
mentir (ie), to lie
merendar (ie), to lunch
moblar (ue), to furnish: also
mueblar, reg.
moler (ue), to grind
morder (ue), to bite
mortr (ue), to die: p.p. irr., 250, a
mostrar (ue), to show
mover (ue), to move
negar (ie), to deny: 240, 2; 246, 2
nevar (ie), to snow, impers.
obstruir, to obstruct: 256
obtener, to obtain: irr., 258
ofr, to hear: irr., 276
oler (hue-), to smell, have an
odor; 247, 2
opener, to oppose: irr., 265
LIST OF VERBS
273
pedir (i), to ask
pensar (ie), to think, mean, be-
lieve
perder (ie), to lose, spoil, destroy
pemiquebrar (ie), to break the legs
perseguir (i), to pursue, perse-
cute: 241, 4; 252, 2
pervertir (ie), to pervert
placer, to please: irr., 281
plafiir, to lament, bewail: 242, 2;
252,3
plegar (ie), to fold: 240, 2; 246, 2
poblar (ue), to found, people, fill
poder, to be able; can: irr., 270
poner, to put: irr., 265
poseer, to possess: 242, 1
posponer, to place after, postpone:
irr., 265
predecir, to predict: irr., 267;
242, 2
predisponer, to predispose: irr.,
265
preferir (ie), to prefer
prender, to arrest, catch: 280
preponer, to put before, prefer:
irr., 265
presentir (ie), to forebode, foresee
presuponer, to presuppose: irr.,
265
prevalerse, to prevail: irr., 273
prevenir, to forestall, prevent: irr.,
264
prever, to foresee: irr., 279
probar (ue), to prove, try, taste
producir, to produce: irr., 278;
255, a; 242, 2
preferir (ie), to utter, pronounce
promover (ue), to promote
preponer, to propose: irr., 265
proseguir (i), to pm-sue, prose-
cute: 241, 4; 252, 2
prostituir, to prostitute: 256
proveer, to provide: 242,1; 279, a
provenir, to proceed: irr., 264
quebrar (ie), to break
querer, to wish, like: irr., 271
reapretar (ie), to squeeze again
rebendecir, to bless again: irr.,
267; 255, a; 242, 2
recaer, to fall back, relapse: irr.,
275
recalentar (ie), to heat again
recentar (ie), to leaven
recluir, to shut up, seclude: 256
recocer (ue), to boU again: 255,
a; 246, 4
recolar (ue), to strain again
recomendar (ie), to recommend
recomponer, to recompose, mend:
irr., 265
reconducir, to renew lease or con-
tract: irr., 278; 255, a; 242, 2
reconstruir, to reconstruct: 256
recontar (ue), to recount
reconvenir, to accuse, rebuke:
irr., 264
recordar (ue), to remind
recostar (ue), to lean against, re-
cline
redargiiir, to reargue: 256
reducir, to reduce: irr., 278; 255,
a; 242, 2
reelegir (i), to reelect: 241, 2;
252, 1
referir (ie), to relate, refer
refiuir, to flow back: 256
reforzar (ue), to strengthen, for-
tify: 240, 4; 246, 3
refregar (ie), to rub over again:
240, 2; 246, 2
274
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
refrefr, to fry again: 253
regar (ie), to water: 240, 2
246 2
regir (i), to rule, direct: 241, 2
252, 1
regoldar (ue), to belch, eruct
246, 5
rehacer, to make again, mend
irr., 266; 255, a
rehenchir (i), to fill again, restuS
reherir (ie), to wound again
reherrar (ie), to shoe (horses)
again
rehervir (ie), to reboil
rehollar (ue), to trample under
foot
rehuir, to withdraw, deny: 256
reir, to laugh: 253
remendar (ie), to repair, patch
rementir (ie), to Ue again
remoler (ue), to grind again
. remorder (ue), to bite repeatedly,
cause remorse
remover (ue), to remove, alter
rendir (i), to subdue, render; — se
(i), to surrender
renegar (ie), to deny, disown:
240, 2; 246, 2
renovar (ue), to renovate, renew
refiir (i), to quarrel, scold: 242, 2;
252,3
repensar (ie), to think over again
repetir (i), to repeat, recite
replegar (ie), to refold, double
again: 240, 2; 246, 2
repoblar (ue), to repopulate
reponer, to put back, replace: irr.,
265
reprobar (ue), to reject, condermi
reproducir, to reproduce: irr.,
278; 265, o; 242, 2
requebrar (ie), to court, make love
requerir (ie), to investigate, re-
quire, request
resalir, to project, be prominent:
irr., 274
resegar (ie), to reap again: 240,
2; 246, 2
resembrar (ie), to sow again
resentirse (ie), to begin to give
way, resent
resolver (ue), to resolve: p.p. irr.,
245,4
resollar (ue), to respire
resonar (ue), to resound
resquebrar (ie), to crack, split,
burst
restittiir, to restore, reestablish:
256
restregar (ie), to scrub: 240, 2;
246,2
retemblar (ie), to shake, tremble
much, brandish
retener, to retain: irr., 258
retentar (ie), to threaten (with a
relapse)
retefiir (i), to dye over again:
242, 2; 252, 3
retorcer (ue), to twist, contort:
241, 1; 246, 4
retostar (ue), to toast again, scorch
well
retraer, to retract: irr., 277;
242,2
retribuir, to make retribution,
recompense: 256
retronar (ue), to thunder again
retrotraer, to make retroactive:
irr., 277; 242, 2
revenirse, to be consumed gradu-
ally, sour, ferment: irr., 264
reventar (ie), to burst
LIST OF VERBS
275
rever, to see again, review, revise:
irr., 279
reverter (ie), to revert
revestir (i), to put on vestments
revolar (ue), to fly again
revolcarse (ue), to wallow: 240,
1; 246, 1
revolver (ue), to stir, revolve:
p.p. irr., 245, 4
rodar (ue), to roll
rogar (ue), to entreat, ask: 240, 2;
246, 2; derivatives (abrogar,
derogar) reg.
saber, to know: irr., 268
salir, to go out, come out: irr., 274
salpimentar (ie), to season with
pepper and salt
sarmentar (ie), to gather prunings
of vine
satisfacer, to satisfy: irr., 266;
255, a
segar (ie), to reap: 240, 2; 246, 2
seguir(i), to follow: 241,4; 252,2
sembrar (ie), to sow
sementar (ie), to sow
sentar (ie), to seat, set, suit
sentir (ie), to feel, regret
ser, tobe: irr., 259
serrar (ie), to saw
servir (i), to serve
sobre(e)ntenderse (ie), to be un-
derstood
sobreponer, to put above, add:
irr., 265
sobresalir, to rise above, surpass:
irr., 274
sobresembrar (ie), to sow over
again
sobresolar (ue), to pave again,
put on new sole
sobrevenir, to happen, supervene:
irr., 264
sobreverterse (ie), to overflow
sobrevestir (i), to put on an outer
coat
sofreir (i), to fry slightly: 253
solar (ue), to floor, pave, sole
soldar (ue), to solder, mend
soler (ue), to be wont or accus-
tomed: 281
soltar (ue), to untie, loosen
solver (ue), to loosen: p.p. irr.,
245,4
sonar (ue), to soimd
sonrefr (i), to smile: 253
sonrodarse (ue), to stick in the
mud
sofiar (ue), to dream
sorregar (ie), to change channels:
240, 2; 246, 2
sosegar (ie), to appease, rest:
240, 2; 246, 2
sostener, to sustain: irr., 258
soterrar (ie), to put imderground,
bury
subarrendar (ie), to take a sub-
lease, subrent
9ubentender (ie), to subintend
subseguir (i), to be next in se-
quence: 241, 4; 252, 2
substituir: see sustituir
substraer: see sustraer
subtender (ie), to subtend
subvenir,to aid, give a subven-
tion: irr., 264
subvertir (ie), to subvert
sugerir (ie), to suggest
superponer, to superimpose: irr.,
265
supervenir, to supervene: irr.,
264
276
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
suponer, to suppose: irr., 265
sustituir, to substitute: 256
sustraer, to subtract: irr., 277;
242, 2
taller, to ring, peal, touch: 242, 2
temblar (ie), to tremble
tender (ie), to stretch
tener, to have, hold : irr., 258
tentar (ie), to feel, try
tefiir (i), to tinge, dye, stain: 242,
2; 252, 3
torcer (ue), to twist, bend: 241, 1;
246, 4
tostar (ue), to toast
traducir, to translate: irr., 278;
255, a; 242,2
traer, to bring: irr., 277; 242, 2
transcender: see trascender
transferir (ie), to transfer
transfregar: see trasfregar
transponer: see trasponer
trascender (ie), to transcend
trascolar (ue), to filter through
trascordarse (ue), to forget
trasegar (ie), to upset, decant:
240, 2; 246, 2
trasfregar (ie), to rub: 240, 2;
246,2
trasofr, to misunderstand, hear
imperfectly: irr., 276
trasoiiar (ue), to dream
trasponer, to transpose, go be-
yond ; — se, to set (of sun) :
irr., 265
trastrocar (ue), to change about,
invert order: 240, 1; 246, 1
trasverter (ie), to overflow
trasvolar (ue), to fly across or
beyond
travesar (ie), to cross
trocar (ue), to exchange, barter:
240, 1; 246, 1
tronar (ue), to thimder
tropezar (ie), to stiunble: 240, 4;
246,3
valer, to be worth: irr., 273
venir, to come: irr., 264
ventar (ie), to blow
ver, to see: irr., 279
verter (ie), to pour, shed
vestir (i), to dress, clothe
volar (ue), to fly, rise, blow up
volcar (ue), to overturn: 240, 1;
246, 1
volver (ue), to return, come back:
p.p. irr., 245, 4
yacer, to lie: irr., 281
yuxtaponer, to put in juxtaposi-
tion: irr., 265
za(m)bullirse, to dive: 242, 2
zaherir (ie), to reproach, censure
283. REFERENCE LIST OF VERBS
Taking a Direct Infinitive Object, or Requiring a Preposition
Before a Subordinate Infinitive.
If the principal verb is followed by a direct infinitive object, with-
out the interposition of a preposition, this fact is indicated by a dash
(-) placed after the principal verb, thus : querer -, to wish to.
If a preposition is required before the subordinate infinitive, the
preposition is given after the principal verb, thus: empezar a, to begin
to; tratar de, to try to.
If the gerund may be used instead of a subordinate infinitive, this
fact is indicated thus: continuar a or ger.
After many verbs in the list, the infinitive is used only when the
principal and the subordinate verbs have the same subject. This is
true of verbs of affirming, denying, believing, doubting, knowing, etc.
(afirmar, asegurar, confesar, creer, dudar, negar, reconocer, saber,
sostener, etc.), verbs of willing or wishing (anhelar, desear, querer,
etc.), and verbs that express feeling or emotion (alegrarse de, sentir,
temer, etc.).
The following list does not include verbs and expressions with which
an infinitive is used only as subject of the sentence, such as importar
(e.g., me importa hacerlo), ocurrir (e.g., se me ocurre hacerlo), ser
fficil, necesario, etc. (e.g., es facil hacerlo), tocar (e.g., me toca ha-
cerlo), valer mas (e.g., vale mfis hacerlo), etc. Nor is reference made
to the use of an infinitive subject with such verbs as convenir (e.g.,
me conviene hacerlo), gustar (e.g., me gusta hacerlo), etc.
abandonar (se) a, to give (oneseK) acudir a, to go, come, hasten to
up to acusar de, to accuse of
abstenerse de, to refrain from adherir(se) a, to stick to
acabar de, to finish, have just; — afanarse por, to exert oneself to
por, to end by aficionarse a, to become addicted
acceder a, to accede, agree to to
acomodarse a, to conform to afirmar -, to aflfirm, declare
aconsejar -, to advise to afligirse de, to lament
acordarse de, to remember agraviarse de, to be grieved at
acostumbrar -, to be used to; ajustarse a, to agree to
— (se) a, to make (become) alcanzar a, to reach, attain to,
used to alegrarse de, to be glad to
278
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
amenazar -, to threaten to; —
con, to threaten with
anhelar -, to long to
animar a, to encourage to
aplicarse a, to apply oneself to
aprender a, to leam to
apresurar(se) a, to hurry, hasten to
aprovecharse de, to profit by
apurarse per, to exert oneself to
arrepentirse de, to repent of
arriesgar con, to risk by
asegurar -, to assure, claim to
aspirar a, to aspire to
asustarse de, to be terrified at
atreverse a, to dare to
autorizar a, to authorize to
aventurarse a, to venture to
avergonzarse de, to be ashamed of
ayudar a, to aid, help to
bastar con, to be enough, suffice to
cansar(se) de, to tire, make (grow)
weary of
celebrar -, to be glad to
cesar de, to cease to
comenzar a, to begin, commence to
complacerse en, to take pleasure in
comprometer(se) a, to engage
(oneself), agree to
condenar a, to condemn to
condescender a, to condescend to
conducir a, to lead, conduct to
conf esar -, to confess
confiar en, to trust, hope to
conformarse a, to conform, agree
to
consagrar(se) a, to devote (one-
self) to
conseguir -, to succeed in
consentir en, to consent to
consistir en, to consist in
conspirar a, to conspire to
consumirse en, to be consumed in
contar con, to count on
contentarse con, to content one-
self with; — de, to be satis-
fied to
continuar a or ger., to continue
(to)
contribuir a, to contribute to
convenir(se) - en or a, to agree to
convidar a, to invite to
correr a, to nm to
creer -, to believe, think
dar a, to give to; — se a, to give
oneself up to
deber -, should, ought to; — de,
ought to (supposition)
decidir(se) - or a, to decide, deter-
mine to
declarar -, to declare
dedicar(se) a, to dedicate (one-
self) to
dejar -, to let, allow, permit to;
— de, to leave off, cease to
deleitarse en, to take deUght in
desafiar a, to challenge to
descender a, to descend to
descuidar de, to neglect to
desdeiiar(se) - or de, to disdain
to
desear -, to desire to
desesperar(se) de, to despair of
desistir de, to desist from
destinar a, to destine to
detenerse a, to stop to
detenninarse a, to determine to
dignarse - or de, to deign to
disculpar(se) de, to excuse one-
self for
LIST OF VERBS
279
dispensar de, to excuse from
disponer(se) a, to get ready, pre-
pare to
disuadir de, to dissuade from
divertirse en, con or ger., to amuse
oneself by or with
dudar -, to doubt; — en, to hesi-
tate to
echar(se) a, to begin to
elegir -, to choose to
empefiarse en, to insist on
empezar a, to begin to
encargarse de, to undertake to
ensefiar a, to teach to
entrar a, to enter on, begin to
entretener(se) a or ger., to enter-
tain oneself by or with
enviar a, to send to
eqmvocarse en, to be mistaken in
escuchar -, to listen to
esforzar(se) a, en, or per, to at-
tempt, endeavor to
esmerarse en, to take pains in
esperar -, to hope to
estar para, to be about to; — per,
to be inclined to
evitar -, to avoid
excitar a, to excite to
excusar(se) de, to excuse (one-
self) from
exhortar a, to exhort to
exponer(se) a, to expose (oneself)
to
fastidiar(se) de, to weary, be
weary of
fatigar(se) de, to tire, be tired of
felicitar(se) de, to congratulate
(oneself) on
fijarse en, to pay attention to
fingir -, to pretend to
forzar a, to force to
gozar(se) de, to enjoy; — (se) en,
or ger., to take pleasm-e in
guardarse de, to guard against
haber de, to have to
habituaT(se) a, to accustom one-
(self) to
hacer -, to make, have; — per,
to try to
hartarse de, to be sated with
humillar(se) a, to hmnihate (one-
self) to
imaginarse -, to imagine
impedir -, to prevent, hinder
impeler a, to impel to
incitar a, to incite to
inclinar a, to induce to; — se a,
to be inclined to
incomodarse de, to be annoyed
at; — per, to put oneself out to
indignarse de, to be indignant at
inducir a, to induce to
insistir en, to insist on
inspirar a, to inspire to
intentar -, to try, attempt
invitar a, to invite to
ir a, to go to
jactarse de, to boast of
jurat -, to swear to
justificar(se) de, to justify (one-
self) for
librar de, to free from
limitar(se) a, to limit (oneself) to
lograr -, to succeed in
Uegar a, to come to, succeed in
280
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
mandar -, to command, have; —
a, to send to
matarse per, to try hard to
meditar en, to meditate upon
merecer -, to deserve to
meterse a, to midertake to
mezclarse en, to take part in
mirar -, to look at, watch
morirse per, to be dying to
necesitar -, to need, want to
negar -, to deny; — se a, to de-
cline, refuse to
obligar(se) a, to oblige (oneself) to
obstinarse en, to persist in
ocupar(se) en, to busy (oneself)
with
odiar -, to hate to
ofrecer(se) -, to offer, promise to;
— (se) a, to offer to
ofr -, to hear
olvidar -, to forget to; — (se) de,
to forget
oponerse a, to be opposed to
ordenar -, to order to
pararse a, to stop to
parecer -, to seem to
particularizarse en, to specialize in
pasar a, to proceed, pass to
pensar -, to intend to; . — en, to
think of
permitir -, to permit to
perseverar en, to persevere in
persistir en, to persist in
persuadir(se) a, to persuade (one-
self) to
poder -, can, may, to be able to
poner a, to put to; — se a, to
begin to
preciarse de, to boast of
pref erir -, to prefer to
preparar(se) a, to prepare, make
ready to
presumir -, to presume to
pretender -, to claim, try to
principiar a, to begin to
privar(se) de, to deprive, be de-
prived of
probar a, to try to
proceder a, to proceed to
procurar -, to try to
prohibir -, to forbid
prometer -, to promise to
proponer -, to propose, purpose to
provocar a, to provoke to
pugnar per, to strive, struggle to
quedar(se) a, to remain to; — en,
to agree to; — por, to remain
to (be . . .)
quejarse de, to complain of
querer -, to wish to
rabiar per, to be crazy to
recelarse -, to fear
recomendar -, to reconamend to
reconocer -, to acknowledge, con-
fess to
recordar -, to remember
recrear(se) en or ger., to divert
(oneself) by
reducir(se) a, to bring (oneself) to
rehusar(se) - or a, to refuse to
renimciar a, to renoxmce
resignarse a, to resign oneself,
submit to
resistirse a, to resist
resolver(se), a to resolve, decide
to
reventar por, to be bursting to
LIST OF VERBS
281
saber -, to know how, be able to,
can
saJir a, to go {or come) out to
sentarse a, to sit down to
sentir -, to regret, be sorry to
ser de, to be
servirse -, to please, be so kind
as to
sobresalir en, to excel in
solar -, to be wont, used to
soltar a, to start to
someter(se) a, to submit (one-
self) to
soSar con, to dream of
sospechar de, to suspect of
sostener -, to maintain, aflfirm
subir a, to go up to
sugerir -, to suggest
tardar en, to delay, be long in
temer -, to fear to
terminar en, to end by
tomar a, to return to; to . , .
again
tratar de, to try to
urgir a, to urge to
vacilar en, to hesitate to
valerse de, to avail oneself of
venir a, to come to; — de, to
come from, have just
ver -, to see
volar a, to fly to
volver a, to return to; to . , .
again
GENERAL VOCABULARY
SPANISH-ENGLISH
a, to, at ; from,
el abogado, lawyer, attorney.
abonar, to credit.
a bordo (de), aboard.
abril m., April.
abrir §280, to open,
el abuelo, la — a, grandfather,
grandmother; los abuelos,
grandparents.
acA, here.
acabar, to finish; yaacabe, I
have finished, I'm done; se
acab6, it's finished or done;
acaba (acababa) de hablar,
he has (had) just spoken;
acabd de hablar, he finished
speaking,
el aceite, oil.
aceptar, to accept.
acertadamente, accurately.
aclarar, to make clear,
la acogida, reception.
acompaiiar, to accompany, go
with, come with.
aconsejar, to advise.
acontecer, to happen.
acordarse (ue) de, to remem-
ber; si mal no me acuerdo,
if I remember rightly.
acostar (ue), to lay down, put
to bed; — se, to Ue down, go
to bed.
acostumbrado, -a, (a), used
(to),
el acrdbata, la — , acrobat,
la actriz, actress.
actual, present, instant,
acudir, to come (to), go (to),
hasten to.
acusar, to acknowledge,
el acusativo, accusative.
ademfis, moreover, besides; —
de, besides, in addition to.
adentro, within, inside.
adi6s, goodbye, farewell,
el adjetivo, adjective.
adjunto, -a adj., adjunto adv.,
enclosed, herewith.
la admiracifin, exclamation, ad-
miration, wonder; signo de
— , exclamation mark,
adoptar, to adopt.
adquerir (ie), to acquire,
el adverbio, adverb,
las advertencias, instructions.
advertir (ie), to note; advier-
tase, note.
afectisimo, most afifection-
ateOy).
af ectuosamente, afifectionately.
aficionado, -a (a), fond (of),
afmo: see afectlsimo.
el agente, agent.
agitado, -a, agitated, rough {as
the sea).
agitar, to shake, wave,
agosto m., August,
agradable, pleasant, agreeable,
agradecer, to be grateful for;
agradecido, -a, grateful,
obliged,
agregar, to add.
el agua /., water.
at^seq asi^ra o;^ '(b) asjBJnsaidB
•UJB9I o% 'japuajdB
•JOA'BJ
moX •b^ibo — ns ca^qBtoaidB
•ua'^joqs 0!j 'jedooodB
•J95{JOM
pjBq B SI aq * — sa ii^uaS
-qrp 'snoiJ'^snpTn *b- 'opBoqdB
•a'^T'^add'B 'ojiiadB p
•^UBA 'joj Suoj 'JOJ
a(^T!}add'B ub aA'eq <y\ 'jaoajadB
•iC^pj'Bq 'jC^aoj'Bos 'sBuadB
•auTBuXiTui'Bj'aui'BUJns'opTnadB p
•xoq aoigo
•(soaxioo ap) opB^BdB p
•jBadd'B (y\ 'jaoaiBdB
•pjBoqapis 'jopBJBdB p
*OAanTi ogy 'J'^a^ 'o^b p
•pp'B O:} 'jTpBUB
•(juauiasT'jjaAp'B 'oputiuB p
•aounouu'B o(j 'gf'2§ JBpunxiB
•aOTTBApB UT *B- 'opBdlOpUB
•aiojaq '-fuoo anb — '-dajd
op — I (am? m) ajojaq 'sa^iiB
•Smpaoaad 'jouajUB
•aiojaq pao^id 'b- 'ojsandajtiB
•ajoj
-oq aoB^d (y\ '992§ jauodajuB
•(avoid ui) ajojaq 'a^TiB
-^od
Ma^
•(^uapnfjs
•pn
-sfBaiq ((
•q
■SuTq:jj^i
Bun3p i
'■id IXui
'iCpoqaui'
fSurq-jjCir
•mo
•(pn
-po UOSJi
•JOJ -JTI
AHVinavooA ivna
284
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
arreglar, to arrange, pack (o
trunk).
la arroba, 25 pounds.
arrojar, to throw, cast; arroja
un saldo a mi favor, there
is a balance in my favor,
el articulo, article,
el artista, la — , artist.
asar, to roast.
ascender (ie) a, to amount to.
el ascensor, lift, elevator.
asegurar, to assure, insure.
asf, thus; — como, as well as.
el asiento, seat.
asistir, to be present (at), at-
tend.
asustar, to frighten.
la atencidn, attention.
atento, -a, devoted, courteous.
atravesar (ie), to cross, pass
through.
aiimentar, to increase.
aun, even; afin, still, yet.
aunque, although, even if.
el autom6vil, motor car, auto-
mobile,
el autor, la — a, author,
la avena, oats.
ayer, yesterday.
la azotea, flat roof,
el azficar, sugar.
azul, blue.
la azumbre, two quarts.
B
bajar(se), to aUght, descend.
bajo, -a, low.
el balc6n, balcony,
el banco, bench, bank,
el banquero, banker.
baflarse, to bathe, take a bath,
el bafio, bath, bathtub.
barato, -a, cheap.
el barrio, ward, psul; (of a city).
bastante adj., enough; adv.,
enough, rather.
bastardllla: la letra — , italics,
la bateria de cocina, cooking
utensils,
el batU, trunk.
el bautismo, baptism; nombre de
— , given or Christian name.
besar, to kiss,
la biblioteca, Ubrary.
la bicicleta, bicycle.
bien, well; o bien . . . o, either
... or.
el billete, ticket, note; — de ida
y vuelta, round-trip ticket;
— sencillo, one-way ticket,
el bizcocho, biscuit, " cracker."
bianco, -a, white,
la blusa, blouse,
la boda, marriage,
el boletero (<Spon. Am.), ticket
agent.
el boleto (Span. Am.), ticket.
la bolsa, purse, pocket,
el bolsillo, p>ocket.
la bondad, kindness, goodness,
bonito, -a, pretty.
borrar, to erase,
el borrdn, blot,
la bota, boot, high shoe; — de
montar, riding boot,
la botella, bottle,
el botdn, button,
el brasero, brazier,
el Brasil, Brazil,
el brazo, arm.
breve, short.
bueno, -a, good; estar — , to
be well.
el buque, boat, vessel,
burlarse de, to make fun of,
mock.
buscar, to seek, look for; ir a
— , to go and get.
la butaca, easy chair, seat (in
" orchestra " or " dress circle "
of theater).
el buz6n, letter box.
•pajJJBUI 'b- 'op'BSBO
•auioq '^■e * — U9 faraoq
♦ — V [asnoq-Smpa'Boq 'S9p
•aot
-adsanq op — fao^o !^sod
*S03XI03 ap — fasnoq «bsbo 'q
•3u
•J8!J!J9| *B;JB0 Bl
•^JTP<
•ja-^uadrBo 'ojajmireo p
•9m|0J'BQ 'BunojBO
•9Aisu8dxa 'j^ap *b- 'ojbo
•^■Baq
•uo'^'^nra
•£
* — ap aiUBO fda9t[9 'ojaxuBO p
•jaaq *(saj ap)
BOBA ap — fqsag '^■Baut 'aiuBO ■Bi
•saiJBqQ 'soiJBO
aajgoo 'a
'^ad
o^ 's — jaoBq fuoT'joajjB 'oguBO p
•sX'Bp 0^
•pBO^ 'aSjBqo o'^ 'jbSjbo
lauo qoi
•j^o'E^ o(^ *ap jaoajBO
qBoojBqo 'Bijaj ap
•i— flBoo *BjpaTd ap — lupqjBO p
•aojoj 'ja'^o'Bj'Bqo *japf jbo p
xoq aq
•aOBJ *BJBO 'B^
^BfBO B
•jQ'^d'Bqo 'opi^idBO p
fpauTBi^u
•UTB'^d'BO 'npidBO p
•iC-jpcdBO 'pBppBdBO B^
9^J fo)
•aaSuTs *B — ^i 'jo%WBO p
•Xi^i'^trenb '(nmouTB *pBpt;ireo 'b^
-pu *Bni
•MOJO 'SmS 0% 'jBJtTBO
'JJ
•maod 'Suos 'jbjitbo p
•pajT^ 'B- 'OpBSUBD
9SZ
AHvinavooA ^vHa
286
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
el centimo, centime {100 — s =
1 peseta),
el centre, center.
cepillar, to brush,
el cepillo, brush; — de dientes,
toothbrush.
cerca adv., near; — de pre-p.,
near, nearly, about,
la ceremonia, ceremony,
la cerilla, wax match.
cerrar (ie), to close, shut, bruig
{an account) up to.
certificar, to register (a letter,
package, etc.).
ciego, -a, blind,
el cielo, sky.
el cinematografo (" cine "), mov-
ing pictures, "movies."
circunscrito, -a, limited, cir-
cumscribed.
citar, to quote, mention,
la ciudad, city, Garge) town,
la claridad, clearness.
claro, -a, clear, bright,
la clase, class, kind, classroom;
— de espafiol, Spanish class.
cl&sico, -a, classic,
la clausula, clause,
el clima, climate.
cobrar, to collect (a biU), cash
(a check).
el cobre, copper.
cocer (ue), to bake, boil {food).
la cocina, kitchen, cooking; —
econ6mica, modem iron
kitchen range.
el cocinero, la — a, cook.
el coche, carriage, coach; —
cama ( — dormitorio), sleep-
ing car; — comedor, dining
car; ir (pasearse) en — , to
drive,
coger, to catch.
la coIecci6n, collection,
la colocaci6n, position,
colocar, to place.
Col6n, Colianbus.
el color, color,
la comedia, play, comedy,
el comedor, dining room,
comer, to eat, dine; dar de — ,
to feed,
el comercio, commerce, business,
el cometa, comet,
la comida, (prepared) food, meal,
dinner,
las comillas, quotation marks.
como, as, about; ic6mo? how?
la c6moda, chest of drawers,
"chiffonier."
la comodidad, convenience,
comodo, -a, comfortable, con-
venient,
la compaflia, company,
la comparaci6n, comparison,
el compartimiento, compartment.
complementario, -a, {iised as)
object.
el complemento, complement, ob-
ject.
completar, to complete,
completo, -a, complete,
componer §265, to compose;
— se de, to be composed of.
la compra, purchase,
comprar, to buy.
comprender, to comprehend,
include,
el compromise, engagement,
compuesto, -a {p.p. of com-
poner), compound,
con, with.
conceder, to give, offer,
concertar (ie), to agree,
la concordancia, agreement.
concordar (ue), to agree,
concrete, -a, concrete,
la cenf onnidad, conformity, ap-
proval.
cengelarse, to freeze,
la cenjugaci6n, conjugation,
conmige, with me.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
287
conocer, to know, be ac-
quainted with, make the
acquaintance of, meet.
el conocido, la — a, acquaint-
ance.
conservar, to retain, keep.
consigo, with himself, herself,
etc.
conslstir en, to consist of.
la consonante, consonant.
constante, consistent, regu-
larly recurring.
la construcci6n, order {of words
in a sentence).
construir, to build, make, con-
strue, use (with).
contado: al — , for cash.
contar (ue), to count; — con,
to count on, be assured
{that).
contestar, to answer,
el contexto, context.
contigo, with thee,
la continuacidn, continuation.
continuar §243, to continue.
contra, against; per — , against
you (your account).
contradicho, -a, contradicted,
offset.
contrario, contrary; al — , por
el — , on the contrary, on
the other hand.
conveniente, suitable, well.
convenir §264, to be proper,
la corbata, cravat, (neck) tie.
cordialmente, cordially,
el corral, yard.
correctamente, correctly.
el correo, mail; casa de — s, post
office.
correr, to run.
corresponder, to correspond,
repay.
corriente, cvurent, present
(month), instant, usual, of
every day.
el cortaplumas, (pen)knife.
cortar, to cut.
la Corte, Court.
cortes, polite, courteous,
corto, -a, short,
la cosa, thing, matter ; — de, a
matter of, about.
costar (ue), to cost.
crecer, to grow,
el credito, credit.
creer, to believe, think ; jya lo
creo! I should say so ! [ant.
el criado, la — a, (domestic) serv-
la crisis, crisis.
Crist6bal, Christopher,
critico, -a, critical,
el cuademo, notebook, exercise
book,
el cuadrado, square; cuadrado,
-a, square,
el cuadro, picture.
cual, which; el (la, lo) — , los
(las) — es, who (whom),
which; cual interrog., which,
la cualidad, quaUty.
cual(es)quier(a), any(one) at
all, whatever.
cuando, when; cuiindo inter-
rog., when,
cuanto, -a, all who, all that;
en — a, with regard to;
cuinto, -a interrog., how
much (many).
la cuarta (= J vara), 8 inches,
el cuartillo, pint.
el cuarto, room; — de baflo,
bathroom.
cubico, -a, cubic,
la cubierta, deck {of a ship).
cubierto, p.p. of cubrir.
cubrir §280, to cover,
la cuchara, spoon,
la cucharadita, teaspoonful.
la cucharita, teasp>oon.
el cuchillo, knife,
el cuello, neck, collar.
288
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
la cuenta, account, bill; a — , on
account,
el cuero, hide, leather,
el cuidado, care; tango — , I am
careful; itenga Vd. — 1 look
out! pierda Vd. — , do not
worry.
la culpa, fault; no es vaia. la — , it
is not my fault; Vd. tiene la
— , it is your fault.
cultivar, to cultivate, grow.
cumplir, to fulfil; — ocho alios,
to be eight years old.
el cura, parish priest,
el oiTso, school or college year,
cuyo, -a, whose.
Ch
el chaleco, waistcoat, vest.
el chanclo, rubber overshoe,
"golosh."
la chaqueta, boy's coat, jacket,
el cheque, check, draft.
chico, -a, small, httle.
el chicharo (Span. Am.), pea.
chileno, -a, Chilean,
la chimenea, fireplace,
el chocolate, chocolate.
da, gives.
dado que, granted that.
dar §263, to give; — a, to
face; da la tma (dan las dos),
it is striking one (two) ; — de
comer, to feed; — a conocer,
to make known,
el dativo, dative.
de, of, from, by, than.
debajo de, below, vmder.
deber, to owe, must; debiera,
should, ought to; debe,
debit; — de, must {accord-
ing to opinion) ; esto se debe
a que, this is due to the fact
that.
debil, weak,
el decimetro, decimeter,
decir §267, to say, tell; querer
— , to mean,
el dedal, thimble.
deducir, to deduce,
definido, -a, definite,
dejar, to let, allow; — de, to
stop; no — de, not to fail to.
delante de, before.
dem&s, rest, others; per lo — f
otherwise.
demostrativo, -a, demonstra-
tive.
el departamento, department,
compartment,
el dependiente, clerk.
derecho, -a adj., straight,
right; derecho adv., straight
(ahead).
desagradable, impleasant, dis-
agreeable.
desaparecer, to disappear,
desatar, to untie.
desajTimar, to breakfast.
el desajruno, (early) breakfast.
descansar, to rest.
el descanso, rest.
descoser, to rip.
descubrir §280, to discover,
el descuento, discount.
desde, since, from; — que,
from the time when, since;
— luego, at once,
desear, to desire,
el deseo, desire, wish,
la desinencia, ending.
desocupado, -a, unoccupied,
el despacho, office.
despedirse (i), to take leave,
despertarse (ie), to wake up,
awaken,
despues, afterwards, since; —
de, — que, after.
detaUar, to itemize,
detr&s de, behind.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
289
ddia, day; buenos — s, good
day, good morning; al — ,
daily.
diario, -a, daily.
diciembre m., December,
dicho (p.p. of decir), said;
major — , rather,
el diente, tooth,
la dieta, diet.
diferente, different. >,
dificil, difficult, hard,
la dificultad, difficulty,
el digito, digit,
el dinero, money,
el diploma, diploma,
la direcci6n, direction, address,
el director, la — a, director, prin-
cipal,
dirigir, to direct, address; — se
(a), to make one's way (to),
go (to).
dispensar, to give, grant, ex-
cuse,
la distancia, distance.
distinto, -a, several, distinct,
divertir (ie), to amuse; — se, to
enjoy oneself; — se con, to
enjoy.
dividir, to divide,
doblar, to double, turn (a
comer).
la docena, dozen,
el dfilar, doUar {of U. S. A.).
el dolor, pain, sorrow; — de ca-
beza, headache,
el domicilio, residence,
el domingo, Sunday.
don (dofia), Mr. (Mrs.).
donde, where; d6nde interrog.,
where,
dormir, to sleep; — se, to go to
sleep,
el dormitorio, bedroom,
el dorso, back {of check).
dos, two; los — , both,
la dosis, dose.
el dril, duck (cloth),
la duda, doubt.
dudar, to doubt,
el duefio, owner.
durante, during.
durar, to last, endure.
duro, -a, hard; el dure, dollar
(in gold or silver).
£
e, and.
echar, to throw, cast, put,
pour; — en el buzdn, al co-
rreo, to post; una gallina
est& echada, a hen is sitting.
la edicidn, edition.
el edificio, building.
editorial, publishing.
efectivo: hacer — , to cash (a
check for someone).
efectuar §243, to effect, make,
la ejecucidn, execution, progress.
ejecutar, to execute, fill {an
order).
el ejemplar, copy {of a book, etc.).
el ejemplo, example, instance,
el ejercicio, exercise.
electrico, -a, electric.
embalar, to pack.
Emilia, Emily.
empaquetar, to pack.
empezar (ie), to begin.
emplear, to use, employ,
el empleo, employment, use.
en, in, into, on.
enclitico, -a, enclitic, attached
to a preceding word.
encoger(se), to shrink.
encontrar (ue), to meet, en-
counter.
encuademar, to bind.
endosar, to endorse.
el enemigo, la — a, enemy.
enero, m., January.
enfadarse, to get angry.
enf&tico, -a, emphatic.
290
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
la enfermedad, illness.
enfermo, -a, ill, sick; el en-
f ermo, la — a, the patient.
enfrente de, in front of, before.
engailar, to deceive.
enjugar, to wipe, dry.
el enlace, union, marriage.
enojarse, to get angry; enojado
con, angry with.
Enrique, Henry.
la ensalada, salad.
en segiuda: see seguida.
enseflar, to teach, show.
entender (ie), to understand.
entero, -a, entire.
entonces, then.
la entrada, entrance, admission.
entrar en (o a), to enter (into),
go (into), come (into).
entre, between, among.
entregar, to hand, deliver.
enviar §243, to send.
el en^o, shipment {of goods).
equivalente, equivalent.
equivaler §273, to be equiva-
lent.
equivocarse, to be mistaken.
errar (ye-) §247, 1, to err,
la escalera, stairs, stairway.
escoger, to choose, select.
escribir §280, to write.
escrito {irr. p.p. of escribir),
written.
el escritorio, writing desk.
escuchai, to listen.
la escuela, school,
el espacio, space.
Espafla/., Spain.
el espaiiol, la — a, Spaniard;
Spanish woman; espaflol,
— ola, Spanish.
el espejo, mirror, looking-glass,
la espera, expectation.
esperar, to hope, wait,
espeso, -a, thick.
el esposo, la — a, husband, wife.
la espuela, spur.
la esquina, corner; las cuatro — s,
{game of) puss-in-a^corner.
la estacidn, season, station,
el estado, state; Estados Unidos,
United States.
estad(o)unidense, of the United
Staties, American,
la estampilla, stamp.
estar §260, to be.
el este, east.
estimable, esteemed.
estrechar, to press, clasp.
estrenar, to jjerform or give (a
play, etc.) for the first time,
el estribor, starboard (= right).
estudiar §243, to study,
la estufa, stove.
etc. = etcetera,
la etiqueta, etiquette; traje de — f
evening clothes, "dress"
suit.
evitar, to avoid.
exacto, -a, exact, correct.
excelente, excellent.
ezcepto, except.
exceptuar §243, to except.
excusar, to excuse.
exigir, to demand, insist on.
la expedicidn, sending, shipping.
explicar, to explain.
expreso, -a, express.
el extracto, extract, summary.
F
fficil, easy,
la factura, bill.
lafalta, lack, mistake; me hace
— , I lack, need,
f altar, to lack; le falta, he lacks;
poco faltd para que se
cayera, he almost fell,
la familia, family,
la fanega, IJ bushels; — de
tierra, 1| acres.
febrero to., February.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
291
la fecha, date.
f echar, to date.
Felipe, Philip.
feliz, happy.
femenino, -a, feminine.
feo, -a, homely, ugly.
Fernando, Ferdinand,
el f errocarril, railway,
la fiebre, fever,
el fieltro, felt.
figurarse, to seem, app>ear.
fijamente, with certainty,
la fila, row.
la firma, signature.
firmar, to sign.
flexible, soft, flexible,
la flor, flower,
el fog6n, fireplace
fonetico, -a, phonetic.
formular, to formulate,
el f6sforo, match,
el frac, evening coat, "dress"
coat.
elfrances, la francesa, French-
man, French woman; fian-
ces, -esa, French.
Francisco, Francis; — a, Fran-
franco (-a) de porte, postage
prepaid.
la frase, phrase, sentence,
la frazada, blanket.
fregar (ie), to scour {pots, etc.),
scrub {floors).
el frente, front; la — , forehead.
fresco, -a, fresh, cool,
el frio, cold; tengo — , I am cold;
hace — , it is cold; frio, -a,
cold,
frito, -a {irr. p.p. ofbeic), fried.
la(s) fruta(s), fruit.
fuerte, strong,
la f imci6n, performance.
funda (de almohada), (pillow)
case.
future, -a, futiu*e.
la galeria, gallery, balcony, ve-
randa.
la gallina, hen.
el ganadero, cattle raiser, stock-
man.
ganar, to earn, win.
ganas: tengo — de, I long
to.
el gas, gas.
gastar, to spend, use up, take,
el gatito, la — a, kitten.
el genero, gender, goods.
el genitivo, genitive.
la gente, people.
la geografia, geography.
girar, to revolve.
el giro, order, draft; — postal,
post-office money order,
gordo, -a, stout, fat.
la gorra, cap.
gracias, thanks, thank you.
el grado, degree.
grafico, -a, graphic, written,
la gramitica, granamar.
el gramo, gramme.
grande, large, big, great,
el grano, grain.
grato, -a, pleasing, kind,
griego, -a, Greek,
el grueso, bulk, thickness; grue-
so, -a, bulky, thick.
el guante, glove.
guardar, to keep; — cama, to
stay in bed.
la guayaba, guava.
la guerra, war.
el guia, guide,
el gxiisante, pea.
guisar, to cook.
gustar, to please; me gusta, I
like,
el gusto, taste, pleasure; tener
buen — , to have (a) good
taste.
292
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
la Habana, Havana.
haber §257, to have, there . . .
be; hay, there is (are); hay
que, one must; ^que hay?
what is the matter?
la habitacidn, suite of rooms,
room,
el habitante, inhabitant.
hablar, to speak.
el hacendado, planter, farmer,
hacer §266, to do, make; —
frio (calor), to be cold,
(warm) ; — el haul, to pack
the trunk; — ejercicio, to
take exercise; hace echo dias,
a week ago; higame Vd. el
favor de, please.
la hacienda, large farm, planta-
tion,
el hacha /., axe.
hallar, to find; me hallo mejor,
I am better.
d hambre /., hunger; tengo — ,
I am himgry.
hasta, till, to; — que, imtil.
hay: see haber.
la hectdrea, hectare (= abo^U 2\
acres).
el hecho, act, fact.
el henoano, la — a, brother, sister,
hermoso, -a, handsome.
hervir (ie), to boil,
el hierro, iron.
el hijo, la — a, son, daughter; los
hijos, children (= sons and
daughters).
el hilo, thread; (fine) Unen.
hipotetico, -a, hypothetic.
hlspanoamericano,-a, Spanish-
American,
la historia, history, story.
hist6rico, -a, historic (al).
hizo, pret. of hacer.
la hoja, leaf.
el hombre, man.
hondo, -a, deep,
el hongo, "derby" hat, "bowler."
la hora, hour; ique — es? what
time (o'clock) is it? es — de,
it is time to (for),
el homo, oven,
hoy, to-day.
la huerta, garden,
el huesped, la huespeda, guest;
casa de — es, boarding house,
el huevo, egg.
huir, to flee,
el hule {Mex.), rubber.
identificar, to identify,
el idioma, language,
la iglesia, church.
igual, equal.
igualmente, equally.
ilustrar, to illustrate,
el imperative, imperative.
imperfecto, -a, imperfect.
implicar, to imply, denote,
la importancia, importance.
importante, important.
importar, to be important,
amount to.
el importe, amount, cost,
los impresos, printed matter.
inclinarse, to bow, be inclined.
incluir, to include.
el inconveniente, impropriety; si
Vd. tiene — en hacerlo, if
you have any objection to
doing so.
indefinido, -a, indefinite.
indicar, to point out, indicate,
el indicative, indicative.
indio, -a, Indian,
el individuo, individual, member,
el infinitivo, infinitive.
infinito, -a, infinite.
la inflexi6n, inflection,
Inglaterra/., England.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
293
el ingles, la inglesa, Englishman,
Englishwoman; ingles, -esa,
English.
inmortal, immortal.
instruir, to instruct.
inteligente, intelligent.
interesante, interesting.
interrogativo, -a, interrogative.
Ultimo, -a, intimate.
invertido, -a, inverted,
el inviemo, winter,
la invitaci6n, invitation.
invitar, to invite.
ir §261, to go; — creciendo,
to be growing.
Isabel, Elizabeth, Isabel.
Italia/., Italy.
italiano, -a, ItaUan.
izquierdo, -a, left.
el jab6n, soap.
el Jap6n, Japan.
el jardin, flower garden.
el jarro, jug, "pitcher."
Juan, John.
Juanito, Johnny,
el jueves, Thursday.
jugar §249, to play; — a la
pelota, to play ball.
Julio m., July.
junio m., June.
juntar, to join,
la juventud, youth.
K
el kilo: see kilogramo.
el kilogramo, kilogramme (=
1,000 grammes or about 2
pounds).
el kil6metro, kilometer (= | Eng-
lish mile).
el labrador, (small) farmer, farm
laborer, farm "hand."
labrar, to till,
el lado, side,
el ladrUlo, brick,
el lago, lake,
la limpara, lamp,
la lana, wool; de — ^ woolen,
el lapiz, pencil.
largo, -a, long,
la listima, pity; es (una) — , it is
a pity, it is too bad.
lastimar, to hurt,
el lavandero, la — ^a, laundry-
man, laimdress.
lavar, to wash,
la leccidn, lesson,
la lectura, reading,
la leche, milk,
la lechuga, lettuce.
leer, to read,
la legua, league (= about 3 miles
or 5 kilometers).
la legimibre, vegetable.
la lengua, tongue, language,
la lefLa, firewood.
Le6n m., Leon {ancient king-
dom, now a part of the king-
dom of Spain).
la letra de cambio, bill of ex-
change.
levantar, to raise; — se, to
rise, get up.
la levita, coat.
la libra, pound.
la libreria, bookstore; — gen-
eral, publisher(s) and book-
seller (s).
ellibro, book; — de lectxira,
reading book, reader,
ligero, -a, Hght; swift.
limpiar, to clean,
limpio, -a, clean.
Undo, -a, pretty.
lalinea, Une; en — recta, in a
straight line.
liquido, -a, Uquid.
la lista, list, bill of fare.
294
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
la litera, berth.
la literatura, literature.
el litro, liter (o little more than a
quart).
lograr, to succeed (in).
la lona, canvas,
la longitud, length.
luego, soon, then; — que, as
soon as; hasta — , farewell
for a while; desde — , at
once,
el lugar, place, position; tener — ,
to take place.
Luis, Lewis, Louis,
el lujo, luxury; de — , de luxe,
elegant,
la lumbre, fire.
la luna, moon; hay (hace) — ^ the
moon is shining,
el lunes, Monday,
la luz, Ught.
LI
llamar, to call, knock, ring (the
door bell); me llamo, my
name is; ic6mo se llama Vd.?
what is your name?
la llave, key.
llegar, to arrive, come.
lleno, -a, full.
llevar, to carry, bring, wear.
llorar, to weep, cry.
llover (ue), to rain.
M
macho, male,
la madera, wood (for manufac-
ture, building, etc.).
la madre, mother,
el maiz, maize, Indian com.
mal, badly
la maleta, vaUse, (hand)bag.
male, -a, bad, poor (= bad);
estar — , to be ill.
la mamfi, mamma, mother.
mandar, to command, order,
send; — hacer alguna cosa,
to have something done,
el mando, command,
la manera, manner; de — que, so
as, so that.
la manga, sleeve,
la manif estacidn, statement,
manif estar (ie), to manifest,
inform, advise,
la mano, hand.
manso, -a, gentle, tame,
la manta, blanket,
la manteca, lard, butter (in
Spain) .
el mantel, tablecloth,
la manteqiulla, butter (in Span.
Am.), sweetened butter-
cake (in Spain).
la manzana, apple,
la mafiana, morning; per la — ,
in the morning; adv., to-
morrow; pasado — ^ the day
after to-morrow,
el mapa, map.
el mar, or la — , sea.
marcar, to mark,
marearse, to become seasick.
Maria, Mary.
el marido, husband,
el marinero, sailor,
el martes, Tuesday.
marzo m., March.
mas, but.
m&s, more, most, plus; no —
que, only, no more than,
masciilino, -a, mascuhne.
el material, material.
mayo m.. May.
mayor, greater, greatest; older,
oldest (of persons).
la mayoria, majority; — de, most,
la ma]rfiscula, capital letter,
la media, stocking, hose,
mediante, by means of.
la medlcina, medicine,
el medico, physician, doctor.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
295
la medida, measure.
medio, -a, half.
medir (i), to measure.
major, better, best.
mencionar, to mention,
manor, less, least; youoger,
youngest (of persons).
menos, less, least, minus; a — ■
que, unless; al — , por lo — ,
at least.
menudo: a — , often,
el mercado, market,
el mes, month.
la mesa, table, desk.
meter (an), to put (in or into),
metrico, -a, metric.
Mexico {or Mejico) m., Mex-
ico, City of Mexico.
el miado, fear; tango — , I am
frightened.
mientras: — que, while, as
long as.
el miercoles, Wednesday,
la milla, mile.
la minuscula, small letter, lower-
case letter.
el minuto, minute,
mirar, to look at.
mismo, -a, same, self,
la mitad, half, middle.
m/o = mi orden.
la moda, fashion; da — , in fash-
ion, fashionable,
el modo, manner, mode, mood,
way; de — que, so as, so
that; de dos — s, in two
ways.
molestar, to trouble,
la molestia, trouble,
el momento, moment; en este — ,
at this moment,
la moneda, coin.
monetario, -a, monetary.
montar, to ride; — a caballo,
to ride on horseback; — en
bicicleta, to ride a bicycle.
el monton, heap, pile,
el monumento, monmnent, im-
posing pubUc building,
morir (ue), to die.
el moro, Moor,
mortal, mortal.
mostrar (ua), to show,
el motivo, motive, object,
el mozo, servant-boy, waiter,
el muchacho, la — ^a, boy, girl;
los — s, children,
mucbisimo, -a adj., mucblsimo
adv., very much.
mucbo, -a, much (many), " a
lot of"; — adv., much, a
great deal, very; trabaja — ,
he works hard; me agrada
— , it pleases me greatly,
mudo, -a, dumb, mute,
el mueble, piece of furniture; loa
— s, fm-niture.
el muella, wharf, dock, pier,
la mujar, woman.
multipUcar, to multiply,
el mimdo, world.
murmurar, to gossip,
la musica, music,
la mutaciSn, change.
muy, very; — ... para, too
...to.
N
nacer, to be bom.
nada, nothing; no . . . — , not
. . . anything.
nadar, to swim.
nadie, no one, nobody; no . . .
— , not . . . anyone, not . . .
anybody,
la naranja, orange,
la nariz, nose,
la neblina, fog.
necesario, -a, necessary,
necesitar (de), to need,
la negaci6n, negation.
negar (ie), to deny.
296
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
negativo, -a, negative.
negro, -a, black.
nevar (ie), to snow.
ni, nor; ni . . . ni, neither . . .
nor.
el nido, ne$t.
la nieve, snow.
ningtino, -a, no, none; no . . .
— , not . . . any.
el niiio, la — a, small boy, small
girl; child; muy — , very
much of a child.
el niquel, nickel (metal).
no, no, not.
la noche, night, evening (after
dark); de — , at night; por
(en) la — , in the evening, at
night; esta — , to-night,
el nombre, name, noun.
norteamericano, -a, (North)
American,
la noticia, news (item) ; las — s,
news; ^cudndo tuvo Vd. — s
de el? when did you hear
from him last?
la novedad, novelty, news; no
hay — , all is well; sin — ,
without accident, all right.
noviembre m., November.
nublado, -a, cloudy, overcast.
nuevo, -a, new; ique hay de
— ? what is the news?
la nuez, (English) walnut,
el nflmero, number.
nunca, never.
o, or; o . . . o, o bien . . . o,
either ... or.
el objeto, object.
la obra, work (of literature, music,
art, etc.).
observar, to observe,
la ocasidn, occasion, opportunity,
occidental, western.
octubre m., October.
ocupado, -a, occupied, busy.
ocho, eight; — dias, a week,
el oeste, west.
ofender, to offend,
el oficial, officer.
ofrecer, to offer,
el oido, (inner) ear, hearing.
off §276, to hear.
ojald, would that, I wish he
(she, etc.) would,
el ojo, eye.
la ola, wave.
oler (hue-) §247, 2, to smell,
el olfato, sense of smell,
el olor, odor, smell.
olvidar, to forget; se me olvid6,
I forgot,
la olla, pot.
omitir, to omit,
la onza, ounce,
la 6pera, opera,
la oportunidad, opportimity.
la oraci6n, prayer, sentence,
el orden, order (= arrangement);
la — , order (for goods; or a
religious or military order),
command,
la oreja, ear.
el 6rgano, organ,
el ore, gold.
la ortograf la, spelling, orthog-
raphy.
ortografico, -a, orthographic,
la oruga, caterpillar,
el otoilo, autumn.
otorgar, to grant.
otro, -a, other, another,
la oveja, ewe, sheep.
Pablo, Paul,
el padre, father; los — s, parents.
pagar, to pay.
la pdgina, page,
el pago, payment,
el pais, country.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
297
la paja, straw.
el pfijaro, bird.
la palabra, word, speech.
el palco, box (in theater).
pdlido, -a, pale.
la pampa, plain, prairie,
el pan, bread,
el pantal6n, trousers,
el pafio, cloth,
el paiLuelo, handkerchief,
la papa (Span. Am.), potato,
el pap&, papa, father,
el papel, paper,
el paquete, package, parcel,
el par, pair.
para, for, in order to, to; —
que, in order that.
el parang6n, comparison.
parar, to stop.
parecer, to appear, stem; ique
le parece a Vd.? what do
you think about it? si le
parece a Vd., if you think
best.
la pared, wall.
la parte, part; la mayor — , most;
a, en, per todas — s, every-
where.
participar, to announce,
el participle, participle.
particular, especial, private.
partir (de), to leave, depart
(from), crack, spUt.
pasado, -a, past, last (= past).
el pasajero, la — a, passenger.
pasar, to pass, come in, go {to
the blackboard), spend {time).
pasearse, to walk, drive, or
ride for pleasure, stroll.
pasivo, -a, passive; en — a, in
the passive (voice).
la pasta, dough; — de guayaba,
guava marmalade,
la pata, foot {of an animM),
paw.
la patata {in Spain), potato.
el patio, (inner) courtyard, pit
{of theater).
patronimico, -a: nombre — o,
family name.
la paz, peace.
la pechera, (shirt) bosom, front,
el pedido, order {of goods).
pedir (i), to ask (for), request,
order.
Pedro, Peter.
peinar, to comb,
el pelo, hair.
pensar (ie), to think, intend.
pequefio, -a, little, small.
percibir, to perceive, collect,
el perd6n, pardon.
perdonar, to pardon, forgive.
perezoso, -a, indolent, lazy.
perfectamente, perfectly.
perfecto, -a, perfect,
el periodico, (news)paper.
permanecer, to remain.
permitir, to permit, let.
pero, but.
el perro, la — a, dog.
la persona, person,
la pesa, weight {with which to
weigh objects).
pesar, to weigh,
el pescado, fish {after being
caught).
pescar, to fish,
el peso, weight, dollar,
el petr61eo, coal oil, petrolemn,
"kerosene."
el pez, (Uving) fish,
el piano, piano,
el pie, foot, leg {of chair, etc.); ir
a — , to go afoot, walk,
la piedra, stone,
la pieza, piece, room,
la pila, baptismal font; el nombre
de — f Christian or given
name,
la pildora, pill,
la pimienta, pepper.
298
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
el piso, story, floor; — alto, upper
story; — bajo, ground floor.
la pizarra, slate, {slate) black-
board,
el placer, pleasure.
planchar, to iron,
el planeta, planet,
la planta, plant, sole {of foot).
la plata, silver,
el pl&tano, banana,
el plato, plate, dish,
la plaza, public square, market
place,
el plazo, time limit,
la pluma, feather, pen; — estilo-
gr&fica, foimtain pen.
la plumafuente, fountain pen.
el pluscuamperfecto, pluperfect,
pobre, poor.
poco, -a, Uttle, (pi.) feif, un —
de dinero, a Uttle money;
— o adv., Uttle.
poder §270, to be able, can,
no puedo menos de hacerlo,
I can't help doing it.
el poema, poem,
la poesia, poetry, poem,
el polvo, dust; — s dentifiicos, o
— s para los dientes, tooth-
powder,
ponderal, of weight.
poner §265, to put, put on,
set, lay (eggs); — se, to be-
come, turn.
popularmente, popularly.
por, for, by, through, "per";
i — que? why?
porque, because, for.
el portamonedas, purse, pocket-
book.
el porte, transportation, postage.
poseer, to possess.
posesivo, -a, possessive.
posible, possible.
pospuesto, -a, placed after,
los postres, dessert.
ppdo = prdximo pasado (see
pr6ximo).
preceder, to precede,
el precio, price.
preciso, -a, necessary.
preferir (ie), to prefer,
la pregunta, question.
pregimtar, to ask (a question).
el premie, prize.
la prenda de vestir, article of
clothing.
preparar, to prepare,
la preposicidn, preposition,
presentar, to present, offer,
presente, present; con la —
(carta), herewith,
el presidente, president.
prestar, to lend, afford, show;
pedir (i) prestado, to ask the
loan of, borrow; tomar pres-
tado, to borrow; — atencidn,
to pay attention,
el preterito, preterite,
la primavera, spring.
el primo, la — a, cousin; primo
hermano, first cousin,
principal, main, principal,
principiar §243, to begin,
privar, to deprive (of),
la probabiUdad, probabiUty.
procurar, to attempt, try.
producir, to produce, create,
el producto, product,
el profesor, la — a, teacher, pro-
fessor,
la profimdidad, depth,
el programa, program.
prohibir, to forbid, prohibit,
prometer, to promise,
el pronombre, pronoun.
pronto, soon,
la propina, tip, gratuity.
propio, -a, proper, own; — de,
pecuUar to.
pros6dico, -a: acento — o^
vocal stress.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
299
pr6zimo, -a, next, approach-
ing; — pasado, last (month),
publicar, to publish,
la puerta, door.
pues, well, as, well then, for.
la pulgada, inch,
el pulse, pulse.
el punto, point, period; — de ad-
niiraci6n, exclamation mark;
— de interrogacidn, in-
terrogation mark; de — ,
promptly, exactly.
el puflo, fist; cuff (0/ sleeve).
pure, -a, pure.
Q. B. S. M. (P.), o Q. S. M.
(P.) B. = que besa su mano
(sus pies), o que su mano
(sus pies) besa.
Q. E. S. M. = que estrecha su
mano.
que conj., that, for, than; con-
— , so that, so then.
que rel. pron., that, who
(whom), which; el (la, lo,
Ids, las) — , who (whom),
which,
ique? what? ia — ? ^para — ?
ipor — ? why? I — ! what,
what a, how!
quebrar (ie), to break; numero
quebrado, fraction.
quedar(se), to remain; — se
con alguna cosa, to keep
something.
quemar, to bum.
querer §271, to wish, want;
— a, to be fond of, like (a
person) ; yo quisiera, I should
hke to, I should be glad to;
— decir, to mean.
querido, -a, dear, beloved.
el queso, cheese.
quien, -es, quien, -es interrog.,
who (whom) ; de quien, whose.
quien (es)quiera, who(m)ever,
who(m)soever,
quince, fifteen; — dias, a fort-
night, two weeks.
el quintal, hundredweight.
quitar, to take off, take away,
strike off.
el radical, stem {of a word).
la raiz, root.
ripido, -a, rapid, express
(train).
la raya, dash,
la raza, race, breed,
el real, " nickel " {in Spain = S5
centimes), shilling, " bit " {in
Mexico, etc. = J^^ centavos).
real, royal,
recibir, to receive,
el recibo, receipt, reception.
recitar, to recite,
el recuerdo, reminder, souvenir;
los — s, regards.
reducido, -a, low {price).
reducir, to reduce.
reexpedir, to forward; a — , to
be forwarded, please forward,
referirse, to refer,
reflexivo, -a, reflexive,
el regimen, government.
regit (i), to govern, take,
la regla, rule; por — general, as a
rule.
regular, regular, ordinary,
"fan-."
reiterar, to reiterate, repeat,
el relampago, flash of hghtning;
los — s, lightning,
relampaguear, to Ughten.
religioso, -a, rehgious.
el reloj, clock, watch; — de mesa,
de pared, clock; — de bol-
siUo, watch.
remediar §243, to help, remedy,
remedio, remedy, medicine.
300
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
el remendar (ie), to mend,
la remesa, remittance.
remitir, to remit, send,
reparar, to repair.
repasar, to review,
repetir (i), to repeat,
requerir (ie), to require,
la res, quadruped, {Span. Am.)
cattle.
d resfriado, cold (disease).
resfriarse, to catch cold,
el respaldo, back.
respecto de, with regard to.
el respeto, respect; los — s, re-
gards.
responder, to answer,
la respuesta, answer.
el restaurant, restaurant.
el resto, rest, remainder,
el resultado, result.
resultar, to result, become;
resiilta m&s barato, it is
cheaper,
el restunen, summary, r6smn6.
retirar, to retire, take out.
la reverencia, bow.
rico, -a, rich.
el rfo, river.
rogar (ue), to request.
rojo, -a, red.
romance, Romance (derived
from Latin).
romper, to break, tear.
laropa, clothes; — interior, un-
derclothes; — de cama, bed
linen,
roto, -a, torn.
el rubf, ruby,
rlistico, -a, rustic; en o a la
rdstica, vmbound, paper-
covered.
S. S. S. = su seguro servidor o
su segura servidora, your
faithful servant.
el sfibado, Saturday,
la sibana, sheet.
saber §268, to know, know
how to, can; a — , namely,
to wit; que yo sepa, so far
as I know.
sabroso, -a, savory; ser — , to
taste good.
sacar, to take out, draw (out),
get (a ticket), get (out),
hatch,
el saco, morning or business coat,
"sack" coat,
el sainete, farce,
la sal, salt.
la sala, room, drawing room; —
de recibo, reception room,
saldar, to balance, settle (an
accourd).
el saldo, balance (of account).
salir §274, to go out, come
out, leave, rise (as the sun);
-^ a la calle, to go out into
the street.
saltar, to jump (out), skip,
saludar, to salute, bow to.
salvo, except.
santo, -a, holy, saint,
el sastre, tailor.
la sastreria, tailor shop, " tai-
lor's."
la satisfaccidn, satisfaction.
sea (pres. subj. of ser): ya —
. . . o, whether it be . . . or.
secar, to dry.
seco, -a, dry.
la sed, thirst; tengo — ^ I am
thirsty,
la seda, silk.
la seguida, continuation; en — ,
next, then, immediately.
seguir (i), to follow, continue,
go on; — derecho, to go
straight ahead; ^que tal
sigue Vd.? how are you get-
ting on?
GENERAL VOCABULARY
301
segfin, according to.
segundo, -a, second,
seguro, -a, sure; su — servi-
dor, your faithful servant.
el seUo, stamp; — • de correo, —
postal, postage stamp,
la semana, week.
sentar (ie), to seat, set, fit;
— se, to seat oneself, be
seated, sit, sit down,
el sentido, sense.
sentir (ie), to feel, regret; me
siento debil, I feel weak.
sefialar, to point out, call at-
tention to, show, indicate,
el seiior, gentleman, sir, Mr.;
Seflor, Lord; la — a, lady,
madam, Mrs.; los — es,
gentlemen, ars, gentlemen
and ladies, Mr. and Mrs.;
muy — mio, my dear sir;
su — a madre de Vd., your
mother,
el seflorito, yoimg gentleman,
sir. Master; la seilorita,
yoimg lady, madam. Miss.
septiembre m., September.
set §259, to be; el — , being,
el servicio, service,
el servidor, la — ora, servant.
la servilleta, napkin.
servir (i), to serve; sirve bas-
tante bien, it does pretty
well; no sirve para nada, it
is good for nothing; — se, to
be pleased {to do something) ;
sirvase Vd., please; — se de,
to use; — de, to serve as.
Sevilla,/., Seville,
si, if, why, indeed,
si, yes, indeed.
siempre, always; — que, when-
ever, provided that,
la sierra, moimtain range, moun-
tains,
el siglo, century.
el significado, meaning, signifi-
cance,
el signo, sign, mark.
siguiente, following, next,
la silaba, syllable,
la silla, chair, saddle,
el sill6n, armchair.
simp&tico, -a, likable, pleasant,
charming.
simple, single, simple.
sin, without; — embargo, nev-
ertheless.
sine, but; no . . . — , only,
la sinopsis, synopsis, r6sum6.
el sitio, site, place,
el sobre, envelope.
sobre prep., on, upon.
sobrentenderse, to be imder-
stood {not expressed).
el sobrino, la — a, nephew,
niece,
el sol, sun, sunshine; hace — , the
sun is shining.
solo, — a, alone.
s61o, only,
la sombrereria, hat shop, hatter's,
el sombrerero, hatter, dealer in
hats.
el sombrero, hat.
el sonido, sound,
la sopa, soup.
soportar, to endin-e, support.
sordo, -a, deaf.
sorprender, to sm"prise.
el sotano, basement.
subido, -a, high.
subir, to go up, come up,
ascend, climb,
el subjxmtivo, subjunctive.
subordrnado, -a, subordinate,
dependent.
subrayar, to imderline.
subscribir, to subscribe, sign,
la subscripci6n, subscription.
substantivado, -a, substantive.
substituir, to replace.
302
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
suceder, to happen; — con, to
be true of.
sucesivamente, successively.
sucio, -a, dirty,
la suela, sole (0/ a shoe).
el suelo, ground, floor.
suelto, -a, loose, single.
sufrir, to suffer, undergo,
el sujeto, subject,
la suma, sum.
sumamente, greatly, exceed-
ingly,
la superficie, surface.
suplicar, to beg {a favor).
suponer §265, to suppose,
assume,
la supresi6n, suppression, omis-
sion.
supuesto: por — , of course,
el sur, south.
el surtido, supply, stock.
el tabaco, tobacco,
la tabla, board, plank,
la tablilla, tablet, shingle.
tal, such, such a; con — • que,
provided that; ique tal
(sigue)? how are you (get-
ting on)?
el tamaflo, size.
tambien, also, too.
tampoco, neither, nor; no (ni)
. . . — , not (nor) . . . either.
tan, so.
tanto(s), as (so) much (many);
en — que, while; otro — , the
same thing; tanto . . . como,
both ... as.
la tardanza, delay.
tardar, to delay; no tardara en
volver, it will not be long
before he returns.
la tarde, afternoon; por o en la — ,
in the afternoon; adv., late.
la tarifa, scale of prices, fare.
la tarjeta, card; — postal, post(al)
card; — de visita, visiting
card.
la taza, cup.
el te, tea.
el teatro, theater.
el techo, roof, ceiling.
el tejamani o tejamanil {Span.
Am.), (wooden) shingle,
telefonear, to telephone.
el telefono, telephone.
el telegrama, telegram.
el teldn, curtain {of theater).
el tema, theme, written exercise,
composition,
temer, to fear.
la temperatura, temperature.
el templo, temple, church,
temprano, early.
el tenedor, fork.
tener §258, to have; — que,
to have to, must; tengo frio
(calor, suefLo, etc.), I am cold
(warm, sleepy, etc.); ique
tiene Vd.? what is the mat-
ter with you? no tengo
nada, there is nothing the
matter with me.
Teresa, Theresa.
la terminacion, ending.
tenninar, to end, terminate.
el tennino, term, expression.
el termdmetro, thermometer.
el terreno, land.
tibio, -a, lukewarm.
el tiempo, time, tense, weather ;
mucho — , a long time.
la tienda, shop, store, [of scissors,
las tijeras, scissors ; unas — , a paii
la tinta, ink.
tinto, -a, red {of wine).
el tic, la — a, uncle, aimt.
el tiro, throw, pull; caballo de — ,
driving horse, draught horse.
la tiza, chalk.
la toalla, towel.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
303
el tocador, dressing-table, " dress-
er."
tocar, to touch, play (o vmsical
instrument).
todavia, yet, still.
todo, -a, all, every; n., every-
thing; — s Ids dias, every
day; per — , altogether.
tomar, to take,
el tomo, volume,
la tonelada, ton.
la tormenta, storm.
trabajar, to work,
el trabajo, work.
traducir §278, to translate.
traer §277, to bring,
la tragedia, tragedy.
traidor, -era, treacherous.
el traje, suit {of clothes).
tranquilo, -a, calm, tranquil,
el tranvia, street car, tramway.
tratar de, to try (to), refer (to),
la travesia, passage,
el tren, train,
el trigo, wheat.
trigueflo, -a, dark-complex-
ioned.
triste, sad, gloomy.
tronar (ue), to thunder.
el trueno, thimder.
u, or.
filtimo, -a, last (in a series).
la unidad, unity.
xinir, to join, unite,
la universidad, imiversity. •
uno, -a, one; — s, some.
usar, to use, wear, wear out.
iitil, useful.
la vaca, cow; came de — , beef,
las vacaciones, vacation (s).
valer §273, to be worth,
el valor, worth, courage.
vamos (pres. indie, and inv-
perat. of ir), we go, let us go.
el vapor, steam, steamboat,
la vara, yard (= 32 inches).
variable, variable, changeable,
la variaci6n, change, variation,
variar § 243, to vary; — de, to
change, vary in.
la variedad, variety; teatro de
— es, vaudeville theater,
varios, -as, several.
el vaso, (drinking-)glass.
el vecino, la — a, neighbor,
la vela, candle, sail,
vender, to sell.
venir §264, to come; la se-
mana que viene, next week.
la ventana, window.
ver §279, to see; vease, see.
el verano, summer.
verbigracia {Lot.), for instance,
el verbo, verb.
la verdad, truth; iao es verdad?
o iverdad? isn't it so? Jen
verdad que estoy cansadol
my, but I'm tired!
verdadero, -a, true.
verde, green,
la verdura, fresh (green) vege^
table.
verificarse, to be held, occur,
el vestido, dress; los — s, clothes,
vestirse (i), to dress (oneself).
la vez, time; tma — , once; dos
veces, twice; tres veces,
three times; a veces, algu-
nas veces, sometimes; en —
de, instead of; otra — , again;
de — en cuando, from time
to time; hacer las veces de,
to serve as; rara — , rarely,
el viaje, trip, voyage; de — , trav-
ehng.
el viajero, la — a, traveler, pas-
senger (on train).
la vida, life.
304
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
vie jo, -a, old.
el viento, wind,
el viemes, Friday.
vigilar, to watch over, guard,
el vigor, vigor,
el vinagre, vinegar,
el vino, wine.
la visita, visit.
visitar, to visit, call on.
la vista, sight. >
vistoso, -a, bright, showy,
vivir, to hve.
el vocablo, word,
el vocabulario, vocabulary,
la vocal, vowel,
el volumen, volume.
volver (ue) §245, 4, to turn, re-
turn; — a hacer alguna cosa,
to do something again; — se,
to become.
la voz, voice, word,
la vuelta, tiu*n, return; esti de — ,
he has returned, he is back;
a — de correo, by return
mail; dar la — , to turn; dar
una — , to make a turn, re-
volve,
vulgarmente, vulgarly.
Y
y, and.
ya, already, now, in due time,
indeed; ya . . . no, no . . .
longer, no . . . more; ya que,
since.
Z
el zaguSn, vestibule, passage-
way.
la zapateria, shoe shop, shoe
store.
el zapatero, shoemaker, dealer in
shoes,
la zapatilla, shpper.
el zapato, shoe; — de goma
(hule), rubber overshoe,
"golosh."
la zarzuela, operetta, musical
comedy.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
ENGLISH-SPANISH
able: be — , poder (ue).
aboard, a bordo (de).
about, cerca de, como, cosa de.
abundant, abundante; be — ,
abundar.
accept, aceptar.
accompany, acompanar.
according to, segiin.
account, cuenta.
accusative, acusativo.
acknowledge, acusar,
acquaintance, conocido, -a; make
the — of, conocer.
acquainted: be — with, conocer.
acre: If — s, fanega de tierra.
acrobat, el o la acr6bata.
actress, la actriz.
add, anadir.
address, la direcci6n.
adjective, adjetivo.
admiration, la admiracidn.
admission, entrada.
adopt, adoptar.
adoration, la adoraci6n.
advance : in — , anticipado, -a.
adverb, adverbio.
advertisement, anuncio.
advise, aconsejar.
affection, carino.
affectionately, afectuosamente;
most — , afectlsimo, -a.
afford, prestar.
afraid: be — , tener miedo.
after, despu6s de, despu^s que.
afternoon, la tarde; in the — , en o
por la tarde.
afterwards, despu^s.
again, otra vez; do something — ,
volver (ue) a hacer alguna cosa.
against, contra,
aged, anciano, -a.
agent, el agente; ticket — , agente
de billetes, boletero {Span. Am.).
agitated, agitado, -a.
""igo: a week — , hace echo dias.
agree, concertar (ie).
agreeable, agradable.
agreement, concordancia.
air, el aire.
alcove, alcoba.
alight, bajar(se).
all, todo, -a; — is well, no hay
novedad; — who, — that,
cuanto, -a.
allow, dejar, permitir.
almost, casi; he — fell, poco falt6
para que se cayera.
alone, solo, -a.
' already, ya.
also, tambi^n.
although, aunque.
altogether, por todo.
always, siempre.
American, americano, -a; {of U.
S. A.) norteamericano, -a, es-
tadounidense, yanqui.
among, entre.
amount, el importe, la cantidad;
— to, ascender (ie) a, importar.
amuse, divertir (ie).
and, y, e {before i- or hi-).
angry (with), enojado, -a (con);
become — , enojarse, enfadarae.
306
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Anna, Ana.
announce, anunciar, participar.
another, otro, -a.
answer v., contestar, responder;
noun, respuesta.
any, alguno (algiin), -a; — one,
alguien; — one (at all),
cual(es)quiera.
anybody, alguien.
anything, algo, alguna cosa; not
— , no . . . nada.
appear, aparecer, parecer, figu-
rarse; it — s to me, me parece,
se me figura.
appetite, apetito; have an — for,
apetecer.
apple, manzana.
approaching, pr6ximo, -a.
approval, la conformidad.
approximately, aproximadamente.
April, abril m.
Arab, el o la drabe.
architect, arquitecto.
are {=100 square meters), drea.
Argentine, argentine, -a.
arid, drido, -a.
arise, levantarse.
arithmetic, aritm^tica.
arm, braze,
armchair, el sill6n.
aroma, el aroma,
arrange, arreglar.
arrive, llegar.
article, artlcule; — of clothing,
prenda de vestir; — of food, el
manjar.
artist, el o la artista.
as, como, tan, pues; — ... — , tan
. . . come.
ascend, subir.
ask (a favor), pedir (i), rogar (ue);
— (a question), preguntar; —
the loan of, pedir prestado.
asstire, asegm-ar; be — d (that),
contar (ue) con (que).
at, a, en.
attempt, procurar.
attend, asistir.
attention, la atenci6n.
attorney, abogado.
August, ageste.
aunt, tia.
author, el auter, la autera.
automobile, el autem6vil.
autumn, otone.
avoid, evitar.
await, aguardar.
awaken, despertarse (ie).
axe, el hacha, /.
B
back (of chair), respalde, (of check)
dorse; be back, estax de vuelta.
bad, male, -a; it is too — , es (ima)
Idstima.
badly, mal.
baggage, el equipaje; — room,
sala de equipaje.
bake, cocer (ue).
balance (of account), salde; there
is a — in my favor, arroja un
saldo a mi favor; — (an account),
v., saldar.
balcony (before a window), el bal-
c6n; (in theater) galerla o an-
fiteatre.
bald, calve, -a.
banana, pMtano.
bank, banco,
banker, banquero.
basement, s6tano, subterrdneo.
bath, bane; — tub, bane, banadera
(Arg.), tina de bane (Mex.);
take a — , banarse; — ^room,
cuarte de bafie.
bathe, banarse.
be, estar §260, ser §259.
because, perque.
become, penerse §265.
bed, cama; — ^room, see bedroom,
bedroom, dormitorie, alcoba
(Spain), recdmara (Mex.).
r
GENERAL VOCABULARY
307
beef, la carne de vaca (o de res).
before prep. (j)osition), ante, de-
lante de, en f rente de; (time)
antes de; conj., antes que.
beg (a favor), suplicar, pedir.
begin, empezar (ie), principiar.
behind, detr^ de.
believe, creer.
beloved, querido, -a, amado, -a.
below, debajo de.
berth, litera, cama.
besides, ademds (de).
best, mejor.
better, mejor; I am — , me hallo
mejor.
between, entre.
bicycle, bicicleta.
big, grande.
bill, cuenta, factura; — of ex-
change, letra de cambio; — of
fare, lista (de platos).
bind, encuademar.
bird, pdjaro.
biscuit, bizcocho, galleta {Span.
Am.).
bitter, amargo, -a.
black, negro, -a.
blackboard, pizarra, el pizarr6n.
blanket, frazada, manta (Spain).
blind, ciego, -a.
blot, el borr6n.
blouse, blusa.
blue, azul.
board, tabla.
boarding-house, casa de hu^pe-
des.
boat, el buque.
boil, hervir (ie) ; — (food) cocer
(ue).
book, Hbro.
bookstore, libreria.
boot, bota; riding — , bota de
montar.
bom: be — , nacer.
borrow, pedir (i) prestado, tomar
prestado.
both, ambos, -as, los o las dos.
bottle, botella.
bow, reverencia; v., inclinarse; —
to, saludar a
box, caja; little — , cajita; (in
theater), palco.
boy, muchacho; little — , nino; — 's
coat, chaqueta.
brazier, brasero.
Brazil, el Brasil.
bread, el pan.
breadth, anchura.
break v., quebrar (ie).
breakfast, (early) desayuno, (late)
almuerzo; v., desayunarse, al-
morzar (ue).
breed, raza.
brick, ladrillo.
bright, claro, -a, vistoso, -a;
bright-colored, vistoso, -a.
bring, traer §277, Uevar.
broad, ancho, -a.
brother, hermano; — s and sisters,
hermanos.
brush, cepillo; v., cepillar o ace-
pillar,
build, construir.
building, edificio.
bulk, grueso.
bulky, grueso, -a.
btun, quemar.
bushel: 1§ — s, fanega.
business, negocio, comercio.
busy, ocupado, -a.
but, mas, pero, sino, no . . . sino.
butter, mantequilla (Span. Am.),
manteca de vaca (Spain).
buy, comprar.
by, por, de.
call v., Uamar; — on, visitar.
calm, tranquilo, -a.
can v., poder §270, (= know how)
saber §268.
Canada, el Canada.
308
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
candle, vela.
canvas, lona.
cap, gorra.
capacity, la capacidad.
captain, el capitdn.
card, tarjeta; post(al) — , tarjeta
postal; visiting — , tarjeta de
visita.
care, cuidado; take — of, cuidar;
take — , tenga Vd. cuidado; in
— of, a (en) casa de; — for,
cuidar.
careful : be — , tener cuidado.
Caroline, Carolina.
carpenter, carpintero.
carriage, el coche.
carry, Uevar.
case, caso.
cash: for — , al contado; v., cobrar,
hacer efectivo.
cast v., arrojar, echar.
Castile, Castilla.
Castilian, castellano, -a.
catalogue, catd,logo.
catch v., coger; — cold, resfriarse.
caterpillar, oruga.
cattleraiser, ganadero.
ceiling, techo.
celebrate, celebrar.
cent, centavo.
center, centro.
centime {100 — s = 1 peseta), c6n-
timo.
centimeter, centimetro.
century, siglo.
ceremony, ceremonia.
certainty: with — , fijamente.
chair, silla.
chalk, tiza, yeso, el gis (Mex.).
change, cambio, la variaci6n.
changeable, variable,
chapter, capltulo.
charcoal, el carb6n (de lena).
charge v., cargar.
Charles, Carlos.
charming, simpdtico, -a.
chase, caza.
cheap, barato, -a.
check, el cheque.
cheese, queso.
chest of drawers, c6moda.
chiffonnier, c6moda.
child, nino, -a; very much of a — ,
muy nino, -a; children (= sons
and datighters), hijos.
Chilean, chileno, -a.
chin, barba.
chocolate, el chocolate,
choose, escoger.
Christian, cristiano, -a; — name,
el nombre de bautismo o de pila.
Christopher, Crist6bal.
chiurch, iglesia, templo.
city, la poblacion, la ciudad.
clasp {someone's hand) v., estre-
char.
class, la clase; — ^room, la close;
Spanish — , clase de espanol.
classic, cldsico, -a.
clause, clausula.
clean v., limpiar; adj., limpio, -a.
clear, claro, -a.
clerk, el dependiente.
climate, el clima.
climb v., subir.
clock, el reloj (de pared),
close v., cerrar (ie).
cloth, pano.
clothes, ropa.
cloudy, nublado, -a.
coach, el coche.
coal, el carb6n de piedra; — oil,
petr61eo.
coat: frock — , levita; morning or
business — , americana, saco;
evening or dress — , el frac;
boy's — , chaqueta.
coffee, el caf6.
coin, moneda.
cold, {a disease) resfriado; adj.,
frio, -a; be -, tener frlo; it is — f
hace frio.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
309
collar, cuello.
collect, cobrar, percibir.
collection, la colecci6ii.
color, el color.
Columbus, Col6n,
comb v., peinar.
come, venir §264; — in, pasar;
— into, entrar en; — out,
salir; — up, subir; — with,
acompanar.
comedy, comedia; musical — , zar-
zuela.
comfortable, c6modo, -a.
command v., mandar.
commerce, comercio.
common: be — , abundar.
company, companla.
comparison, la comparaci6n.
compartment, compartimiento, de-
partamento.
complete v., completar; adj., com-
plete, -a.
compose, componer §265.
composition, el tema.
comprehend, comprender.
conditional, condicional.
conformity, la conformidad.
conjugation, la conjugacidn.
consist (of), consistir (en).
contain, contener §258; be — ed,
caber § 269.
context, contexto.
continuation, la continuacidn, se-
guida.
continue, continuar, seguir (i).
contrary, contrario, -a; on the — ,
al contrario, per el contrario.
convenience, la comodidad.
convenient, c6modo, -a.
cook, cocinero, -a; v., guisar, co-
cinar.
cooking, cocina.
cool, fresco, -a.
copper, el cobre.
copy (of a book, etc.), el ejemplar.
cordially, cordialmente.
comer, esquina.
correct, exacto, -a, correcto, -a.
correctly, correctamente.
correspond, corresponder.
cost v., costar (ue).
cotton, el algod6n.
count v., contar (ue); — on, con-
tar con.
coimtry, el pais; (as distinguished
from the city) campo.
courage, el valor.
course : of — , por supuesto.
court, la corte; (inner) — yard,
patio.
courteous, cort^s.
cousin, primo, -a; first — , prime
hermane, prima hermana.
cover v., cubrir (p.p. cubierte).
cow, vaca.
crack v., partir.
" cracker," galleta.
cravat, corbata.
create, producir.
credit, cr6dite; v., abenar
crisis, la crisis.
critical, critice, -a.
cross v., atravesar.
crow v., cantar.
cry v., llorar.
cubic, ciibico, -a.
ctiff {of sleeve), puno.
cultivate, cultivar.
cup, taza.
cturent, cerriente.
curtain {of theater), el tel6n.
daily adj., diario, -a; adv., al dia,
per dia.
dark, obscure, -a; complex^
ioned, trigueno, -a.
dash, raya.
date, fecha; v., fechar.
dative, dative.
daughter, hija.
day, el dia; good — ! jbuenos diasl
310
rmST SPANISH COURSE
deaf, sordo, -a.
dear, caro, -a, querido, -a; my —
Sir, muy senor mio.
debit, debe.
deceive, enganar.
December, diciembre m.
decimeter, declmetro.
deck (of a ship), cubierta.
deep, hondo, -a.
definite, determinado, -a, defi-
nido, -a
degree, grado.
delay, tardanza; v., tardar (en),
deliver, entregar.
demand v., exigir.
demonstrative, demostrativo, -a.
deny, negar (ie).
depart (from), partir (de).
dependent, subordinado, -a.
deprive (of), privar.
depth, la profundidad.
"derby" (hat), hongo.
descend, bajar(se).
desire v., desear.
desk, escritorio, mesa.
dessert, los postres.
die, morir (ue).
diet, dieta.
diJBferent, diferente.
difficult, diflcil.
difficulty, la dificultad.
digit, digito.
diligent, aplicado, -a.
dine, comer.
dining car, el cochecomedor.
dining room, el comedor.
dinner, comida (principal); have
— , comer,
diploma, el diploma,
direct v., dirigir.
direction, la direcci6n; -s, adver-
tencias.
director, el director, la directora.
dirty, sucio, -a.
disagreeable, desagradable.
disappear, desaparecer.
discount, descuento.
discover, descubrir.
dish, plato.
distance, distancia.
divide, dividir.
do, hacer §266; it does pretty well,
sirve bastante bien.
dock, el muelle.
doctor, mddico.
dog, perro, -a.
dollar, dure (Spain), peso (Span.
Am.); (of U.S. A.) el d61ar.
domestic servant, criado, -a.
door, puerta.
dose, la dosis.
double v., doblar.
doubt, duda; v., dudar.
dough, pasta.
dozen, docena.
draft, giro, el cheque,
draught horse, caballo de tiro,
draw (out), sacar.
dress, vestido; — coat, el frac;
— suit, el traje de etiqueta;
v., vestir (i); — oneself, ves-
tirse (i).
dressing table, "dresser," el to-
cador.
drive v., ir o pasearse en coche o
autom6vil.
driving horse, caballo de tiro,
dry, seco, -a, drido, -a; v., secar.
duck (cloth), el dril.
dtmib, mudo, -a.
during, durante,
dust, polvo.
E
each, cada; — one, cada uno.
ear, oreja; inner — , oldo.
early adj., temprano, -a; adv.^
temprano.
earn, ganar.
east, el este.
easy, fdcil.
eat, comer.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
311
edition, la edici6n.
eflfect v., efectuar.
egg, huevo.
either ... or, o ... o.
electric, el^ctrico, -a.
elegant, de lujo, elegante.
elevator, el ascensor, el elevador
(Mex.).
Elizabeth, Isabel.
Emily, Emilia.
emplojrment, empleo.
enclosed adj., adjunto, -a; adv.,
ad junto.
encounter v., encontrar (ue).
end v., terminar.
endorse, endosar.
endure, durar, soportar.
enemy, enemigo, -a.
engagement, compromise.
England, Inglaterra.
English, ingles, -esa.
Englishman, ingl6s; English-
woman, iaglesa.
enjoy, divertirse (ie) con; — one-
self, divertirse.
enough, bastante.
enter (into), entrar (en o a).
entire, entero, -a, integro, -a.
entrance, entrada.
envelope, el sobre.
equal, igual.
equally, iguaknente.
equivalent, equivalente; be — ,
equivaler §273.
erase, borrar.
eraser, el borrador, cepillo.
err, errar (ye-).
error, el error.
especial, particular.
esteemed: highly — , estimable,
estimado, -a.
etc., etc. (= et cetera).
etiquette, etiqueta.
even, aun; — if, aunque.
evening (before dark), la tarde;
(flfter dark) la noche; in the — ,
por 0 en la noche; — coat, el
frac; — clothes, el traje de eti-
queta.
every (one), todo, -a; — day,
todos los dias; — two days, cada
dos dIas.
everybody, todo el mundo.
ever3rthing, todo.
ever3rwhere, a, en, por todas par*
tes.
exact, exacto, -a.
exactiy {of time), al punto.
example, ejemplo.
exceedingly, simiamente.
excellent, excelente.
except, excepto.
exclamation mark, signo de adnd-
raci6n.
excuse v., dispensar, excusar, per-
donar.
execute, ejecutar.
exercise, ejercicio; — book, cua-
derno; take — , hacer ejercicio;
written — , el tema.
expectation, espera.
expensive, caro, -a.
explain, explicar.
express, expreso, -a; — train, el
tren expreso o rdpido.
extract, extracto.
eye, ojo.
F
face, cara; v., dar a.
fail: not — to, no dejar de.
fair {as ■price, etc.), regular,
faithful, fiel; your — servant,
S. S. S. (= su seguro servidor).
fall v., caer §275.
family, familia; — name, apellido.
far, lejos; how — is it? ^cudnto
farce, el sainete. [hay?
fare, tarifa. [hasta luego.
farewell, adi6s ; — for a while,
farm: large — , hacienda; — hand,
— laborer, labrador, -ora.
312
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
fanner, el agricultor, hacendado.
fashion, moda; be in — , estar de
moda.
fashionable, de moda.
fast, aprisa.
fat, gordo, -a.
father, padre, papd.
fault, culpa; it is not my — , no es
mfa la culpa; it is your — , Vd.
tiene la culpa.
favor, el favor; your — (= letter),
8U apreciable carta.
fear, miedo; v., temer, tener
miedo.
feather, pluma.
February, febrero.
feed, dar de comer.
feel, sentir (ie); I — weak, me
siento d6bil.
felt, fieltro.
feminine, femenino, -a.
Ferdinand, Fernando.
fever, la fiebre.
few, a — , pocos, -as, unos (-as)
cuantos (-as).
field, campo.
fill, llenar; — (an order), ejecutar.
find, hallar, encontrar.
finish v., acabar; I have — ed,
ya acab6; it's — ed, se acab6;
he — ed speaking, acab6 de
hablar.
fire, fuego, la lumbre; — ^place,
chimenea, (for cooking) el fo-
g6n; — ^wood, lena.
fish (living), el pez; (after being
caught) pescado.
fist, pufio.
fit v., caer §275, sentar (ie).
flee, huir.
flesh, la carne.
flexible, flexible.
floor, piso, suelo; ground — , piso
bajo.
flower, la flor.
fog, neblina.
follow, seguir (i) ; — ^ing, siguiente.
fond (of), aficionado, -a (a); be — ■
of (a person), querer (a) §271.
food (prepared), comida.
foot, el pie, (of an animal)
pata.
for, para, por; conj., porque, que,
pues.
forbid, prohibir.
forehead, la frente.
forget, olvidar; I forgot, se me
olvid6.
fork, el tenedor.
fortnight, quince dias.
forward v., reexpedir (i) ; please — ,
to be — ed, a reexpedir.
fountain pen: see pen.
fraction, numero quebrado.
Frances, Francisca.
Francis, Francisco.
freeze, helar (ie), congelarse.
French, francos, -esa.
Frenchman, francos; French-
woman, francesa.
fresh, fresco, -a; — water (dis-
tinguished from salt uiater), agua
dulce.
Friday, el viemes.
fried, frito, -a.
friend, amigo, -a.
frighten, asustar.
frightened: to be — , asustarse,
tener miedo.
from, de, desde.
front, el frente; in — of, en frente
de.
fruit, fruta(s).
fulfil, cumplir.
full, lleno, -a.
fun: make — of, burlarse de.
furnace, homo; central — (to
warm a building), calorlfero o
estufa central, caldera (= boiler).
furniture, los muebles; piece of — ,
el mueble.
future, futuro, -a.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
313
gallery, galerfa.
garden, huerta, jardln.
gas, el gas.
gender, g^nero.
genitive, genitivo.
gentle, manso, -a.
gentleman, caballero, senor;
young — , senorito; gentlemen
and ladies, senores.
get, conseguir (i), obtener §258;
— (= take out), sacar; how are
you — ting on? iqu6 tal sigue
Vd.? — out {of train, etc.),
bajar(se); — up, levantarse; go
and — , ir a buscar.
girl, muchacha; little — , nina.
give, dar §263, conceder, dispen-
ear; — (a play), see perform;
given name, el nombre de bau-
tismo 0 de pila.
glad, contento, -a; be — (of), ale-
grarse (de), celebrar; I should
be — to, quisiera.
glass (= drinking ), vaso.
gloomy, triste.
glove, el guante.
go, andar §262, ir §261, diri-
girse; — afoot, ir a pie; — in or
into, entrar en; — on, conti-
nuar, seguir (i); — out, salir
§274; — out into the street,
salir a la calle; — up, subir; —
with, acompanar a; — and get,
ir a buscar; — to bed, acos-
tarse (ue); let us — , vamos.
gold, ore.
golosh, chanclo.
good, bueno, -a; he (it, etc.) is —
for nothing, no sirve para nada.
goodbye, adi6s.
goodness, la bondad.
goods, g6nero(8).
gossip v., munnurar, referir
chismes.
grain, grano.
grammar, gramdtica.
gramme, gramo.
grandfather, abuelo.
grandmother, abuela.
grandparents, abuelos.
grant v., conceder, otorgar, dis-
pensar; — ed that, dado que.
grateful, agradecido, -a; be — for,
agradecer.
great, grande; a — deal, mucho;
— er, mds grande, mayor,
greatly, sumamente.
green, verde.
ground, suelo.
grow, crecer; be — ing, ir ere-
ciendo; trans., cultivar, produ*
cir.
guard v., vigilar.
guava, guayaba.
guest, hu6sped, -eda.
guide, el o la gufa.
hair (of the head), cabellos (pi.),
pelo.
half adj., medio, -a; noun, la mi-
tad; hose, el calcetln.
hand, la mano; on the other — , per
el contrario; — bag, maleta; v.,
entregar.
handkerchief, panuelo.
handsome, hermoso, -a.
happy, feliz.
hard, dure, -a, dificil; " — up,"
apurado, -a; he works — , tra-
baja mucho.
hardly, apenas.
haste: make — (to), apresurarse
(a).
hat, sombrero.
hatch v., sacar.
hatter, sombrerero; — *s ("hat
shop), sombrererla.
Havana, la Habana.
have, haber §257, tener §258;
— to (= must), tener que; —
314
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
something made or done, man-
dax hacer alguna cosa.
head, cabeza; — ache, el dolor de
cabeza.
hear, olr §276; when did you —
from him? icudndo tuvo Vd.
noticias de 61?
hearing, oldo.
heat, el calor.
hectare, hectdrea (= about 2\
acres).
height, altura.
help v., ayudar, remediar, evitar;
I can't — doing it, no puedo
menos de hacerlo.
hen, gallina; a — is sitting, una
gallina estd echada.
Henry, Enrique.
here, aquf, acd. [presente (carta).
herewith, adjunto (-a), con la
hide, cuero.
high, alto, -a ; (in price)subido, -a.
historic (al), hist6rico, -a.
history, historia.
hold v., caber §269; how much
does the box — ? i cudnto cabe
en la caja ? be held, verificarse.
holy, santo, -a.
home, casa, a casa ; at — , en casa.
homely, feo, -a.
hope v., esperar.
horse, caballo.
horseman, el jinete.
hose, media.
hot, caliente.
hotel, el hotel,
hour, hora.
house, casa.
how, como; interrog., c6mo; —
much (many), cudnto, -a (-os,
-as); — pretty! iqu6 bonito, -a!
htmdredweight, el quintal,
himger, el hambre (/.).
hungry: be — , tenor hambre.
hunting, caza; go — , ir a caza.
hurt v., lastimar.
husband, esposo, marido.
hypothetic, hipot6tico, -a.
identify, identificar.
if, si.
ill, enfermo, -a; be — , estar male,
-a.
illness, la enfermedad.
illustrate, ilustrar.
immortal, inmortal,
imperative, imperativo, -a.
imperfect, imperfecto, -a.
importance, importancia.
important, importante; be — , im-
portar.
imposing: — public building,
monumento.
in, en.
inch, pulgada.
include, comprender, incluir.
indeed, si, si, ya.
indefinite, indeterminado, -a, in-
definido, -a.
Indian, indio, -a; — com, el mafz.
indicate, indicar.
indicative, indicativo.
indolent, perezoso, -a.
industrious, aplicado, -a.
infinite, infinito, -a.
infinitive, infinitivo.
inflection, la inflexi6n.
inform, manif estar (ie).
inhabit, habitar.
inhabitant, el o la habitante.
ink, tinta.
inn, el hotel,
inside, adentro.
insist (on), exigir.
instance, ejemplo.
instant adj., actual, corriente.
instead of, en vez de.
instruct, instruir.
instructions, advertencias.
insure, asegurar.
intelligent, intelligente.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
315
intend, pensar (ie).
interesting, interesante.
interrogative, interrogativo, -a.
intimate, Intimo, -a.
into, en.
inverted, invertido, -a.
invitation, la invitaci6n.
invite, invitar.
iron, hierro; v., planchar.
Italian, italiano, -a.
Italy, Italia.
itemize, detallar.
jacket, chaqueta.
January, enero.
Japan, el Jap6n.
John, Juan.
Johnny, Juanito.
join, juntar.
joke, broma.
jug, jarro.
July, Julio.
jimip (out), saltar.
just: I have — done it, acabo de
hacerlo; he had — spoken, aca-
baba de hablar.
keep, guardar, conservar; — on,
seguir (i); — something, que-
darse con alguna cosa.
kerosene, petr61eo.
key, la 11a ve.
kid, cabritilla.
kilo, see kilogramme,
kilogramme, kilogramo.
kilometer, kil6metro.
kind, la clase, la especie; adj., bon-
dadoso, -a, grate, -a.
kindness, la bondad.
kiss v., besar.
kitchen, cocina; {modem iron) —
range or stove, cocina econ6-
mica.
kitten, gatito, -a.
knee-breeches, los calzones, los
pantalones cortos.
knife, cuchillo.
knock v., Uamar.
know, saber §268, conocer; so far
as I — , que yo sepa; — how (to),
saber.
lack, falta; v., f altar; I — , me falta,
me hace falta.
lady, senora; yoimg — , senorita.
lake, lago.
lamp, Idmpara.
language, lengua, el idioma.
lard, manteca (de cerdo).
large, grande.
last v., durar; adj., (of a series)
ultimo, -a; — montib, el (mes)
pr6ximo pasado.
late adv., tarde.
laimdress, lavandera.
Iaundr3mian, lavandero.
lawyer, abogado.
lay (eggs), poner §265; — down,
poner, acostar (ue).
lazy, perezoso, -a, flojo, -a.
leaf, hoja.
league, legua (= about S miles, or
6 kilometers).
learn, aprender.
least, menor; at — , al menos, per
lo menos.
leather, cuero.
leave, dejar, intrans. partir; to
take — , despedirse.
lecture, conferencia; — room, sala
de conferencias, aula,
left, izquierdo, -a.
leg, pierna, {of chair, etc.) el pie.
lend, prestar.
length, la longitud.
less adj., menor; adv., menos.
lesson, la lecci6n.
let, dejar, permitir; — us go,
vamos.
316
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
letter, carta; — box, el buz6n;
— carrier, cartero.
lettuce, lechuga.
Lewis, Luis,
library, biblioteca.
lie v., mentir (ie) ; — down, acos-
tarse (ue).
life, vida.
lift, el ascensor, el elevador (Mex.).
light, la luz; v., alumbrar; adj.,
ligero, -a.
lighten, relampaguear.
lightning, reMmpago(s).
likable, simpdtico, -a.
like v., gustar (de); I — , me gus-
ta; I should — , me gustarfa,
quisiera.
line, linea; in a straight — , en
linea recta.
linen, hilo; bed — , ropa de cama.
liquid, Ilquido; adj., liquido, -a.
list, lista.
listen, escuchar.
liter, litre.
literature, Uteratura.
little, poco, -a; a — money, un
poco de dinero; (= small) pe-
queno, -a, chico, -a.
live, vivir.
load v., cargar.
long, largo, -a; be — (= delay),
tardar en; it will not be — be-
fore he returns, no tardard en
volver; adv., as — as, mientras
(que) ; no — er, ya no.
look (at), mirar; — for, buscar; —
out! itenga Vd. cuidado!
looking-glass, espejo.
loose, suelto, -a.
Lord, Sefior.
lose, perder (ie) . [t6n de.
lot: a — of, muchos, -as, un mon-
loud, alto, -a.
Louis, Luis,
love v., amar.
low, bajo, -a; {-price) reducido, -a.
luggage, el equipaje.
lukewarm, tibio, -a.
lunch, almuerzo; v., almorzar (ue).
luxe: de — , de lujo.
luxury, lujo.
M
madam, sefior a; my dear — , muy
senora mla.
mail, correo.
main, principal.
maize, el malz.
make, hacer §266, construir, efeo-
tuar; — one's way, dirigirse a.
mamma, mamd.
man, el hombre.
manifest, manifestar (ie).
maimer, manera, mode.
map, el mapa.
March, marzo.
mark, signo; exclamation — , punto
de admiraci6n; interrogation — ,
pimto de interrogaci6n; v., mar-
car, senalar.
market, mercado; — place, plaza.
marmalade, pasta.
marriage, boda, el enlace.
married, casado, -a.
marry, casar, casarse con.
Mary, Maria.
masctdine, masculino, -a.
Master, (el) sefiorito. [{Mex.).]
match, f6sforo, cerilla o cerillo
material, el material.
matter: what is the — ? iqu6 hay?
what is the — with you? iqu6
tiene Vd.? nothing is the —
with me, no tengo nada.
May, mayo.
meal, comida.
meaning, significado. '
measure, medida; v., medir (i).
meat, la carne.
medicine, medicina, remedio.
meet, v., encontrar (ue), conocer.
mend, remendar (ie).
GENERAL VOCABULARY
317
mention v., mencionar.
metric, m^trico, -a.
Mexico, Mexico o M6jico; City of
— , Mexico, Ciudad de Mexico.
middle, medio, la mitad; adj., me-
dio, -a.
mile, milla.
milk, la leche.
minus, menos.
minute, minuto.
mirror, espejo.
Miss, (la) senorita, dofia.
mistake, el error,
mistaken: be — , equivocarse, es-
tar equivocado, -a.
mock v., burlarse de.
mode, modo.
moment, momento; at this — , en
este momento.
Monday, el limes,
monetary, monetario, -a.
money, dinero; post-oflBce —
order, giro postal; without — ,
apm-ado, -a, sin dinero.
month, el mes; last — , el (mes)
pr6ximo pasado.
monimient, monimiento.
mood, modo.
moon, luna; the — is shining, hace
(hay) luna.
Moor, moro, -a.
more, mds; no — , ya no.
moreover, ademda (de).
morning, manana; in the — , por o
en la manana; good — ! jbuenos
dias!
mortal, mortal.
most, mds, la mayor parte (de).
mother, madre; your — , su sefiora
madre de Vd.
motion pictures, cinemat6grafo, el
"cine" 0 el "cinema."
motive, motive.
motor car, el autom6vil.
mountains or mountain range,
sierra.
move v., mover (ue).
moving pictures (" movies '*)f ci-
nemat6grafo.
Mr., (el) senor; {before given
names) don; — and Mrs. Garcia,
el senor Garcia y su sefiora es-
posa, los sefiores de Garcia.
Mrs., (la) sefiora, (before given
names) dofia.
much, mucho, -a; very — , muchl-
simo, -a; adv., mucho.
multiply, multipUcar.
music, miisica.
must, deber, tener que; {according
to opinion) deber de; one — f
hay que.
mute, mudo, -a.
mutton, la came de camero.
N
name, el nombre; given or Chris-
tian — , nombre de bautismo o
de pila; family — , apellido.
namely, a saber.
napkin, servilleta.
near, cerca; prep., cerca de.
nearly, cerca de.
necessary, necesario, -a; precise,
-a.
neck, cuello; — ^tie, corbata.
need v., necesitar (de); I — , ne-
cesito (de), me hace falta.
needle, aguja.
negation, la negaci6n.
negative, negativo, -a.
neighbor, vecino, -a.
neither, tampoco; — ... nor, ni
. . . ni.
nephew, sobrino.
nest, nido.
never, nimca, jamds.
new, nuevo, -a.
news, noticias; — item, noticia;
what is the — ? iqu6 hay de
nuevo?
newspaper, peri6dico.
318
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
next, pr6ximo, -a, siguiente; adv.,
en seguida.
nickel, el nlquel; {money) el real
(Spain), medio real (Mexico,
Cuba, etc.).
niece, sobrina.
night, la noche; last — , anoche;
to- — , esta noche.
no, no.
no, no one, none, ninguno (nin-
gun), -a.
nobody, nadie.
nor, ni.
nose, la nariz.
not, no; — anyone, — anybody,
no . . . nadie, ninguno (nin-
gdn), -a.
notebook, cuaderno.
nothing, nada, no . . . nada; — is
the matter with me, no tengo
nada; be good for — , no servir
para nada.
noun, el nombre, substantive,
novelty, la novedad.
November, noviembre m.
now, ahora, ya.
number, niimero.
numeral, el numeral.
oats, avena.
object, objeto, motivo.
objection: if you have any — to
doing so, si Vd. tiene inconve-
niente en hacerlo.
obUged (= grateful), agradecido, -a.
observe, observar.
occasion, la ocasi6n.
occupied, ocupado, -a.
occtir, verificarse.
October, octubre m.
odor, el olor.
of, de.
offend, ofender.
offer v., ofrecer, conceder, presen-
tar.
office, despacho.
officer, el oficial.
often, a menudo, muchas veces.
oil, el aceite. [^persons), mayor.
old, vie jo, -a, anciano, -a; — er (oj
omission, la onusi6n, la 8upresi6n.
on, en, sobre.
once, una vez; at — , desde lu^o.
only, s61o, solamente, sino, no m^
que.
open v., abrir; adj., abierto, -a.
opera, 6pera; comic — , zarzuela.
opportimity, la oportunidad, la
ocasi6n.
or, o, u (before o- or ho-),
orange, naranja.
order (= arrangement), el orden;
(religious or military) la orden;
(for mercJiandise) pedido, la
orden; in — to, para; in — that,
para que; v., pedir (i), mandar.
ordinary, regular.
organ, 6rgano.
orthographic, ortogrdfico, -a.
orthography, ortografla.
other, otro, -a; the — s, los o las
demds, el resto.
ought to, deber; he , debiera.
ounce, onza.
oven, homo.
overcast (with clouds), nublado, -a.
overcoat, sobretodo, el gabdn.
owner, dueno.
pack v., empaquetar, embalar; —
a trtmk, hacer o arreglar un badl.
package, el paquete.
page, pdgina.
pain, el dolor.
pair, el par; a — of scissors, Unas
tijeras.
pale, pdhdo, -a.
pan, cazuela.
papa, el papd.
paper, el papel.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
319
parcel, el paquete.
pardon, el perd6n.
pardon v., perdonaJ.
parents, los padres.
parish priest, el cura.
part, la parte.
participle, participio.
pass v., pasar.
passage, travesla.
passenger, pasajero, -a, (on train)
viajero, -a.
passive, pasivo, -a.
past, pasado, -a.
patient, enfermo, -a.
Paid, Pablo,
paw, pata.
pay v., pagar; — attention, prestar
atenci6n.
payment, pago.
pea, el guisante, chicharo (Span.
Am.)
pen, pluma; fountain — , pluma
estilografica, la plumafuente o
la pluma de fuente {in most of
Span. Am.).
pencil, el Idpiz.
penknife, el cortaplumas.
people, pueblo, la gente.
pepper, piraienta.
"per," por.
perceive, percibir.
perfect, perfecto, -a.
perfectly, perfectamente.
perform; — (o play, etc.) for the
first time, estrenar.
performance, la funci6n.
perfimie, el aroma, el perfume.
period {in punctuation), punto.
permit v., permitir.
person, persona.
Peter, Pedro,
petroleum, petr61eo.
Philip, Felipe,
phonetic, fon^tico, -a.
physician, medico,
piano, piano.
picture, cuadro.
piece, pieza, {= fragment) pedazo.
pier, el muelle.
pill, plldora.
pillow, almohada; — case, funda
(de almohada).
pineapple, {in Spain) anana, {in
Span. Am.) el anand o el ana-
n^.
pipe, tubo; steam — , tubo de
vapor,
pitcher (= j-ug), jarro.
pity: it is a — , es (una) Idstima.
place, el lugar, sitio; take — , veri-
ficarse, tener lugar; v., colocar.
plain, pampa.
planet, el planeta.
plank, tabla.
plant, planta.
plantation, hacienda,
planter, hacendado.
plate, plato.
play v., jugar (ue) ; — ball, jugar a
la pelota; {on a musical instru-
ment) tocar.
pleasant, agradable, simpdtico, -a.
please, gustar, agradar; it — s me
greatly, me agrada o gusta
mucho; {=he kind enough to)
hdgame Vd. el favor de, slrvase
Vd.
pleasing, grato, -a.
pleasure, gusto, el placer,
pluperfect, pluscuamperfecto.
plus, mds.
pocket, bolsillo, bolsa {Mex.).
pocketbook, el portamonedas.
poem, poesia, el cantar, el poema.
point, punto; — out, sefialar, in-
dicar.
polite, cort^s.
poor, pobre.
popularly, popularmente.
port (= left), el babor.
position, la colocaci6n, la posici6n,
possessive, posesivo, -a.
320
FIEST SPANISH COURSE
possible, posible.
post v., echar al correo o en el
buz6n.
postage, el porte; — stamp, sello o
estampilla de correo, sello o
estampilla postal; — prepaid,
franco de porte.
postman, cartero.
post office, correo, casa de correos;
— box, apartado o casilla (de
correos).
pot, oUa.
potato, patata (Spain), papa
{Span. Am.); sweet — , bata-
ta, el camote (Mex.), boniato
iCuba).
poimd, libra; 26 — s, arroba.
pour v., echar.
powder, polvo; tooth — , polvos
dentlifricos.
prairie, pampa.
prefer, preferir (ie).
prepare, preparar.
preposition, la preposici6n.
present v., presentar; adj., pre-
sente, actual; — month, el co-
rriente, el actual; be — (at),
asistir (a).
president, el presidente.
press v., estrechar.
preterite, pret^rito,
pretty, bonito, -a, Undo, -a; adv.,
bastante.
price, precio.
principal, director, -ora; adj., prin-
cipal.
print v., imprimir; — ed matter, los
impresos.
private, particular.
prize, premio.
probability, la probabilidad.
produce, v., producir.
product, producto.
professor, profesor, -ora, catedr^
tico (in university).
program, el programa.
prohibit, prohibir.
promise v., prometer.
promptly, al punto.
pronoim, el pronombre.
proper: be — , convenir §264.
provided that, siempre que, con
tal que.
public, publico, -a; — square,
plaza.
publish, publicar.
publisher, el editor; — (s) and
bookdealer(s), libreria general.
pubUshing house, casa editorial,
pull, tiro,
pulse, pulso.
punish, castigar.
purchase, compra.
pure, puro, -a.
purse, bolsa, el portamonedas.
put, poner §265; — (in or into),
meter (en); — on (shoes), calzar;
— on one's shoes, calzarse.
quotation marks, comillas.
race, raza.
railway, el ferrocarril.
rain v., Hover (ue) ; n., Uuvia.
raise, levantar.
range (= modem cooking — ), co-
cina econ6mica, also estufa
(Mex.).
rather, mda bien, mejor dicho,
bastante.
read, leer,
reader (= reading book), libro de
lectura.
reading, lectura; — book, libro de
lectm-a.
receipt, recibo.
receive, recibir.
reception, recibo; — room, sala
(de recibo).
recite, recitar.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
321
red, rojo, -a, {of wine) tinto, -a.
reduce, reducir.
reflexive, reflexive, -a.
regard: in — to, cuanto a; with —
to, respecto de; — s, recuerdos,
respetos.
register (a letter, package, etc.),
certificar.
regret v., sentir (ie).
regular, regular,
reiterate, reiterar.
rejoice at, alegrarse de, celebrar.
religious, religiose, -a.
remain, quedar(se), permanecer.
remedy, remedio; v., remediar.
remember, acordarse (ue) de; if I
— rightly, si mal no me acuerdo.
reminder, recuerdo.
remit, remitir.
remittance, remesa.
repair v., reparar, hacer las repa-
raciones; — s, las reparaciones.
repay, corresponder.
repeat, repetir (i), reiterar.
reply v., contestar, corresponder.
request v., pedir (i), rogar (ue),
suplicar.
residence, domicilio.
respect, respeto; with or in — to,
(con) respecto de.
rest, resto, lo (los, las) demds;
(•= repose) descanso; v., descan-
sar.
restaiu'ant, el restaurant.
result, resultado.
resume, la sinopsis.
retire, retirar(8e).
return, vuelta; by — mail, a vuelta
de correo; v., volver (ue) ; he has
— ed, estd de vuelta; (= give
back) devolver (ue).
review v., repasar.
revolve, girar.
rich, rico, -a.
ride v., montar; — on horseback,
montar a caballo; — a bicycle,
montar en bicicleta; — for
pleasure, pasearse.
right, derecho, -a.
ring {the doorbeU), llamar.
rip v., descoser.
rise v., levantarse; (jthe sun) ealir.
river, rlo.
roast v., asar.
Romance, romance (= derived from
Latin) .
roof, techo; flat — , azotea.
room, cuarto, pieza, la liabitaci6n;
class — , la clase.
root, la raiz.
rough (as the sea), agitado, -a.
row, fila.
royal, real.
rubber overshoe, chanclo (Spain),
zapato de goma (South Am.),
zapato de hule (Mex.).
ruby, el rubl.
rule, regla; as a — , por regla ge-
neral,
run v., correr.
rustic, riistico, -a.
sack coat, americana (Spain), saco
(Span. Am.).
sad, triste.
saddle, silla; ahorse, caballo de
silla.
said, dicho, -a.
sail, vela,
sailor, marinero.
saint, santo, -a.
salad, ensalada.
salt, la sal.
salute v., saludar.
same, mismo, -a.
satisfaction, la satisfaccidn.
Sattu-day, sdbado.
savory, sabroso, -a.
say, decir §267; I should — so,
ya lo creo.
322
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
scarcely, apenas.
school, escuela; — year, curso.
scissors, tijeras; a pair of — , unas
tijeras.
scrub (floors, ketUes, etc.), f re-
gar (ie).
sea, el o la mar.
seasick, mareado, -a; become — ,
marearse.
season, la estaci6n.
seat, asiento; (in theater) butaca;
v., sen tar (ie); — oneself, be
— ed, sentarse.
see, ver § 279.
seek, buscar.
seem, figurarse, parecer; it — s to
me, se me figura, me parece.
select, escoger.
self, mismo, -a.
sell, vender.
send, enviar, mandar, remitir.
sending, la expedici6n.
sentence, la frase, la oraci6n.
September, septiembre m.
servant, criado, -a, servidor, -era;
^boy, mozo.
serve, servir (i).
service, servicio.
set v., poner § 265, sentar (ie).
settle (an account), saldar.
several, varios, -as.
Seville, Sevilla.
shake, agitar.
sheep, camero, oveja.
sheet, sdbana.
shilling, el real (Span. Am.).
shingle, el tejamani o tejamanil,
tablilla (de madera).
shipment (of goods), en vie.
shipping, la expedici6n.
shirt, camisa; — bosom, pechera.
shoe, zapato; high — , beta; —
dealer, — maker, zapatero; —
shop, — store, zapaterla
shop, tienda.
short, corto, -a.
should (= otight to), deber; he — ^
el debiera.
show v., mostrar (ue), ensefiar,
marcar.
showy, vistoso, -a.
shrink, encoger(se).
shut, cerrar (ie).
sick, enfermo, -a.
side, lado.
sideboard, el aparador.
sight, vista.
sign v., firmar(se), subscribir(8e).
signature, firma.
significance, significado.
silk, seda.
silver, plata.
since, desde, despu^s.
sing, cantar.
single, simple, suelto, -a.
singular, singular,
sir, senor, caballero; my dear — f
may senor mio.
sister, hermana.
sit (down), sentarse (ie).
site, sitio.
size, tamano.
skip, saltar.
sky, cielo.
slate, pizarra.
sleep, sueno; v., dormir (ue); go to
— , fall a — , dormirse (ue).
sleeping: — car, el cochecama, el
coche dormitorio, el "sleeping,"
el pulm^ (Mex.); — room,
cuarto de dormir.
sleepy: be — , tener sueno.
sleeve, manga,
slipper, zapatilla.
small, chico, -a, pequeno, -a.
smell (sense of), oHato, (=• odor)
el olor; v., oler (hue-).
snow, la nieve; v., nevar (ie).
so, asi, tan; — as, — that, de
manera (modo) que; — much
(many), tanto, -a, (tantos, -as);
— that (- then), conque; isn't
GENERAL VOCABULARY
323
it — ? Ino es verdad? he did — ,
lo hizo.
soap, el jab6n.
sock, el calcetln.
sofa, el sofd.
sole, (of foot) planta, (of a shoe)
suela.
some, alguno (algiin), -a; pi., al-
gunos, -as, unos, -as.
somebody, alguien.
some one, alguien.
something, algo, algima cosa.
sometimes, a veces, algimas veces.
somewhat, algo.
son, hijo; — s and daughters, hijos.
song, la canci6n, el cantar.
soon, pronto; as — as, luego que;
no — er, apenas.
sorrow, el dolor.
soul, el alma/.
soup, sopa.
south, el sur.
souvenir, recuerdo.
space, espacio.
Spain, Espafia.
Spaniard, espanol, -ola.
Spanish, espanol, -ola, castellano,
-a; — -American, hispano-
americano, -a; — class, la clase
de espanol; — woman, espanola.
speak, hablar.
speech, palabra.
spelling, ortografla.
spend, gastar, (time) pasar.
split v., partir.
spoon, cuchara.
spring, primavera.
spur, espuela, (pointed) el acicate.
square, cuadrado; adj., cuadrado,
-a.
stable, caballeriza.
stairs, stairway, escalera.
stamp, sello, estampilla.
starboard (= right), el estribor.
starch, el almid6n.
state, estado.
stateroom, el camarote.
station, la estacidn.
stay v., quedar(se), permanecer;
— in bed, guardar cama.
steam, el vapor,
steamboat, el vapor,
stem (of a word), el radical,
still, aun, todavia.
sting, el aguij6n.
stocking, media,
stockman, ganadero.
stone, piedra.
stop v., parar, dejar de.
store (= shop), tienda.
storm, tormenta, el temporal,
story, cuento, historia; piso; upper
— , piso alto,
stout, gordo, -a.
stove: cooking — , cocina econ6-
mica, estufa (Mex.).
straight, derecho, -a; go — ahead,
seguir (i) derecho.
straw, paja.
street, la calle; — car, el tranvla.
strike (as a clock) v., dar ; it is strik-
ing one, two, da la una, dan las
dos; — off, quitar.
stroll v., pasearse.
strong, fuerte; — coffee, el csd6
cargado.
student, alumno, -a, el o la estu-
diante.
study v., estudiar.
subject, sujeto.
subjunctive, subjvmtivo.
subordinate, subordinado, -a.
subscribe, subscribir(se).
subscription, la subscripci6n.
substantive adj., substantivado,
-a.
succeed (in), lograr.
successively, sucesivamente.
such, such a, tal.
sugar, el o la azijcar.
suit (of clothes), el traje.
smtable, propio, -a.
324
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
sum, suma.
sxunmary, extracto.
summer, verano.
sun, el sol; — shine, sol; the — is
shining, hace sol.
Sunday, domingo.
sup, cenar.
supper, cena; have — , cenar.
support v., soportar, mantener
§258.
sure, seguro, -a.
surface, la superficie.
surname, apellido.
surprise v., sorprender.
sweet, dulce.
swift, ligero, -a.
swim v., nadar.
synopsis, la sinopsis.
table, mesa; — cloth, el mantel.
tailor, el sastre; — shop, "tai-
lor's," sastrerla.
take, tomar; — leave, despedir-
se (i); — away, — off, quitar,
retirar; — out, sacar.
tall, alto, -a.
tame, manso, -a.
taste, gusto, el sabor; v., — good,
ser sabroso, tener buen sabor.
tea, el te; — spoon, cucharita; — -
spoonful, cucharadita.
teach, ensenar.
teacher, maestro, -a, profesor,
-ora.
tear v., romper, rasgar.
telegram, el telegrama.
telephone, tel6fono; v., telefonear.
teU, decir §267.
temperature, temperatura.
temple, templo.
tense, tiempo.
term, t^rmino.
terminate, terminar.
than, que, de.
thanks I thank you! igraciasi
that rel., que; dem., ese, -a, -o;
aquel, aquella, aquello; conj.,
que, ( = in order that) para que.
that one, 6se, -a; aqu61, aquella.
theater, teatro.
theme, el tema.
then, entonces, luego.
there, alii, alld; {near the person
addressed) ahl; — is (are), hay.
Theresa, Teresa.
thermometer, term6metro.
thick, grueso, -a, espeso, -a.
thickness, grueso.
thimble, el dedal.
thing, cosa.
think, pensar (ie), creer; what do
you — about it? iqu6 le parece
a Vd.? if you — best, si le
parece a Vd.
thkst, la sed.
thirsty: be — , tener sed.
this, este, -a, -o; — one, 6ste, -a.
thread, hilo.
throu^, per.
throw, tiro; v., arrojar, tirar, echar.
thtmder, trueno(s); v., tronar (ue).
Thm-sday, el jueves.
ticket, el billete, boleto (Span.
Am.)', round-trip — , billete
(boleto) de Ida y vuelta.
till v., labrar; prep., hasta.
time, tiempo, la vez; a long — ,
mucho tiempo; three — s, tres
veces; — limit, plazo; from —
to — , de vez en cuando; what —
(o'clock) is it? Iqu6 hora es? it
is — to (for), es hora de.
tip, propina.
tired, cansado, -a.
to, a, hasta.
tobacco, tabaco.
to-day, hoy.
to-morrow, mafiana; the day after
— , pasado manana.
ton, tonelada.
tongue, lengua.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
325
I
too, demasiado; — much (many),
demasiado, -a (-os, -as); too
... to, muy . . . para; (= also)
tambi^n.
tooth, el diente; molar — , muela;
— ^brush, cepillo de dientes o
cepillo para los dientes ; — ^pow-
der, pelves dentifrices o pelves
para los dientes; — ^ache, el do-
lor de muelas.
torn, rete, -a.
touch v., tecar.
towel, tealla.
town, pueblo, la peblaci6n.
tragedy, tragedia.
train, el tren.
tramway, el tranvia.
tranquil, tranquilo, -a.
translate, traducir §278.
traveler, viajero, -a.
treacherous, traidor, -ora.
tree, el drbol.
trick, broma; play — s, dar bromas.
trip, el viaje.
tropical, tropical.
trouble, melestia; v., melestar.
trousers, les pantalones {also el
pantal6n).
true, cierto, -a; it is — , es verdad;
isn't it — ? ino es verdad?
tnmk, el baiil.
truth, la verdad.
try, procurar, tratar de.
Tuesday, el martes.
turn v., volver (ue), deblar (la
esquina, pdgina, etc.); (= become)
ponerse §265.
ugly, feo, -a.
unbound, en o a la nistica.
uncle, tie.
under, debajo de.
underclothes, ropa interior.
underline, subrayar.
tmderstand, entender (ie).
union, el enlace, la iini6n.
unite, unir.
United States, Estados Unidos; of
the , estad(o)unidense.
unity, la unidad.
university, la universidad.
unless, a menos que.
unoccupied, desecupado, -a.
unpleasant, desagradable.
tmtie, desatar.
until, hasta que.
upon, en, sebre.
upper, superior; — story, piso alto.
use, empleo, uso.
use v., servirse (i) de, usar, em-
plear; be — d to, estar acostum-
brado a.
useful, litil.
utensil, utensilio, trasto.
vacation (s), las vacaciones.
valise, maleta.
variable, variable.
variation, la variaci6n.
variety, la variedad.
vary, variar.
vaudeville theater, teatro de var
riedades.
vegetables, verduras, las legum-
bres.
veranda, galerfa.
verb, verbo.
very, muy, mucho.
vessel, el lauque.
vest, chaleco.
vestibxile, el zagudn.
vigor, el vigor.
vinegar, el vinagre.
visit, visita; v., visitar.
vocabulary, vocabulario.
voice, la vez.
volume, el volumen, tomo (= part
of a work, several tomos being
sometimes bound in one volu-
men).
326
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
voyage, el viaje.
vulgarly, vulgarmente.
W
waistcoat, chaleco.
wait (for), aguardar, esperar.
waiter, mozo, camarero, mesero
(Mex.).
wake up, despertarse (ie).
walk v., ir a pie, {for pleasure)
pasearse.
wall, la pared, muro.
walnut : English — , la nuez.
want v., querer §271.
ward (= part of a city), barrio,
warm, calentar (ie); adj., caliente;
I am — , tengo calor; it is — {of
the weather), hace calor.
warmth, el calor.
wash v., lavar.
watch, el reloj, reloj de bolsillo; v.,
— over, vigilar.
water, el agua /.
watery, aguanoso, -a.
wave, ola.
wax, cera; — match, cer ilia, cerillo
{Mex.).
way, camino; make one's — (to),
dirigirse (a).
weak, d6bil.
wear v., llevar, usar; — out,
usar.
weather, tiempo.
Wednesday, el mi^rcoles.
week, semana; one — , echo dias;
two — s, quince dIas; next — , la
semana que viene.
weep, Uorar.
weigh, pesar.
weight, peso, {vnth which to weigh)
pesa ; of — , ponderal.
well, bien, pues; — then, pues;
bo — , estar bueno, -a.
west, el oeste.
western, occidental.
wharf, el muelle.
what (a), iqu6!, {=that which) lo
que; interrog., qu6, (= which)
cudl.
wheat, trigo.
when, cuando; interrog., cudndo,
a qu6 hora.
where, donde; interrog., d6nde.
which, que; el, la o lo cual; el, la
o lo que; interrog., cudl, qu6.
while, mientras (que), en tanto
que.
white, bianco, -a.
who, que; el o la cual; el o la que;
quien; interrog., qui^n.
whoever, quien (es)quiera.
whom rel., que, quien, el cual, etc.;
el que, etc.; interrog., qui^n.
whose rel., cuyo, -a, de quien;
interrog., de qui6n.
whosoever, quien (es)quiera.
why, per qu6, a qu6, para qu6;
exclam., si.
wide, ancho, -a.
width, anchura.
wife, esposa.
will v., querer §271.
wind, viento.
window, ventana.
wine, vino,
wing, ala.
winter, inviemo.
wipe, secar, enjugar.
wish v., desear, querer §271 ; I —
he would do it, yo quisiera, o
ojald, que 61 lo hiciera.
wit: to — , a saber.
with, con; — me, conraigo; —
himself, herself, etc., consigo; —
thee (you), contigo.
within, adentro.
without, sin; — accident, sin nove-
dad; — money, apurado, -a, sin
dinero.
woman, mujer.
wood, {for manufacture, building,
etc.) madera, {for fuel) lena.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
327
wool, lana.
woolen, de lana.
word, palabra.
work, trabajo, {of literature,
music, art, e'c.) obra; v., tra-
bajar.
worker: he is a hard — , es muy
aplicado.
world, mundo.
worry: do not — , pierda Vd. cui-
dado.
worship, la adoraci6n.
worth, el valor; be — , valer
§273.
would that, ojald (que).
write, escribir.
written, escrito, -a, irr. p.p. of es-
cribir; — exercise, el tema.
yard, el corral; vara (=33 inches).
year, ano; New Year's Day, Ano
nuevo; school — , curse; be
eight — s old, cumplir echo anos.
yellow, amarillo, -a.
yes, si.
yesterday, ayer.
yet, aiin, todavia; not — , todavla
no.
young, joven; — er, — est {of per-
sons), menor.
youth, la juventud.
INDEX
The numbers refer to sections unless otherwise indicated
a: with dative, 67; with accusative,
68: a + el = al, 69.
acaba de, 91; acababa (acab6) de,
XXIV, Exer.; ya acab6, se acab6,
XX, Exer.
Accusative case, use of a, 68.
Adjectives: inflection, 35, 36, 99;
apocopation, 179; position, 34,
180; agreement, 37, 38, 181;
comparison, 182, 184; of nation-
ality, 99, 100.
adjunto, page 205, footnote 2.
Adverbs, 222; comparison, 185,
186.
Agreement of subject and verb, 223.
any, 215, a.
aquf and ac&, 222, 1.
Arithmetical signs, 220.
Augmentatives, 229, 230.
bathtub, XI, Exer.
bedroom, XI, Exer.
Believing or saying, verbs of, 167.
butter, XVI, Exer.
by, 130.
caballero, XXX, Exer. '
Cardinal numerals, 217.
casilla, XLIX, Exer.
castellano, 100, b.
Changes in spelling, 114, 239 fol.
classroom, pages 24, 27, footnotes.
coal, XIV, Exer.
Commands, 147, 148.
Comparison: see Adjectives and
Adverbs.
Conditional clauses, 166.
Conjunctions, 226.
conocer, 139.
creo que no, XXIV, Exer.
cualquiera, 215, c.
cumplir, XXXIV, Exer.
Dative case, 67; of separation,
176.
Days of the month, 120.
Days of the week, 124,
Defective verbs, 281.
Definite article, 201; feminine el,
201, 1; lo, 201, 2; use of def. art.,
202; omission, 204; before a
noun used in apposition with a
personal pronoun, 199.
dejar, 148, a; XXXIV, Exer.
Demonstratives, 59-62, 210.
desk, page 24, footnote.
digo que sf, XXIV, Exer.
Diminutives, 229, 231.
Distributive construction, 108.
Dollar sign ($), page 212, footnote.
don, 103, a.
donde, 226, 3.
Doubting or denying, verbs of,
156, 2.
e, 226, 1.
ear, XXIX, Exer.
editor, page 224, footnote.
esperar + fut. ind., page 131, foot*
note.
estadounidense, XL VII, Exer.
estar and ser: use of, 72, 73.
INDEX
329
farm, XVI, Exer.
Floors of Spanish buildings, page
109, footnote 2.
Fractions, 219.
garden, XLIII, Exer.
Genitive case, 45.
Grammatical nomenclatiire, 237, a.
haber: uses of, 136; haber and
tener, 131.
hacer: hace buen tiempo, XXV,
Exer.; hace frio, XXIII, Exer.;
hace echo dias, etc., XX, Exer.
hay, 136.
Hours of the day, 78.
How old are you f XIX, Exer.
-iar and -uar verbs, 243.
idos, 149.
Imperative, 144, 147-150.
Imperfect subjunctive, 159, 160.
Inceptive verbs, 255.
Indefinite article, 24, 25; omission,
205.
Indefinite pronouns, 215.
Infinitives: use of, 88; instead of
subjunctive, 153, 158, 2; list of
verbs followed by an infinitive,
with or without a preposition,
283.
Interrogative pronouns, 214.
ir a buscar, 91.
ir, pret. of, 106, a.
Irregular verbs, list of, 282.
lazy, page 27, footnote.
Ut, 148.
List of verbs, 282.
little : a — , 215, h.
llamarse, XXI, Exer.
mandar, 153, a.
mas, 226, 2.
meala, XIV, Exer.
Measures, page 218, footnote.
-mente, 222, 5.
Mexico, page 204, footnote.
migo, tigo, sigo, page 180, footnote.
Months of the year, 119.
mucho and muy, 222, 2.
muerto, page 103, footnote.
Names of tenses, 237, a.
Negatives, 113.
Neuter gender, 97.
next, 123.
Nouns: gender, 174; number, 175;
genitive case, 45; dative case, 37;
accusative case (use of a), 68;
used as adjectives, 177.
Numerals: cardinal, 217; ordinal,
218; fractions, 219.
o'clock, 78.
ojaia, 167.
Ordinal numerals, 218.
pantalon (-on:s), XXIV, Exer.
para, 225.
Passive voice, 129, 130.
Past participles, 125-129; irregu-
lar, 280.
Perfect tenses, 132-135.
pero, 226, 2.
Personal pronouns: as subjects or
' objects of verbs, 190-192, 194,
195; reflexive, 77, 192, 195, 197;
reciprocal, 198; tfl, 42; usted,
42, 191, 196, 2; se, 192, 195;
ello, 190, a; prepositional forms,
81-83, 196, 197; omission of
subject pronouns, 51.
please, XVII, Exer.
per, 225.
Position of words in a sentence,
with past participle, 135.
Possessives: adjectives, 52-55; pro-
noims, 207, 208; agreement of,
55.
330
FIRST SPANISH COURSE
Prepositions: with infinitive, 88;
retained in Spanish, 156, a;
por and para, 225.
Present participles, 140, 141.
Progressive forms of verbs, 142.
Progressive tenses, 238.
Pronominal adjectives, 215.
pta., page 213, footnote.
publisher and publishing house,
page 224, footnote.
Q. B. S. M., page 199, footnote.
que, omitted, page 205, footnote 3.
Radical-changing verbs, 244 fol.
Reciprocal pronouns, 198.
Reference list of verbs taking an
infinitive object, 283.
Reflexive pronouns, 77, 192, 195,
197.
Reflexive verbs, 77.
Relative pronouns, 211; uses of,
212.
reloj, XXIV, Exer.
rubber overshoe, XXXVI, Exer.
S. S., page 199, footnote,
saber and conocer, 139.
schools, terms used, page 15, foot-
notes.
seflor, -ora, etc., 103, 6.
ser and estar: use of, 72, 73.
should, 169.
si, intensive, 222, 3.
sino, 226, 2.
sleeping car, XXXIX, Exer.
slippers, XXXVI, Exer.
Softened statement, 168.
some, 215, a.
spurs, page 154, footnote.
stove, XV, Exer.
Subjunctive: in substantive clauses,
152, 156, 157, 158; in adjec-
tival clauses, 161; in adverbial
clauses, 165; in conditional clauses,
166; stem of pres. tense, 155;
imperf. tense, 159, 160; fut. tense,
170, 171; with ojaia, 167; in
softened statement, 168.
temer + fut. ind., page 131, foot-
note.
tener and haber, 131; tengo frfo,
XXIII, Exer. ; tener + name of
part of body, 107, b.
Tenses: pres. ind., to express an
act that continues from the past
into the present, 115; imperf.
and pret. ind., use of, 94, 115, a;
fut. and cond., 116-118, 121;
fut. and cond. of probability, 122.
than, 188.
the . . . the (correlative), 187.
ticket, XXXVIII, Exer.
" Treinta dias trae noviembre, •..''!
page 97.
u, 226, 1.
-uir verbs, 256.
un(o), -a, 64.
Tamos a, 86.
Verbs, 233-283.
volver a, 91, 283.
waiter, XVII, Exer.
Weights and measures, page 218,
footnote.
whose (interrog.), 56.
xvill and should, 169.
Word order, 227.
ya, 222, 4; with preterite, page 159,
footnote.
<:^
VO O
o "d
o
f> CO
2 ^
4) O
o
^
•H
■s§
''Pi
<H CO
fH
W +»
00
«
• CV2
CO VTv
-1»
University of Toronto
Library
DO NOT
REMOVE
THE
CARD
FROM
THIS
POCKET
Acme Library Card Pocket
LOWE-MARTIN CO. limited
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American Libraries
TV News
Understanding 9/11